Yamaha CVP-89 Manual de usuario

Marca: Yamaha

Modelo: CVP-89

Categoría: Instrumentos musicales

Tipo: Manual de usuario

Owner’s Manual

Bedienungsanleitung

Mode d’emploi

Manual de instrucciones

92-469-

➀

ENVIRONMENTAL ISSUES: Yamaha strives to pro-

duce products that are both user safe and environmentally

friendly. We sincerely believe that our products and the

production methods used to produce them, meet these

goals. In keeping with both the letter and the spirit of the

law, we want you to be aware of the following:

Battery Notice: This product MAY contain a small non-

rechargeable battery which (if applicable) is soldered in

place. The average life span of this type of battery is ap-

proximately five years. When replacement becomes neces-

sary, contact a qualified service representative to perform

the replacement.

Warning: Do not attempt to recharge, disassemble, or

incinerate this type of battery. Keep all batteries away

from children. Dispose of used batteries promptly and as

regulated by applicable laws. Note: In some areas, the

servicer is required by law to return the defective parts.

However, you do have the option of having the servicer

dispose of these parts for you.

Disposal Notice: Should this product become damaged

beyond repair, or for some reason its useful life is consid-

ered to be at an end, please observe all local, state, and

federal regulations that relate to the disposal of products

that contain lead, batteries, plastics, etc.

NOTICE: Service charges incurred due to lack of knowl-

edge relating to how a function or effect works (when the

unit is operating as designed) are not covered by the

manufacturer’s warranty, and are therefore the owners

responsibility. Please study this manual carefully and con-

sult your dealer before requesting service.

NAME PLATE LOCATION: The graphic below indi-

cates the location of the name plate. The model number,

serial number, power requirements, etc., are located on

this plate. You should record the model number, serial

number, and the date of purchase in the spaces provided

below and retain this manual as a permanent record of

your purchase.

CAUTION

RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK

DO NOT OPEN

CAUTION: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK.

DO NOT REMOVE COVER (OR BACK).

NO USER-SERVICEABLE PARTS INSIDE.

REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL.

PRODUCT SAFETY MARKINGS: Yamaha electronic

products may have either labels similar to the graphics

shown below or molded/stamped facsimiles of these

graphics on the enclosure. The explanation of these graph-

ics appears on this page. Please observe all cautions indi-

cated on this page and those indicated in the safety in-

struction section.

See bottom of Keyboard enclosure for graphic symbol markings

The exclamation point with the equilat-

eral triangle is intended to alert the user

to the presence of important operating

and maintenance (servicing) instruc-

tions in the literature accompanying the

product.

The lightning flash with arrowhead

symbol within the equilateral triangle is

intended to alert the user to the pres-

ence of uninsulated “dangerous volt-

age” within the product’s enclosure that

may be of sufficient magnitude to con-

stitute a risk of electrical shock.

IMPORTANT NOTICE: All Yamaha electronic products

are tested and approved by an independent safety testing

laboratory in order that you may be sure that when it is

properly installed and used in its normal and customary

manner, all foreseeable risks have been eliminated. DO

NOT modify this unit or commission others to do so un-

less specifically authorized by Yamaha. Product perform-

ance and/or safety standards may be diminished. Claims

filed under the expressed warranty may be denied if the

unit is/has been modified. Implied warranties may also be

affected.

SPECIFICATIONS SUBJECT TO CHANGE: The

information contained in this manual is believed to be

correct at the time of printing. However, Yamaha reserves

the right to change or modify any of the specifications

without notice or obligation to update existing units.

Model _____________________________________

Serial No.__________________________________

Purchase Date _____________________________

SPECIAL MESSAGE SECTION

English

Owner’s Manual

Deutsch

Bedienungsanleitung

Français

Mode d’emploi

Español

Manual de instrucciones

Introduction

Thank you for choosing a Yamaha Clavinova. Your Clavinova is a fine musical instrument that employs

advanced Yamaha music technology. With the proper care, your Clavinova will give you many years of musical

pleasure.

as the presets.

● Full-keyboard ABC (Auto Bass Chord) provides ac-

companiment as you play across the entire keyboard.

● 50 Solo Styleplay variations make it simple to pro-

duce rich, complex harmonies.

● 10-track performance memory records and plays

back your keyboard performances.

● Registration Memory memorizes 12 complete control-

panel setups that you can recall whenever needed.

● Internal 3.5" floppy disk drive provides extended Per-

formance Memory capacity and Disk Orchestra play-

back capability – one blank floppy disk for recording

and one Disk Orchestra Collection disk with corre-

sponding score are provided.

● MIDI compatibility, GM voices, and a range of MIDI

functions make the Clavinova useful in a range of

advanced MIDI music systems.

● AWM (Advanced Wave Memory) tone generator sys-

tem offers a range of 60 rich, realistic voices.

● 32-note polyphony permits use of sophisticated play-

ing techniques.

● Piano-like touch response provides extensive expres-

sive control and outstanding playability.

● Dual and split play modes allow 2 voices to be played

simultaneously or individually with the left and right

hands.

● 50 exciting accompaniment styles can be used to

provide rhythm-only accompaniment or fully-orches-

trated rhythm, bass, and chord accompaniment. 50

additional accompaniment styles are provided on

floppy disk (Style Disk).

● Custom Rhythm lets you create original rhythm pat-

terns that can be recalled and played in the same way

In order to make the most of your Clavinova’s performance potential and features, we urge you to read this

Owner’s Manual thoroughly, and keep it in a safe place for later reference.

Contents

Taking Care of Your Clavinova 1

The Panel Controls 2

Preparation 4

The Volume Controls 5

Demonstration Playback 6

Voice Selection 7

■ Selecting the 60 Voices ....................... 7

■ Keyboard Percussion .......................... 8

Dual Mode 9

■ Engaging the Dual Mode ..................... 9

■ Dual-mode Voice Balance ................... 9

Split Mode 10

■ Engaging the Split Mode ................... 10

■ Changing the Split Voices ................. 10

■ Changing the Split Point.................... 10

■ Split Balance ..................................... 11

■ Damper Pedal Operation in the

Split Mode ......................................... 11

Digital Reverb Effects 12

■ Selecting a Reverb Effect.................. 12

■ Reverb Depth Control........................ 12

The Keyboard & Polyphony 13

Pan 13

The Pedals 14

■ Right Pedal (Damper Pedal) ............. 14

■ Center Pedal (Sostenuto Pedal)........ 14

■ Left Pedal (Multi-function) ................. 14

Pitch Control 16

■ The Pitch Display .............................. 16

Accompaniment 17

■ Style Selection................................... 17

■ Tempo Control................................... 18

■ Starting the Accompaniment ............. 18

■ Fill-ins ................................................ 20

■ Left-pedal Rhythm Break................... 20

■ Stopping the Accompaniment ........... 20

■ Metronome ........................................ 20

Auto Bass Chord (ABC) 21

■ Single-Finger & Fingered

Accompaniment................................. 21

■ Full-keyboard ABC ............................ 22

■ Volume Control.................................. 23

■ Changing the ABC Split Point ........... 23

■ Special Modes................................... 23

Custom Rhythm 24

■ Creating an Original Rhythm Pattern 24

■ Playing Back Your Custom Rhythm

Pattern............................................... 25

Disk Styles 26

■ Selecting & Loading Disk Styles........ 26

■ Using a Loaded Disk Style ................ 27

Solo Styleplay 28

■ Using Solo Styleplay ......................... 28

■ Harmonization Variations .................. 28

■ The Left Pedal & Solo Styleplay........ 28

Registration Memory 29

■ Memory Store.................................... 29

■ Recall ................................................ 29

Disk Orchestra 30

■ Automatic Performance..................... 30

■ Playing Back only Specific Parts ....... 31

■ Volume Control.................................. 32

■

Guided Right- and Left-hand Practice...

■ Repeat Functions .............................. 33

■ Other Playback Controls ................... 34

■ DISK ORCHESTRA COLLECTION

Disk Copy .......................................... 34

■ Playing Other Types of Music Data ... 34

Performance Memory 35

Easy One-pass Recording & Playback ..

Multi-track Recording & Playback

.....

■ Adding New Tracks ........................... 38

■ Punch-in Recording........................... 39

■ Playback............................................ 40

The Chord Sequence Function

...........

Utility Functions 42

■

Selecting & Using the Utility Functions . 42

The Utility Mode Functions................ 42

Effect Functions

.....................................

Disk Functions

.......................................

MIDI Functions

.......................................

General Utilities

.....................................

The Connectors 65

Factory Preset Recall 66

Troubleshooting 66

Options 66

Index 67

Assembly ................................................ i

MIDI Data Format...................................iii

Voice List ..............................................vii

Percussion Kit List............................... ix

Specifications....................................... xi

Fingering Chart ....................................xii

MIDI Implementation Chart................ xvii

1. Avoid Humidity & Heat

Avoid placing the Clavinova in areas that are subject to exces-

sive humidity or heat. Do not leave the instrument near heaters

or in a car exposed to direct sunlight, for example.

2. Avoid Dust & Moisture

Avoid locations in which the instrument is likely to be exposed

to excessive dust or moisture.

3. Power-off Before Connecting

Connections between the Clavinova and any other device must

be made with both pieces of equipment turned off.

4. Handle With Care

Never apply excessive force to the controls, connectors or

other parts of your Clavinova, and avoid scratching or bumping

it with hard objects. Further, always turn the POWER switch off

after use, and close the key cover to protect the keyboard.

5. Clean Carefully

Clean the cabinet and keys of your Clavinova only with a clean,

slightly damp cloth. A neutral cleanser may be used if desired.

Never use abrasive cleansers, waxes, solvents or chemical

dust cloths since these can dull or damage the finish.

6. Never Tamper With the Internal Circuitry

Never open the Clavinova cabinet and touch or tamper with the

internal circuitry. Tampering with the circuitry can result in elec-

trical shock!

7. Electric Interference

Since the Clavinova contains digital circuitry, it may cause

interference if placed too close to radio or television receivers.

If this occurs, move the instrument further away from the af-

fected equipment.

8. Name Plate Location

The Clavinova name plate, including the unit’s serial number, is

located on the bottom panel of the main unit.

9. Handling Floppy Disks

Yamaha Disk Orchestra Collection and Style Disk are write-

protected, and therefore cannot be used to save songs. To save

Performance Memory songs from the Performance Memory, a

blank floppy disk should be used (one blank disk is supplied

with the Clavinova).

Taking Care of Your Floppy Disks

■ Do NOT eject the disk during recording or playback, or at

any time when the disk drive lamp is lit. Doing so may dam-

age both the disk and the FDD.

■ Do NOT turn the Clavinova on or off while the disk is in the

drive.

■ Always eject the disk before turning the Clavinova off.

■ When ejecting a floppy disk from the disk drive:

Your Clavinova will give you years of playing pleasure if you observe the simple rules given below:

nism and/or the floppy disk. To remove a partially ejected

disk, try pressing the eject button once again or push the

disk back into the slot, then repeat the eject procedure

carefully.

■ Never open or close the key cover while a disk is

extending from the drive (i.e. in the ejected position).

The key cover may contact the disk, possibly damag-

ing the disk or even the disk drive.

■ Do not insert anything but floppy disks into the disk

drive. Other objects may cause damage to the disk

drive or floppy disk.

■ Use only double-sided double density (2DD) 3.5-inch

floppy disks with the Clavinova.

Taking Care of Your Clavinova

• To eject a floppy disk, press the eject button slowly as far as it will go.

Then when the disk Is fully ejected, remove it by hand.

• The disk may not be ejected properly if the eject button is pressed too

quickly or if it is not pressed in far enough. (The eject button may

become stuck halfway with the disk extending from the slot by only a

few millimeters). If this is the case, do not attempt to pull out the

partially ejected disk. Doing so may damage the disk drive mecha-

Disk drive lamp

Write protect tab

open (locked —

write protected)

Write protect tab

closed (unlocked —

write enabled)

Precautions Regarding Floppy Disk Use

■ Never open the disk’s shutter. Dirt or dust on the

Internal magnetic surface will cause data errors.

■ Never leave disks near a speaker, TV, or other de-

vice that emits a strong magnetic field.

■ Do not store disks in places exposed to direct sun-

light or sources of high temperature.

■ Do not place heavy objects such as books on top of

a disk.

■ Avoid getting the disks wet.

■ Be sure to store the disks in environmental condi-

tions as specified below:

• Storage temperature: 4

to 53

C (39

to 127

F).

• Storage humidity: 8 to 90% relative humidity.

• Store in an area free from dust, sand, smoke, etc.

■ Be sure to apply the disk label at the proper position.

When changing the label never cover the old label

with a new label; always remove the old label first.

Head Cleaning

The head of the disk drive unit will get dirty as you use

it eventually causing data errors. If this occurs, clean

the head with a 3.5 inch head cleaning disk (available

from most computer supply stores).

Data Backup

It is recommended that you copy your recorded songs

to another disk for backup (see page 46). If the original

disk is damaged or your song is deleted, the backup

disk can be used instead of the original.

Protecting Your Data (Write Protect Tab)

The Panel Controls

C1 D1 E1 F1 G1 A1 B1 C2 D2 E2 F2 G2 A2 B2 C3 D3 E3 F3 G3 A3 B3 C4 D4 E4 F4 G4 A4

B0A0G0F0E0D0C0B-1A-1

MAX

MIN

MASTER VOLUME



DEMO LEFT PEDAL

UTILITY REVERB

PROGRAM

CUSTOM

RHYTHM

TEMPO

TAP

METRONOME

–

– / NO

+ / YES

RHYTHM BASS 1 CHORD 2

AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT

MAX

MIN

STYLE

POP 16BEAT

DANCE

POP

BOOGIE

SLOW

ROCK

SWING

JAZZ

BALLAD

BOSSA RHUMBA

MARCH

STYLE

COUNTRY

WALTZ

STYLE

13-50

DISK

STYLE

START/STOP

INTRO/

ENDING

SYNCHRO

START

SOLO

STYLEPLAY

NORMAL

FILL TO

NORMAL

VAR IAT IO N

FILL TO

VAR IATI ON

FULL

KEYBOARD

A B C

SINGLE/

FINGERED

A B C

PIANO

CLAVINOVA

TONE

E. PIANO

HARPSI-

CHORD

VIBES GUITAR STRINGS ORGAN CHOIR

UPRIG

BAS

VOICE

CDEFGAB

2 45 7

# %

PHONES

MIC. VOL

MIC.

MIN MAX

BEAT

* (

) q

we r t

POWER

AUX IN

AUX OUT

R L/L+R

The Panel Controls

1 POWER Switch........................................................page 4

2 MASTER VOLUME Control .....................................page 5

3 [UTILITY] Button............... page 5, 13, 30, 33, 38, 42—64

4 [DEMO] Button.........................................................page 6

5 [LEFT PEDAL] Button............................................page 14

6 [REVERB] Button...................................................page 12

7 AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT Volume Controls.... page 5, 23

8 [START/STOP] Button .................................... page 18, 22

9 ABC [FULL KEYBOARD] Button...........................page 22

0 [INTRO/ENDING] Button................................ page 19, 22

! ABC [SINGLE/FINGERED] Button .......................page 21

@ [NORMAL/FILL TO NORMAL] Button ............ page 18, 22

# [SYNCHRO START] Button...................................page 19

$ [VARIATION/FILL TO VARIATION] Button ..... page 18, 22

% [SOLO STYLEPLAY] Button..................................page 28

^ [CUSTOM RHYTHM] Button .................................page 24

& [PROGRAM] Button...............................................page 24

* STYLE Selectors ...................................................page 17

( [DISK STYLE] Buttons ..........................................page 26

) BEAT Display .........................................................page 20

q LCD Display .............................................................page 4

w [TAP (–)] Button .............................................. page 19, 42

e [METRONOME (+)] Button............................. page 20, 42

r TEMPO [▲ (+/YES)] and [▼(–/NO)] Buttons. page 18, 42

t VOICE Selectors......................................................page 7

y [SPLIT] Button .......................................................page 10

u 3.5" Floppy Disk Drive ........................page 26, 30, 35, 44

i [REGISTRATION] Button ......................................page 29

o [MEMORY] Button .................................................page 29

p DISK ORCHESTRA Buttons .......................... page 30, 55

Q [CHORD SEQUENCE] Button...............................page 41

W Keyboard................................................................page 13

E FILL IN Bars...........................................................page 20

R Disk Orchestra Keyboard Guide Lamps ...............page 32

T Soft Pedal...............................................................page 14

Y Sostenuto Pedal.....................................................page 14

U Damper Pedal ........................................................page 14

I PHONES Jacks........................................................page 4

O MIC. Jack & MIC. VOL. Control..............................page 65

P AUX IN R and L Jacks ...........................................page 65

a AUX OUT R and L/L+R Jacks ...............................page 65

s EXP PEDAL Jack.............................................. page 5, 65

d MIDI Connectors....................................................page 65

B4 C5 D5 E5 F5 G5 A5 B5 C6

D6 E6 F6 G6 A6 B6 C7

MEMORY

REGIST-

RATION

VOICE

T

ELEC

BASS

DRUMS

VOICE

13-60

SPLIT

SONG/PHRASE

NUMBER

START/STOP

REC

CHORD

SEQUENCE

PHRASE

REPEAT

GUIDE

LAMP

CANCEL

SONG SELECT

3-10

DISK ORCHESTRA

PAUSE

RIGHT

LEFT

ORCH

RHYTHM

REW

CLEAR

ALL

CANCEL

THRUIN

MIDI

EXP PEDAL

OUT

Preparation

■The Music Stand

If you will be using sheet music with your Clavinova, raise the music stand

built into it’s top panel by lifting the rear edge of the music stand.

The music stand can be lowered by slightly lifting the stand and then lowering

it gently back down to its resting position.

■The Power Switch

After making sure that the Clavinova’s AC plug is properly inserted into a con-

venient AC wall outlet, press the [POWER] switch located to the left of the key-

board once to turn the power on. The power indicator located below the left end of

the keyaboard will light. Press the [POWER] switch again to turn the power off.

When the power is initially turned on, the PIANO voice selector LED will

light, the POP style selector LED will light, and the display will appear as shown

to the left.

■Headphones

One or two standard pairs of stereo headphones can be plugged in here for pri-

vate practice or late-night playing. The internal speaker system is automatically

shut off when a pair of headphones is plugged into either or both of the PHONES

jacks.

■The Key Cover

To open the CVP-89 key cover lift it just enough to clear the keys (do not lift

excessively) then slide the cover back into the main unit. To close the cover slide it

forward all the way and then lower it gently until it closes completely.

PHONES

POWER

∫ 001µ Piano 1

œ= 78 Pop 1

The Clavinova has several volume controls that

give you extra versatility in creating the required

sound.

The Volume Controls

● Master Volume ........................................................................................................................................

The MASTER VOLUME control adjusts the overall volume of sound

produced by the Clavinova. It also adjusts headphone volume when one or two

pairs of headphones are plugged into the PHONES jacks.

Initially set the MASTER VOLUME control about half way between the

“MIN” and “MAX” settings. Then, when you start playing, adjust the control for

the most comfortable listening level.

MAX

MIN

MASTER VOLUME

RHYTHM BASS 1 CHORD 2

AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT

MAX

MIN

BEAT

MAX

MIN

MASTER VOLUME



DEMO LEFT PEDAL

UTILITY REVERB

PROGRAM

CUSTOM

RHYTHM

TEMPO

TAP

METRONOME

–

/ NO

+ / YES

MEMORY

REGIST-

RATION

RHYTHM BASS 1 CHORD 2

AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT

MAX

MIN

STYLE

POP 16BEAT

DANCE

POP

BOOGIE

SLOW

ROCK

SWING

JAZZ

BALLAD

BOSSA RHUMBA

MARCH

STYLE

COUNTRY

WALTZ

STYLE

13-50

DISK

STYLE

START/STOP

INTRO/

ENDING

SYNCHRO

START

SOLO

STYLEPLAY

NORMAL

FILL TO

NORMAL

VARIATI ON

FILL TO

VARIATI ON

FULL

KEYBOARD

A B C

SINGLE/

FINGERED

A B C

VOICE

PIANO

CLAVINOVA

TONE

E. PIANO

HARPSI-

CHORD

VIBES GUITAR STRINGS ORGAN CHOIR

UPRIGHT

BASS

ELEC

BASS

DRUMS

VOICE

13-60

SPLIT

VOICE

SONG/PHRASE

NUMBER

START/STOP

REW

REC

CHORD

SEQUENCE

PHRASE

REPEAT

GUIDE

LAMP

CANCEL

SONG SELECT

3-10

DISK ORCHESTRA

PAUSE

RIGHT

LEFT

ORCH

RHYTHM

MAX

MIN

MASTER VOLUME

● Auto Accompaniment ............................................................................................................................

Separate volume controls are provided for the RHYTHM, CHORD 1,

CHORD 2, and BASS sound. These volume controls let you set up the best

balance between the various accompaniment parts when the AUTO BASS

CHORD (ABC), Disk Orchestra Collection playback, and Performance Memory

features are used, and the RHYTHM volume control can be used to balance the

keyboard and rhythm sound when only rhythm accompaniment is used.

The volume of the keyboard can be independently adjusted (1 … 127) by using

the BASS control while holding the [UTILITY] button — this is particularly

handy for adjusting the balance when recording the Clavinova sound.

● Other Volume Control Modes

The Auto Accompaniment volume controls can be assigned to other functions

via the “Accompaniment Volume Mode” utility function (page 61). They can be

used to control modulation, pitch bend, and expression; or individual reverb

depth for the rhythm, chord 1, chord 2, and bass parts.

NOTES

• If any or all of the Auto Accompaniment volume controls are set to their minimum

positions, no sound will be produced by the corresponding parts. The maximum

control positions produce the normal volume levels.

● Expression Control ................................................................................................................................

An optional Yamaha EP-1 Expression Pedal can be plugged into the EXP

PEDAL jack for foot volume (expression) control of the keyboard sound only (i.e.

expression doesn’t affect the auto-accompaniment sound or disk playback). Press

the pedal forward to increase volume, and backward to decrease volume.

RHYTHM BASS 1 CHORD 2

AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT

MAX

MIN

UTILITY

BASS

EXP PEDAL

[001] Piano 1

œ= 78 MANUAL VOL. 127

The CVP-89 features a powerful “3D System” amplifier featuring a single 50-watt channel

and stereo 25-watt channels. This high-performance amplifier and speaker system puts out

exceptionally rich sound with natural response from powerful lows to shimmering highs. The

CVP-89 speaker system employs a single 18-cm speaker for center-channel low-frequency

reproduction, and three speakers each per stereo channel: 13-centimeter speaker units for

midrange sound, 2.5-cm units for outstanding high-frequency sound, and 8-cm units for

player monitoring.

The Internal Amplifier &

Speaker System

Demonstration Playback

The Clavinova features 25 demonstration tunes that effectively demonstrate

its sound and accompaniment capabilities. Here’s how you can select and play

the demo tunes.

VStop Playback .........................................................................................................................................

Demo playback can be stopped temporarily by pressing either the [START/

STOP] button or STYLE or VOICE selector corresponding to the demonstration

tune which is currently playing. Press the [DEMO] button when you want to stop

demo playback and return to the normal mode.

The Demo Tunes

BEAT

MAX

MIN

MASTER VOLUME



DEMO LEFT PEDAL

UTILITY REVERB

PROGRAM

CUSTOM

RHYTHM

TEMPO

TAP

METRONOME

–

/ NO

+ / YES

MEMORY

REGIST-

RATION

RHYTHM BASS 1 CHORD 2

AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT

MAX

MIN

STYLE

POP 16BEAT

DANCE

POP

BOOGIE

SLOW

ROCK

SWING

JAZZ

BALLAD

BOSSA RHUMBA

MARCH

STYLE

COUNTRY

WALTZ

STYLE

13-50

DISK

STYLE

START/STOP

INTRO/

ENDING

SYNCHRO

START

SOLO

STYLEPLAY

NORMAL

FILL TO

NORMAL

VARIATI ON

FILL TO

VARIATI ON

FULL

KEYBOARD

A B C

SINGLE/

FINGERED

A B C

VOICE

PIANO

CLAVINOVA

TONE

E. PIANO

HARPSI-

CHORD

VIBES GUITAR STRINGS ORGAN CHOIR

UPRIGHT

BASS

ELEC

BASS

DRUMS

VOICE

13-60

SPLIT

VOICE

SONG/PHRASE

NUMBER

START/STOP

REW

REC

CHORD

SEQUENCE

PHRASE

REPEAT

GUIDE

LAMP

CANCEL

SONG SELECT

3-10

DISK ORCHESTRA

PAUSE

RIGHT

LEFT

ORCH

RHYTHM

POP 16BEAT

DANCE

POP

BOOGIE

SLOW

ROCK

SWING

JAZZ

BALLAD

BOSSA RHUMBA

MARCH

STYLE

COUNTRY

WALTZ

DEMO

PIANO

CLAVINOVA

TONE

E. PIANO

HARPSI-

CHORD

VIBES GUITAR STRINGS ORGAN CHOIR

UPRIGHT

BASS

ELEC

BASS

DRUMS

VOICE

13-60

VOICE

MAX

MIN

MASTER VOLUME

CAdjust the Volume ..................................................................................................................................

Use the MASTER VOLUME control to adjust the volume, and play along on

the keyboard if you like.

NOTES

• The tempo cannot be adjusted during demo playback.

ZPress the [DEMO] button .......................................................................................................................

XSelect a Demo Tune ...............................................................................................................................

The 25 demo tunes are selected via the STYLE and VOICE selectors — the

corresponding selector indicators light when the [DEMO] button is pressed. Press a

selector to start playback of the corresponding tune. You can also select continuous

repeat playback of all demo tunes by pressing the [START/STOP] button. The

demo tunes will play back in sequential or random order, depending on the setting

of the “Random All Song Repeat” utility function described on page 62. The corre-

sponding voice name will appear on the LCD during VOICE demo playback. The

style name will appear on the display during STYLE demo playback.

DEMO

PIANO

CLAVINOVA

TONE

E. PIANO

HARPSI-

CHORD

VIBES

DEMO SONG

SELECT VOICE OR STYLE

DEMO SONG

Elec. Piano Voice

DEMO

START/STOP

* The demonstration pieces listed above, except the PIANO piece, are short excerpts from the original compositions.

VOICE NAME COMPOSER SONG TITLE

PIANO F. F. Chopin Etude Op.25-1 “Aeolian Harp” or “The Shephered Boy”

CLAVINOVA TONE D. Foster “Water Fountain” from “The Secret of My Success”

HARPSICHORD J. S. Bach Italienisches Konzert (Italian Concerto) BWV 971 3rd movement

GUITAR I. Albeniz Asturias

STRINGS A. Vivaldi The Four Seasons No. 3 “Autumn” 1st movement

ORGAN J. S. Bach Sinfonia from Kantate (Cantata) 29 BWV 29

CHOIR W. A. Mozart Requiem K. 626 No. 6 “Lacrimosa”

Voice Selection

The CVP-89 has a total of 60 different voices that can be selected in a number

of ways. There’s also a “Keyboard Percussion” mode that let’s you play a range of

drums and percussion instruments on the keyboard.

● The VOICE 13-60 [▲] and [▼] Buttons..................................................................................................

Use the VOICE [▲] and [▼] buttons immediately to the right of the [VOICE

13-60] button to select a voice number between 13 and 60. Press either button

briefly to select the next voice number in the specified direction, or hold the button

for continuous scrolling in the specified direction. The [VOICE 13-60] indicator

will light and the voice number and name will appear on the display.

If a panel voice (1-12) is selected, the last selected voice in the 13-60 range can

be instantly re-selected simply by pressing the [VOICE 13-60] button. The

[VOICE 13-60] button will initially select voice number 13 (BRASS) after the

power is turned on.

NOTES

• Voice number 13 can be instantly selected by pressing the VOICE [

▲

] and [

▼

]

buttons simultaneously.

BEAT

MAX

MIN

MASTER VOLUME



DEMO

LEFT PEDAL

UTILITY

REVERB

PROGRAM

CUSTOM

RHYTHM

TEMPO

TAP

METRONOME

–

/ NO

+ / YES

MEMORY

REGIST-

RATION

RHYTHM BASS 1 CHORD 2

AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT

MAX

MIN

STYLE

POP 16BEAT

DANCE

POP

BOOGIE

SLOW

ROCK

SWING

JAZZ

BALLAD

BOSSA RHUMBA

MARCH

STYLE

COUNTRY

WALTZ

STYLE

13-50

DISK

STYLE

START/STOP

INTRO/

ENDING

SYNCHRO

START

SOLO

STYLEPLAY

NORMAL

FILL TO

NORMAL

VARIATI ON

FILL TO

VARIATI ON

FULL

KEYBOARD

A B C

SINGLE/

FINGERED

A B C

VOICE

PIANO

CLAVINOVA

TONE

E. PIANO

HARPSI-

CHORD

VIBES GUITAR STRINGS ORGAN CHOIR

UPRIGHT

BASS

ELEC

BASS

DRUMS

VOICE

13-60

SPLIT

VOICE

SONG/PHRASE

NUMBER

START/STOP

REW

REC

CHORD

SEQUENCE

PHRASE

REPEAT

GUIDE

LAMP

CANCEL

SONG SELECT

3-10

DISK ORCHESTRA

PAUSE

RIGHT

LEFT

ORCH

RHYTHM

VOICE

PIANO

CLAVINOVA

TONE

E. PIANO

HARPSI-

CHORD

VIBES GUITAR STRINGS ORGAN CHOIR

UPRIGHT

BASS

ELEC

BASS

DRUMS

VOICE

13-60

VOICE

DRUMS

VOICE

13-60

● Numeric Selection ..................................................................................................................................

VOICE

PIANO

CLAVINOVA

TONE

E. PIANO

HARPSI-

CHORD

VIBES GUITAR STRINGS ORGAN CHOIR

UPRIGHT

BASS

ELEC

BASS

DRUMS

VOICE

13-60

Enter the number of the desired voice via the voice selectors (note that each

voice selector has a number between 1 and 0 associated with it) while pressing the

[DRUMS] selector.

To select voice number 16, for example, press and hold [DRUMS], press [PI-

ANO/1], then [GUITAR/6], then release the [DRUMS] button. The voice number

and name will appear on the display. The [VOICE 13-60] button indicator will

light whenever a voice number between 13 and 60 is selected.

■Selecting the 60 Voices

● Voices 1-12: Direct Panel Selection......................................................................................................

Of the Clavinova’s 60 voices, 12 are “panel voices” which can be directly

accessed by pressing the corresponding VOICE selector. When a voice selector is

pressed the corresponding indicator will light and the number and name of the se-

lected voice will appear on the display.

The PIANO voice is automatically selected when the power is initially turned

on.

VOICE

PIANO

CLAVINOVA

TONE

E. PIANO

HARPSI-

CHORD

VIBES GUITAR STRINGS ORGAN CHOIR

UPRIGHT

BASS

ELEC

BASS

DRUMS

VOICE

13-60

[001] Elec. Piano 3

œ= 78 Pop 1

[001] Brass 13

œ= 78 Pop 1

[001] Mute Trumpet 16

œ= 78 Pop 1

Voice Selection

No. Name

Usable Range

1 PIANO A-1 - C7

2 CLAVINOVA TONE C1 - C7

3 E. PIANO C1 - C6

4 HARPSICHORD C1 - C6

5 VIBES F2 - F5

6 GUITAR E1 - F#4

7 STRINGS C0 - C6

8 ORGAN C0 - C6

9 CHOIR E1 - E5

10 UPRIGHT BASS C0 - F#3

11 ELEC BASS E0 - F#3

12 DRUMS —

No. Name

Usable Range

19 SAX SOFT A#0 - F#5

20 CLARINET D2 - A#5

21 OBOE A#2 - G5

22 FLUTE G2 - F#6

23 ACCORDION F2 - A5

24 HARMONICA C3 - C6

25 STRINGS SOFT C0 - C6

26 VIOLIN C0 - C6

27 VIOLIN HARD C0 - C6

28 FULL ORGAN C0 - C6

29 JAZZ ORGAN 1 C1 - C6

30 SYNTH BRASS C1 - C6

31 SYNTH WOOD C2 - F#6

32 SYNTH STRINGS C0 - C6

33 SYNTH CHOIR E1 - E5

34 PIANO BRIGHT A-1 - C7

35 PIANO SOFT A-1 - C7

36 E. PIANO DX C1 - C6

37 SYNTH CRYSTAL C2 - C6

38 CELESTA C2 - C6

39 MARIMBA C2 - C6

No. Name

Usable Range

40 FOLK GUITAR E1 - A4

41 JAZZ GUITAR 1 E1 - A4

42 JAZZ GUITAR 2 E1 - A4

43 ROCK GUITAR 1 E1 - A4

44 ROCK GUITAR 2 E1 - A4

45 MUTE GUITAR E1 - A4

46 BANJO C3 - A5

47 PIZZICATO C1 - C6

48 HARP C1 - C6

49 U. BASS SOFT C0 - F#3

50 E. BASS SOFT E0 - F#3

51 E. BASS HEAVY E0 - F#3

52 SYNTH BASS E0 - F#3

TIMPANI & ORCH. HIT

E0 - C2/G2 - C6

54 BASSOON A#0 - D4

CHAMBER STRINGS

C1 - C6

56 JAZZ ORGAN 2 C1 - C6

57 ROCK GUITAR 3 E1 - A4

58 COSMIC 1 G0 - C6

59 COSMIC 2 G0 - C6

60 COSMIC 3 G0 - C6

NOTES

• When the DRUMS voice is selected only the keys with drum or percussion sym-

bols printed above them will sound.

• The PIANO voice is automatically selected when the power is initially turned on.

• The chorus effect ON/OFF and pitch bend range parameters for the voices can

be accessed via the UTILITY mode — page 43, 62.

No. Name

Usable Range

13 BRASS F0 - C6

14 POP BRASS F0 - C6

15 TRUMPET F0 - C6

16 MUTE TRUMPET F#2 - A5

17 HORN A#0 - F4

18 SAX A#0 - F#5

Voices 13 — 60

Panel Voices (1 — 12)

■Keyboard Percussion

ELEC

BASS

DRUMS

VOICE

13-60

When the [DRUMS] voice selector is pressed (its indicator will light), you can

play 44 different drum and percussion instruments on the keyboard. The symbols

above the keys correspond to the NORMAL drum kit instruments (keys with no

symbols produce no sound).

NOTES

• The CVP-89 has two drum kits — “NORMAL” and “PROCESSED”. Which of

these kits will sound when Keyboard Percussion is engaged depends on the

currently selected accompaniment style. Some styles which use the “NORMAL”

kit, however, include instruments from the “PROCESSED” kit, and vice-versa.

• The accompaniment styles listed below use the “PROCESSED” drum kit while all

others use the “NORMAL” kit.

Internal Styles Disk Styles

3: DANCE POP 8: POP BALLAD

23: TECHNO POP 11: NEW AGE POP

12: COMPUTER GAME

16: DANCE POP 2

20: REGGAE 2

38: CLOCK

• See page ix for a list of the NORMAL and PROCESSED drum kit instrument

assignments.

• The TRANSPOSE and PITCH functions described on pages 43 and 16 do not

affect the DRUMS sound.

• Drum parameters individually programmable for each instrument are accessible

via the UTILITY mode — page 63.

Dual Mode

The DUAL mode makes it possible to play two voices simultaneously across the entire range

of the keyboard. This makes it easy to create exceptionally rich, thick tonal textures.

■Engaging the Dual Mode

Dual mode voice combinations can be broadly divided into three categories: panel voice + panel voice, panel voice +

voice number 13-60, and two voices in the 13-60 range. The dual mode for each combination is selected in a different way,

as described below:

BEAT

MAX

MIN

MASTER VOLUME



DEMO LEFT PEDAL

UTILITY REVERB

PROGRAM

CUSTOM

RHYTHM

TEMPO

TAP

METRONOME

–

/ NO

+ / YES

MEMORY

REGIST-

RATION

RHYTHM BASS 1 CHORD 2

AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT

MAX

MIN

STYLE

POP 16BEAT

DANCE

POP

BOOGIE

SLOW

ROCK

SWING

JAZZ

BALLAD

BOSSA RHUMBA

MARCH

STYLE

COUNTRY

WALTZ

STYLE

13-50

DISK

STYLE

START/STOP

INTRO/

ENDING

SYNCHRO

START

SOLO

STYLEPLAY

NORMAL

FILL TO

NORMAL

VARIATI ON

FILL TO

VARIATI ON

FULL

KEYBOARD

A B C

SINGLE/

FINGERED

A B C

VOICE

PIANO

CLAVINOVA

TONE

E. PIANO

HARPSI-

CHORD

VIBES GUITAR STRINGS ORGAN CHOIR

UPRIGHT

BASS

ELEC

BASS

DRUMS

VOICE

13-60

SPLIT

VOICE

SONG/PHRASE

NUMBER

START/STOP

REW

REC

CHORD

SEQUENCE

PHRASE

REPEAT

GUIDE

LAMP

CANCEL

SONG SELECT

3-10

DISK ORCHESTRA

PAUSE

RIGHT

LEFT

ORCH

RHYTHM

VOICE

PIANO

CLAVINOVA

TONE

E. PIANO

HARPSI-

CHORD

VIBES GUITAR STRINGS ORGAN CHOIR

UPRIGHT

BASS

ELEC

BASS

DRUMS

VOICE

13-60

VOICE

● Panel Voice + Panel Voice .....................................................................................................................

To combine two panel voices simply press two voice selectors at the same time

— or press one voice selector while holding another. The names of both selected

voices will appear on the display when the DUAL mode is active. To return to the

normal single-voice play mode, press any single voice selector.

● Panel Voice + 13-60 Voice .....................................................................................................................

A voice in the 13…60 range can be “dualed” with the panel voices by pressing

the [VOICE 13-60] button and any other voice selector at the same time. The

VOICE [▲] and [▼] buttons can then be used to select the desired 13…60 voice.

The names of both selected voices will appear on the display (the 13-60 voice name

will appear on right side of the display). To return to the normal single-voice play

mode, press any single voice selector.

● Two 13-60 Voices....................................................................................................................................

To combine two voices in the 13-60 range press the [DRUMS] button and the

[VOICE 13-60] button at the same time (the default combination is POP BRASS

and BRASS). The voice shown on the right of the display can then be selected by

using the VOICE [▲] and [▼] button, while the left voice can be selected by using

the VOICE [▲] and [▼] buttons while holding the [DRUMS] and [VOICE 13-60]

buttons. To return to the normal single-voice play mode, press any single voice

selector.

■Dual-mode Voice Balance

The volume balance between the two voices combined in the DUAL mode can

be adjusted by using the TEMPO [▲] and [▼] buttons while pressing both of the

active voice selectors. The selected balance value (1 … 15) will be shown on the

display until the voice selectors are released.

■ A setting of “1” sets the volume of the left voice on the display to maximum

and the right voice to minimum (no sound).

■ A setting of “8” sets both voices to the same volume (this is the default balance

setting, and can be recalled by pressing the TEMPO [▲] and [▼] buttons si-

multaneously).

■ A setting of “15” sets the volume of the right voice on the display to maximum

and the left voice to minimum (no sound).

NOTES

• Hold either the TEMPO [

] or [

] button for continuous scrolling in the specified

direction.

• The dual mode cannot be used with the DRUMS voice. Also, the dual and split

modes cannot be used at the same time.

PIANO

CLAVINOVA

TONE

E. PIANO

TEMPO

– / NO

+ / YES

E. PIANO

HARPSI-

CHORD

VIBES

PIANO

CLAVINOVA

TONE

PIANO

CLAVINOVA

TONE

VOICE

VOICE

13-60

[001] PopBrass+Brass

œ= 78 Pop 1

[001] Piano + ClavTone

œ= 78 DUAL BALANCE 8

ELEC

BASS

VOICE

DRUMS

VOICE

13-60

The split mode lets you play different voices with

the left and right hands — bass with the left and pi-

ano with the right, for example. You can assign any

of the Clavinova’s voices to the left and right-hand

sections of the keyboard.

Split Mode

■Engaging the Split Mode

When the [SPLIT] button is pressed and its indicator lights, the keyboard is

split into left- and right-hand sections and different voices can be assigned to each.

The split point is initially set at the F#2 key when the power is turned on, and the

UPRIGHT BASS voice is initially assigned to the left-hand section of the keyboard

(all keys up to and including F#2). The voice that was selected when the SPLIT

mode was engaged is assigned to the right-hand section of the keyboard. The cur-

rent settings are retained if the SPLIT mode is turned off (press the [SPLIT] button

again) and on while the power remains on. The names of both the left and right-

hand voices appear on the display while the SPLIT mode is active.

BEAT

MAX

MIN

MASTER VOLUME



DEMO

LEFT PEDAL

UTILITY

REVERB

PROGRAM

CUSTOM

RHYTHM

TEMPO

TAP

METRONOME

–

/ NO

+ / YES

MEMORY

REGIST-

RATION

RHYTHM BASS 1 CHORD 2

AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT

MAX

MIN

STYLE

POP 16BEAT

DANCE

POP

BOOGIE

SLOW

ROCK

SWING

JAZZ

BALLAD

BOSSA RHUMBA

MARCH

STYLE

COUNTRY

WALTZ

STYLE

13-50

DISK

STYLE

START/STOP

INTRO/

ENDING

SYNCHRO

START

SOLO

STYLEPLAY

NORMAL

FILL TO

NORMAL

VARIATI ON

FILL TO

VARIATI ON

FULL

KEYBOARD

A B C

SINGLE/

FINGERED

A B C

VOICE

PIANO

CLAVINOVA

TONE

E. PIANO

HARPSI-

CHORD

VIBES GUITAR STRINGS ORGAN CHOIR

UPRIGHT

BASS

ELEC

BASS

DRUMS

VOICE

13-60

SPLIT

VOICE

SONG/PHRASE

NUMBER

START/STOP

REW

REC

CHORD

SEQUENCE

PHRASE

REPEAT

GUIDE

LAMP

CANCEL

SONG SELECT

3-10

DISK ORCHESTRA

PAUSE

RIGHT

LEFT

ORCH

RHYTHM

SPLIT

Left-hand section

Right-hand section

▼

F#2

SPLIT

■Changing the Split Point

The split point can be set at any key by pressing the desired key while holding

the [SPLIT] button. The split point key name will appear on the display while the

[SPLIT] button is held.

■Changing the Split Voices

The right-hand voice can be changed simply by pressing the appropriate voice

selector.

The left-hand voice can be changed by pressing a voice selector while holding

the [SPLIT] button.

NOTES

• All voices except BASS (voice numbers 10, 11, 49, 50, 51, and 52) and DRUMS

(voice number 12) are shifted up one octave when assigned to the lower section

of the keyboard (this function can be turned on or off via the “Split Left Octave”

utility function described on page 64).

SPLIT

UPRIGHT

BASS

ELEC

BASS

SPLIT

A keyboard guide lamp will indicate the selected split point. The default split

point — F#2 — will always be set automatically whenever the power is initially

turned on.

[001] Up Bass /Piano

œ= 78 Pop 1

[001] E.Bs Slp/Piano

œ= 78 SPLIT BALANCE 8

[001] E.Bs Slp/Piano

œ= 78 SPLIT POINT C 2

■Split Balance

Split Mode

The volume balance between the left-hand and right-hand voices can be ad-

justed by using the TEMPO [▲] and [▼] buttons while holding the [SPLIT] but-

ton. The selected balance value (1 … 15) will be shown on the display while the

[SPLIT] button is held.

■ A setting of “1” sets the volume of the left voice to maximum and the right

voice to minimum (no sound).

■ A setting of “8” sets both voices to the same volume (this is the default balance

setting, and can be recalled by pressing the TEMPO [▲] and [▼] buttons si-

multaneously).

■ A setting of “15” sets the volume of the right voice to maximum and the left

voice to minimum (no sound).

NOTES

• Hold either the TEMPO [

] or [

] button for continuous scrolling in the specified

direction.

■Damper Pedal Operation in the Split Mode

The damper pedal (the right pedal — see “The Pedals” on page 14) can be as-

signed to the left voice only, the right voice only, or to both voices in the split

mode.

■ Right Voice Only (default): Press the right (damper) pedal while holding the

[SPLIT] button.

■ Left Voice Only: Press the left (soft) pedal while holding the [SPLIT] button.

■ Both Voices: Press both the right and left pedals while holding the [SPLIT]

button.

NOTES

• The dual and split modes cannot be used at the same time.

• In the split the soft and sostenuto pedal functions apply to both the left- and right-

hand voices.

• When the ABC Single/Fingered mode (page 21) and the split mode are used

simultaneously, the left-hand voice will be accompanied by the appropriate ABC

chord voices.

SPLIT

TEMPO

– / NO

+ / YES

SPLIT

[001] E.Bs Slp/Piano

œ= 78 SPLIT BALANCE 8

Digital Reverb Effects

The [REVERB] button provides a number of

digital effects that you can use for extra depth

and expressive power.

■Selecting a Reverb Effect

Each time the [TAP] or [METRONOME] button is pressed while the

[REVERB] button is held, the next reverb effect is selected. The currently selected

reverb effect and the reverb depth setting appear on the display while the

[REVERB] button is held. The reverb effect can also be selected by repeatedly

pressing the [REVERB] button while the reverb type remains on the display.

OFF

No effect is produced.

ROOM

This setting adds a reverb effect to the sound that is similar to the type of acous-

tic reverberation you would hear in a medium-size room.

HALL 1

For a more spacious reverb sound, use the HALL 1 setting. This effect simulates

the natural reverberation of a medium-size concert hall.

HALL 2

HALL 2 simulates the reverb of a very large concert hall.

COSMIC

“COSMIC” is an echo effect in which the sound seems to “bounce” around in

the stereo sound field.

NOTES

• The ROOM effect is automatically selected when the POWER switch is turned

on.

REVERB

TAP

METRONOME

–

REVERB

TYPE:HALL 1 DEPTH: 8

BEAT

MAX

MIN

MASTER VOLUME



DEMO LEFT PEDAL

UTILITY REVERB

PROGRAM

CUSTOM

RHYTHM

TEMPO

TAP

METRONOME

–

/ NO

+ / YES

MEMORY

REGIST-

RATION

RHYTHM BASS 1 CHORD 2

AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT

MAX

MIN

STYLE

POP 16BEAT

DANCE

POP

BOOGIE

SLOW

ROCK

SWING

JAZZ

BALLAD

BOSSA RHUMBA

MARCH

STYLE

COUNTRY

WALTZ

STYLE

13-50

DISK

STYLE

START/STOP

INTRO/

ENDING

SYNCHRO

START

SOLO

STYLEPLAY

NORMAL

FILL TO

NORMAL

VARIATI ON

FILL TO

VARIATI ON

FULL

KEYBOARD

A B C

SINGLE/

FINGERED

A B C

VOICE

PIANO

CLAVINOVA

TONE

E. PIANO

HARPSI-

CHORD

VIBES GUITAR STRINGS ORGAN CHOIR

UPRIGHT

BASS

ELEC

BASS

DRUMS

VOICE

13-60

SPLIT

VOICE

SONG/PHRASE

NUMBER

START/STOP

REW

REC

CHORD

SEQUENCE

PHRASE

REPEAT

GUIDE

LAMP

CANCEL

SONG SELECT

3-10

DISK ORCHESTRA

PAUSE

RIGHT

LEFT

ORCH

RHYTHM

REVERB

■Reverb Depth Control

TEMPO

–

/ NO

+ / YES

REVERB

The depth of the selected reverb effect can be increased or decreased by press-

ing the TEMPO [▲] or [▼] button while holding the [REVERB] button. The

reverb depth is shown on the display while the [REVERB] button is held. The

reverb depth range is from “0” (no effect) to “15” (maximum depth).

NOTES

• Reverb depth is initially set to “8” when the power is turned on (this setting can be

recalled during reverb depth selection by pressing the TEMPO [

▲

] and [

▼

] but-

tons simultaneously).

• Hold either the TEMPO [

] or [

] button for continuous scrolling in the specified

direction.

• The depth of reverb effect applied to the manually-played part can be individually

adjusted (0 … 127, 64 by default) by using the BASS volume control while hold-

ing the [REVERB] button: This setting is shown on the display while the

[REVERB] button is held.

REVERB

TYPE:HALL 1 DEPTH:11

[001] Piano 1

œ= 78 MANUAL REV. 64

REVERB

BASS

The Keyboard & Polyphony

The Clavinova has “32-note polyphony” which means you can normally play up to 32 notes at once.

This number varies, however, according to the functions being used, as shown in the chart below:

Keyboard only 32 notes.

Keyboard + rhythm 24 notes (rhythm uses 8).

Keyboard + ABC 12 notes (rhythm 8; ABC 12).

The following voices are STEREO:

• No.1 PIANO

• No.8 ORGAN

• No.28 FULL ORGAN

• No.34 PIANO BRIGHT

• No.35 PIANO SOFT

The following voices feature VELOCITY SWITCHING

(i.e. they sound different when played soft or loud).

• No.3 E.PIANO

• No.11 ELEC BASS

● The number of available notes is further reduced if the dual

mode, the performance memory, or a Disk Orchestra Collec-

tion disk is being played at the same time.

The Clavinova also offers keyboard touch response, so the

volume and timbre of notes played can be controlled accord-

ing to how “hard” you play the keys. The amount of variation

available depends on the selected voice.

NOTES

• Some voices have greater polyphony than shown in the above chart.

Further, some dual-mode and split-mode voice combinations provide 64-

note total polyphony (32 notes per voice).

Pan

● The pan (stereo) position of the voice played on the key-

board can be adjusted by moving the RHYTHM volume

control while holding the [UTILITY] button. The pan

position is shown on the display, from “LEFT 6” for full

left at the “MIN” control position, through “CENTER” for

center, to “RIGHT 6” for full right at the “MAX” control

position. This can be used to produce a broader ensemble

sound with the Performance Memory multitrack recording

feature.

Each voice has a preset pan setting (indicated by “KEY-

BOARD” on the display) which is automatically set when

the power is first turned on.

The pan settings are as follows:

NOTES

• The “KEYBOARD” default keyboard scale pan places the treble-regis-

ter sound to the right and the bass-register sound to the left. Using a

different PAN setting places the entire voice, low and high notes in-

cluded, at the same position.

• The DRUMS voice has a preset PAN setting which cannot be changed.

UTILITY

RHYTHM

BEAT

MAX

MIN

MASTER VOLUME



DEMO LEFT PEDAL

UTILITY REVERB

PROGRAM

CUSTOM

RHYTHM

TEMPO

TAP

METRONOME

–

/ NO

+ / YES

MEMORY

REGIST-

RATION

RHYTHM BASS 1 CHORD 2

AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT

MAX

MIN

STYLE

POP 16BEAT

DANCE

POP

BOOGIE

SLOW

ROCK

SWING

JAZZ

BALLAD

BOSSA RHUMBA

MARCH

STYLE

COUNTRY

WALTZ

STYLE

13-50

DISK

STYLE

START/STOP

INTRO/

ENDING

SYNCHRO

START

SOLO

STYLEPLAY

NORMAL

FILL TO

NORMAL

VARIATI ON

FILL TO

VARIATI ON

FULL

KEYBOARD

A B C

SINGLE/

FINGERED

A B C

VOICE

PIANO

CLAVINOVA

TONE

E. PIANO

HARPSI-

CHORD

VIBES GUITAR STRINGS ORGAN CHOIR

UPRIGHT

BASS

ELEC

BASS

DRUMS

VOICE

13-60

SPLIT

VOICE

SONG/PHRASE

NUMBER

START/STOP

REW

REC

CHORD

SEQUENCE

PHRASE

REPEAT

GUIDE

LAMP

CANCEL

SONG SELECT

3-10

DISK ORCHESTRA

PAUSE

RIGHT

LEFT

ORCH

RHYTHM

UTILITY

Full Left Full Right

LEFT 6 RIGHT 6

KEYBOARD

•

LEFT 1

CENTER

RIGHT 1

[001] Piano 1

œ= 78 PAN POS. RIGHT 6

The CVP-89 has three pedal which offer a

range of advanced expressive capabilities.

The Pedals

BEAT

MAX

MIN

MASTER VOLUME



DEMO LEFT PEDAL

UTILITY REVERB

PROGRAM

CUSTOM

RHYTHM

TEMPO

TAP

METRONOME

–

/ NO

+ / YES

MEMORY

REGIST-

RATION

RHYTHM BASS 1 CHORD 2

AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT

MAX

MIN

STYLE

POP 16BEAT

DANCE

POP

BOOGIE

SLOW

ROCK

SWING

JAZZ

BALLAD

BOSSA RHUMBA

MARCH

STYLE

COUNTRY

WALTZ

STYLE

13-50

DISK

STYLE

START/STOP

INTRO/

ENDING

SYNCHRO

START

SOLO

STYLEPLAY

NORMAL

FILL TO

NORMAL

VARIATI ON

FILL TO

VARIATI ON

FULL

KEYBOARD

A B C

SINGLE/

FINGERED

A B C

VOICE

PIANO

CLAVINOVA

TONE

E. PIANO

HARPSI-

CHORD

VIBES GUITAR STRINGS ORGAN CHOIR

UPRIGHT

BASS

ELEC

BASS

DRUMS

VOICE

13-60

SPLIT

VOICE

SONG/PHRASE

NUMBER

START/STOP

REW

REC

CHORD

SEQUENCE

PHRASE

REPEAT

GUIDE

LAMP

CANCEL

SONG SELECT

3-10

DISK ORCHESTRA

PAUSE

RIGHT

LEFT

ORCH

RHYTHM

LEFT PEDAL

■Left Pedal (Multi-function)

The left pedal has a number of functions which can be selected using the

[LEFT PEDAL] button. Each time the [TAP] or [METRONOME] button is

pressed while the [LEFT PEDAL] button is held, the next LEFT PEDAL function

is selected and shown on the display. The left pedal functions can also be selected

by using the TEMPO [▲] or [▼] button while holding the [LEFT PEDAL] but-

ton. It is also possible to select the left pedal function by repeatedly pressing the

[LEFT PEDAL] button while the left-pedal function name remains on the display.

LEFT PEDAL

TEMPO

TAP

METRONOME

–

/ NO

+ / YES

■Center Pedal (Sostenuto Pedal)

If you play a note or chord on the keyboard and press the sostenuto pedal while the note(s) are held, those notes will

be sustained as long as the pedal is held (as if the damper pedal had been pressed) but all subsequently played notes will

not be sustained. This makes it possible to sustain a chord, for example, while other notes are played “staccato.”

■Right Pedal (Damper Pedal)

The damper pedal functions in the same way as a damper pedal on an acoustic piano. When the damper pedal is

pressed notes played have a long sustain. Releasing the pedal immediately stops (damps) any sustained notes.

NOTES

• The damper pedal can be set for continuous or on/off type damping control via

the “Damper Pedal Mode” utility function (page 62). Continuous control is th

default setting.

• The damper pedal can also be used to increase the depth of a unique

“Soundboard” effect for the PIANO voice (voice number 1). The maximum depth

of the Soundboard effect can be set via the “Damper Pedal Mode” utility function

(page 62).

Pressing the soft pedal subtly reduces the volume and slightly changes the tim-

bre of notes played. The amount of “softness” corresponds to how deeply the pedal

is pressed. The SOFT function is automatically selected whenever the POWER

switch is turned on.

● Soft...........................................................................................................................................................

LEFT PEDAL FUNCTION

SOFT PEDAL

NOTES

• The sostenuto pedal will not function while the SOLO STYLEPLAY feature (page

28) is engaged.

● Start/Stop ................................................................................................................................................

LEFT PEDAL FUNCTION

START/STOP

The left pedal performs the same function as the panel [START/STOP] buttons.

For details on the START/STOP function, refer to the “Accompaniment” section,

page 18.

● Solo Styleplay .........................................................................................................................................

For details on the SOLO STYLEPLAY function see “SOLO STYLEPLAY” on

page 28 (the SOLO STYLEPLAY pedal function can only be selected when the

SOLO STYLEPLAY feature is in use).

NOTES

• The damper, soft, and sostenuto pedal functions do not affect the DRUMS voice.

LEFT PEDAL FUNCTION

SOLO STYLEPLAY

● Pitch Bend...............................................................................................................................................

LEFT PEDAL FUNCTION

PITCH BEND

When this function is selected the center and left pedals can be used to bend the

pitch of notes played on the keyboard up or down, respectively, while the center or

left pedal is held. The default pitch bend range is individually set for each voice.

The pitch bend range can be adjusted as required via the “Pitch Bend Range” utility

function (page 62).

● Rhythm Break .........................................................................................................................................

LEFT PEDAL FUNCTION

RHYTHM BREAK

For details on the RHYTHM BREAK function, refer to the “Accompaniment”

section, page 20.

Pitch control makes it possible to tune the Clavinova over a ±50-cent range (approximate) in

approximately 1.2-cent or 1-hertz intervals. A hundred “cents” equals one semitone, so the tuning

range provided allows fine tuning of overall pitch over a range of approximately a semitone. Pitch

control is useful for tuning the Clavinova to match other instruments or recorded music.

Pitch Control

● Tuning Up................................................................................................................................................

ZTo tune up (raise pitch), hold the A-1 and B-1 keys simultaneously (A-1 and B-

1 are the two lowest white keys on the keyboard) and press any key between C3

and B3. Each time a key in this range is pressed the pitch is raised by approxi-

mately 1.2 cents, up to a maximum of about 50 cents above standard pitch. To

raise the pitch in 1-hertz increments press the TEMPO [▲] button instead of

the C3-B3 keys. The TEMPO [▼] button can also be used to tune down while

the A-1 and B-1 keys are held.

XRelease the A-1 and B-1 keys.

● Tuning Down...........................................................................................................................................

ZTo tune down (lower pitch), hold the A-1 and A#-1 keys simultaneously and

press any key between C3 and B3. Each time a key in this range is pressed the

pitch is lowered by approximately 1.2 cents, up to a maximum of about 50 cents

below standard pitch. To lower the pitch in 1-hertz increments press the

TEMPO [▼] button instead of the C3-B3 keys. The TEMPO [▲] button can

also be used to tune up while the A-1 and A#-1 keys are held.

XRelease the A-1 and A#-1 keys.

-1

TEMPO

–

/ NO

+ / YES

-1

TEMPO

–

/ NO

+ / YES

● To Restore Standard Pitch* ...................................................................................................................

ZTo restore standard pitch (A3 = 440 Hz), hold the A-1, A#-1, and B-1 keys si-

multaneously and press any key between C3 and B3, or simultaneously press

the TEMPO [▲] and [▼] buttons.

XRelease the A-1, A#-1, and B-1 keys.

* Standard pitch (A3 = 440 Hz) is automatically set whenever the POWER

switch is initially turned on.

NOTES

• The PITCH function does not affect the DRUMS sound.

• Hold either the TEMPO [

] or [

] button for continuous scrolling in the specified

direction.

■The Pitch Display

The approximate pitch of A3 is shown on the display in Hertz while the pitch

control function is in operation. The total display range is from approximately 427

hertz (-50 cents) to 453 hertz (+50 cents).

-1

TEMPO

–

/ NO

+ / YES

PITCH

A3=440.0Hz

Accompaniment

The CVP-89 has 50 “styles” that can be used as a basis for rhythm accompaniment, or fully

orchestrated rhythm, bass, and chord accompaniment (see “Auto Bass Chord” on page 21).

■Style Selection

● Styles 1-12: Direct Panel Selection.......................................................................................................

Pressing the [STYLE 13-50] button immediately recalls the last style selected

in the 13-50 range. The STYLE [s] and [t] buttons can be used to select a style

number between 13 and 50. Press either button briefly to select the next style

number in the specified direction, or hold the button for continuous scrolling in the

specified direction. The selected style number and name will appear on the display.

The styles 13-50 are organized into categories corresponding to the names of

the panel STYLE selectors (POP, DANCE POP, 16 BEAT, etc. — see the STYLE

LIST, below). You can directly jump any category by pressing the STYLE [s] or

[t] button when the corresponding panel STYLE selector indicator is lit. To select

the “SWING” styles in the 13-50 range, for example, use the STYLE [s] or [t]

button when the [SWING] STYLE selector indicator is lit.

NOTES

• The 8 BEAT style (number 13) will initially be selected by the [STYLE 13-50]

button when the power is turned ON.

• There are also two [DISK STYLE] buttons that can be used to select styles

loaded from floppy disk (the supplied Style Disk). See the “Disk Styles” section on

page 28 for details.

• Use the RHYTHM volume control to adjust the volume of the rhythm sound.

STYLE

SWING

JAZZ

BALLAD

STYLE

13-50

STYLE

POP 16BEAT

DANCE

POP

BOOGIE

SLOW

ROCK

SWING

JAZZ

BALLAD

BOSSA RHUMBA

MARCH

STYLE

COUNTRY

WALTZ

STYLE

13-50

STYLE

POP 16BEAT

DANCE

POP

BOOGIE

SLOW

ROCK

SWING

JAZZ

BALLAD

BOSSA RHUMBA

MARCH

STYLE

COUNTRY

WALTZ

STYLE

13-50

Of the Clavinova’s 50 styles, 12 are “panel styles” which can be directly

accessed by pressing the corresponding STYLE selector. When a style selector is

pressed the corresponding indicator will light and the number and name of the se-

lected style will appear on the display.

The POP style is automatically selected when the power is initially turned on.

● The [STYLE 13-50] Button and STYLE [s]/[t] Buttons......................................................................

[001] Piano 1

œ= 72 16Beat 2

[001] Piano 1

œ=100 8Beat 13

[001] Piano 1

œ=208 Bebop 30

BEAT

MAX

MIN

MASTER VOLUME



DEMO LEFT PEDAL

UTILITY REVERB

PROGRAM

CUSTOM

RHYTHM

TEMPO

TAP

METRONOME

–

/ NO

+ / YES

MEMORY

REGIST-

RATION

RHYTHM BASS 1 CHORD 2

AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT

MAX

MIN

STYLE

POP 16BEAT

DANCE

POP

BOOGIE

SLOW

ROCK

SWING

JAZZ

BALLAD

BOSSA RHUMBA

MARCH

STYLE

COUNTRY

WALTZ

STYLE

13-50

DISK

STYLE

START/STOP

INTRO/

ENDING

SYNCHRO

START

SOLO

STYLEPLAY

NORMAL

FILL TO

NORMAL

VARIATI ON

FILL TO

VARIATI ON

FULL

KEYBOARD

A B C

SINGLE/

FINGERED

A B C

VOICE

PIANO

CLAVINOVA

TONE

E. PIANO

HARPSI-

CHORD

VIBES GUITAR STRINGS ORGAN CHOIR

UPRIGHT

BASS

ELEC

BASS

DRUMS

VOICE

13-60

SPLIT

VOICE

SONG/PHRASE

NUMBER

START/STOP

REW

REC

CHORD

SEQUENCE

PHRASE

REPEAT

GUIDE

LAMP

CANCEL

SONG SELECT

3-10

DISK ORCHESTRA

PAUSE

RIGHT

LEFT

ORCH

RHYTHM

BEAT

STYLE

POP 16BEAT

DANCE

POP

BOOGIE

SLOW

ROCK

SWING

JAZZ

BALLAD

BOSSA RHUMBA

MARCH

STYLE

COUNTRY

WALTZ

STYLE

13-50

DISK

STYLE

TEMPO

TAP

METRONOME

–

/ NO

+ / YES

START/STOP

INTRO/

ENDING

SYNCHRO

START

SOLO

STYLEPLAY

NORMAL

FILL TO

NORMAL

VARIATION

FILL TO

VARIATION

FULL

KEYBOARD

A B C

SINGLE/

FINGERED

A B C

NOTES

• The Accompaniment Style data is not transmitted via the MIDI OUT connector.

Accompaniment

■Tempo Control

Whenever you select a different style, the preset tempo for that style is also

selected, and the tempo is displayed on the display in quarter-note beats per minute

(unless the accompaniment is playing, in which case the same tempo is main-

tained).

You can change the tempo to any value between 32 and 280 beats per minute,

however, by using the TEMPO [▲] and [▼] buttons. This can be done either be-

fore the accompaniment is started or while it is playing. Press either button briefly

to decrement or increment the tempo value by one, or hold the button for continu-

ous decrementing or incrementing.

NOTES

• The preset tempo for the selected style can be recalled at any time by pressing

both the [

▲

] and [

▼

] buttons simultaneously.

• Automatic style tempo switching can be turned on or off via the “Style Tempo

Switching” utility function described on page 61.

Panel Styles (1—12)

TEMPO

–

/ NO

+ / YES

[001] Piano 1

œ=132 Dance Pop 3

Styles 13—50

RHUMBA

38 MAMBO

39 CHACHA

40 TANGO

MARCH

41 MUSICAL

42 POLKA

43 6/8 MARCH

COUNTRY

44 COUNTRY SHUFFLE

45 COUNTRY SWING

46 COUNTRY ROCK

WALTZ

47 JAZZ WALTZ

48 VIENNA WALTZ

49 BOSSA WALTZ

50 COUNTRY WALTZ

1 POP

2 16BEAT

3 DANCE POP

4 BOOGIE

5 SLOW ROCK

6 SWING

7 JAZZ BALLAD

8 BOSSA

9 RHUMBA

10 MARCH

11 COUNTRY

12 WALTZ

POP

13 8BEAT

14 ROCK BAND

15 70’S JAZZ ROCK

16 LATIN ROCK

16BEAT

17 16BEAT POP

18 16BEAT BALLAD

19 FUNK

16BEAT SHUFFLE SOFT

21 16BEAT SHUFFLE

DANCE POP

22 DISCO

23 TECHNO POP

24 REGGAE

BOOGIE

ROCK’N’ROLL SHUFFLE

26 60’S ROCK’N’ROLL

27 SPEED METAL

28 TWIST

SLOW ROCK

29 SLOW BLUES

SWING

30 BEBOP

31 2BEAT SWING

32 DIXIELAND

33 BIG BAND

JAZZ BALLAD

34 BIG BAND BALLAD

BOSSA

35 JAZZ BOSSA

36 SAMBA

37 SALSA

■Starting the Accompaniment

There are several ways to start the accompaniment:

● Straight Start...........................................................................................................................................

Press the [START/STOP] button.

Each of the styles also has a variation that can be selected by pressing the

[VARIATION/FILL TO VARIATION] button or the right FILL IN bar (its LED

will light) before pressing the [START/STOP] button. Normally the [NORMAL/

FILL TO NORMAL] button LED will be lit (or you can select it if the variation is

selected), indicating that the normal pattern is selected.

START/STOP

FILL IN Bars

NORMAL/FILL TO NORMAL

VARIATION/FILL TO VARIATION

START/STOP

Normal straight start

Variation straight start



Left FILL IN Bar

Right FILL IN Bar

Accompaniment

● Start With an Introduction .....................................................................................................................

Press the [INTRO/ENDING] button.

If you press the [NORMAL/FILL TO NORMAL] button (or left FILL IN bar)

or the [VARIATION/FILL TO VARIATION] button (or right FILL IN bar) while

holding the [INTRO/ENDING] button, the rhythm will start with an appropriate

fill and then go to the normal rhythm or variation rhythm, respectively.

The selected start mode can be disengaged prior to starting the accompaniment

by pressing the selected button (flashing indicator) a second time.

The synchronized start mode can be cancelled by pressing the [SYNCHRO

START] button a second time so that its indicator goes out.

NOTES

• The synchronized start mode is automatically turned on when one of the ABC

modes is engaged — see page 21 for details.

● Tap start ..................................................................................................................................................

This function lets you set the tempo and start the rhythm in one operation. Sim-

ply tap the [TAP] button at the required tempo — 3 times for a 3/4 style and 4

times for a 4/4 style. The rhythm will start from the beginning of the next measure

at the specified tempo.

NOTES

• The [TAP] button can also be used to change the tempo during rhythm playback.

In this case the “tap” click will not sound.

• If you tap the [TAP] button less than the required number of times (i.e. 3 or 4), the

tap tempo function will be cancelled after a few seconds.

INTRO/

ENDING

INTRO/ENDING

NORMAL/FILL TO NORMAL

VARIATION/FILL TO VARIATION

START/STOP

INTRO/ENDING

START/STOP

INTRO/ENDING

Intro start



Fill start to normal



Fill start to variation

(Flashing)

Left FILL IN Bar

Right FILL IN Bar

(Flashing)

SYNCHRO

START

NORMAL/FILL TO NORMAL

VARIATION/FILL TO VARIATION

NORMAL/FILL TO NORMAL

INTRO/ENDING

SYNCHRO START

Play key

INTRO/ENDING

VARIATION/FILL TO VARIATION

Play key

After pressing

Normal start

Variation start

Intro start

Fill start to normal

Fill start to variation

Left FILL IN Bar

Right FILL IN Bar

Left FILL IN Bar

Right FILL IN Bar

TAP

METRONOME

–

Any of the start types described above can be synchronized to the first note or

chord played on the keyboard by first pressing the [SYNCHRO START] button so

that its indicator lights. When the keyboard is split or Auto Bass Chord Single/

Fingered mode is used, the first note played on the left-hand section of the key-

board will start the accompaniment (i.e. keys to the left of and including the split-

point key — normally F#2). Once the synchronized start mode has been selected,

use the [NORMAL/FILL TO NORMAL], [VARIATION/FILL TO VARIA-

TION] and/or [INTRO/ENDING] buttons to select the type of start you want.

The first dot of the BEAT display will flash at the current tempo when a syn-

chronized start mode has been selected.

● Synchronized Start.................................................................................................................................

Accompaniment

■Metronome

The CVP-89 also offers a metronome function that is ideal for practice.

To start the metronome, simply press the [METRONOME] button so that its

indicator lights. The metronome will play at the currently selected tempo whether a

style is playing or not. The metronome volume can be adjusted via the RHYTHM

volume control.

Press the [METRONOME] button again to stop the metronome sound (the

METRONOME indicator will go out). The metronome will also stop automati-

cally if the [START/STOP] button is pressed to stop a style in progress.

NOTES

• If the style is started by pressing the [START/STOP] button while the metronome

is playing, the metronome will continue to sound along with the style.

TAP

METRONOME

–

■Fill-ins

The CVP-89 provides two types of automatic “fill-ins.”

■ Fill To Normal: Press the [NORMAL/FILL TO NORMAL] button or the left

FILL IN bar (located in front of the keyboard) during playback to produce a

fill-in and go to the normal rhythm.

■ Fill To Variation: Press the [VARIATION/FILL TO VARIATION] button or

the right FILL IN bar during playback to produce a fill-in and go to the varia-

tion pattern.

If you hold one of the FILL buttons or bars, the fill-in will repeat until the end

of the measure in which button is released.

FILL TO

NORMAL

VARIATION

FILL TO

VARIATION

NORMAL

FILL IN Bars

■Left-pedal Rhythm Break

When the left-pedal function is set to “Rhythm Break” as described on page 15,

the left pedal can be used to create a break in the rhythm while playing. Press and

release the left pedal to stop the rhythm. Rhythm playback will resume from the top

of the next measure. You can also hold the left pedal for longer breaks — the

rhythm will resume from the top of the next measure after the pedal is released.

The break can be cancelled before the beginning of the next measure by pressing

the pedal a second time.

LEFT PEDAL FUNCTION

RHYTHM BREAK

■Stopping the Accompaniment

The accompaniment can be stopped at any time by pressing the [START/

STOP] button. Press the [INTRO/ENDING] button if you want to go to the

ending pattern and then stop.

NOTES

• If you started with an intro or fill-in, or using the SYNCHRO mode, these selec-

tions are maintained even after the accompaniment is stopped.

• If the left pedal is switched to START/STOP operation, it performs the same

function as the panel [START/STOP] buttons (press to START, press again to

STOP).

START/STOP

INTRO/

ENDING

● Measure Number Display

During rhythm playback the current measure number is shown in the upper left-

hand corner of the display.

[001] Piano 1

œ= 78 Pop 1

Measure number

● The Beat Display

The four LED dots of the BEAT display provide a visual indication of the se-

lected tempo. The leftmost (red) dot flashes on the first beat of each measure,

the second dot flashes on the second beat, and so on (all dots except the

leftmost dot are green). When a 3/4-time rhythm is selected, only the first three

dots will flash.

1st. Beat

2nd. Beat

3rd. Beat

4th. Beat

BEAT

Auto Bass Chord (ABC)

The CVP-89 includes a sophisticated auto-

accompaniment system (Auto Bass Chord —

ABC) that can provide automated rhythm, bass

and chord backing in a number of ways.

BEAT

MAX

MIN

MASTER VOLUME



DEMO LEFT PEDAL

UTILITY REVERB

PROGRAM

CUSTOM

RHYTHM

TEMPO

TAP

METRONOME

–

/ NO

+ / YES

MEMORY

REGIST-

RATION

RHYTHM BASS 1 CHORD 2

AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT

MAX

MIN

STYLE

POP 16BEAT

DANCE

POP

BOOGIE

SLOW

ROCK

SWING

JAZZ

BALLAD

BOSSA RHUMBA

MARCH

STYLE

COUNTRY

WALTZ

STYLE

13-50

DISK

STYLE

START/STOP

INTRO/

ENDING

SYNCHRO

START

SOLO

STYLEPLAY

NORMAL

FILL TO

NORMAL

VARIATI ON

FILL TO

VARIATI ON

FULL

KEYBOARD

A B C

SINGLE/

FINGERED

A B C

VOICE

PIANO

CLAVINOVA

TONE

E. PIANO

HARPSI-

CHORD

VIBES GUITAR STRINGS ORGAN CHOIR

UPRIGHT

BASS

ELEC

BASS

DRUMS

VOICE

13-60

SPLIT

VOICE

SONG/PHRASE

NUMBER

START/STOP

REW

REC

CHORD

SEQUENCE

PHRASE

REPEAT

GUIDE

LAMP

CANCEL

SONG SELECT

3-10

DISK ORCHESTRA

PAUSE

RIGHT

LEFT

ORCH

RHYTHM

FULL

KEYBOARD

A B C

SINGLE/

FINGERED

A B C

■Single-Finger & Fingered Accompaniment

This mode lets you create accompaniment in two ways.

“Single Finger” accompaniment makes it simple to produce accompaniment using major, seventh, minor and minor-

seventh chords by pressing a minimum number of keys in the ABC section of the keyboard. The automatic accompaniment

consists of rhythm, bass and chords.

“Fingered” accompaniment is ideal if you already know how to play chords on a keyboard, since it allows you to supply

your own chords for the Auto Accompaniment feature.

ZSelect SINGLE/FINGERED .....................................................................................................................

XSelect a Style ..........................................................................................................................................

Select an accompaniment style using the style selectors (see “Style Selection”

on page 17).

Press the [SINGLE/FINGERED] button to select the SINGLE/FINGERED

mode (the SINGLE/FINGERED indicator will light).

CSet the Tempo.........................................................................................................................................

Use the TEMPO [▲] and [▼] buttons to set the desired accompaniment tempo

if necessary (see “Tempo Control” on page 18 for more details).

VPlay ..........................................................................................................................................................

Pressing any key on the ABC section of the keyboard (up to the split point —

normally the F#2 key) will cause the automatic chord and bass accompaniment to

begin (synchro start is automatically selected in the ABC mode). If you press a “C”

key, for example, a C-major accompaniment will be played. Press another key in

the ABC section of the keyboard to select a new chord. The key you press will

always determine the “root” of the chord played (i.e. “C” for a C chord). The name

of the detected chord will appear on the display.

Single-finger minor, seventh, and minor-seventh chords can be played as fol-

lows:

• For a minor chord, press the root key and the black key to its left.

• For a seventh chord, press the root key and the white key to its left.

• For a minor-seventh chord, press the root key and both the white and black key to

its left.

Any other two-note fingerings that do not fit the above rules will produce a

chord based on the previous chord.

● Single-finger Accompani-

ment

FULL

KEYBOARD

A B C

SINGLE/

FINGERED

A B C

Auto Bass Chord (ABC)

As soon as you play any chord (up to 4 notes) on the lower keyboard (up to the

split point — normally the F#2 key), the Clavinova will automatically begin to play

the chord along with the selected rhythm and an appropriate bass line (synchro start

is automatically selected in the ABC mode*). The name of the detected chord will

appear on the display. If the chord played is not recognized by the CVP-89, only

the root note will be displayed followed by an asterisk (“

”).

* Automatic synchro start switching can be enabled or disabled via the “Auto Synchro Start

Switching” function, described on page 62.

● Fingered Accompaniment

■Full-keyboard ABC

● Full-keyboard ABC

When this advanced auto-accompaniment mode is engaged (press the [FULL

KEYBOARD] button so that its indicator lights) the Clavinova will automatically

create appropriate accompaniment while you play just about anything, anywhere on

the keyboard: chords, a bass line, arpeggiated chords, a melody line. The name of

the detected chord will appear on the display. You don’t have to worry about speci-

fying the accompaniment chords. Although Full-keyboard ABC is designed to work

with many songs, some arrangements may not be suitable for use with this feature.

Try playing a few simple songs in the Full-keyboard ABC mode to get a feel for its

capabilities.

NOTES

• Chord detection occurs at approximately 8th-note intervals. Extremely short

chords — less than an 8th note in length — may therefore not be detected.

FULL

KEYBOARD

A B C

SINGLE/

FINGERED

A B C

[001] Piano 1

œ= 78 Dbm

The Clavinova will accept the following 20 chord types

in the Fingered Accompaniment mode:

“On-bass” chords can be produced by

playing 5-note chords. the lowest note

specifies the bass note while the upper 4 (or

3 if the 4-note chord is not recognized)

specify the chord.

NOTES

• The automatic accompaniment will sometimes not

change when related chords are played in se-

quence (e.g. some minor chords followed by the

minor seventh).

● The [INTRO/ENDING], [NORMAL/FILL TO NORMAL], and [VARIA-

TION/FILL TO VARIATION] buttons can be used in the ABC mode to create

pattern variations in the same way that they are used with rhythm patterns (refer

to the “Accompaniment” section on page 18, 19 for details).

NORMAL/FILL TO NORMAL

VARIATION/FILL TO VARIATION

NORMAL/FILL TO NORMAL

INTRO/ENDING

= Lower key

Lower key

INTRO/ENDING

VARIATION/FILL TO VARIATION

Lower key

Normal start

Variation start

Intro start

Fill start to normal

Fill start to variation

Left FILL IN Bar

Right FILL IN Bar

Left FILL IN Bar

Right FILL IN Bar

BStop the Accompaniment ......................................................................................................................

Press the [START/STOP] or [INTRO/ENDING] button to stop the accompani-

ment.

NOTES

• Press the [SINGLE/FINGERED] button so that its indicator goes out when you

want to exit from the SINGLE/FINGERED mode.

START/STOP

INTRO/

ENDING

• Flatted fifth [(b5)]

• Seventh flatted fifth [7(b5)]

• Major seventh flatted fifth [M7(b5)]

• Seventh suspended fourth [7sus4]

• Suspended fourth [sus4]

• Augmented [aug]

• Seventh sharp fifth [7(#5)]

• Major seventh sharp fifth [M7(#5)]

• Diminished [dim]

• Minor major seventh flatted fifth [mM7(b5)]

• Major

• Minor [m]

• Major seventh [M7]

• Sixth [6]

• Seventh [7]

• Minor sixth [m6]

• Minor seventh [m7]

• Minor major seventh [mM7]

• Minor seventh flatted fifth [m7(b5)]

• Minor flatted fifth [m(b5)]

Auto Bass Chord (ABC)

The Conventional Full-keyboard ABC mode can be engaged by pressing the

[FULL KEYBOARD] and [SINGLE/FINGERED] buttons simultaneously (both

indicators will light). In this mode the split point is de-activated and notes played any-

where on the keyboard are detected and used to determine the harmonization of the

accompaniment. In the Conventional Full-keyboard ABC mode, chord detection is

possible when at least three notes are played anywhere on the keyboard. The name of

the detected chord will appear on the display.

NOTES

• 2-note fingerings are not recognized in the Conventional Full-keyboard ABC mode.

• If more than 5 notes are played in the Conventional Full-keyboard ABC mode, the

lowest 4 notes are used to specify the chord.

• The (

5), 7(

5), M7(

5), and mM7(

5) chord types included in the list on the previous

page are not recognized in the Conventional Full-keyboard ABC mode.

• The Dual or SPLIT mode can be used with Full-keyboard ABC.

• The Full-keyboard and Conventional Full-keyboard ABC modes will be disengaged

and the Single/Fingered mode will be engaged if Solo Styleplay is turned on.

• Solo Styleplay will automatically be turned off whenever the Full-keyboard or Conven-

tional Full-keyboard ABC mode is engaged.

• Press the [FULL KEYBOARD] button so that its indicator goes out when you want to

exit from the Full-keyboard ABC mode. To exit from the Conventional Full-keyboard

ABC mode press the [FULL KEYBOARD] or [SINGLE/FINGERED] button twice.

● Conventional Full-

keyboard ABC

FULL

KEYBOARD

A B C

SINGLE/

FINGERED

A B C

■Special Modes

Some accompaniment notes may be automatically muted if they interfere musically

with what is being played by the right hand. This mute function can be enabled or disa-

bled via the “ABC Auto Mute” function described on page 64. The mute function is

normally enabled (default).

● Mute

■Changing the ABC Split Point

The ABC split point can be set at any key by pressing the desired key while holding

the [SINGLE/FINGERED] button. The specified split point will appear on the dis-

play.

The default split point — F#2 — will always be set automatically whenever the

power is initially turned on.

NOTES

• The split point is indicated by the keyboard guide lamp above the split point key.

SINGLE/

FINGERED

A B C

■Volume Control

The RHYTHM, CHORD 1, CHORD 2, and BASS volume controls can be used to

adjust the volume of the corresponding accompaniment parts when using ABC. In

general, CHORD 1 controls rhythmic chords while CHORD 2 controls more decora-

tive chords (arpeggios, etc.). The volume of the keyboard can be independently con-

trolled by using the BASS volume control while holding the [UTILITY] button.

NOTES

• Some styles may not use all four parts: RHYTHM, CHORD 1, CHORD 2, and BASS.

UTILITY

BASS

RHYTHM BASS 1 CHORD 2

AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT

MAX

MIN

● Minor Harmonization When playing a 7th chord in a minor key, the ABC system will automatically shift

a 9th note down to the octave, and a 6th note to the 5th when the “Minor Harmoniza-

tion” function described on page 64 is turned on. The default setting for this function is

off.

NOTES

• Minor Harmonization will not function in the Full Keyboard ABC mode.

CANCEL

16BEAT

DANCE

POP

Custom Rhythm

The CVP-89 CUSTOM RHYTHM feature allows you

to create 12 original rhythm patterns that can be later

recalled and played at any time, just like the presets.

Each custom rhythm pattern can be “stored” in any of

the CVP-89’s 12 panel style memory locations.

■Creating an Original Rhythm Pattern

BEAT

MAX

MIN

MASTER VOLUME



DEMO LEFT PEDAL

UTILITY REVERB

PROGRAM

CUSTOM

RHYTHM

TEMPO

TAP

METRONOME

–

/ NO

+ / YES

MEMORY

REGIST-

RATION

RHYTHM BASS 1 CHORD 2

AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT

MAX

MIN

STYLE

POP 16BEAT

DANCE

POP

BOOGIE

SLOW

ROCK

SWING

JAZZ

BALLAD

BOSSA RHUMBA

MARCH

STYLE

COUNTRY

WALTZ

STYLE

13-50

DISK

STYLE

START/STOP

INTRO/

ENDING

SYNCHRO

START

SOLO

STYLEPLAY

NORMAL

FILL TO

NORMAL

VARIATI ON

FILL TO

VARIATI ON

FULL

KEYBOARD

A B C

SINGLE/

FINGERED

A B C

VOICE

PIANO

CLAVINOVA

TONE

E. PIANO

HARPSI-

CHORD

VIBES GUITAR STRINGS ORGAN CHOIR

UPRIGHT

BASS

ELEC

BASS

DRUMS

VOICE

13-60

SPLIT

VOICE

SONG/PHRASE

NUMBER

START/STOP

REW

REC

CHORD

SEQUENCE

PHRASE

REPEAT

GUIDE

LAMP

CANCEL

SONG SELECT

3-10

DISK ORCHESTRA

PAUSE

RIGHT

LEFT

ORCH

RHYTHM

PROGRAM

CUSTOM

RHYTHM

ZSelect a Rhythm......................................................................................................................................

Begin by selecting one of the preset rhythms (NORMAL or VARIATION), a

previously-recorded custom rhythm, or a loaded disk style rhythm (NORMAL or

VARIATION) that is close to the rhythm you want to create. For example, select a

WALTZ rhythm if you want to program a rhythm pattern in

3/4 time. You cannot program a 3/4 rhythm when a 4/4 rhythm is selected, and vice

versa.

XPress [PROGRAM]..................................................................................................................................

Press the [PROGRAM] button so that its LED indicator lights. The selected

rhythm will begin playing.

• When the PROGRAM mode is engaged, the LED indicators for all rhythm se-

lectors that currently contain custom rhythm data will glow green. Any previ-

ously programmed and stored custom rhythm pattern can be erased from

memory by pressing the corresponding rhythm button while holding the [CAN-

CEL] (F6) key.

CSet the Required Resolution .................................................................................................................

The initial resolution for custom rhythm programming is 16th (for doublet-type

beats) or 12th notes (for triplet-type beats): “QUANTIZE ON” will appear on the

display when the PROGRAM mode is engaged. This means that all entered notes

will be adjusted to fall on the nearest 16th or 12th beat. If you need greater resolu-

tion for free-tempo passages, switch to 96th-note resolution by pressing the [TAP]

key (“QUANTIZE OFF” will appear on the display). You can return to 16th (12th)

note resolution at any time by pressing the [METRONOME] button.

POP 16BEAT

DANCE

POP

BOOGIE

SLOW

ROCK

PROGRAM

TAP

METRONOME

–

[001]CUSTOM NORMAL

œ= 78 QUANTIZE ON

VEnter the Rhythm....................................................................................................................................

You can now add new notes to the selected rhythm accompaniment by playing

the keyboard percussion keys at the appropriate timing. Keyboard velocity sensitiv-

ity lets you add accents and dynamics as required. The rhythm pattern is two meas-

ures long (the current measure number will appear on the display), and the pattern

will continue to repeat so you can add new instruments during each repeat, if nec-

essary.

NOTES

• If you want to create a totally new rhythm from scratch, press the [CLEAR ALL]

(G6) key and the [CANCEL] key simultaneously before beginning to program.

This cancels all the instruments in the original accompaniment, leaving only a

metronome sound (the metronome sound is not recorded).

F6 G6

CANCEL

CLEAR

ALL

Custom Rhythm

BCancel Instruments & Correct Mistakes as Required .........................................................................

Although you can cancel all instruments in a pattern by pressing the [CLEAR

ALL] and [CANCEL] keys, it is also possible to cancel a single instrument to

erase a mistake or simply eliminate an unwanted instrument. While holding the

[CANCEL] key, press the key corresponding to the instrument you want to cancel.

The selected instrument should now be cleared from the pattern.

NSave the Custom Rhythm ......................................................................................................................

When your custom rhythm is complete, press the STYLE selector with which

you want the new rhythm to be associated. The STYLE selector indicator will glow

green. This saves the custom rhythm in the selected style button. Then press the

[PROGRAM] button to exit the custom rhythm programming mode (the PRO-

GRAM indicator will go out). If you want to stop programming without saving the

rhythm pattern, simply press the [PROGRAM] button so that its LED indicator

goes out.

NOTES

• The following patterns can be individually programmed for each Custom Rhythm:

Basic pattern x 1 (NORMAL)

Fill-in x 2 (FILL IN 1/2)

Intro x 1 (INTRO)

Ending x 1 (ENDING)

• If a FILL IN button or bar is pressed prior to programming, it is possible to pro-

gram a one-measure custom fill-in (2 types). Custom INTRO/ENDING patterns

can also be programmed: press the [INTRO/ENDING] button while the rhythm is

running to program a custom ending, or while the rhythm is stopped to program a

custom intro. The intro or ending pattern will be the same length as the original (8

measures maximum).

• Up to 8 notes can be played simultaneously.

• The drum kit, reverb, and pan settings for the custom rhythm can be changed as

required via the “Edit Drum Instrument” function described on page 63.

F6 G6

CANCEL CLEAR

ALL

POP 16BEAT

DANCE

POP

BOOGIE

SLOW

ROCK

■Playing Back Your Custom Rhythm Pattern

Once created, your original rhythm pattern can be played back by pressing the

[CUSTOM RHYTHM] button (its LED will light), the style selector button into

which it was stored, and then the [START/STOP] button. Press the [START/

STOP] button to stop playback. Your CUSTOM RHYTHM can also be used as the

basis for ABC accompaniment.

NOTES

• If ABC is used with a Custom Rhythm pattern, the ABC program of the original

style will be used. If the original style is a disk style, however, no ABC sound will

be produced unless that disk style is loaded.

• No sound will be produced if the selected Custom Rhythm style contains no data.

• Custom Rhythm data will be backed up for approximately one week.

• A set of 12 custom rhythms can be saved to and loaded from disk as described

on page 45, 46.

CUSTOM

RHYTHM

Disk Styles

A “Style Disk” is supplied with the Clavinova, pro-

viding an extra 50 ABC accompaniment styles. Any

two of these patterns can be loaded into the

Clavinova’s memory at a time. The [DISK STYLE 1]

and [DISK STYLE 2] buttons select the loaded disk

styles in the same way as the STYLE selectors se-

lect the internal styles.

BEAT

MAX

MIN

MASTER VOLUME



DEMO LEFT PEDAL

UTILITY REVERB

PROGRAM

CUSTOM

RHYTHM

TEMPO

TAP

METRONOME

–

– / NO

+ / YES

MEMORY

REGIST-

RATION

RHYTHM BASS 1 CHORD 2

AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT

MAX

MIN

STYLE

POP 16BEAT

DANCE

POP

BOOGIE

SLOW

ROCK

SWING

JAZZ

BALLAD

BOSSA RHUMBA

MARCH

STYLE

COUNTRY

WALTZ

STYLE

13-50

DISK

STYLE

START/STOP

INTRO/

ENDING

SYNCHRO

START

SOLO

STYLEPLAY

NORMAL

FILL TO

NORMAL

VARIATI ON

FILL TO

VARIATI ON

FULL

KEYBOARD

A B C

SINGLE/

FINGERED

A B C

VOICE

PIANO

CLAVINOVA

TONE

E. PIANO

HARPSI-

CHORD

VIBES GUITAR STRINGS ORGAN CHOIR

UPRIGHT

BASS

ELEC

BASS

DRUMS

VOICE

13-60

SPLIT

VOICE

SONG/PHRASE

NUMBER

START/STOP

REW

REC

CHORD

SEQUENCE

PHRASE

REPEAT

GUIDE

LAMP

CANCEL

SONG SELECT

3-10

DISK ORCHESTRA

PAUSE

RIGHT

LEFT

ORCH

RHYTHM

DISK

STYLE

SONG/PHRASE

NUMBER

SONG SELECT

NOTES

• If no disk styles are loaded as described below, the [DISK STYLE 1] and [DISK STYLE 2] buttons select

pre-programmed disk styles contained in internal ROM memory.

• Loaded disk styles will be retained in memory for about one week if the CVP-89 power is not turned on

during that time. To keep the loaded disk steyles for longer periods, turn the power ON briefly at least

once a week.

• Style disk data can be copied to a different disk — see page 47.

■Selecting & Loading Disk Styles

ZInsert the Style Disk ...............................................................................................................................

Insert the Style Disk into the disk drive with the sliding door on the disk facing

the drive slot and the label side facing upward. The disk should click into place and

the disk lamp will light briefly while the Clavinova reads and identifies the disk.

XMake Sure the [SONG SELECT] Indicator Is Lit ..................................................................................

The [SONG SELECT] indicator will light automatically when the disk is

ready. If a disk is already loaded and the [SONG SELECT] indicator is not lit,

press the [SONG SELECT] button so that it lights. When this is done the [DISK

STYLE 1] and [DISK STYLE 2] button indicators will flash alternately, and the

SINGLE/FINGERED ABC mode and synchronized start mode will be engaged

(any other ABC mode will remain active if it was selected before the disk was

loaded).

SONG SELECT

CSelect a Style ..........................................................................................................................................

Use the SONG/PHRASE NUMBER [▲] and [▼] buttons to select the desired

style number. The selected style number, style name, and the current tempo will

appear on the display. Also, an “s” will appear in front of the disk symbol on the

display to indicate that a disk style is selected. You can “preview” the selected style

by playing on the left-hand section of the keyboard (single-finger or fingered).

Pattern playback will stop if a different pattern number is selected.

NOTES

• If a tempo is set prior to loading the style, that tempo becomes the default for the

loaded style.

SONG/PHRASE

NUMBER

VLoad the Style .........................................................................................................................................

Press the [DISK STYLE 1] or [DISK STYLE 2] button to load the selected

pattern into that button. The [DISK STYLE 1] or [DISK STYLE 2] indicator will

light, and the [SONG SELECT] indicator will go out.

DISK

STYLE

[001] Piano 1

œ=148 AmericanRock ßƒ 1

BRepeat......................................................................................................................................................

Repeat steps X through V to select and load a second pattern into the other

[DISK STYLE] button if you like.

Disk Style List

Group No. Name

1 AMERICAN ROCK

2 ROCK’N’ROLL

ROCK

3 ROCK CLASSIC

4 ROCKABILLY

5 FIGHTING ROCK

6 60’S ROCK SHUFFLE

7 8BEAT 2

8 POP BALLAD

9 FOLK

POP

10 MUSIC BOX

11 NEW AGE POP

12 COMPUTER GAME

13 16 BEAT POP BALLAD

14 16 BEAT SHUFFLE 2

15 DANCE 8BEAT

16 DANCE POP 2

DANCE POP

17 HOUSE POP

18 POWER HOUSE

19 FUNK 2

20 REGGAE 2

21 BIG BAND 2

22 BIG BAND 3

JAZZ

23 CONTEMPORARY JAZZ

24 CHARLESTON

25 AFRO-CUBAN

26 SWING WALTZ

Group No. Name

27 CALYPSO

28 BOSSA SOFT

LATIN 29 SAMBA 2

30 SALSA 2

31 BIG BAND CHACHA

32 BROADWAY

33 SHOW TIME

MUSICAL 34

PIT ORCHESTRA 1 (VAUDEVILLE)

&35

PIT ORCHESTRA 2 (SWING)

NOVELTY 36

PIT ORCHESTRA 3 (POPULAR)

SNARE ROLL & PRIZE WINNER

38 CLOCK

39 CLASSICAL POLKA

40 POP BAROQUE 1

41 POP BAROQUE 2

CLASSIC 42 QUASI BAROQUE

43 OVERTURE 1

44 OVERTURE 2

45 URBAN WALTZ

46 CHANSON

47 BOLERO

WORLD 48 CHINESE POP

49 ARABIAN POP

50 AFRICAN POP

NEject the Disk When Done .....................................................................................................................

When you’ve finished with the Style Disk, press the disk drive EJECT button

to remove it.

■Using a Loaded Disk Style

After you’ve loaded the desired Disk Styles, the [DISK STYLE 1] and [DISK

STYLE 2] buttons can be used in exactly the same way as the other STYLE but-

tons to select the loaded patterns for ABC accompaniment (see “Auto Bass Chord

(ABC)” beginning on page 21).

The name of the Disk Style selected by the [DISK STYLE 1] or [DISK

STYLE 2] button will be shown on the display. Also, the numbers “51” and “52”

will appear when DISK STYLE 1 and DISK STYLE 2 are selected, respectively.

DISK

STYLE

[001] Piano 1

œ=148 AmericanRock 51

Solo Styleplay

BEAT

MAX

MIN

MASTER VOLUME



DEMO LEFT PEDAL

UTILITY REVERB

PROGRAM

CUSTOM

RHYTHM

TEMPO

TAP

METRONOME

–

/ NO

+ / YES

MEMORY

REGIST-

RATION

RHYTHM BASS 1 CHORD 2

AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT

MAX

MIN

STYLE

POP 16BEAT

DANCE

POP

BOOGIE

SLOW

ROCK

SWING

JAZZ

BALLAD

BOSSA RHUMBA

MARCH

STYLE

COUNTRY

WALTZ

STYLE

13-50

DISK

STYLE

START/STOP

INTRO/

ENDING

SYNCHRO

START

SOLO

STYLEPLAY

NORMAL

FILL TO

NORMAL

VARIATI ON

FILL TO

VARIATI ON

FULL

KEYBOARD

A B C

SINGLE/

FINGERED

A B C

VOICE

PIANO

CLAVINOVA

TONE

E. PIANO

HARPSI-

CHORD

VIBES GUITAR STRINGS ORGAN CHOIR

UPRIGHT

BASS

ELEC

BASS

DRUMS

VOICE

13-60

SPLIT

VOICE

SONG/PHRASE

NUMBER

START/STOP

REW

REC

CHORD

SEQUENCE

PHRASE

REPEAT

GUIDE

LAMP

CANCEL

SONG SELECT

3-10

DISK ORCHESTRA

PAUSE

RIGHT

LEFT

ORCH

RHYTHM

SOLO

STYLEPLAY

SOLO

STYLEPLAY

This sophisticated feature not only provides auto-

matic rhythm, bass and chord accompaniment, but it

also adds appropriate harmony notes (two or three

harmonized notes) to a melody you play on the upper

keyboard.

Press the [SOLO STYLEPLAY] button to turn the SOLO STYLEPLAY mode

on. The SINGLE/FINGERED mode is automatically selected when SOLO

STYLEPLAY is turned on. If a FULL KEYBOARD mode is selected, the SIN-

GLE/FINGERED mode will automatically be selected since Solo Styleplay cannot

be used with the FULL KEYBOARD modes.

ZTurn Solo Styleplay ON..........................................................................................................................

■Using Solo Styleplay

XSelect a Style ..........................................................................................................................................

Select an accompaniment style using the style selectors (see “Style Selection”

on page 17). An appropriate voice for the selected style will automatically be se-

lected, but you can also select any other voice after selecting the style.

CSet the Tempo.........................................................................................................................................

Set the desired tempo if necessary using the TEMPO [▲] and [▼] buttons (see

“Tempo Control” on page 18).

VPlay ..........................................................................................................................................................

Play the required chords (single-finger or fingered) on the ABC section of the

keyboard while playing a melody line on the upper keyboard (for some styles, only

one note can be played at a time on the right-hand section of the keyboard in the

Solo Styleplay mode).

BStop the Accompaniment ......................................................................................................................

Press [START/STOP] or [INTRO/ENDING] to stop the accompaniment.

NTurn Solo Styleplay OFF........................................................................................................................

Press the [SOLO STYLEPLAY] button again to turn the function off.

LEFT PEDAL

■The Left Pedal & Solo Styleplay

If the LEFT PEDAL function is set to SOLO STYLEPLAY after the SOLO

STYLEPLAY mode is selected, harmonization of notes played on the right-hand

section of the keyboard only occurs while the left pedal is pressed. This allows you

to combine normal ABC type performance with SOLO STYLEPLAY as required.

NOTES

• The SOLO STYLEPLAY mode will be disengaged if the ABC SINGLE/FIN-

GERED mode is turned off or the FULL KEYBOARD ABC mode is turned on.

LEFT PEDAL FUNCTION

SOLO STYLEPLAY

■Harmonization Variations

It is possible to apply the harmonization type and voice from a different style to

the selected style by pressing the style selector corresponding to the harmonization

type you want to use (except for the [DISK STYLE 1/2] selector) while holding the

[SOLO STYLEPLAY] button — the selected STYLE button indicator will flash

and the selected style number will appear on the display while the [SOLO

STYLEPLAY] button is held. This makes it possible, for example, to use the solo

styleplay harmonization type and voice from the 16 BEAT style when actually

playing in the POP style.

SOLO

STYLEPLAY

POP

DANCE

POP

BOOGIE16BEAT

[001] Piano 1

œ= 78 SOLO STYLEPLAY 2

Registration Memory

The CVP-89 Registration Memory feature can be

used to memorize 12 complete control-panel setups

that you can recall whenever needed.

BEAT

MAX

MIN

MASTER VOLUME



DEMO LEFT PEDAL

UTILITY REVERB

PROGRAM

CUSTOM

RHYTHM

TEMPO

TAP

METRONOME

–

/ NO

+ / YES

MEMORY

REGIST-

RATION

RHYTHM BASS 1 CHORD 2

AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT

MAX

MIN

STYLE

POP 16BEAT

DANCE

POP

BOOGIE

SLOW

ROCK

SWING

JAZZ

BALLAD

BOSSA RHUMBA

MARCH

STYLE

COUNTRY

WALTZ

STYLE

13-50

DISK

STYLE

START/STOP

INTRO/

ENDING

SYNCHRO

START

SOLO

STYLEPLAY

NORMAL

FILL TO

NORMAL

VARIATI ON

FILL TO

VARIATI ON

FULL

KEYBOARD

A B C

SINGLE/

FINGERED

A B C

VOICE

PIANO

CLAVINOVA

TONE

E. PIANO

HARPSI-

CHORD

VIBES GUITAR STRINGS ORGAN CHOIR

UPRIGHT

BASS

ELEC

BASS

DRUMS

VOICE

13-60

SPLIT

VOICE

SONG/PHRASE

NUMBER

START/STOP

REW

REC

CHORD

SEQUENCE

PHRASE

REPEAT

GUIDE

LAMP

CANCEL

SONG SELECT

3-10

DISK ORCHESTRA

PAUSE

RIGHT

LEFT

ORCH

RHYTHM

MEMORY

REGIST-

RATION

PIANO

CLAVINOVA

TONE

E. PIANO

HARPSI-

CHORD

VIBES GUITAR STRINGS ORGAN CHOIR

UPRIGHT

BASS

ELEC

BASS

DRUMS

VOICE

■Memory Store

Set the CVP-89 panel controls to the state you want to memorize. The settings

that are memorized by the Registration Memory are listed below.

ZMake the Desired Control Settings .......................................................................................................

Settings Stored By the Registration Memory

• ABC On/Off

• Solo Styleplay On/Off

• Solo Styleplay Variation

• Voice Number

• Manual Volume

• Style Number

• Style Variation

• Tempo

• Rhythm Volume

• Chord 1 Volume

• Chord 2 Volume

• Bass Volume

• Split Point

• Dual/Split Mode

• Dual/Split Voice

• Dual/Split Balance

• Reverb Type

• Reverb Depth

• Left Pedal Function

• Intro

• Touch Sensitivity

• Pitch Bend Range

(for the selected voice only)

• Chorus On/Off

(for the selected voice only)

• Soundboard Effect Depth

XMemorize the Settings ...........................................................................................................................

Press one of the VOICE selectors while holding the [MEMORY] button. The

indicator of the pressed voice selector will glow green indicating that the panel data

has been memorized in that location.

MEMORY

REGIST-

RATION

PIANO

CLAVINOVA

TONE

E. PIANO

■Recall

Simply press the appropriate VOICE selector after pressing the [REGISTRA-

TION] button (the [REGISTRATION] button indicator should be lit) to recall the

memorized settings (the indicator of the selected VOICE selector will glow green).

The recalled voice, style, and tempo will appear on the display. Once recalled,

press the [REGISTRATION] button again so that its indicator goes out to return to

the normal play mode.

NOTES

• If DISK STYLE 1 or DISK STYLE 2 is stored in the registration memory, the same

disk style must be assigned to the same button ([DISK STYLE 1] or [DISK STYLE

2]) when the memory is recalled otherwise the currently assigned disk style will

sound.

• The contents of all 12 Registration Memory locations can be saved to and loaded

from disk using the Save Registration and Load Registration utilities described on

page 44.

• The Registration Tempo utility function described on page 64 determines whether

the tempo setting included in the registration memory data will be used when a

registration memory is recalled.

• Registration data is retained in the Clavinova memory for about one week even if

the POWER is not turned on. To keep the data in memory for longer periods, turn

the POWER switch on briefly at least once a week.

• 12 “preset” sets of registration data are stored in the 12 memory locations when

the CVP-89 is initially shipped.

MEMORY

PIANO

CLAVINOVA

TONE

E. PIANO

REGIST-

RATION

Disk Orchestra

Using Yamaha Disk Orchestra disks (one is supplied with the CVP-89, others are available from Yamaha),

the Clavinova will let you enjoy listening to automated performances, or function as your “private music tutor,”

allowing you to practice various parts of a piece while the others are played automatically. The CVP-89 also

shows you which keys to play with keyboard guide lamps that light up above each key. You can also play “in

ensemble” with the complete Disk Orchestra arrangement.

CStart Playback.........................................................................................................................................

Start playback of the selected song by pressing either the DISK ORCHESTRA

[START/STOP] button or the ABC [START/STOP] button. Unless “ALL” is se-

lected, the selected song will play through to the end and playback will stop auto-

matically. It is also possible to automatically play all songs from the currently se-

lected song repeatedly by pressing the [START/STOP] button while holding the

[UTILITY] button. The current measure number will be shown on the display

during playback, and the voice indicator used for the RIGHT/1TR and LEFT/2TR

parts will light. The voice can be changed as required via the VOICE selectors.

Playback can be stopped at any time by pressing the DISK ORCHESTRA or

ABC [START/STOP] button.

UTILITY

START/STOP

■Automatic Performance

ZInsert a Disk Orchestra Disk..................................................................................................................

Insert the DISK ORCHESTRA disk into the disk drive with the sliding door

facing the drive slot and the label side facing upward. The disk should click into

place and the disk lamp will light briefly while the Clavinova reads and identifies

the disk.

NOTES

• If a disk is already loaded and the [SONG SELECT] indicator is out, press the

[SONG SELECT] button so that the indicator lights before proceeding.

XSelect a Song Number ...........................................................................................................................

When the disk is inserted the [SONG SELECT], [RIGHT/1], [LEFT/2],

[ORCH/3-10], and [RHYTHM] indicators will light if the corresponding tracks

contain performance data, and the selected song number and name will be shown

on the display along with the current tempo. Use the SONG/PHRASE NUMBER

[▲] and [▼] buttons to select the desired song number. Select “ALL” if you want

all songs on the disk to be played and repeated until playback is stopped.

NOTES

• You can also start sequential repeat playback by using the [

▲

] and [

▼

] buttons to

select the song number from which playback is to begin, and then pressing the

[START/STOP] button while holding the [UTILITY] button.

• The songs can be made to play back and repeat either in sequence or in random

order when “ALL” is selected or when starting playback by pressing the [START/

STOP] button while holding the [UTILITY] button, and playback is started, de-

pending on the setting of the “Random All Song Repeat” function (page 62).

SONG/PHRASE

NUMBER

[001] Piano 1

œ=144 MINUET(BACH) ƒALL

NOTES

• The Disk Orchestra Collection playback data is not transmitted via the MIDI OUT

connector.

BEAT

MAX

MIN

MASTER VOLUME



DEMO LEFT PEDAL

UTILITY REVERB

PROGRAM

CUSTOM

RHYTHM

TEMPO

TAP

METRONOME

–

/ NO

+ / YES

MEMORY

REGIST-

RATION

RHYTHM BASS 1 CHORD 2

AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT

MAX

MIN

STYLE

POP 16BEAT

DANCE

POP

BOOGIE

SLOW

ROCK

SWING

JAZZ

BALLAD

BOSSA RHUMBA

MARCH

STYLE

COUNTRY

WALTZ

STYLE

13-50

DISK

STYLE

START/STOP

INTRO/

ENDING

SYNCHRO

START

SOLO

STYLEPLAY

NORMAL

FILL TO

NORMAL

VARIATI ON

FILL TO

VARIATI ON

FULL

KEYBOARD

A B C

SINGLE/

FINGERED

A B C

VOICE

PIANO

CLAVINOVA

TONE

E. PIANO

HARPSI-

CHORD

VIBES GUITAR STRINGS ORGAN CHOIR

UPRIGHT

BASS

ELEC

BASS

DRUMS

VOICE

13-60

SPLIT

VOICE

SONG/PHRASE

NUMBER

START/STOP

REW

REC

CHORD

SEQUENCE

PHRASE

REPEAT

GUIDE

LAMP

CANCEL

SONG SELECT

3-10

DISK ORCHESTRA

PAUSE

RIGHT

LEFT

ORCH

RHYTHM

SONG/PHRASE

NUMBER

START/STOP

REC

CHORD

SEQUENCE

PHRASE

REPEAT

GUIDE

LAMP

CANCEL

SONG SELECT

3-10

DISK ORCHESTRA

PAUSE

RIGHT

LEFT

ORCH

RHYTHM

REW

SONG SELECT

Disk Orchestra

NOTES

• Please note that playback cannot be started while the Clavinova is searching the disk for

a selected song (a flashing dot following the song name on the display indicates that the

Clavinova is searching).

• With some songs the displayed measure numbers may not match those marked on the

score.

• Some songs start after a click count-in.

• The playback tempo can be changed freely as required. The preset tempo for the se-

lected song can be recalled at any time by pressing the TEMPO [

▲

] and [

▼

] buttons

simultaneously.

• Some Disk Orchestra software does not produce a tempo display (e.g. free-tempo

phrases, etc.). In this case, three dashes appear in place of the tempo on the display,

and the measure numbers shown on the display will not match the actual measure

numbers of the song.

• The keyboard guide lamps corresponding to the keys being played will light in real time.

The keyboard guide lamps can be turned off by pressing the [LAMP CANCEL] button.

Disk drive lamp

■Playing Back only Specific Parts

The [RIGHT/1], [LEFT/2], [ORCH/3-10], and [RHYTHM] buttons can be used to

select playback of specific parts. The [LEFT/2] button turns the left-hand part on or off,

the [RIGHT/1] button turns the right-hand part on or off, the [ORCH/3-10] button turns

the ORCHESTRA parts on or off, and the [RHYTHM] button turns the rhythm part on

or off. When a part is on, the corresponding LED indicator lights. You can, for example,

turn off the right and/or left-hand parts so you can practice them on the keyboard.

● Turning Individual Orchestra Parts On or Off

Normally the [ORCH/3-10] buttons turns all the orchestra parts (tracks 3 through

10)* on or off at once. You can, however, turn these parts on or off individually. There

are two ways to do this:

* Some software may actually have 15 or 16 tracks, indicated by numbers “1” through “9” and letters “A”

through “E” and “R” or “A” through “G” on the display, depending on the type of data.

Via the Keyboard

Turn the desired tracks on or off by pressing the keys shown in the illustration to the

left while holding the [ORCH/3-10] button (the current status of the tracks is shown

on the display while the [ORCH/3-10] button is held):

Press the key once to move the cursor to the tracks on the display, and a second to

turn the track on or off. The status of the track is indicated by the track number (or

letter):

No number.................. No data

Flashing number ........ Playback off

Lit number .................. Playback on

Via the Panel Controls

Use the [TAP] and [METRONOME] buttons while holding the [ORCH/3-10] button

to move the cursor on the display to the number of the track you want to turn on or

off, then, still holding the [ORCH/3-10] button, use the TEMPO [s] and [t] but-

tons to turn the track on or off.

NOTES

• With DOC, Performance Memory, and Disklavier data, only the numbers of tracks

containing data appear on the display. With most other types of data all tracks are

displayed whether they contain data or not.

In addition to the main display, the status of tracks 3 through 16 is indicated by the

corresponding keyboard guide lamps while the [ORCH/3-10] button is held. If a

lamp is out, the corresponding track contains no data. A flashing lamp indicates that

playback is off, and a lit lamp indicates that playbacks is on.

3-10

RIGHT

LEFT

ORCH

RHYTHM

3-10

ORCH

TEMPO

TAP

METRONOME

–

– / NO

+ / YES

[001] Piano 1

œ=120 123456789ABCDER

Track 10 12 14

Track 11 13 15

(Rhythm)

B5 C6 D6 E6 F6

57 10

98643

G6 A6 B6 C7

11 13 15 16

12 14

3-10

ORCH

(A)(C)(E)

(B)(D)(R)(G)

(F)

VEject the Disk When Done .....................................................................................................................

When you’ve finished with the currently loaded disk, simply press the disk drive

EJECT button to remove it.

CAUTION

NEVER eject a disk or turn the power off while:

1. The disk drive lamp is on.

2. The DISK ORCHESTRA function is playing.

-1

GUIDE

-1

GUIDE

Disk Orchestra

■Volume Control

During DISK ORCHESTRA playback use the RHYTHM volume control

to adjust the volume of the drum and percussion parts, the CHORD 2 volume

control adjusts the volume of the main left- and right-hand parts, the CHORD

1 volume control adjusts the volume of all other parts except the bass, and the

BASS control adjusts the volume of the bass part.

NOTES

• When a different song is selected the volume settings will correspond to

those in the song data, regardless of the positions of the volume controls.

RHYTHM.....Drum and Percussion parts

(track 15).

BASS ..........Bass part (track 3).

CHORD 1 .... Other backing parts except

Bass (track 4-10).

CHORD 2 .... Main left- and right-hand

parts (tracks 1 & 2).

■Guided Right- and Left-hand Practice

With this feature, the Clavinova waits for you to play the appropriate keys

before playing ahead, so you can learn to play the piece at your own pace.

Press the [GUIDE] button so that its indicator lights to turn the guide mode

on. The settings of the [RIGHT/1] and [LEFT/2] buttons will then determine

whether the guide function operates for the left-hand part only, the right-hand

part only, or both the right- and left-hand parts, as shown to the left.

Right-hand guide only

After turning on...

Left- and right-hand guide =

Left-hand guide only =

GUIDE

RIGHT

LEFT

RIGHT

LEFT

RIGHT

LEFT

RIGHT

LEFT

When you press the [START/STOP] button to begin playback, the introduc-

tion will play automatically but then the Clavinova will stop and wait for you to

play the next key(s). The CVP-89 indicates the next key(s) to be played via the

guide lamps above the keyboard. As you play the appropriate keys, the piece

will continue, pausing until you play the right keys each time.

As with automated performance, the song will stop automatically when the

end is reached, or it can be stopped at any time by pressing the [START/STOP]

button.

NOTES

• Disk Orchestra playback tempo can be set to any desired value after a song

has been selected by using the TEMPO [

▲

] and [

▼

] buttons.

• The positions of the guide lamps do not change if the transpose function is

used to transpose the pitch of the keyboard.

• If the guide lamps flashing above the keyboard distract you, or you want to try

playing along without them, simply press the [LAMP CANCEL] button so that

its indicator lights. Repeat to turn the guide lamps back on.

• The [PAUSE], [REW] and [FF] buttons will not operate when the guide func-

tion is in use.

● Guide Modes ...........................................................................................................................................

The Clavinova has two guide modes which can be selected as follows:

● Normal Wait:

This mode is automatically selected when the power is turned on. It can also

be selected by pressing the A-1 key (the lowest key) while holding the

[GUIDE] button. The A-1 guide lamp will light while the [GUIDE] button

is pressed.

In the normal wait mode the Clavinova will wait until the appropriate key or

chord, as indicated by the keyboard guide lamps, is played before proceed-

ing to the next note.

● Delayed Wait:

This mode can be selected by pressing the B-1 key (the second-to-lowest

white key) while holding the [GUIDE] button. The B-1 guide lamp will

light while the [GUIDE] button is pressed.

In the delayed wait mode the Clavinova will play ahead for 8 quarter-note

beats (two measures in 4/4 time) and then wait until the appropriate key or

chord, as indicated by the keyboard guide lamps, is played.

[001] Piano 1

œ=120 GUIDE

[001] Piano 1

œ=120 GUIDE 2bar

Disk Orchestra

■Repeat Functions

● Phrase Repeat

Use this function if you want to practice a specific phrase within a song, as indicated by the phrase marks on the

Disk Orchestra Collection score.

ZSelect a Song ..........................................................................................................................................

Press the [SONG SELECT] button so that its indicator lights and select the

desired song by using the SONG/PHRASE NUMBER [▲] and [▼] buttons.

● A-B Repeat

XTurn Phrase Repeat ON and Select a Phrase Number........................................................................

Press the [PHRASE REPEAT] button (its LED indicator will light). When this

is done the phrase number will appear on the display. Use the SONG/PHRASE

NUMBER [▲] and [▼]buttons to select the desired phrase number (refer to the

DISK ORCHESTRA COLLECTION book that comes with the DISK ORCHES-

TRA COLLECTION disk).

This function allows you to specify any section of a DISK ORCHESTRA song for continuous repeat playback.

While the song is playing, hold the [UTILITY] and press the [PHRASE RE-

PEAT] button once at the beginning of the section to be repeated (the “A” point)

and again at the end of the section to be repeated (the “B” point). Repeat playback

will begin automatically from the A point as soon as the B point has been specified.

The programmed A and B points are retained until a different song number or mode

is selected, and the A-B phrase can be selected again for repeat playback after play-

back has been stopped by following the Phrase Repeat procedure described above

and selecting “<A-B>” instead of a phrase number in step X.

NOTES

• The specified A-B repeat points will be erased when a new song number is se-

lected.

SONG/PHRASE

NUMBER

PHRASE

REPEAT

“A” point “B” point

UTILITY

PHRASE

REPEAT

PHRASE

REPEAT

SONG SELECT

SONG/PHRASE

NUMBER

CSelect a Part to Practice.........................................................................................................................

Use the [RIGHT/1], [LEFT/2], [ORCH/3-10], and [RHYTHM] buttons to

turn playback of the various parts on or off, as required.

VStart Playback.........................................................................................................................................

Press the [START/STOP] button to begin playback of the selected phrase after

a one-measure count-in. Phrase playback will repeat until the [START/STOP]

button is pressed a second time.

NOTES

• The count-in may not sound with some songs — e.g. those that do not include a

rhythm track.

3-10

RIGHT

LEFT

ORCH

RHYTHM

START/STOP

[025] Piano 1

œ=120 PHRASE< 3>

[009] Piano 1

œ=120 PHRASE<A- >

[016] Piano 1

œ=120 PHRASE<A-B>

Disk Orchestra

■Other Playback Controls

● Pause .......................................................................................................................................................

Press the [PAUSE] button to temporarily stop DISK ORCHESTRA playback. Press

the [PAUSE] button again (or the [START/STOP] button) to resume playback from

the same point.

● Rewind and Fast Forward......................................................................................................................

During DISK ORCHESTRA operation the [REW] and [FF] buttons function as

follows:

■ While playback is stopped or paused the [REW] and [FF] buttons can be used to

step backward or forward through the song a measure at a time. Either button can

also be held for continuous stepping in the specified direction.

■ During playback the [REW] and [FF] buttons allow you to move rapidly in the

specified direction for as long as the button is held. No sound is produced during

[REW] operation.

NOTES

• Using the [REW] button may cause the voice, tempo, and/or volume to change.

• The [PAUSE], [REW] and [FF] buttons do not function while a guide mode is en-

gaged.

PAUSE

REW

● Pedal Pause/Next Phrase.......................................................................................................................

If the left pedal is set for START/STOP operation using the [LEFT PEDAL] but-

ton, it functions as a pause/next phrase control during DISK ORCHESTRA playback:

press once to pause, and again to continue from the beginning of the next phrase (refer

to the DISK ORCHESTRA COLLECTION book that comes with the DISK ORCHES-

TRA COLLECTION disk for phrase locations).

NOTES

• The pedal pause/next phrase function will not operate if the guide, phrase repeat, or

all songs repeat modes are active.

LEFT PEDAL FUNCTION

START/STOP

■Playing Other Types of Music Data

In addition to Disk Orchestra Collection disks, the Clavinova can also play back Yamaha Disklavier PianoSoft™ disks,

disks containing Yamaha ESEQ format sequence data, and disks containing songs recorded in Standard MIDI File format (for-

mats 0 and 1 — the [REW] and [FF] buttons do not function with format 1 data).

It is possible to change the track 1/2 voice by using the panel voice selectors during playback of Disk Orchestra Collection

and Disklavier PianoSoft disks. In this case the playback voice will become the same as the voice played via the keyboard. The

playback voice cannot be changed when playing back other type of disks (the keyboard voice can be changed).

The phrase repeat function described above can only be used with Disk Orchestra Collection disks. A-B repeat can be used

with any type of data. The guide function can only be used with ESEQ files.

The [ORCH/3-10TR] part select button can also be used with all types of data: with files other than General MIDI files it

turns tracks 3 through 14 on or off, and with General MIDI Files it turns tracks 3 through 9 and 11 through 16 on or off. The

[RHYTHM] button can be used to turn track 15 on and off with file types other than General MIDI (with General MIDI files

the [RHYTHM] button turns track 10 on and off). With any type of file the individual tracks (1 through 16) can be turned on

and off as described on page 31.

When playing files other than General MIDI files the Auto Accompaniment volume controls affect the following tracks

BASS Track 3

CHORD 2 Tracks 1 & 2

CHORD 1 Tracks 4 … 14

RHYTHM Track 15

(the volume of General MIDI format tracks cannot be controlled):

When playing General MIDI Files the Clavinova’s internal tone generator is auto-

matically switched to the GM System Level 1 voice allocation.

■DISK ORCHESTRA COLLECTION Disk Copy

The [ORCH/3-10] and [RHYTHM] parts of songs from DISK ORCHESTRA COLLECTION disks — the disk sup-

plied with the Clavinova and others available from Yamaha — can be copied to separate disks by following the

“Copying Disk Orchestra Disks” instructions given on page 47. Data copied in this way can be played back and manipu-

lated via the Performance Memory (page 35) — you can, for example, record your own [RIGHT/1] and [LEFT/2]

parts.

NOTES

• Disk Orchestra Collection phrase marks are not copied.

The CVP-89 features a built-in “sequencer”

which can be used to independently record up to

ten separate parts of a single musical composition,

plus a rhythm track. Each part is recorded on one

of the Performance Memory “tracks” accessed via

the [RIGHT/1], [LEFT/2], [ORCH/3-10], and

[RHYTHM] buttons. The music data that you record

is stored on a 3.5" floppy disk loaded into the

Clavinova’s disk drive unit. Up to approximately 60

songs can be recorded on a single disk, depending

on the amount of data contained in each song. Be-

fore you can record, however, you must “format” a

new disk, as described on page 48.

ZInsert a Formatted Disk..........................................................................................................................

If you haven’t already done so, make sure that a properly formatted disk is loaded

into the Clavinova disk drive (see page 48), and that the disk’s write protect tab is set

to the “write” position (tab closed).

NOTES

• If you insert an unformatted disk, “UNFORMATTED DISK!” will appear on the display.

Please format the disk before proceeding.

• DOC disks, Disklavier PianoSoft disks, and disks formatted by the Disklavier cannot

be formatted.

• If a disk is already loaded and the [SONG SELECT] indicator is out, press the [SONG

SELECT] button so that the indicator lights before proceeding.

Easy One-pass Recording & Playback

Select a SONG NUMBER between 1 and 60 for the piece you are about to record

(up to 60 different songs, each with a different song number, can be recorded on a

single disk). Make sure the song number you select has not already been used for a

song previously recorded on the disk you are using.

NOTES

• If the [RIGHT/1], [LEFT/2], [ORCH/3-10], or [RHYTHM] button indicator glows green

when a song number is selected, the corresponding track of the selected song al-

ready contains recorded data. Before recording over a song that contains previous

data, we recommend that you delete the entire song as described in “Song Delete”

on page 47.

XSelect a Song Number ...........................................................................................................................

CSelect a Voice .........................................................................................................................................

Use the VOICE selectors to select the voice you want to record with. You can try

out the selected voice on the keyboard before proceeding.

VEngage the Record Ready Mode...........................................................................................................

Press the [REC] button so that its indicator lights. The [RIGHT/1] indicator

should also glow red at this point, indicating that you are ready to record on track 1.

The number of the current record track and the status of tracks 1 through 16 will ap-

pear on the display (if a track number appears that track has been recorded and

contains data).

● Remaining Disk Space Display

When you press the [REC] button the amount of disk space available for recording

will appear on the display (in approximate kilobytes). With an empty disk you

should have about 707 kilobytes of space for recording (room enough for about

57,000 notes if no other Clavinova functions are used). If no space is available for

recording, “DISK FULL!” will appear on the display.

SONG/PHRASE

NUMBER

REC

[001] Piano 1

œ= 78 SONG 1 ƒ 1

Performance Memory

BEAT

MAX

MIN

MASTER VOLUME



DEMO LEFT PEDAL

UTILITY REVERB

PROGRAM

CUSTOM

RHYTHM

TEMPO

TAP

METRONOME

–

/ NO

+ / YES

MEMORY

REGIST-

RATION

RHYTHM BASS 1 CHORD 2

AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT

MAX

MIN

STYLE

POP 16BEAT

DANCE

POP

BOOGIE

SLOW

ROCK

SWING

JAZZ

BALLAD

BOSSA RHUMBA

MARCH

STYLE

COUNTRY

WALTZ

STYLE

13-50

DISK

STYLE

START/STOP

INTRO/

ENDING

SYNCHRO

START

SOLO

STYLEPLAY

NORMAL

FILL TO

NORMAL

VARIATION

FILL TO

VARIATI ON

FULL

KEYBOARD

A B C

SINGLE/

FINGERED

A B C

VOICE

PIANO

CLAVINOVA

TONE

E. PIANO

HARPSI-

CHORD

VIBES GUITAR STRINGS ORGAN CHOIR

UPRIGHT

BASS

ELEC

BASS

DRUMS

VOICE

13-60

SPLIT

VOICE

SONG/PHRASE

NUMBER

START/STOP

REW

REC

CHORD

SEQUENCE

PHRASE

REPEAT

GUIDE

LAMP

CANCEL

SONG SELECT

3-10

DISK ORCHESTRA

PAUSE

RIGHT

LEFT

ORCH

RHYTHM

SONG/PHRASE

NUMBER

START/STOP

REC

CHORD

SEQUENCE

PHRASE

REPEAT

GUIDE

LAMP

CANCEL

SONG SELECT

3-10

DISK ORCHESTRA

PAUSE

RIGHT

LEFT

ORCH

RHYTHM

REW

NOTES

• The Performance Memory playback data is not transmit-

ted via the MIDI OUT connector.

[001] REC TRACK 1 680

œ= 78 ‘‘‘‘‘‘‘‘‘‘‘

Current record track

Remaining Disk Space

Track status

Performance Memory

BStart Recording.......................................................................................................................................

Multi-track Recording & Playback

ZInsert a Formatted Disk..........................................................................................................................

If you haven’t already done so, make sure that a properly formatted disk is

loaded into the Clavinova disk drive (see page 48), and that the disk’s write protect

tab is set to the “write” position (tab closed).

XSelect a Song Number ...........................................................................................................................

Select a SONG NUMBER between 1 and 60 for the piece you are about to

record (up to 60 different songs, each with a different song number, can be re-

corded on a single disk). Make sure the song number you select has not already

been used for a song previously recorded on the disk you are using.

CSet All Performance Features As Required .........................................................................................

Set up all necessary performance features as required: voice, voice mode (nor-

mal, dual, or split), style, tempo, etc. Try out the features as you select them to

check that you have the right overall sound.

VEngage the Record Ready Mode...........................................................................................................

Press the [REC] button so that its indicator lights. The [RIGHT/1] indicator

should also glow red at this point, indicating that you are ready to record on track

1. As soon as you release the [REC] button the first dot of the beat indicator will

begin to flash at the currently set tempo.

NOTES

• Be careful not to start recording prematurely by either playing the keyboard or

pressing the [START/STOP] button before you’ve completed the following steps.

SONG/PHRASE

NUMBER

REC

Play on the keyboard. Recording will begin automatically as soon as you start

playing.

NOTES

• You can turn the metronome on before or during recording (the metronome

sound will not be recorded).

• The “

√” symbol will appear during recording.

NStop Recording.......................................................................................................................................

Stop recording by pressing the [START/STOP] button or the [REC] button.

When recording has finished the indicator of the recorded track will glow green,

indicating that the track is ready for playback.

NOTES

• The Clavinova may continue to write data to the disk for a short time after you

stop recording. “WRITING” will appear on the display while this occurs. DO NOT

eject the disk while this display is showing.

• You can enter a name for the recorded song, as described on page 51.

MPlay Back the Recording .......................................................................................................................

Press the [START/STOP] button to play back your recording. Play along on the

keyboard if you like. During playback you can use the [PAUSE], [REW], and [FF]

buttons, as described on page 34. You can also change the playback tempo via the

TEMPO [▲] and [▼] buttons.

<Stop Playback .........................................................................................................................................

Playback will stop automatically when the end of the recording is reached, or

you can press the [START/STOP] button to stop it at anytime.

START/STOP

REC

START/STOP

NOTES

• If a disk is already loaded and the [SONG SELECT] indicator is out, press the

[SONG SELECT] button so that the indicator lights before proceeding.

RIGHT

SINGLE/

FINGERED

A B C

3-10

ORCH

FULL

KEYBOARD

A B C

Performance Memory

BSelect the Track(s) to Record................................................................................................................

Only one track can be recorded at a time. If you press [RIGHT/1] you will

record on track number 1. If you press [LEFT/2] you will record on track number

2. If you press [ORCH/3-10], you can choose to record on track 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9,

or 10 by selecting the desired track number using the SONG/PHRASE NUMBER

[▲] and [▼] buttons while holding the [ORCH/3-10] button (the selected track

number will appear on the display). When a record track has been selected the cor-

responding indicator will light.

● Recording with Rhythm

To record a rhythm in addition to the part you play on the keyboard, select the

desired style via the STYLE selectors and press the [RHYTHM] button so that

its indicator glows red. “+R” and the style name will appear on the display. The

rhythm data will be recorded on track 15.

If you only want to record the rhythm track, de-select all other selected tracks

by pressing their buttons so that their indicators go out.

If you select the rhythm track for recording, or the rhythm track already con-

tains data, the metronome will sound at the current tempo.

● Recording with ABC

When recording with ABC auto-accompaniment the keyboard part can only be

recorded to track 1 or 2. To record with ABC press the [RIGHT/1] or [LEFT/2]

button and then engage an ABC mode. The [ORCH/3-10] and [RHYTHM]

indicators will light automatically in addition to the [RIGHT/1] or [LEFT/2]

indicator, and the ABC sound will be recorded on tracks 3 through 10 while

what you play on the keyboard will be recorded on track 1 or 2.

If you only want to record the ABC sound, de-select track 1 or 2 by pressing the

appropriate button so that the indicator goes out. In the same way, de-select the

[RHYTHM] track if you don’t want to record the rhythm sound.

● Recording with Solo Styleplay

If you also select solo styleplay, the solo styleplay sound will be recorded on

tracks 11 through 14. Solo Styleplay can be recorded at the same time as SIN-

GLE/FINGERED ABC, but not at the same time as FULL KEYBOARD

mode ABC.

NStart Recording.......................................................................................................................................

The synchronized start mode is automatically selected when the record ready

mode is engaged, so recording will begin automatically as soon as any key on the

keyboard is pressed or the [START/STOP] button is pressed (see page 18 for the

various synchro start modes). The current measure number is shown on the display

as you record.

Parameters recorded for Each Track

• Voice*

• Dual Voice*

• Split Voice*

• Volume* (Initial MIDI

value = 127. Not

changeable during

recording)

• Expression (Not re-

corded as an initial

setting)

• Pan*

• Damper Pedal*

• Soft Pedal*

• Sostenuto Pedal (Not

recorded as an initial

setting)

• Modulation*

• Pitch Bend*

• Reverb Depth*

• Dual Balance*

• Split Balance*

• Chorus*

• Pitch Bend Range

Parameters Recorded for the Entire Song

• Style

• Rhythm Volume*

• Reverb Type*

• Reverb Depth*

• Tempo*

• Intro Mode (Not change-

able during recording)

• Ending Mode (Not recorded

as an initial setting)

• Fill-in

• ABC Mode (Not change-

able during recording)

• ABC Volume*

• Solo Styleplay Mode (Not

changeable during record-

ing)

• Solo Styleplay Variation

(Not changeable during

recording)

Parameters Recorded for Each

Track via MIDI Only

• Coarse Tune (Not recorded as an initial

setting)

• Fine Tune (Not recorded as an initial

setting)

The following parameters will be recorded in addition to notes you play:

SOLO

STYLEPLAY

SONG/PHRASE

NUMBER

3-10

RIGHT

LEFT

ORCH

RHYTHM

[001] REC TRACK 3 680

œ= 78 ‘‘‘‘‘‘‘‘‘‘‘

[001] REC TRACK 3+R 680

œ= 78 Pop 1

[001] REC ABC+R 680

œ= 78 Pop 1

MStop Recording.......................................................................................................................................

Press the [REC] button a second time, or the [START/STOP] button to stop

recording.

START/STOP

REC

Performance Memory

■Adding New Tracks

When you’ve finished recording the first track, you can simply play it back as described in the previous section or

add a new track to your song. To record a new track:

ZSelect a Voice .........................................................................................................................................

Select a voice and other parameters for the new track. Try out the voice and selected

parameters before proceeding.

XEngage the Record Ready Mode...........................................................................................................

Press the [REC] button to engage the record ready mode.

● Monitoring Previously Recorded Tracks

All previously recorded tracks are automatically selected for playback when the

record mode is engaged. You can turn these tracks on or off as required by pressing

the corresponding track button(s) before pressing the [REC] button.

CSelect a Track .........................................................................................................................................

Select a track other than the one you used to record the previous track. The indicator

of the track selected for recording should glow red.

NOTES

• Remember that if you record on a track that has already been recorded, the previous

material will be erased and the new material will be recorded in its place.

BStop Recording.......................................................................................................................................

Press the [START/STOP] button or the [REC] button to stop recording.

● Changing the Initial Parameter Values

The initial values of parameters marked with asterisks (*) in the lists given in step N

on page 37 can be changed for each track or the entire song by engaging the record

mode for the desired track, changing the parameters as required, and then disengag-

ing the record mode (press the [REC] button again) without actually recording. To

cancel any initial parameter values you’ve made, select a different track and then

press the [REC] button to disengage the record mode.

To change individual ABC part volume settings engage any ABC mode after turning

[REC] on, set the RHYTHM, CHORD 1, CHORD 2, and/or BASS volume control

as required, then disengage the record mode.

The BASS volume control can be used while holding the [UTILITY] button to inde-

pendently adjust the volume of each track (except the rhythm track). The volume of

the rhythm track is adjusted via the RHYTHM volume control. Please note that vol-

ume settings can only be decreased.

Individual track reverb depth can be adjusted by using the BASS volume while hold-

ing the [REVERB] button, and the overall reverb depth can be adjusted by using the

TEMPO [▲] and [▼] buttons while holding the [REVERB] button.

Also note that the tempo, reverb type, style, style variation, fill-in, and intro/ending

settings are common to all tracks and cannot be set independently for different

tracks.

NOTES

• Only initial parameter data created by the CVP-89 can be changed. Data converted by

the Convert to SMF functiion (page 53) cannot be changed. If the data cannot be

changed, “DATA NOT EDITABLE!” will appear on the display.

• Only the individual track volume can be changed for data converted by the Convert to

DOC function (page 52).

● Erasing the Tracks

Individual tracks — except the rhythm track — can be completely erased by starting

and stopping recording without actually playing or changing any parameters (i.e.

press the [START/STOP] button twice). The same procedure can be used to erase

the rhythm track if the RHYTHM volume control is set to its minimum position.

NOTES

• Tracks 3-10 can be erased by engaging the record mode, turning ABC on, and then

pressing the [START/STOP] button twice.

VStart Recording.......................................................................................................................................

Play on the keyboard or press the [START/STOP] button to start recording.

UTILITY

BASS

REC

[001] REC TRACK 3 660

œ= 78 12‘‘‘‘‘‘‘‘‘

Volume of each track

Performance Memory

● Recording Without a Disk

The Clavinova has enough internal RAM memory to allow recording for a while

even if a disk is not loaded (up to approximately 2,200 notes — 28 kilobytes — if

no other data is recorded). If you accidentally record without loading a disk, make

sure you use the COPY function (described on page 46) to copy the recorded data

to disk if you want to keep the recorded data (the internal RAM memory is not

backed up). This is necessary because the internal RAM memory is cleared auto-

matically when a Disk Orchestra Collection, Disklavier PianoSoft, or Style Disk is

loaded, or a performance disk is loaded and the [SONG SELECT] button is

pressed.

● Recording Using General MIDI Voice Assignments

It is also possible to use the General MIDI voice assignments when recording with

the Performance Memory. See “The Multi-Timbre Mode” on page 57 for details.

NStop Recording.......................................................................................................................................

Press the [START/STOP] button or the [REC] button to stop recording at the point

at which you want to “punch out”.

3-10

RIGHT

LEFT

ORCH

RHYTHM

START/STOP

REC

BStart Playback & Recording ..................................................................................................................

Press the [START/STOP] button to start playback from the current pause location,

then begin playing at the point you want to record from. Recording will begin as soon

as you begin playing on the keyboard.

START/STOP

VSelect a Track .........................................................................................................................................

If you want to record on a different track than the one that is currently selected for

recording (red indicator), use the normal track selection procedure.

3-10

RIGHT

LEFT

ORCH

RHYTHM

● Erasing All Material From the Punch-in Point

If at step B, above, you press the [START/STOP] button while holding the track

button corresponding to the track on which you want to record, recording will

begin immediately. If you then stop recording without actually playing anything, all

recorded material from the punch-in point to the end of the track will be erased.

NOTES

• Punch-in recording cannot be used with ABC, SOLO STYLEPLAY, or RHYTHM

tracks.

ZPlay the Song..........................................................................................................................................

Play back the song in order to locate the point you want to punch-in from. You can

also use the [FF] and [REW] buttons to locate the punch-in point.

XPause Before the Punch-in Point..........................................................................................................

Press the [PAUSE] button to pause playback a bit before the point at which you

want to start recording. Leave a measure or more before the punch-in point so you’ll

be able to grasp the timing for the punch in.

START/STOP

PAUSE

■Punch-in Recording

“Punch-in recording” allows you to start recording from any “punch-in” point within a previously-recorded track and

stop recording at any “punch -out” point, leaving all recorded material up to the punch-in point and following the punch-

out point intact.

CEngage the Record Ready Mode...........................................................................................................

Press the [REC] button to engage the record ready mode. The last track selected for

recording will automatically be reselected.

REC

Performance Memory

Original Performance Memory recordings can be played back and controlled in

the same way as described in the Disk Orchestra section, beginning on page 30.

You can individually select tracks to play back (page 31), use the guide function

and keyboard guide lamps with the data recorded on tracks 1 and 2 (page 32), and

use the A-B repeat function (page 33).

NOTES

• The playback voice cannot be changed when playing back Performance Memory

data (the voice played via the keyboard can be changed).

■Playback

● Volume Control

The RHYTHM, CHORD 1, CHORD 2, and BASS volume controls can be

used to adjust the volume of the corresponding accompaniment parts when

playing back data that was recorded with ABC.

When playing back data that was recorded without ABC, however, these

volume controls have the following track assignments.

RHYTHM ........ RHYTHM track

BASS ............. 3 track

CHORD 1 ....... 4 - 10 tracks

CHORD 2 ....... 1 & 2 tracks

ZMake the Required MIDI Connections

Connect the MIDI OUT terminal of the trans-

mitting device to the Clavinova’s MIDI IN terminal

using a standard MIDI cable.

XSelect the External Clock Mode

To select the external clock mode press the

[ORGAN] VOICE button while holding the

[UTILITY] button. When selected, the [ORGAN]

indicator will light while the [UTILITY] button is

pressed. In this mode the Clavinova is controlled by

an external MIDI clock signal.

CSelect a Song Number

Select the song number to which you want to

record the data by using the SONG/PHRASE

NUMBER [▲] and [▼] buttons (of course, a prop-

erly formatted floppy disk must already be loaded in

the disk drive).

VEngage the MIDI Record Ready Mode

Press the [REC] button while holding the

[UTILITY] button to engage the MIDI record ready

mode. In this mode all tracks (1 through 15) can be

recorded at the same time via the correspondingly

numbered MIDI channels. That is, MIDI data re-

ceived on channel 1 will be recorded on track 1, data

received via channel 2 will be recorded on track 2,

etc.

Data from an external MIDI device such as a sequencer or music computer can also be recorded to the Performance

Memory as follows:

● Multi-timbre Recording via MIDI

[001] REC TRACK ALL 680

œ= 78 Pop 1

BMatch the Time Signature & Tempo

Select a style having a time signature that

matches that of the data you are going to record (e.g.

4/4, 3/4), and match the Clavinova tempo setting to

that of the data to be recorded.

NRecord the MIDI Data

Play back the MIDI data on the sequencer,

music computer, or other device. Recording will start

and stop automatically.

NOTES

• Please note that the Clavinova’s internal styles cannot be played

during multi-timbre recording.

• Any notes played on the keyboard and other setting changes will

be recorded on track 1 during multi-timbre recording.

• Initial panel settings will not be recorded unless the settings are

changed in the record ready mode.

• Previous data on all tracks will be erased when new data is

recorded in the multi-timbre mode.

• If multi-timbre recording is carried out while the GM Multi-Timbre

mode is turned on (page 57), or a “GM on” message is received

during recording, GM voice recording is possible on tracks 1

through 14.

• Be sure to turn the multi-timbre and external clock modes off

when you’re finished multi-timbre recording (see pages 57 and

58).

Performance Memory

The Chord Sequence Function

ZEngage the Chord Sequence Function ................................................................................................

Press the [CHORD SEQUENCE] button. The [ORCH/3-10] and [RHYTHM]

track button indicators will glow red, and the ABC SINGLE/FINGERED mode

will be automatically selected.

NOTES

• The chord sequence data will replace any previous ABC data.

The CHORD SEQUENCE function provides a convenient way to enter chord sequences and style changes one at a time.

XEnter the Chords and/or Style Changes...............................................................................................

Make the required style changes (style number, normal/variation, fill-in, intro/

ending, and tempo, as necessary), play and hold a chord on the left-hand section of

the keyboard, and press the [q] key (look for the “q” symbol above the B6 key) or

the [w] key (C7) to enter the chord for a quarter note or whole note, respectively.

You can move one beat backward by pressing the [?] key (A6).

Continue entering chords in this manner until your sequence is complete.

NOTES

• The number of the measure to be entered is shown on the display, while the beat

to be entered is shown on the BEAT display.

• If no chords are entered, the result will be a rhythm-only sequence.

CHORD

SEQUENCE

BEAT

CStop Recording.......................................................................................................................................

When all the required chords and style changes have been entered, press the

[CHORD SEQUENCE] button to stop recording.

NOTES

• The chord sequence data now resides in Performance Memory tracks 3 though

10 and 15, and can be played back in the normal way. Add melody tracks 1 and 2

as required. You can also record over individual tracks of the sequence and

replace them with original material if you like by using the standard Performance

Memory track selection and record procedure.

● Punch-in Chord Sequence Recording

You can begin chord sequence recording from any point within a previously-

recorded song by pausing playback at the point you want to begin chord se-

quence recording, engaging the Chord Sequence function at that point, and en-

tering the chords up to the end of the sequence as described above.

NOTES

• If you attempt punch-in chord sequence recording on a song in which no chord

sequence data has been entered, “DATA NOT EDITABLE!” will appear on the

display and the recording will not be possible.

• If you record chord sequences to all songs on a disk, the maximum number of

songs available on that disk will be 55.

CHORD

SEQUENCE

[001] CHORD SEQUENCE

œ= 78 Pop 1

[002] CHORD SEQUENCE

œ= 78 Dbm

The 44 “utility functions” described in this chapter

include effect, disk, MIDI, and general functions that

significantly enhance the versatility and flexibility of

the CVP-89.

Utility Functions

■Selecting & Using the Utility Functions

BEAT

MAX

MIN

MASTER VOLUME



DEMO LEFT PEDAL

UTILITY REVERB

PROGRAM

CUSTOM

RHYTHM

TEMPO

TAP

METRONOME

–

/ NO

+ / YES

MEMORY

REGIST-

RATION

RHYTHM BASS 1 CHORD 2

AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT

MAX

MIN

STYLE

POP 16BEAT

DANCE

POP

BOOGIE

SLOW

ROCK

SWING

JAZZ

BALLAD

BOSSA RHUMBA

MARCH

STYLE

COUNTRY

WALTZ

STYLE

13-50

DISK

STYLE

START/STOP

INTRO/

ENDING

SYNCHRO

START

SOLO

STYLEPLAY

NORMAL

FILL TO

NORMAL

VARIATION

FILL TO

VARIATION

FULL

KEYBOARD

A B C

SINGLE/

FINGERED

A B C

VOICE

PIANO

CLAVINOVA

TONE

E. PIANO

HARPSI-

CHORD

VIBES GUITAR STRINGS ORGAN CHOIR

UPRIGHT

BASS

ELEC

BASS

DRUMS

VOICE

13-60

SPLIT

VOICE

SONG/PHRASE

NUMBER

START/STOP

REW

REC

CHORD

SEQUENCE

PHRASE

REPEAT

GUIDE

LAMP

CANCEL

SONG SELECT

3-10

DISK ORCHESTRA

PAUSE

RIGHT

LEFT

ORCH

RHYTHM

UTILITY

Most of the CVP-89 utility functions are selected and set in the same way for consistent, easy operation. The general

selection and setting procedure is as follows:

ZSelect a Utility Function.........................................................................................................................

While holding the [UTILITY] button use the [TAP] and/or [METRONOME]

buttons to select the desired utility function display. It is also possible to step

through the utility functions by repeatedly pressing the [UTILITY] button (the

utility display will remain for about one second after the [UTILITY] button is

released).

The [UTILITY] button must be held until after you’ve set the function, below.

NOTES

• You can cancel the selected function at this point and exit from the utility mode

simply be releasing the [UTILITY] button.

• The last utility function selected is automatically re-selected when the [UTILITY]

button is pressed (“01: Transpose” is always the first utility function selected after

the power has been turned on).

• When some functions are selected “NO/YES” will flash on the display. In such

cases press the TEMPO [

] (YES) button to actually engage the selected func-

tion or the TEMPO [

] (NO) button to cancel. You can release the [UTILITY]

button once you’ve pressed the TEMPO [

] button.

XSet as Required ......................................................................................................................................

Use the TEMPO [s] and [t] buttons while still holding the [UTILITY] but-

ton to select the required setting, or follow the procedure given below for the se-

lected function.

• You can jump directly to the first utility func-

tion in each group by pressing the corre-

sponding STYLE selector while holding the

[UTILITY] button:

[POP] m 02: Chorus ON/OFF

[16BEAT] m 05: Save Registration

[DANCE POP]

m 15: Quantize Song Data

[BOOGIE] m 21: Send Channel Select

[SLOW ROCK]

m 32:

Individual Key Tuning

⁄¤‹›‚02 CHORUS

Piano OFF

01 Transpose

02 Chorus ON/OFF

03 Soundboard Depth

04 Mic Reverb Depth

05 Save Registration

06 Load Registration

07 Save Individual Key Tuning

08 Load Individual Key Tuning

09 Save Custom Rhythm

10 Load Custom Rhythm

11 Song Copy

12 Song Delete

13 Disk Format

Standard MIDI File Playback Mode

15 Quantize Song Data

16 Track Mix

17 Volume Control

18 Song Name

19 Convert to DOC

20 Convert to SMF

21 Send Channel Select

22 Receive Channel Select

23 Local Control ON/OFF

Program Change ON/CANCEL

25 Control Change ON/CANCEL

26 The Multi-Timbre Mode

27 The Split Send Mode

28 MIDI Clock Select

29 Panel Data Send

30 MIDI Transpose Transmit

31 GM Drum Kit

32 Individual Key Tuning

33 Touch Sensitivity

Accompaniment Volume Mode

35 Style Tempo Switching

36 Auto Synchro Start Switching

37 Random All Song Repeat

38 Damper Pedal Mode

39 Pitch Bend Range

40 Edit Drum Instrument

41 Split Left Octave

42 Registration Tempo

43 ABC Auto Mute

44 Minor Harmonization

TEMPO

TAP

METRONOME

–

– / NO

+ / YES

UTILITY

TEMPO

TAP

METRONOME

–

– / NO

+ / YES

UTILITY

CExit ...........................................................................................................................................................

Release the [UTILITY] button to exit from the utility mode when you’ve fin-

ished making the required settings.

If you’ve used a function which is engaged by pressing the TEMPO [s]

button in response to the “NO/YES” prompt on the display (i.e. the [UTILITY]

button has already been released), press the [UTILITY] button again to exit from

the utility mode.

UTILITY

The Utility Mode Functions

Effect Functions

■

01: Transpose

The Transpose function makes it possible to shift the pitch of the entire keyboard

up or down in semitone intervals up to a maximum of six semitones. “Transposing” the

pitch of the Clavinova keyboard makes it easier to play in difficult key signatures, and

you can simply match the pitch of the keyboard to the range of a singer or other instru-

mentalist.

Once the Transpose function has been selected, use the TEMPO [s] and [t] but-

tons to select the desired degree of transposition, then release the [UTILITY] button.

The amount of transposition selected is shown on the display as shown to the left.

NOTES

• Press the TEMPO [

] and [

] buttons simultaneously while holding the [UTILITY]

button (while the Transpose function is selected) to restore normal keyboard pitch.

• Transpose is always set to Normal when the power is turned on.

• The transpose function does not affect the drums sound.

• Notes below and above the original 88-key range of the Clavinova sound one octave

higher and lower, respectively.

⁄¤‹›‚01 TRANSPOSE

Display Transposition

-6 -6 semitones

-5 -5 semitones

-4 -4 semitones

-3 -3 semitones

-2 -2 semitones

-1 -1 semitone

0 Normal

+1 +1 semitone

+2 +2 semitones

+3 +3 semitones

+4 +4 semitones

+5 +5 semitones

+6 +6 semitones

■02: Chorus ON/OFF

A preset chorus effect is provided with each of the CVP-89 voices (this may be ON

or OFF, depending on the voice). This function allows the chorus effect to be turned

ON or OFF for the currently selected voice.

Once the Chorus ON/OFF function has been selected, use the TEMPO [s] and

[t] buttons to turn the chorus effect ON or OFF, then release the [UTILITY] button.

NOTES

• The chorus ON/OFF setting is retained in memory for approximately one week even

when the power is turned off.

• See page vii for a list of the chorus settings for each voice.

• In the Dual mode the setting of the voice shown to the left of the display takes priority,

while in the Split mode the right-hand voice setting takes priority.

⁄¤‹›‚02 CHORUS

Piano OFF

Utility Functions

■ 04: Mic Reverb Depth

This function sets the amount of reverb effect applied to the signal from a micro-

phone plugged into the CVP-89 MIC. jack (page 65).

Once the Mic Reverb function has been selected, use the TEMPO [s] and [t]

buttons to set the depth of the reverb effect, then release the [UTILITY] button. The

microphone reverb depth can be set from “0” (no reverb) to “15” (maximum reverb).

The default setting is “8”.

⁄¤‹›‚04 MIC REVERB DEPTH

■ 03: Soundboard Depth

The CVP-89 PIANO voice ( voice number 1) features a “Soundboard” effect which

can be enhanced via the damper pedal. Extra soundboard and string resonance is added

when the damper pedal is pressed. This function sets the maximum depth of the

Soundboard effect.

Once the Soundboard Depth function has been selected, use the TEMPO [s] and

[t] buttons to set the depth of the effect as required, then release the [UTILITY] but-

ton. The Soundboard Depth can be set from “0” (no effect) to “15” (maximum effect

depth). The default setting is “8”.

NOTES

• The Soundboard Depth setting is retained in memory for approximately one week

even when the power is turned off.

⁄¤‹›‚03 SOUNDBOARD DEPTH

Utility Functions

Disk Functions

This group of utility functions covers a range of disk-related jobs: formatting new disks, copying songs, deleting songs,

saving and loading various types of data, and more.

NOTES

• Disk-related functions (05 through 20) can only be accessed when a disk is present in

the Clavinova disk drive.

■ 05: Save Registration

This function saves the contents of all 12 registration memory locations (page 29) to disk. The data can then be reloaded

at any time by using the Load Registration function, described next.

ZInsert a Disk & Select the Save Registration Function .......................................................................

Insert a properly formatted disk into the Clavinova disk drive, then select the

Save Registration function — see “Selecting & Using the Utility Functions”, page

42.

■ 06: Load Registration

This function reloads the panel settings saved to disk by the Save Registration function, described above.

ZInsert a Disk & Select the Load Registration Function.......................................................................

Insert the disk containing the registration memory data you want to load into the

Clavinova disk drive, then select the Load Registration function — see “Selecting

& Using the Utility Functions”, page 42.

XSelect a Song Number & Execute the Function ..................................................................................

Registration memory data can be saved to a blank song number or one that al-

ready contains performance memory data.

Use the TEMPO [s] and [t] buttons to select the song number to which you want

to save the registration memory data, then press the [START/STOP] button to

actually begin saving the data. Simply release the [UTILITY] button before

pressing the [START/STOP] button if you want to cancel the function.

The contents of all 12 registration memory locations is saved to one song file on

the disk. The Save Registration function will automatically be exited when the data

has been saved.

XSelect a Song Number and Execute the Function...............................................................................

Use the TEMPO [s] and [t] buttons to select the song number from which

you want to load the registration memory data, then press the [START/STOP]

button to actually begin loading the data. “NO DATA!” will appear on the display

if you select a song that contains no data. Simply release the [UTILITY] button

before pressing the [START/STOP] button if you want to cancel the function.

The Load Registration function will automatically be exited when the data has

been loaded.

⁄¤‹›‚05 REGIST −> DISK

SONG 01 PRESS [START]

⁄¤‹›‚06 DISK −> REGIST

SONG 01 PRESS [START]

Utility Functions

■ 07: Save Individual Key Tuning

This function saves the current individual key tuning data set up via the “Individual Key Tuning” function (page 60) to

disk. The data can then be reloaded at any time by using the Load Individual Key Tuning function, described next.

ZInsert a Disk & Select the Save Individual Key Tuning Function.......................................................

Insert a properly formatted disk into the Clavinova disk drive, then select the

Save Individual Key Tuning function — see “Selecting & Using the Utility Func-

tions”, page 42.

⁄¤‹›‚07 IND. KEY −> DISK

SONG 01 PRESS [START]

■ 09: Save Custom Rhythm

This function saves all the 12 current Custom Rhythm data created via the CVP-89’s Custom Rhythm programmer (page

24) to disk. The data can then be reloaded at any time by using the Load Custom Rhythm function, described next.

ZInsert a Disk & Select the Save Custom Rhythm Function ................................................................

Insert a properly formatted disk into the Clavinova disk drive, then select the

Save Custom Rhythm function — see “Selecting & Using the Utility Functions”,

page 42.

XSelect a Song Number & Execute the Function ..................................................................................

Custom rhythm data can be saved to a blank song number or one that already

contains performance memory data.

Use the TEMPO [s] and [t] buttons to select the song number to which you want

to save the custom rhythm data, then press the [START/STOP] button to actually

begin saving the data. Simply release the [UTILITY] button before pressing the

[START/STOP] button if you want to cancel the function.

The custom rhythm data is saved to one song file on the disk. The Save Custom

Rhythm function will automatically be exited when the data has been saved.

⁄¤‹›‚09 C.RHYTHM −> DISK

SONG 01 PRESS [START]

XSelect a Song Number & Execute the Function ..................................................................................

Individual key tuning data can be saved to a blank song number or one that

already contains performance memory data.

Use the TEMPO [s] and [t] buttons to select the song number to which you want

to save the individual key tuning data, then press the [START/STOP] button to

actually begin saving the data. Simply release the [UTILITY] button before press-

ing the [START/STOP] button if you want to cancel the function.

The tuning settings are saved to one song file on the disk. The Save Individual

Key Tuning function will automatically be exited when the data has been saved.

■ 08: Load Individual Key Tuning

This function reloads the individual key tuning data saved to disk by the Save Individual Key Tuning function, described

above.

ZInsert a Disk & Select the Load Individual Key Tuning Function ......................................................

Insert the disk containing the individual key tuning data you want to load into

the Clavinova disk drive, then select the Load Individual Key Tuning function —

see “Selecting & Using the Utility Functions”, page 42.

XSelect a Song Number and Execute the Function...............................................................................

Use the TEMPO [s] and [t] buttons to select the song number from which

you want to load the individual key tuning data, then press the [START/STOP]

button to actually begin loading the data. “NO DATA!” will appear on the display if

you select a song that contains no data. Simply release the [UTILITY] button be-

fore pressing the [START/STOP] button if you want to cancel the function.

The Load Individual Key Tuning function will automatically be exited when the

data has been loaded. The Individual Key Tuning function (UTIL 32) will then be

automatically engaged with the loaded tuning, unless the loaded data is the same as

that currently in the CVP-89.

⁄¤‹›‚08 DISK −> IND. KEY

SONG 01 PRESS [START]

■ 10: Load Custom Rhythm

Utility Functions

This function reloads the custom rhythm data saved to disk by the Save Custom Rhythm function, described above.

ZInsert a Disk & Select the Load Custom Rhythm Function ................................................................

Insert the disk containing the custom rhythm data you want to load into the

Clavinova disk drive, then select the Load Custom Rhythm function — see “Select-

ing & Using the Utility Functions”, page 42.

⁄¤‹›‚10 DISK −> C.RHYTHM

SONG 01 PRESS [START]

XSelect a Song Number and Execute the Function...............................................................................

Use the TEMPO [s] and [t] buttons to select the song number from which

you want to load the custom rhythm data, then press the [START/STOP] button to

actually begin loading the data. “NO DATA!” will appear on the display if you

select a song that contains no data. Simply release the [UTILITY] button before

pressing the [START/STOP] button if you want to cancel the function.

The Load Custom Rhythm function will automatically be exited when the data

has been loaded.

CSelect the Destination Song ..................................................................................................................

While holding the [UTILITY] button use the TEMPO [s] and [t] buttons to

select the song number you wish to copy to (i.e. the destination song number), then

release the [UTILITY] button. If you select a song number that already contains

data, that data will be overwritten by the new song data. If you select a song

number greater than 60 (“DISK 2” will appear on the display), the copy will be

made to a different disk.

⁄¤‹›‚11 SONG COPY

SONG 01−>02 PRESS [START]

Copy to same disk

⁄¤‹›‚11 COPY −> DISK2

SONG 01−>01 PRESS [START]

Copy to different disk

VStart Copying..........................................................................................................................................

Press the [START/STOP] button to begin the actual copy operation.

If you chose to copy to a different disk, you may have to exchange the source

and destination disks a few times if the song being copied is long and complex. In

this case, the Clavinova will prompt you to insert the source and destination disks

with the displays shown to the left.

“END” will appear on the display briefly when the copy operation has been

successfully completed.

• While the data is being copied the number of times the disks will have to be exchanged to com-

plete the copy operation will be shown on the display.

NOTES

• If you copy to a song number that already contains data, “ARE YOU SURE?” will

appear on the display. Use the TEMPO [

] (YES) and [

] (NO) buttons to select

either (YES) or (NO). (YES) if you intend to execute the copy operation or (NO) if

you wish to cancel the operation. The copy operation will begin automatically if

you select (YES).

⁄¤‹›‚11 COPY −> DISK2

0/ 3 INSERT DISK2

⁄¤‹›‚11 COPY −> DISK2

1/ 3 INSERT DISK1

Insert destination disk.

Insert source disk.

■ 11: Song Copy

Performance Memory song data — including any existing registration, individual key tuning, and custom rhythm data

— can be “backed up” by copying to a new song number or a different disk, as follows:

NOTES

• The Song Copy function cannot be executed if the selected song contains only

registration, individual key tuning, and/or custom rhythm data.

Insert the disk containing the song you want to copy, and use the SONG/

PHRASE NUMBER [s] and [t] buttons to select the number of the song you

wish to copy.

ZInsert a Disk & Select the Source Song ...............................................................................................

XSelect the Song Copy Function ............................................................................................................

Select the Song Copy function — see “Selecting & Using the Utility Func-

tions”, page 42. “NO DATA!” will appear on the display if you select a song that

contains no data.

NOTES

• The utility mode can be exited by releasing the [UTILITY] button.

Utility Functions

• The copy operation can be aborted at any time prior to actually starting the

copy operation (i.e. prior to pressing the [START/STOP] button or the

TEMPO [

] button) or during the disk exchange display by pressing the

[UTILITY] button.

● Copying Disk Orchestra Disks ([ORCH/3-10] and [RHYTHM] parts only) .........................................

All Disk Orchestra data except the right-hand and left-hand parts can be copied to a separate disk by

following the standard copy procedure outlined above. The copied data cannot, however, be copied a second

time to another disk.

NOTES

• When a Disk Orchestra disk is copied, any parts using the JAZZ ORGAN 2 voice will

be shifted down one octave.

● Copying the Style Disk Data..................................................................................................................

All Style Disk data can be copied to a separate disk by following the standard copy procedure outlined

above. A single disk can hold up to 50 styles. Style Disk data can only be copied to a newly formatted disk

(i.e. no other data can be previously recorded on the disk) or a disk which already contains copied style data.

NOTES

• Data from the Style Disk cannot be copied to a disk that contains Performance

Memory or Disk Orchestra Collection data. The reverse is also true: Performance

Memory and Disk Orchestra Collection data cannot be copied to a disk that contains

data copied from the Style Disk.

● Copying Data Recorded Without a Disk...............................................................................................

If you’ve used the performance memory to record data without first loading a disk:

insert a formatted disk, select the Song Copy function, then select the destination song

number and copy as described above.

NOTES

• Data cannot be copied from Disklavier disks, or Standard MIDI File disks. Data can-

not be copied to any write protected disk. It is also not possible to copy from one

song number to another within the same Disk Orchestra disk.

⁄¤‹›‚11 SONG COPY

CVP −> 01 PRESS [START]

ZInsert a Disk & Select the Delete Function...........................................................................................

Insert the disk containing the song you want to delete, then select the Delete func-

tion — see “Selecting & Using the Utility Functions”, page 42.

⁄¤‹›‚12 SONG DELETE

SONG 01 PRESS [START]

XSelect the Song to Delete ......................................................................................................................

While holding the [UTILITY] button use the TEMPO [s] and [t] buttons to

select the song number you wish to deletee, then release the [UTILITY] button.

CConfirm & Execute the Delete Operation .............................................................................................

Press the [START/STOP] button — “ARE YOU SURE?” will appear on the dis-

play. Use the TEMPO [s] (YES) and [t] (NO) buttons to select either (YES) or

(NO). (YES) to immediately delete the selected song, or (NO) if you wish to cancel

the operation. If the selected song contains no data the “ARE YOU SURE?” prompt

will not appear and the utility mode will be automatically exited.

“END” will appear on the display briefly when the delete operation has been suc-

cessfully completed.

NOTES

• The delete operation can be aborted at any time prior to actually starting the delete

operation (i.e. prior to pressing the TEMPO [

] button) by pressing the [UTILITY]

button.

• Data recorded to memory without loading a disk can be deleted simply by selecting

the Song Delete function and use the TEMPO [

] (YES) and [

] (NO) buttons to

select either (YES) or (NO).

• Data cannot be deleted from any write protected disk, the supplied Style Disk, Disk

Orchestra Collection disks, or Disklavier disks.

■ 12: Song Delete

You can delete any Performance Memory song data — not including any existing registration, individual key tuning, and

custom rhythm data — from a loaded disk as follows:

■13: Disk Format

Utility Functions

The Clavinova uses only 3.5" 2DD floppy disks. We recommend that you use Yamaha 2DD disks. Before you can use a

new disk for recording, the disk must be “formatted” so that the Clavinova can recognize it and correctly write the music

data onto it.

ZInsert the Disk To Be Formatted ...........................................................................................................

Insert a new blank disk. Make sure that the disk’s write protect tab is set to the

“write” position (tab closed), and insert the new disk into the disk drive unit with the

sliding door facing the drive slot and the label side of the disk facing upward. The disk

should click securely into place, and the disk drive lamp should light briefly.

NOTES

• “UNFORMATTED DISK!” will appear on the display to indicate that a blank

(unformatted) disk or one with a format not recognizable by the CVP-89 is loaded in

the drive. If you press the [UTILITY] button at this point utility function 13: Disk For-

mat will automatically be selected.

• “DISK PROTECTED” will appear if a protected disk that cannot be formatted is

loaded in the drive: a write-protected disk, a Disk Orchestra Collection disk, a

Disklavier disk, or a disk formatted by the Disklavier.

XSelect the Disk Format Function...........................................................................................................

Select the Disk Format function — see “Selecting & Using the Utility Functions”,

page 42.

When the Disk Format function is selected, “PRESS [START]” will appear on the

display. Press the [STOP/START] button to begin the disk format procedure.

CConfirm & Start the Format Operation .................................................................................................

When the [START/STOP] button has been pressed, “ARE YOU SURE?” will ap-

pear on the display. Use the TEMPO [s] (YES) and [t] (NO) buttons to confirm and

continue or cancel the operation. “YES” if you intend to execute the format operation

or “NO” if you wish to cancel the operation. This step is necessary because formatting

completely erases any data that is already on the disk — make sure that the disk you’re

about to format does not contain any important data!

Formatting will begin the instant you select “YES”. The number of each “track” on

the disk will be shown on the display as the format process continues (“F80” through

“END”). When formatting is complete (the display will show “END”), you can go

ahead and record using the performance memory, or use the Song Copy function to

copy songs or Disk Style data to the disk.

NOTES

• The format operation can be aborted at any time prior to actually starting the format

operation (i.e. prior to pressing the TEMPO [

] button) by pressing the [UTILITY] or

[START/STOP] button. In this case, the disk will have to be properly formatted again

before use.

■14: Standard MIDI File Playback Mode (SMF Data Format)

This function determines whether standard MIDI files on floppy disk are played

back using the General MIDI voice assignments or the standard Clavinova voice as-

signments.

Once the Standard MIDI File Playback Mode function has been selected, use the

TEMPO [s] and [t] buttons to select “NORMAL” or “GM”, then release the

[UTILITY] button.

⁄¤‹›‚13 DISK FORMAT

PRESS [START]

⁄¤‹›‚13 DISK FORMAT

ARE YOU SURE?

⁄¤‹›‚14 SMF VOICE MODE

Write protect tab

closed (unlocked —

write enabled)

Utility Functions

NORMAL Standard SMF Mode. Standard Clavinova voice assignments (unless a “GM

ON” message is included in the data). Track 10 not necessarily drums.

GM GM SMF Mode. General MIDI voice assignments. Track 10 is always drums.

NOTES

• The Standard SMF mode is useful when playing back a disk containing Standard

MIDI Files created on an external sequencer using the Clavinova panel voice assign-

ments.

• The GM SMF mode is automatically selected (GM) whenever the POWER switch is

turned on.

■15: Quantize Song Data

This function “quantizes” song memory data that has already been recorded to disk. This means that all notes are aligned

to the nearest specified beat, thereby “tightening up” the overall timing.

ZInsert the Disk and Select a Song.........................................................................................................

Make sure that the disk containing the song you want to quantize is loaded in the

Clavinova disk drive, and that the song to be quantized is selected.

XSelect the Quantize Song Data Function .............................................................................................

⁄¤‹›‚15 QUANTIZE

NO/YES

Select the Quantize Song Data function — see “Selecting & Using the Utility Func-

tions”, page 42. “NO/YES” will flash on the display. Press the TEMPO [s] button

(YES) to engage the Quantize function or the [t] button (NO) to cancel. Once you’ve

pressed the TEMPO [s] button to engage the function you can release the [UTIL-

ITY] button.

CSelect the Quantize Value......................................................................................................................

Use the TEMPO [s] and [t] buttons to select the desired quantize value, as

shown on the display:

OFF: “Free”. No quantization.

32: All notes aligned to the nearest 32nd note.

16: All notes aligned to the nearest 16th note.

8: All notes aligned to the nearest 8th note.

24: All notes aligned to the nearest 16th note triplet.

12: All notes aligned to the nearest 8th note triplet.

6: All notes aligned to the nearest quarter note triplet.

TRACK ––

QUANT. 16 PRESS [START]

VSelect a Track .........................................................................................................................................

Use the [TAP] and [METRONOME] buttons to select the track you want to

quantize.

NOTES

• Up until this point you can exit from the Quantize Song Data function at any time by

pressing the [UTILITY] button.

TRACK 2

QUANT. 16 PRESS [START]

BQuantize the Data ...................................................................................................................................

Press the [START/STOP] button to begin quantization. During quantization the

number of the measure being quantized will appear in the lower right corner of the

display. The Quantize Song Data function will automatically be exited when the data

has been quantized.

NOTES

• Once quantized, song data cannot be returned to its original “free” form. It is there-

fore a good idea to make a backup copy of the data before using this function.

• Only song data created by the CVP-89, CVP-87A, CVP-85A or CVP-83S can be

quantized. Data converted by the Convert to DOC function (page 52) or Convert to

SMF function (page 53) cannot be quantized.

• Only note and voice data is quantized.

■16: Track Mix

Utility Functions

Extra Performance Memory track space can be created by using this function to mix the data from two tracks to a single

track. The data from the “source” and “destination” tracks is mixed and the result placed in the destination track. You can

also use this function to copy data from one track to another by specifying a blank destination track (i.e. the source track

data is copied to the destination track.

ZInsert the Disk and Select a Song.........................................................................................................

Make sure that the disk containing the song with the tracks you want to mix is

loaded in the Clavinova disk drive, and that the song to be affected is selected.

XSelect the Track Mix Function...............................................................................................................

Select the Track Mix function — see “Selecting & Using the Utility Functions”,

page 42. “NO/YES” will flash on the display. Press the TEMPO [s] button (YES) to

engage the Track Mix function or the [t] button (NO) to cancel. Once you’ve pressed

the TEMPO [s] button to engage the function you can release the [UTILITY] button.

⁄¤‹›‚16 TRACK MIX

NO/YES

CSelect the Source Track.........................................................................................................................

Use the [TAP] and [METRONOME] buttons to select the source track.

⁄¤‹›‚16 TRACK MIX

1+ 1−> 1 PRESS [START]

VSelect the Destination Track .................................................................................................................

Use the TEMPO [s] and [t] buttons to select the destination track.

NOTES

• Up until this point you can exit from the Track Mix function without affecting the data

on disk by pressing the [UTILITY] button.

⁄¤‹›‚16 TRACK MIX

1+ 2−> 2 PRESS [START]

BStart the Mix Operation ..........................................................................................................................

Press the [START/STOP] button to start the actual track mix operation. The

number of the measure being processed will appear in the lower right corner of the

display. The Track Mix function will automatically be exited when the data has been

mixed.

NOTES

• The initial data values of the destination track take priority.

• The initial data values of the source track are copied if the destination track is empty.

• The destination track cannot be returned to its pre-mix condition after the Track Mix

function has been executed. It is therefore a good idea to make a backup copy of the

data before using this function.

• Only song data created by the CVP-89, CVP-87A, CVP-85A or CVP-83S can be

mixed. Data converted by the Convert to DOC function (page 52) or Convert to SMF

function (page 53) cannot be mixed.

■17: Volume Control

ZInsert the Disk and Select a Song.........................................................................................................

Make sure that the disk containing the song you want to set volume levels for is

loaded in the Clavinova disk drive, that the [SONG SELECT] indicator is lit, and that

the song to be affected is selected.

This function allows you to individually adjust the playback volume of each of the Performance Memory tracks.

Utility Functions

■18: Song Name

Use this function to enter original titles (up to 12 characters) for your Performance Memory songs.

ZInsert a Disk ............................................................................................................................................

Insert the disk containing the song for which you want to enter a title.

VMove the Cursor to the Appropriate Character ...................................................................................

XSelect the Song Name Function............................................................................................................

Select the Song Name function — see “Selecting & Using the Utility Functions”,

page 42. “NO/YES” will flash on the display. Press the TEMPO [s] button (YES) to

engage the Song Name function or the [t] button (NO) to cancel. Once you’ve

pressed the TEMPO [s] button to engage the function you can release the [UTIL-

ITY] button.

⁄¤‹›‚18 SONG NAME

NO/YES

CSelect a Song ..........................................................................................................................................

Use the [TAP] and [METRONOME] buttons to select the song for which you

want to enter a name. The existing song name will appear on the display, or “NO

SONG DATA” will appear if the selected song contains no data. “SONG 1”, “SONG

2”, etc. will appear if the song has not already been given a name.

SONG 01 NAME

S–ONG 1

Use the TEMPO [s] and [t] buttons to move the cursor to the character location

at which you want to enter a character.

XSelect the Volume Control Function.....................................................................................................

Select the Volume Control function — see “Selecting & Using the Utility Func-

tions”, page 42. Use the TEMPO [s] and [t] buttons to turn Volume Control ON or

OFF. Once you’ve turned ON to engage the function you can release the [UTILITY]

button.

⁄¤‹›‚17 VOLUME CONTROL

OFF

VSet the Volume........................................................................................................................................

¥ø–~~~~~~~~~~~~~~

2: 78 123456789ABCDEFG

Use the TEMPO [s] and [t] buttons to set the volume of the selected track. The

volume range is from “0” (no sound) to “127” (maximum volume).

To re-record the initial volume value press the [REC] button then, in response to

the “ARE YOU SURE?” prompt, use the TEMPO [s] and [t] buttons to select

“YES” or “NO” as required.

NOTES

• The initially recorded volume value is always “127”.

• Only data originally recorded on the CVP-89 can be re-recorded. Data converted by

the Convert to SMF function (page 53) cannot be re-recorded.

CSelect a Track .........................................................................................................................................

~–~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~

1:127 123456789ABCDEFG

Use the [TAP] and [METRONOME] buttons to select the track for which you

want to change the volume level.

¥ø~~~~~~~~~~~~~~

ARE YOU SURE?

BExit ...........................................................................................................................................................

To exit from this function first press the [UTILITY] button to return to the VOL-

UME CONTROL ON/OFF display, press the TEMPO [s] or [t] button while hold-

ing the [UTILITY] button to turn volume control off.

NOTES

• If the [SONG/PHRASE NUMBER] button is used to select a different song number

while the Volume Control mode is engaged, the Volume Control mode will be auto-

matically turned OFF and the utility mode will be exited.

Utility Functions

BEnter a Character....................................................................................................................................

The following keys on the CVP-89 keyboard enter the corresponding characters

when pressed:

C1 D1 E1 F1 G1 A1 B1 C2 D2 E2 F2 G2 A2 B2 C3 D3 E3 F3 G3 A3 B3 C4 D4 E4 F4 G4 A4 B4 C5 D5 E5 F5 G5 A5 B5 C6

B0A0G0F0E0D0C0B-1A-1 D6 E6 F6 G6 A6 B6 C7

MOQRTVXY023579 "$%')+,.:;=?]\å{|

Space

LJHFECA

Back space

Delete

Insert space

NP UW Z1 468 !# &(* -/ <>[ ^` }S

KIGDB

• Small capital characters can be entered by pressing the corresponding keys while holding the A-1

key.

• If you press the damper pedal while entering a character, the cursor will not move ahead to the next

character. This can make it easier to select a character for a given character location.

Repeat steps V and B until your name is complete.

NRepeat Until Done...................................................................................................................................

MRegister the Name & Exit.......................................................................................................................

Press the [START/STOP] button to register the entered name and exit from the

utility mode. Press [UTILITY] if you want to exit without registering the name.

NOTES

• Names can only be entered for songs recorded on the CVP-89, CVP-87A, CVP-85A,

or CVP-83S.

■19: Convert to DOC

This function can be used to convert the performance memory voice assignments used by the CVP-89 to DOC Voice

Assignments so songs recorded on CVP-89 can be played back on other Clavinovas.

ZInsert a Disk & Select the Convert to DOC Function ..........................................................................

Insert the disk containing the data to be converted into the Clavinova disk drive,

then select the Convert to DOC function — see “Selecting & Using the Utility Func-

tions”, page 42. This function cannot be executed if an appropriate disk is not loaded

— see “Notes” below.

⁄¤‹›‚19 CONVERT TO DOC

SONG 01 PRESS [START]

XSelect a Song Number & Execute the Conversion Function..............................................................

Use the TEMPO [s] and [t] buttons to select the song number you want to con-

vert, then press the [START/STOP] button to actually begin the conversion process.

Simply release the [UTILITY] button before pressing the [START/STOP] button

if you want to cancel the function. You can release the [UTILITY] button once the

conversion has started, and the conversion will continue to completion. The number of

the measure being processed will appear on the display.

The Convert to DOC function will automatically be exited when the conversion is

complete.

NOTES

• The JAZZ ORGAN 2 voice will be shifted up one octave after conversion.

• This function cannot be used to convert the voice data on Disk Orchestra Collection,

Disklavier, Style, Standard MIDI File, write-protected, or already-converted disks.

Also, Performance Memory data recorded using the GM voice assignments cannot

be converted.

• Once converted, the data cannot be returned to its original form. It is therefore a good

idea to make a backup copy of the data before using this function.

• The Quantize (UTIL 15) and Track Mix (UTIL 16) functions cannot be applied to data

converted by the Convert to DOC function.

• Some Clavinova models may not have the required voices or different voices will be

used so the sound may not be exactly the same as the original.

■20: Convert to SMF

This function can be used to convert the performance memory data used by the CVP-89 to Standard MIDI File (SMF)

format so songs recorded on the CVP-89 can be played back on SMF-compatible devices.

ZInsert a Disk & Select the Convert To SMF Function..........................................................................

Insert the disk containing the data to be converted into the Clavinova disk drive,

then select the Convert to SMF function — see “Selecting & Using the Utility Func-

tions”, page 42.

⁄¤‹›‚20 CONVERT TO SMF

SONG 01 PRESS [START]

Utility Functions

XSelect a Song Number & Execute the Conversion Function..............................................................

Use the TEMPO [s] and [t] buttons to select the song number you want to con-

vert, then press the [START/STOP] button to actually begin the conversion process.

Simply release the [UTILITY] button before pressing the [START/STOP] button

if you want to cancel the function. You can release the [UTILITY] button once the

conversion has started, and the conversion will continue to completion. The number of

the measure being processed will appear on the display.

The Convert To SMF function will automatically be exited when the conversion is

complete.

NOTES

• This function cannot be used to convert the voice data on Disk Orchestra Collection,

Disklavier, Style, write-protected, or already-converted disks.

• Once converted, the data cannot be returned to its original form. It is therefore a good

idea to make a backup copy of the data before using this function.

• Further recording cannot be carried out with songs converted by the Convert to SMF

function. Also, the Quantize (UTIL 15) and Track Mix (UTIL 16) functions cannot be

applied to data converted by the Convert to SMF function.

■Disk Error Messages

If an error related to the disk occurs, one of the following messages may appear. If this happens, check the possible

causes and solutions listed below. If all else fails, try a different disk. If this doesn’t clear up the problem, contact your

Yamaha dealer.

DISK ERROR ! An error occurred while writing to or reading from the disk.

Try the operation again; if the error occurs a second time the disk or drive may be faulty.

If the drive has been in use for some time the heads may be dirty. Clean the heads with a

commercially-available floppy disk head cleaner. If the error still occurs with one disk and

not others the disk should be considered faulty and should be discarded. If the error occurs

with all disks the drive may be faulty. Refer the problem to your Yamaha dealer.

DISK PROTECTED ! You have attempted to format, write to, copy to/from, or delete data from a write-

protected disk. Use a disk that is not write protected (set the disk’s write-protect tab to the

write-enable position).

UNFORMATTED DISK ! The loaded disk is not formatted for use with the Clavinova. After making sure that the

disk does not contain any important data (for another device, for example), format the disk

as described on page 48.

DISK FULL ! The currently loaded disk is full and cannot hold any more data.

Either delete unnecessary data or replace the disk with one that has more available disk

space.

NO DISK ! A disk read or write operation was attempted but no disk is present in the disk drive.

Make sure an appropriate disk is inserted in the disk drive before performing any opera-

tion that involves disk access.

INCOMPATIBLE DATA! You have attempted to perform a Convert to DOC or SMF function on data that cannot be

converted.

DATA NOT EDITABLE! You have attempted to record or edit data that is not recognized by the CVP-89. Refer to

the notes on pages 38, 41, 57, and 63.

Utility Functions

MIDI Functions

MIDI, the Musical Instrument Digital Interface, is a world-standard communication interface that allows MIDI-compat-

ible musical instruments and equipment to share musical information and control one another. This makes it possible to

create “systems” of MIDI instruments and equipment that offer far greater versatility and control than is available with iso-

lated instruments.

The Clavinova has 11 MIDI functions that can be accessed via the normal function selection procedure (page 42), or by

pressing the appropriate VOICE selector while holding the [UTILITY] button. The MIDI functions accessed by the

various VOICE selectors are shown in the following chart:

Function Selector

21. Send Channel Select PIANO

22. Receive Channel Select CLAVINOVA TONE

23. Local ON/OFF E. PIANO

24. Program Change ON/CANCEL HARPSICHORD

25. Control Change ON/CANCEL VIBES

26. Multi-Timbre Mode ON/OFF GUITAR

27. Split Send Mode STRINGS

28. MIDI Clock Select ORGAN

29. Panel Data Transmit CHOIR

30. MIDI Transpose Transmit UPRIGHT BASS

31. GM Drum Kit —

NOTES

• Always use a high-quality MIDI cable to connect MIDI

OUT to MIDI IN terminals. Never use MIDI cables

longer than about 15 meters, since cables longer

than this can pick up noise which can cause data

errors.

• When using the Clavinova with other MIDI equip-

ment, always refer to the MIDI specifications (imple-

mentation chart and MIDI data format) of the equip-

ment used to ensure compatibility.

■21: Send Channel Select

In any MIDI control setup, the MIDI channels of the transmitting and receiving equipment must be matched for proper

data transfer (there are 16 MIDI channels). This function sets the MIDI send (transmit) channel of the CVP-89.

ZSelect the Send Channel Function .......................................................................................................

Select the Send Channel function as described in “Selecting & Using the Utility

Functions” (page 42), or press [PIANO] while holding [UTILITY]. The [PIANO]

indicator will light while the [UTILITY] button is pressed.

⁄¤‹›‚21 MIDI SEND CH.

XSet the MIDI Send Channel ....................................................................................................................

Use the TEMPO [s] and [t] buttons to select the desired channel — the selected

channel number is shown on the display.

NOTES

• When the power is initially turned ON, the MIDI send channel is set to 1.

• “1” can be instantly selected by pressing the TEMPO [

] and [

] buttons simultane-

ously.

Utility Functions

■22: Receive Channel Select

In addition to the 16 MIDI channels, an “OMNI” receive mode is also available which allows reception on all 16 MIDI

channels. In the OMNI mode it is not necessary to match the receive channel of the receiving device to the transmit channel

of the transmitting device.

ZSelect the Receive Channel Function...................................................................................................

Select the Receive Channel function as described in “Selecting & Using the Utility

Functions” (page 42), or press [CLAVINOVA TONE] while holding [UTILITY]. The

[CLAVINOVA TONE] indicator will light while the [UTILITY] button is pressed.

⁄¤‹›‚22 MIDI RECEIVE CH.

ALL

XSet the MIDI Receive Channel ...............................................................................................................

Use the TEMPO [s] and [t] buttons to select the desired channel — the selected

channel number is shown on the display, or “ALL” if the OMNI receive mode is se-

lected.

NOTES

• When the power is initially turned ON, MIDI receive is set to the OMNI ON mode and

the basic receive channel is set to 1.

• “ALL” (OMNI) and basic receive channel 1 can be instantly selected by pressing the

TEMPO [

] and [

] buttons simultaneously.

“Local Control” refers to the fact that, normally, the Clavinova keyboard controls

its internal tone generator, allowing the internal voices to be played directly from the

keyboard. This situation is “Local Control ON” since the internal tone generator is

controlled locally by its own keyboard.

Local control can be turned off, however, so that the Clavinova keyboard does not

play the internal voices, but the appropriate MIDI information is still transmitted via

the MIDI OUT connector when notes are played on the keyboard. At the same time,

the internal tone generator responds to MIDI information received via the MIDI IN

connector. This means that while an external MIDI sequencer, for example, plays the

Clavinova’s internal voices, an external tone generator can be played from the

Clavinova keyboard. Local Control is automatically turned ON when the power is

initially turned on.

MIDI Sequencer

MIDI IN

MIDI OUT

Tone Generator

MIDI OUT

MIDI IN

Played from Clavinova

keyboard.

Clavinova

Local control OFF. Played from MIDI Sequencer.

ZSelect the Local Control ON/OFF Function..........................................................................................

Select the Local Control ON/OFF function as described in “Selecting & Using the

Utility Functions” (page 42), or press [E. PIANO] while holding [UTILITY].

⁄¤‹›‚23 LOCAL CONTROL

XTurn Local Control ON or OFF ..............................................................................................................

Use the TEMPO [s] and [t] buttons or the [E. PIANO] button to turn local con-

trol ON or OFF as required.

E. PIANO

= local control OFF.

= local control ON.

■23: Local Control ON/OFF

Utility Functions

■24: Program Change ON/CANCEL

Normally the Clavinova will respond to MIDI control change data received from an external MIDI device or keyboard,

causing the selected Clavinova voice to be affected by pedal and other “control” settings received from the controlling de-

vice. The Clavinova also transmits MIDI control change information when either of its pedals are operated.

This function makes it possible to cancel control change data reception and transmission if you do not want the

Clavinova voices to be affected by control change data received from an external device or vice versa. Control Change is

automatically turned ON when the power is initially turned on.

■25: Control Change ON/CANCEL

ZSelect the Control Change ON/CANCEL Function ..............................................................................

Select the Control Change ON/CANCEL function as described in “Selecting &

Using the Utility Functions” (page 42), or press [VIBES] while holding [UTILITY].

⁄¤‹›‚25 CONTROL CHANGE

XTurn Control Change ON or CANCEL...................................................................................................

Use the TEMPO [s] and [t] buttons or the [VIBES] button to turn local control

reception and transmission ON or OFF as required.

VIBES

= control change reception/

transmission CANCEL.

= control change reception/

transmission ON.

Normally the Clavinova will respond to MIDI program change numbers received from an external keyboard or other

MIDI device, causing the correspondingly numbered Clavinova voice to be selected. The Clavinova will normally also send

a MIDI program change number whenever one of its voices is selected, causing the correspondingly numbered voice or

program to be selected on the external MIDI device if the device is set up to receive and respond to MIDI program change

numbers.

This function makes it possible to cancel program change number reception and transmission so that voices can be se-

lected on the Clavinova without affecting the external MIDI device, and vice versa. Program Change is automatically turned

ON when the power is initially turned on.

ZSelect the Program Change ON/CANCEL Function ............................................................................

Select the Program Change ON/CANCEL function as described in “Selecting &

Using the Utility Functions” (page 42), or press [HARPSICHORD] while holding

[UTILITY].

⁄¤‹›‚24 PROGRAM CHANGE

XTurn Program Change ON or CANCEL.................................................................................................

Use the TEMPO [s] and [t] buttons or the [HARPSICHORD] button to turn

program change reception and transmission ON or OFF as required.

= program change reception/

transmission CANCEL.

= program change reception/

transmission ON.

HARPSI-

CHORD

HARPSI-

CHORD

Utility Functions

■26: The Multi-Timbre Mode

The Multi-Timbre mode is a special mode in which the Clavinova voices can be independently controlled on different

MIDI channel numbers (1—15 in the CVP mode; 1—10,15, 16 in the DOC mode; 1—16 in the GM mode) by an external

MIDI device. The Multi-Timbre mode is off (SINGLE) when the power is initially turned on.

ZSelect the Multi-Timbre Mode Function ...............................................................................................

Select the Multi-Timbre Mode function as described in “Selecting & Using the

Utility Functions” (page 42), or press [GUITAR] while holding [UTILITY].

⁄¤‹›‚26 MULTI-TIMBRE

SINGLE

XSelect a Multi-Timbre Mode ...................................................................................................................

Use the TEMPO [s] and [t] buttons or the [GUITAR] button to select the de-

sired Multi-Timbre mode, described in the chart below.

SINGLE Multi-Timbre mode OFF.

CVP Multi-track MIDI data received by the CVP-89 is played using the panel voice

assignments — i.e. the same voices selected by the panel controls.

DOC Multi-track MIDI data received by the CVP-89 is played using the Yamaha

DOC voice assignments. The panel voice assignments are not changed but

the transmitted data is converted to DOC voice assignments.

GM Multi-track MIDI data received by the CVP-89 is played using General MIDI

voice assignments. Transmitted data is also converted to GM voice assign-

ments. When this mode is selected the panel voices also conform to the GM

assignments (voices 1—128, drum kits 129—136).

NOTES

• See page vii, viii for listings of the voice assignments in each mode.

• The Dual, Split, internal Style, ABC, and Solo Style Play functions will not operate in

the DOC or GM mode.

• Either “DOC MODE” or “GM MODE” will appear on the display when you return to the

play mode.

● Recording with the GM Voices

If you press the Performance Memory [REC] button while the GM mode is en-

gaged, the [REC] indicator and the indicator of the last selected track will light

(red), and that track will be in the record ready mode. The remaining recording

procedure is the same as described on page 35.

NOTES

• If the selected song number already contains data that was not recorded in the GM

mode, “DATA NOT EDITABLE!” will appear on the display and recording will not be

possible. The reverse is also true: i.e. panel-voice data cannot be recorded to a song

that already contains GM-voice data.

• Internal styles cannot be recorded in the GM mode.

• Select a voice number between 129 and 136 to record a drum voice. When the

[RHYTHM] button is pressed voice number 129 will automatically be selected if an-

other drum voice is not already selected. Track number 10 is automatically selected

for recording.

• Only tracks 3 through 9 can be selected using the [ORCH/3-10] and SONG/PHRASE

NUMBER [

] and [

] buttons (track 10 is selected by pressing the [RHYTHM] but-

ton). It is possible, however, to record voices 129 through 136 to tracks 3 through 9.

GUITAR

= Multi-Timbre mode ON.

(CVP, DOC or GM)

= Multi-Timbre mode OFF.

(SINGLE)

Utility Functions

■27: The Split Send Mode

In the split send mode notes played on the left-hand section of the keyboard (to the left of and including the split point

key — see “Changing the Split Point” on page 10) are transmitted on MIDI channel 2, while the upper keyboard section

transmits on the MIDI channel set using the Send Channel Select function described earlier. In this mode the left- and right-

hand sections of the keyboard can be used to play separate external keyboards or tone generators set to receive on the ap-

propriate channels. The Split Send Mode is automatically turned OFF when the power is initially turned on.

ZSelect the Split Send Mode Function ...................................................................................................

Select the Split Send Mode function as described in “Selecting & Using the Utility

Functions” (page 42), or press [STRINGS] while holding [UTILITY].

⁄¤‹›‚27 MIDI SPLIT

OFF

XTurn Split Send ON or OFF....................................................................................................................

Use the TEMPO [s] and [t] buttons or the [STRINGS] button to turn split send

ON or OFF as required.

STRINGS

= Split Send Mode ON.

= Split Send Mode OFF.

■29: Panel Data Send

This function causes all the current Clavinova panel settings (selected voice, etc.) to be transmitted via the MIDI OUT

connector. This is particularly useful if you will be recording performances to a MIDI sequence recorder which will be used

to control the Clavinova on playback. By transmitting the Clavinova panel settings and recording them on the MIDI se-

quence recorder prior to the actual performance data, the Clavinova will be automatically restored to the same settings when

the performance is played back.

ZSelect the Panel Data Send Function ...................................................................................................

Select the Panel Data Send function as described in “Selecting & Using the Utility

Functions” (page 42), or press [CHOIR] while holding [UTILITY] to send the data

immediately (in the latter case the next step is not required).

⁄¤‹›‚29 SEND PANEL DATA

PRESS [START]

XSend the Panel Data ...............................................................................................................................

Press the [START/STOP] button to begin transmission of the panel data.

■28: MIDI Clock Select

This function determines whether the Clavinova’s rhythm and ABC timing is controlled by the Clavinova’s own internal

clock or an external MIDI clock signal received from external equipment connected to the MIDI IN connector. The Clock

Mode is automatically set to INTERNAL when the power is initially turned on.

ZSelect the MIDI Clock Select Function .................................................................................................

Select the MIDI Clock Select function as described in “Selecting & Using the Util-

ity Functions” (page 42), or press [ORGAN] while holding [UTILITY].

⁄¤‹›‚28 MIDI CLOCK

INTERNAL

XSet the MIDI Clock to INTERNAL or MIDI IN.........................................................................................

Use the TEMPO [s] and [t] buttons or the [ORGAN] button to set the MIDI

clock to INTERNAL or MIDI IN as required.

NOTES

• If the Clock Mode is set to MIDI IN and a MIDI clock signal is not being received from

an external source, the rhythm, ABC and other clock-dependent features will not

operate.

= MIDI IN.

= INTERNAL.

ORGAN

Utility Functions

■30: MIDI Transpose Transmit

This function transposes the pitch of transmitted MIDI note data up or down in semitone intervals up to a maximum of

six semitones. The pitch of notes played on the keyboard is not affected.

ZSelect the MIDI Transpose Transmit Function ....................................................................................

Select the MIDI Transpose Transmit function as described in “Selecting & Using

the Utility Functions” (page 42), or press [UPRIGHT BASS] while holding [UTIL-

ITY]. The [UPRIGHT BASS] indicator will light while the [UTILITY] button is

pressed.

⁄¤‹›‚30 MIDI TRANSPOSE

XSet the Transpose Value As Required..................................................................................................

Use the TEMPO [s] and [t] buttons to set the MIDI Transpose Transmit value as

required.

NOTES

• Press the TEMPO [

] and [

] buttons simultaneously while holding the [UTILITY]

button to restore normal transmitted pitch.

• Transpose is always set to Normal when the power is turned on.

Display Transposition

-6 -6 semitones

-5 -5 semitones

-4 -4 semitones

-3 -3 semitones

-2 -2 semitones

-1 -1 semitone

0 Normal

+1 +1 semitone

+2 +2 semitones

+3 +3 semitones

+4 +4 semitones

+5 +5 semitones

+6 +6 semitones

■31: GM Drum Kit

The CVP-89 includes two different GM drum kits that can be selected via this function. There’s also an “AUTO” setting

that allows automatic GM drum kit selection.

NORMAL The default Yamaha-standard GM drum kit. Can be used with most Gen-

eral MIDI software.

TG100 This kit has the same instrument assignments as the Yamaha TG100

tone generator. When a GM drum kit is selected via the panel (129

through 136 in the GM mode), the normal drum kit name will remain on

the display but the TG100 kit will be played via the keyboard.

AUTO This is the default setting. The TG100 kit is automatically selected when

appropriate disk is inserted. The NORMAL kit is selected at other times.

When “AUTO” is selected and a GM drum kit is selected via the panel

(129 through 136 in the GM mode), the normal drum kit will be played

via the keyboard.

⁄¤‹›‚31 GM DRUM KIT

AUTO

Utility Functions

General Utilities

The functions in this group apply to a wide range of functions and features.

■32: Individual Key Tuning

The Individual Key Tuning Feature makes it possible to individually tune each key on the CVP-89 keyboard in order to

match different tuning standards. The pitch of each key can be raised or lowered by a maximum of 50 cents (approximately)

from the standard pitch.

ZSelect the Individual Key Tuning Function ..........................................................................................

Select the Individual Key Tuning function — see “Selecting & Using the Utility

Functions”, page 42. “NO/YES” will flash on the display. Press the TEMPO [s] but-

ton (YES) to engage the Individual Key Tuning function, or the [t] button (NO) to

cancel. Once you’ve pressed the TEMPO [s] button to engage the function you can

release the [UTILITY] button.

XSelect Up or Down Tuning.....................................................................................................................

First, use the [TAP] and [METRONOME] buttons to select either “ON (UP)” if

you want to raise the pitch of a key or “ON (DOWN)” if you want to lower the pitch of

a key.

OFF Individual key tuning OFF.

ON (UP) Raise pitch.

ON (DOWN) Lower pitch.

⁄¤‹›‚32 IND. KEY TUNING

NO/YES

CPress the Key To Be Tuned Once .........................................................................................................

Press the key to be tuned once to display the current tuning value on the display.

“0” indicates normal pitch, positive values indicate that pitch has been increased by the

corresponding number of steps (about 1.2 cents per step), and negative (“-”) values

indicate that pitch has been lowered by the corresponding number of steps.

INDIVIDUAL KEY TUNE

ON(UP) ååå=+ 0

INDIVIDUAL KEY TUNE

ON(UP) C 3=+ 0

BSelect a New Key Or Exit .......................................................................................................................

To tune a different key, repeat steps X through V, above. To exit from the Indi-

vidual Key Tuning function, press the [UTILITY] button.

NOTES

• Individual key tuning is automatically turned OFF whenever the POWER switch is

turned on.

• The Individual Key Tuning data will be erased when the power is turned off, but can

be saved to and loaded from disk by using the “Save Individual Key Tuning” and

“Load Individual Key Tuning” functions (page 45).

VPress the Key To Tune...........................................................................................................................

Subsequent presses on the key selected in the previous step tune the key in the

specified “(UP)” or “(DOWN)” direction — one 1.2-cent step per press. The highest

and lowest possible values are “+44” and “-44”, respectively. The TEMPO [s] and

[t] keys can also be used to tune as required: [s] to tune up and [t] to tune down.

NOTES

• “0” can be instantly selected by pressing the TEMPO [

] and [

] buttons simultane-

ously.

Utility Functions

■33: Touch Sensitivity

The Clavinova can be set to one of three different types of keyboard touch sensitivity to match different playing styles

and preferences.

SOFT Allows maximum loudness to be produced with relatively light key pressure.

MEDIUM Produces a fairly “standard” keyboard response.

HARD Requires the keys to be played quite hard to produce maximum loudness.

NOTES

• The MEDIUM setting is automatically selected whenever the POWER switch is turned

on.

⁄¤‹›‚33 TOUCH SENS

MEDIUM

■34: Accompaniment Volume Mode

Normally the Auto Accompaniment volume controls are used to adjust the volume of the Rhythm, Chord 1, Chord 2, and

Bass accompaniment parts, as labelled on the Clavinova panel. This function can be used to assign these volume controls to

other operations.

1 Rhythm, Chord 1, Chord 2, and Bass volume control.

2 Modulation, Pitch Bend +, Pitch Bend -, and Expression. In this mode the RHYTHM

slider controls modulation depth, the CHORD 1 slider controls upward pitch bend,

the CHORD 2 slider controls downward pitch bend, and the BASS slider controls

expression (overall volume).

3 Reverb depth for the Rhythm, Chord 1, Chord 2, and Bass tracks. This applies when

playing with ABC and when playing back performance memory data that was re-

corded with ABC. When playing back performance memory data that was recorded

without ABC, and when playing back Disk Orchestra Collection data, the CHORD 1,

CHORD 2 and BASS controls correspond to tracks 4-10, 1-2, and 3, respectively.

NOTES

• The Rhythm, Chord 1, Chord 2, and Bass volume setting (1) is automatically selected

whenever the POWER switch is turned on.

• 1 and 2 can be recorded and their initial values can be changed as described on

page 38. 3 applies only to playback.

⁄¤‹›‚34 ACCOMP. VOLUME

■35: Style Tempo Switching

This function determines whether the preset tempo for each style will be automatically selected whenever a style is se-

lected (while style playback is stopped) or whether the currently selected tempo will be maintained regardless of the se-

lected style (refer to page 17).

KEEP TEMPO Style tempo switching OFF — the current tempo is maintained.

SET TEMPO Style tempo switching ON — the preset tempo for each style is auto-

matically selected.

NOTES

• Style tempo switching is automatically set to “SET TEMPO” whenever the POWER

switch is turned on.

⁄¤‹›‚35 STYLE TEMPO

SET TEMPO

■36: Auto Synchro Start Switching

Utility Functions

This function determines whether the “Synchro Start” mode will automatically be turned ON and OFF when an ABC

mode is turned ON and OFF (refer to page 19, 22).

OFF Auto synchro start switching OFF — synchro start is not turned on and off with

ABC.

ON Auto synchro start switching ON — synchro start is automatically turned on and

off with ABC.

NOTES

• When this function is OFF the SYNCHRO START mode will not be retained after

stopping an accompaniment that was started using the SYNCHRO START mode.

• Auto synchro start switching is automatically turned ON whenever the POWER switch

is turned on.

⁄¤‹›‚36 ABC SYNC. START

■37: Random All Song Repeat

This function determines whether the songs are played back and repeated in sequential or random order when “ALL” is

selected when playing back a disk (refer to page 30). This function also affects demo song playback (page 6).

OFF Random all song repeat OFF — the songs are played in sequence.

ON Random all song repeat ON — the songs are played in random order.

NOTES

• Random all song repeat is automatically turned OFF whenever the POWER switch is

turned on.

⁄¤‹›‚37 RANDOM PLAY

OFF

■38: Damper Pedal Mode

Sets the damper pedal for on/off or continuous operation (refer to page 14).

CONTINUOUS Continuous damper pedal operation.

SW On/off damper pedal operation.

NOTES

• Continuous damper pedal operation (CONTINUOUS) is automatically selected when-

ever the POWER switch is turned on.

⁄¤‹›‚38 DAMPER PEDAL

CONTINUOUS

■ 39: Pitch Bend Range

This function allows the maximum pitch bend range to be set from 100 cents to

1200 cents in 100-cent increments for each individual voice (100 cents = 1 semitone).

First select the voice you want to set the pitch bend range for, then select and set the

Pitch Bend Range function.

NOTES

• A complete list of the preset pitch bend ranges for each voice is given on page vii.

• The pitch bend range of the voice shown to the left of the display takes priority in the

DUAL mode. In the Split mode the right-hand voice setting takes priority.

• The pitch bend range settings are retained in memory for approximately one week

even when the power is turned off.

• Unexpected sound may be produced if the pitch of a note is bent beyond the range of

the voice. See page 8 for a list of the usable ranges for each voice.

⁄¤‹›‚39 PITCH BEND RANGE

100Cent

Utility Functions

■40: Edit Drum Instrument

The CVP-89 has two drum kits — NORMAL and PROCESSED — and this function allows either kit to be selected for

each individual drum instrument. Individual reverb depth and pan settings are also possible.

ZSelect the Edit Drum Instrument Function...........................................................................................

Select the Edit Drum Instrument function — see “Selecting & Using the Utility

Functions”, page 42. Then press the TEMPO [s] button if you actually want to

engage the Edit Drum Instrument function. Once the TEMPO [s] button has been

pressed you can release the [UTILITY] button. The DRUMS voice will automati-

cally be selected and the kit (NORMAL or PROCESSED) for the currently selected

style will be recalled.

⁄¤‹›‚40 EDIT DRUM INST.

NO/YES

VEdit the Parameter as Required ............................................................................................................

EDIT DRUM INSTRUMENT

Rim Lite REV DEPTH: 8

EDIT DRUM INSTRUMENT

ALL KIT:PROCESSED

Use the TEMPO [s] and [t] buttons to select the NORMAL or PROCESSED

drum kit if the KIT parameters is selected, set the reverb depth from 0 to 15 if the

REV DEPTH parameter is selected, or set the pan position from LEFT 6 through

CENTER, DEFAULT to RIGHT 6 if the PAN parameter is selected.

NOTES

• If you press the C7 key while the KIT parameter is selected, “ALL” will appear in

place of the instrument name and the NORMAL or PROCESSED kit can be

selected for all instruments. The REV DEPTH and PAN parameters for all instru-

ments return to their default values and cannot be edited when “ALL” is selected.

• Up to 16 individual reverb depth settings, 8 pan settings, and 8 kit settings can be

made — e.g. after setting KIT to “ALL” and selecting “NORMAL” or “PROC-

ESSED”. If you attempt to make more reverb depth, pan, or kit settings the “TOO

MANY!” error message will appear. The reverb depth and pan settings of an

already-edited instrument can be restored to their default values by simultane-

ously pressing the TEMPO [

▲

] and [

▼

] buttons.

Since some instruments are already edited for some accompaniment styles, the

maximum number of editable instruments will be less when those styles are

selected.

• The Edit Drum Instrument function cannot be used in the GM mode — “DATA

NOT EDITABLE!” will appear on the display.

• See page ix for a list of the NORMAL or PROCESSED kit.

BSelect a New Instrument Or Exit ...........................................................................................................

To edit a different instrument, repeat steps X through V, above. To exit from

the Edit Drum Instrument function, press the [UTILITY] button.

XSelect an Instrument ..............................................................................................................................

Press the key on the CVP-89 keyboard corresponding to the drum instrument

you want to edit. The name of the selected instrument and the drum kit currently

selected for that instrument will appear on the display.

⁄¤‹›‚40 EDIT DRUM INST.

PRESS [DRUM KEY]

CSelect a Parameter .................................................................................................................................

Use the [TAP] and [METRONOME] buttons to select the parameter you want

to edit: KIT, REV DEPTH, or PAN.

EDIT DRUM INSTRUMENT

Rim Lite KIT: NORMAL

■41: Split Left Octave

This function determines whether the left-hand voice in a split keyboard setup will be automatically shifted up one oc-

tave (refer to page 10).

0 Octave shift OFF — no octave shift will occur.

+1 Octave shift ON — all voices except BASS (voice numbers 10, 11, 49, 50, 51, and

52) and DRUMS (voice numbers 12) will be shifted.

NOTES

• Octave shift is automatically turned ON (+1) whenever the POWER switch is turned

on.

⁄¤‹›‚41 SPLIT-L OCTAVE

+ 1

■42: Registration Tempo

Determines whether the tempo setting in a recalled registration memory will be used or not (refer to page 29).

KEEP TEMPO The recalled tempo setting is not used — the tempo will not change

when a registration memory is recalled.

SET TEMPO The recalled tempo setting is used — the tempo will change when a

registration memory is recalled.

NOTES

• The registration Tempo function is automatically turned SET TEMPO whenever the

POWER switch is turned on.

⁄¤‹›‚42 REGIST. TEMPO

SET TEMPO

Utility Functions

■43: ABC Auto Mute

Turns the Auto Accompaniment mute function on or off (refer to page 23).

OFF Mute OFF.

ON Mute ON.

NOTES

• The mute function is automatically turned ON whenever the POWER switch is turned

on.

⁄¤‹›‚43 ABC AUTO MUTE

■44: Minor Harmonization

Turns the Auto Accompaniment minor harmonization function on or off (refer to page 23).

NORMAL Minor harmonization OFF.

CHORD TONE Minor harmonization ON.

NOTES

• The Minor harmonization function is automatically turned OFF (NORMAL) whenever

the POWER switch is turned on.

⁄¤‹›‚44 7th CHORD IN min

CHORD TONE

Although the Clavinova is a self-contained musical instrument that simply be

plugged into the AC mains outlet and played, it also features a number of connec-

tors for system expansion.

The Connectors

● AUX IN L and R Jacks ............................................................................................................................

These jacks are intended primarily for use with external synthesizers or tone

generator modules.

For example, the outputs of the synthesizer/tone generator can be to the

Clavinova AUX IN jacks, allowing the sound of the synthesizer/tone generator to

be reproduced via the Clavinova’s internal amplifier and speaker system.

NOTES

• The input signal from the AUX IN jacks is delivered to the AUX OUT jacks, but is

not affected by the Clavinova’s volume control or reverb effect.

AUX IN

Tone Generator

● AUX OUT L/L+R and R Jacks ................................................................................................................

The AUX OUT L/L+R and R jacks deliver the output of the Clavinova for

connection to an instrument amplifier, mixing console, PA system, or recording

equipment. If you will be connecting the Clavinova to a monaural sound system,

use only the L/L+R jack. When a plug is inserted into the L/L+R jack only, the

left- and right-channel signals are combined and delivered via the L/L+R jack so

you don’t lose any of the Clavinova’s sound.

CAUTION

• The AUX OUT jack signal must never be returned to the AUX IN jacks, either

directly or through external equipment.

AUX OUT

R L/L+R

Stereo System

● MIDI IN, THRU and OUT Connectors ....................................................................................................

The MIDI IN connector receives MIDI data from an external MIDI device

(such as a synthesizer, sequencer, music computer, etc.) which can be used to con-

trol the Clavinova. The MIDI THRU connector re-transmits any data received at

the MIDI IN connector, allowing “chaining” of several MIDI instruments or other

devices. The MIDI OUT connector transmits MIDI data generated by the

Clavinova (e.g. note and velocity data produced by playing the Clavinova key-

board).

More details on MIDI are given in “MIDI Functions” on page 54.

THRUIN

MIDI

OUT

MIDI Sequencer Tone Generator

● EXP PEDAL Jack ....................................................................................................................................

An optional Yamaha EP-1 Expression Pedal can be plugged into this jack for

foot volume (expression) control of the keyboard sound only (i.e. expression

doesn’t affect the auto-accompaniment sound or disk playback). Press the pedal

forward to increase volume, and backward to decrease volume.

EXP PEDAL

● MIC. Jack and VOL. Control ..................................................................................................................

A standard microphone with a 1/4" phone plug can be connected to the MIC.

jack. The microphone sound is then mixed with the Clavinova sound and delivered

via the Clavinova’s speakers. The MIC. VOL. control can be used to adjust the

microphone volume.

NOTES

• The depth of the digital reverb effect applied to the microphone sound can be

adjusted via the “Mic Reverb Depth” utility function described on page 43.

MIC. VOL.

MIC.

MIN

MAX

Troubleshooting

If you encounter what appears to be a malfunction, please check the following points before assuming that

your Clavinova is faulty.

1. No Sound When the Power is Turned On

Is the AC plug properly connected to an AC wall outlet? Check the AC connection carefully. Is the MASTER VOL-

UME control turned up to a reasonable listening level?

2. No Rhythm, ABC, or Performance Memory Sound

Check the Auto Accompaniment volume control settings. No sound is produced if these are set to their minimum

positions.

3. The Clavinova Reproduces Radio or TV Sound

This can occur if there is a high-power transmitter in your vicinity. Contact your Yamaha dealer.

4. Intermittent Static Noise

This is usually due to turning on or off a household appliance or other electronic equipment which is fed by the same

AC mains line as your Clavinova.

5. Interference Appears On Radio or TV Sets Located Near the Clavinova

The Clavinova contains digital circuitry which can generate radio-frequency noise. The solution is to move the

Clavinova further away from the affected equipment, or vice versa.

6. Distorted Sound When the Clavinova is Connected to An External Amplifier/Speaker System

If the Clavinova is connected to a stereo system or instrument amplifier and the sound is distorted, reduce the setting

of the Clavinova volume control to a level at which the distortion ceases.

Options

● BC-10 Bench

A stable, comfortable bench styled to match your Yamaha Clavinova.

● HPE-160 Stereo Headphones

High-performance lightweight dynamic headphones with extra-soft ear pads.

NOTES

• Some items may not be available in certain areas.

Factory Preset Recall

The factory preset settings for the data listed below can be restored by holding

the C7 key while turning the power on.

• Registration memory data.

• Style disk load data.

• Custom rhythm data. (no data)

• Pitch bend range data.

• Chorus ON/OFF data.

• Soundboard depth data.

POWER

NOTES

• Custom Rhythm initially contains no data, so any Custom Rhythm data you have

created will be erased when the Factory Preset Recall function is executed.

Index

A-B repeat, disk orchestra .......................... 33

ABC auto mute............................................ 64

Accompaniment .......................................... 17

Accompaniment volume mode.................... 61

Assembly ....................................................... i

Auto bass chord (ABC) ............................... 21

Auto synchro start switching ....................... 62

Automatic performance, disk orchestra ...... 30

Aux jacks..................................................... 65

Balance, split mode..................................... 11

Chord sequence function ............................ 41

Chorus on/off .............................................. 43

Connectors.................................................. 65

Control change on/cancel ........................... 56

Controls, panel .............................................. 2

Convert to DOC .......................................... 52

Convert to SMF ........................................... 53

Custom rhythm............................................ 24

Damper pedal mode ................................... 62

Damper pedal, split mode ........................... 11

Demonstration playback ............................... 6

Disk copy, disk orchestra ............................ 34

Disk error messages ................................... 53

Disk format .................................................. 48

Disk orchestra ............................................. 30

Disk styles, loading ..................................... 26

Disk styles, using ........................................ 27

Dual mode..................................................... 9

Edit drum instrument ................................... 63

Exp pedal jack............................................. 65

Expression control ........................................ 5

Factory preset recall ................................... 66

Fill-ins.......................................................... 20

Fingered accompaniment ........................... 21

Fingering chart .............................................xii

Floppy disk handling ..................................... 1

Full-keyboard ABC ...................................... 22

GM drum kit ................................................ 59

Guided practice, disk orchestra .................. 32

Harmonization variations, solo styleplay ..... 28

Headphones.................................................. 4

Individual key tuning ................................... 60

Introduction ................................................. 19

Key cover ...................................................... 4

Keyboard percussion .................................... 8

Left pedal .................................................... 14

Load custom rhythm ................................... 46

Load individual key tuning........................... 45

Load registration ......................................... 44

Local control on/off...................................... 55

Metronome .................................................. 20

Mic jack & volume control ........................... 65

Mic reverb depth ......................................... 43

MIDI clock select ......................................... 58

MIDI connectors .......................................... 65

MIDI data format ...........................................iii

MIDI transpose transmit .............................. 59

Minor harmonization ............................. 23, 64

Multi-timbre mode ....................................... 57

Multi-timbre recording via MIDI ................... 40

Music data, playing other types .................. 34

Music stand ................................................... 4

Mute mode .................................................. 23

Next phrase, disk orchestra ........................ 34

Options........................................................ 66

Pan.............................................................. 13

Panel send data .......................................... 58

Pause, disk orchestra ................................. 34

Pedal pause, disk orchestra........................ 34

Pedals ......................................................... 14

Percussion kit list ......................................... ix

Performance memory ................................. 35

Pitch bend range ......................................... 62

Pitch bend, left pedal .................................. 15

Pitch control ................................................ 16

Pitch display ................................................ 16

Playing specific parts, disk orchestra .......... 31

Polyphony ................................................... 13

Power switch ................................................. 4

Program change on/cancel ......................... 56

Punch-in recording ...................................... 39

Quantize song data ..................................... 49

Random all song repeat .............................. 62

Recall, registration memory ........................ 29

Receive channel select ............................... 55

Recording & playback, multitrack................ 36

Recording & playback, one-pass ................ 35

Registration memory ................................... 29

Registration tempo ...................................... 64

Repeat functions, disk orchestra................. 33

Reverb depth control................................... 12

Reverb effects ............................................. 12

Rewind & fast forward, disk orchestra ........ 34

Rhythm break, left pedal ....................... 15, 20

Right pedal .................................................. 14

Save custom rhythm ................................... 45

Save individual key tuning .......................... 45

Save registration ......................................... 44

Send channel select.................................... 54

Single-finger accompaniment ..................... 21

Soft, left pedal ............................................. 14

Solo styleplay, left pedal ....................... 15, 28

Solo styleplay, using ................................... 28

Song copy ................................................... 46

Song delete ................................................. 47

Song name.................................................. 51

Sostenuto pedal .......................................... 14

Soundboard depth ...................................... 43

Specifications ............................................... xi

Split left octave............................................ 64

Split mode ................................................... 10

Split point, ABC ........................................... 23

Split point, changing.................................... 10

Split send mode .......................................... 58

Standard MIDI file playback mode .............. 48

Start/stop, left pedal .................................... 15

Starting accompaniment ............................. 18

Stopping accompaniment ........................... 20

Store, registration memory.......................... 29

Style selection, accompaniment ................. 17

Style tempo switching ................................. 61

Synchronized start ...................................... 19

Tap start ...................................................... 19

Tempo control ............................................. 18

Touch sensitivity ......................................... 61

Track mix .................................................... 50

Transpose ................................................... 43

Troubleshooting .......................................... 66

Utility functions, list ..................................... 42

Utility functions, selecting............................ 42

Voice balance, dual mode............................. 9

Voice list........................................................ 8

Voice list.......................................................vii

Voice selection .............................................. 7

Volume control, utility .................................. 50

Volume controls ................................ 5, 23, 32

Assembly/Zusammenbau/Montage/Montaje

NOTES

• We do not recommend attempting to as-

semble the Clavinova alone. The job can be

easily accomplished, however, with only

two people.

• Use only the screws provided or replace-

ments of exactly the specified size. Using

screws of the wrong size can result in dam-

age to the instrument.

ZOpen the box and remove all

the parts.

On opening the box you should find

the parts shown in the illustration above.

Check to make sure that all the required

parts are provided.

XCarefully lean the main unit

against a wall.

To make it easier to install the legs,

place a soft blanket or similar material

on the floor near a wall, close the

Clavinova keyboard cover, place the

front panel of the Clavinova (the side

with the keyboard) on the blanket and

gently lean the unit against the wall —

MAKING SURE THAT IT CAN NOT

FALL — as shown in the illustration.

CAttach the front legs.

Securely attach the two front legs

using six 5 x 20 mm screws 1 each (use

a Philips “+” screwdriver), as shown in

the illustration. Make sure the screws are

securely tightened.

VAttach the rear leg and pedal

box assembly.

Before attaching the rear leg and

pedal box assembly, insert the 3 plugs

extending from the rear leg into the cor-

responding sockets in the main unit,

making sure that the connectors must be

inserted with the protruding clip facing

the rear of the main unit. Then securely

attach the rear leg with the six 5 x 20

mm screws 1, and the pedal bracket

with the five 4 x 20 mm round-head

screws 2.

IMPORTANT

• After assembling the Clavinova, check once

more to make sure that all screws have

been securely fastened.

• If the stand leans to the side, makes unu-

sual noises, or otherwise seems unstable

during use, check and tighten all screws

while following the assembly instructions

given above.

Assembly

2 3

Six 5 x 20 mm screws 1

Sechs 5 x 20 mm Schrauben 1

Six vis de 5 x 20 mm 1

Seis tornillos de 5 x 20 mm 1

Black

Schwarz

Noir

Negro

White

Weiß

Blanc

Blanco

Black

Schwarz

Noir

Negro

Four 5 x 20mm screws

Vier 5 x 20 mm Schrauben 1

Quatre vis de 5 x 20 mm 1

Cuatro tornillos de 5 x 20 mm 1

Five 4 x 20 mm round-head screws 2

Fünf 4 x 20 mm Rundkopfschrauben 2

Cinq vis à tête ronde de 4 x 20 mm 2

Cinco tornillos de cabeza redonda de 4 x 20 mm 2

Two 5 x 20 mm screws 1

Zwei 5 x 20 mm Schrauben 1

Deux vis de 5 x 20 mm 1

Dos tornillos de 5 x 20 mm 1

Blanket, etc.

Decke o.ä.

Couverture, etc.

Manta, etc.

5 x 20 mm screws

5 x 20 mm Schrauben

x18

Vis de 5 x 20 mm

Tornillos de 5 x 20 mm

4 x 20 mm round-head screws

4 x 20 mm Rundkopfschrauben

Vis à tête ronde de 4 x 20 mm

Tornillos de cabeza redonda de

4 x 20 mm

Assembly/Zusammenbau/Montage/Montaje

Zusammenbau Montage Montaje

HINWEISE

• Wir raten davon ab, das Clavinova alleine

zusammenzubauen und aufzustellen. Zwei

Personen können diese Arbeit jedoch pro-

blemlos ausführen.

• Verwenden Sie ausschließlich die mit-

gelieferten Schrauben oder Ersatz-

schrauben identischer Größe. Die Verwen-

dung von Schrauben mit abweichenden

Maßen kann eine Beschädigung des Instru-

ments zur Folge haben.

REMARQUES

• Nous ne vous conseillons pas d’essayer

d’assembler le Clavinova seul. Toutefois,

ce travail peut être facilement exécuté par

deux personnes.

• N’utilisez que les vis fournies ou des vis

ayant exactement les mêmes dimensions.

L’utilisation de vis de dimensions incorrec-

tes pourrait endommager l’instrument.

NOTAS

• No le recomendamos que intente montar la

Clavinova usted solo. El trabajo puede ser

realizado fácilmente entre dos personas.

• Utilice sólo los tornillos suministrados o

reemplazos del exacto tamaño especifica-

do. El empleo de tornillos de un tamaño

erróneo puede dañar el instrumento.

ZDen Versandkarton öffnen und

alle Teile auspacken.

Der Karton sollte alle in der Abbil-

dung gezeigten Teile enthalten. Verge-

wissern Sie sich, daß alle Teile vollzäh-

lig vorhanden sind.

XDie Haupteineit vorsichtig an

eine Wand lehnen.

Um das Anschrauben der Beine zu

erleichtern, breiten Sie eine Decke oder

ein weiches Tuch neben der Wand auf

dem Boden aus, schließen den Tastatur-

deckel des Clavinova, stellen das Instru-

ment mit der Vorderkante (Seite mit der

Tastatur) vorsichtig auf die Decke und

lehnen es an die Wand, wie in der Abbil-

dung gezeigt. VERGEWISSERN SIE

SICH, DASS DAS INSTRUMENT

NICHT KIPPEN ODER WEG-

RUTSCHEN KANN!

CDie vorderen Beine montieren.

Beine mit jeweils sechs 5 x 20 mm

Schrauben 1 (Kreuzschlitzschrauben-

dreher verwenden!) gut am Clavinova

fest, wie in der Abbildung gezeigt.

Ziehen Sie die Schrauben fest an.

VDas hintere Bein mit dem

Pedalkasten montieren.

Bevor Sie das hintere Bein mit dem

Pedalkasten anbringen, schließen Sie die

3 aus dem hinteren Bein ragenden Stek-

ker an die entsprechenden Buchsen der

Haupteinheit an. Die Stecker müssen mit

dem hervorstehenden Clip zur Rückseite

der Haupteinheit weisend in die Buchsen

gesteckt werden. Schrauben Sie das

hintere Bein danach mit sechs 5 x 20

mm Schrauben 1 und die Pedalstrebe

mit den fünf 4 x 20 mm Rundkopf-

schrauben 2 gut fest.

WICHTIG

• Vergewissern Sie sich nach Zusammenbau

und Aufstellung des Clavinova noch einmal

davon, daß alle Schrauben fest angezogen

sind.

• Wenn der Ständer schief steht, komische

Geräusch erzeugt oder sich beim Spielen

wackelig anfühlt, prüfen Sie gemäß den

unter “Zusammenbau und Aufstellung” gege-

benen Anweisungen, ob der Ständer richtig

zusammengebaut wurde, und ziehen dabei

die einzelnen Schrauben noch einmal nach.

ZOuvrir le carton et retirer tou-

tes les pièces

Les pièces indiquées sur l’illustration

devraient toutes se trouver dans le car-

ton. Vérifier qu’il n’en manque aucune.

XAppuyez le clavier contre un

mur en faisant très attention

Pour faciliter la pose des pieds, pla-

cez une couverture épaisse, ou un maté-

riau similaire, sur le plancher à proxi-

mité d’un mur. Fermez le cache-clavier

et placez le bord avant (bord côté cla-

vier) du Clavinova sur la couverture et

appuyez ensuite le Clavinova contre le

mur de la manière illustrée. ASSUREZ-

VOUS QU’IL NE PEUT PAS TOM-

BER.

CPosez les pieds avant

Fixez chacun des deux pieds avant à

l’aide de six vis de 5 x 20 mm 1 (utili-

sez un tournevis cruciforme “+”) comme

illustré. Vérifiez que les vis sont serrées

à fond.

VFixez le pied arrière et le péda-

lier

Avant de fixer le pied arrière et le

pédalier, branchez les 3 connecteurs

sortant du pied arrière aux prises corres-

pondantes du clavier, en veillant à ce que

les connecteurs soient branchés avec la

languette dirigée vers l’arrière du

clavier. Fixez ensuite le pied arrière à

l’aide de six vis de 5 x 20 mm 1 et la

ferrure du pédalier à l’aide de cinq vis à

tête ronde de 4 x 20 mm 2.

IMPORTANT

• Après avoir assemblé le Clavinova, vérifiez

une fois de plus que toutes les vis sont bien

serrées.

• Si le support du clavier penche d’un côté,

fait du bruit ou semble instable lorsque

vous utilisez l’instrument, vérifiez de nou-

veau et resserrez toutes les vis en suivant

les instructions d’assemblage données ci-

dessus.

ZAbra la caja y extraiga todas

las partes.

Al abrir la caja, encontrará las partes

que se muestran en la ilustración de

arriba. Asegúrese de que no falta ningu-

na de las partes requeridas.

XIncline con cuidado la unidad

principal contra una pared.

Para facilitar la instalación de las

patas, coloque una manta blanda o un

material semejante sobre el piso cerca de

una pared, cierre la cubierta del teclado

de la Clavinova, coloque el panel frontal

de la Clavinova (el lado con el teclado)

sobre la manta e incline con cuidado la

unidad contra la pared, ASEGURAN-

DOSE DE QUE NO PUEDA CAER-

SE, como se muestra en la ilustración.

CInstale las patas delanteras.

Instale con seguridad las dos patas

delanteras usando seis tornillos de 5 x 20

mm 1 en cada una (emplee un destorni-

llador de cabeza en cruz), como se mues-

tra en la ilustración. Asegúrese de que

los tornillos se aprietan bien.

VInstale la pata trasera y el con-

junto de la caja de pedales.

Antes de instalar la pata trasera y el

conjunto de la caja de pedales, inserte

las 3 clavijas que salen de la pata trasera

en los enchufes correspondientes de la

unidad principal, asegurándose de que

los conectores quedan insertados con el

retenedor que sobresale encarado a la

parte posterior de la unidad principal.

Entonces, instale con seguridad la pata

trasera con los seis tornillos de 5 x 20

mm 1, y la ménsula de pedales con los

cinco tornillos de cabeza redonda de 4 x

20 mm 2.

IMPORTANTE

• Después de montar la Clavinova, comprue-

be otra vez para asegurarse de que todos

los tornillos se han apretado bien.

• Si el soporte se inclina hacia un lado, hace

ruidos anormales, o parece inestable du-

rante la utilización, compruebe y apriete

todos los tornillos mientras sigue las ins-

trucciones de montaje de arriba.

MIDI Data Format/MIDI-Datenformat/Format des

iii

If you’re already very familiar with MIDI, or are using a computer

to control your music hardware with computer-generated MIDI

messages, the data provided in this section can help you to

control the Clavinova.

Falls Sie bereits mit MIDI vertraut sind oder einen Computer zur

Hardware-Steuerung einsetzen, werden Ihnen die nachfolgend

aufgeführten Daten bei der Steuerung des Clavinovas

wahrscheinlich hilfreich sein.

Si vous vous êtes déjà familiarisés avec l’interface MIDI, ou si

vous utilisez un ordinateur pour commander votre matériel de

musique au moyen de messages MIDI générés par ordinateur,

les données suivantes vous aideront à commander le

Clavinova.

Si ya está muy familiarizado con MIDI o si está usando una

computadora para controlar su música con mensajes MIDI

generados por computadora, los datos proporcionados en esta

sección le ayudarán a controlar la Clavinova.

1. NOTE ON/OFF

[9nH] [kkH] [vvH]

9nH= Note on/off event

(n= MIDI channel number)

kkH= Note number

(Transmission: 0FH~72H= D#-1~F#7,

Reception= 15H~6CH: A-1~C7)

vvH= Velocity

(Note on= 01H~7FH, Note off= 00H)

[8nH] [kkH] [vvH]

8nH= Note off event

(n= MIDI channel number)

kkH= Note number

(Transmission: 0FH~72H= D#-1~F#7,

Reception= 15H~6CH: A-1~C7)

vvH= Velocity (Note off= 00H~7FH)

* 8nH (note off) is receive only.

9nH (vvH=00H) used for transmission.

2. CONTROL CHANGE

[BnH] [ccH] [vvH]

BnH= Control event

(n= MIDI channel number)

ccH= Control number

vvH= Control value

• Modulation (Vibrato)

[BnH] [01H] [vvH]

n= MIDI channel number

vvH= Modulation

00H~0FH: Off : AM also off.

10H~1FH: 1 : Voice default AM

when greater than 10H

20H~2FH: 2

30H~3FH: 3

40H~4FH: 4

50H~5FH: 5

60H~6FH: 6

70H~7FH: 7

* LFO speed fixed for each voice

• Volume

[BnH] [07H] [vvH]

n= MIDI channel number

vvH= Volume (00H~7FH)

00H: -∞

6FH: -3dB

7FH: ±0dB

• Pan

[BnH] [0AH] [vvH]

n= MIDI channel number

vvH= Pan (00H~7FH)

00H~17H: Left 6

18H~1FH: Left 5

20H~27H: Left 4

28H~2FH: Left 3

30H~37H: Left 2

38H~3FH: Left 1

40H~47H: Center

48H: Voice default Pan

49H:

Scaling Pan (Standard) (receive only)

4AH:

Scaling Pan (Wide) (receive only)

4BH:

Scaling Pan (Narrow L) (receive only)

4CH:

Scaling Pan (Narrow C) (receive only)

4DH:

Scaling Pan (Narrow R) (receive only)

4EH:

Scaling Pan (Half L) (receive only)

4FH:

Scaling Pan (Half R) (receive only)

50H~57H: Right 1

58H~5FH: Right 2

60H~67H: Right 3

68H~6FH: Right 4

70H~77H: Right 5

78H~7FH: Right 6

• Expression

[BnH] [0BH] [vvH]

n= MIDI channel number

vvH= Expression (00H~7FH)

00H: -∞

6FH: -3dB

7FH= ±0dB

• Damper pedal

[BnH] [40H] [vvH]

n= MIDI channel number

vvH= Control value (00H~7FH)

8 levels max.

• Sostenuto pedal

[BnH] [42H] [vvH]

n= MIDI channel number

vvH= Control value (00H~7FH)

00H~3FH: Off

40H~7FH: On

• Soft pedal

[BnH] [43H] [vvH]

n= MIDI channel number

vvH= Control value (00H~7FH)

8 levels max.

• Portamento control

[BnH] [54H] [vvH]

n= MIDI channel number

vvH= Control value (00H~7FH)

15H~6CH: Key Number

• Reverb depth

[BnH] [5BH] [vvH]

n= MIDI channel number

vvH= Reverb Depth (00H~7FH)

Individually adjustable for each channel.

• Chorus depth

[BnH] [5DH] [vvH]

n= MIDI channel number

vvH= Reverb Depth (00H~7FH)

Individually adjustable for each channel.

3. MODE MESSAGES (receive only)

[BnH] [ccH] [vvH]

BnH= Control event

(n= MIDI channel number)

ccH= Mode message number

vvH= Mode message value

• All sound off

[BnH] [78H] [00H]

n= MIDI channel number

• Reset all controllers

[BnH] [79H] [00H]

n= MIDI channel number

• Local Control ON/OFF

[BnH] [7AH] [vvH]

n= MIDI channel number

vvH= 00H: Off

7FH: On

• All notes OFF

[BnH] [7BH] [00H]

n= MIDI channel number

• OMNI OFF/All notes OFF

[BnH] [7CH] [00H]

n= MIDI channel number

• OMNI ON/All notes OFF

[BnH] [7DH] [00H]

n= MIDI channel number

s donées MIDI/Formato de datos MIDI

4. REGISTERED/NON-REGIS-

TERED PARAMETER NUMBER

• Data entry

[BnH] [06H] [mmH]

[BnH] [26H] [llH]

n= MIDI channel number

mm/ll=RPN

• Data inc

[BnH] [60H] [xxH]

n= MIDI channel number

xx= Dummy, RPN

• Data dec

[BnH] [61H] [xxH]

n= MIDI channel number

xx= Dummy, RPN

• Non-registered parameter number

[BnH] [62H] [llH]

[BnH] [63H] [mmH]

n= MIDI channel number

* No parameter is received, but the data is

recognized because of RPN reception.

• Registered parameter number

[BnH] [64H] [llH]

[BnH] [65H] [mmH]

n= MIDI channel number

llH= 00H, mmH= 00H:

Pitch bend range

llH= 01H, mmH= 00H: Fine tune

llH= 02H, mmH= 00H:

Coarse tune

llH= 7FH, mmH= 7FH: RPN Reset

5. PROGRAM CHANGE

[CnH] [ppH]

CnH= Program change event

(n= MIDI channel number)

ppH= Program number

Panel Voices

dd VOICE

00H PIANO

01H CLAVINOVA TONE

02H E. PIANO

03H HARPSICHORD

04H VIBES

05H GUITAR

06H STRINGS

07H ORGAN

08H CHOIR

09H UPRIGHT BASS

0AH ELEC BASS

0BH DRUMS

Voices 13 — 60

dd VOICE

0CH BRASS

0DH POP BRASS

0EH TRUMPET

0FH MUTE TRUMPET

10H HORN

11H SAX

12H SAX SOFT

13H CLARINET

14H OBOE

15H FLUTE

16H ACCORDION

17H HARMONICA

18H STRINGS SOFT

19H VIOLIN

1AH VIOLIN HARD

1BH FULL ORGAN

1CH JAZZ ORGAN 1

1DH SYNTH BRASS

1EH SYNTH WOOD

1FH SYNTH STRINGS

20H SYNTH CHOIR

21H PIANO BRIGHT

22H PIANO SOFT

23H E. PIANO DX

24H SYNTH CRYSTAL

25H CELESTA

26H MARIMBA

27H FOLK GUITAR

28H JAZZ GUITAR 1

29H JAZZ GUITAR 2

2AH ROCK GUITAR 1

2BH ROCK GUITAR 2

2CH MUTE GUITAR

2DH BANJO

2EH PIZZICATO

2FH HARP

30H U. BASS SOFT

31H E. BASS SOFT

32H E. BASS HEAVY

33H SYNTH BASS

34H TIMPANI & ORCH. HIT

35H BASSOON

36H CHAMBER STRINGS

37H JAZZ ORGAN 2

38H ROCK GUITAR 3

39H COSMIC 1

3AH COSMIC 2

3BH COSMIC 3

6. PITCH BENDER

[EnH] [llH] [mmH]

EnH= Bender event

(n= MIDI channel number)

llH= Least significant byte

mmH= Most significant byte

* Caution: Each voice is set to its own bend

range when the power is turned on. The

bend range is set to 300 cents when the

CVP/DOC Multi-Timbre mode is en-

gaged, and to 200 cents when the GM

Multi-Timbre mode is engaged. RPN data

can be used to set the range in 100-cent

(semitone) increments.

7. SYSTEM REALTIME MESSAGES

[rrH]

F8H: Timing clock

FAH: Start

FCH: Stop

FEH: Active sensing

Data Transmission Reception

F8H Transmitted every Received as 96-clock

96 clocks tempo timing when

MIDI clock is set to

External

FAH Rhythm start Rhythm start

FCH Rhythm stop Rhythm stop

FEH Transmitted every All notes are turned

200 milliseconds off if no data is

received for more than

400 milliseconds

* Caution: If an overrun framing error oc-

curs the Damper, Sostenuto, and Soft

effects for all channels are turned off and

an All Note Off occurs.

8. SYSTEM EXCLUSIVE

MESSAGES

• YAMAHA MIDI format

[F0H] [43H] [xnH] [ffH] ..... [F7H]

43H= YAMAHA ID

xnH= Substatus + MIDI channel number

ffH= Format number

* n specifies the receive channel regard-

less of whether omni is on or off.

x ff Information

0 7CH Panel data receive

2 7CH Panel data bulk dump request

27DH

Model ID data bulk dump request

Panel Data Send Format

F0H, 43H, 0xH, 7CH, 00H, 22H

(x: channel number,

data length= Panel data+0cH)

53H, 4BH, 20 H, 20H (SK)

43H, 56H, 50H, 27H, 39H, 34H (CVP’94)

3xH, 3yH

(Version x, y)

[Panel Data]

[Check Sum (1byte)]= 0(53H+4BH+20H+...

...+Data end)

F7H

[Panel Data Contents]

(1) ABC ON/OFF

(2) SSP ON/OFF

(3) SSP NO.

(4) MANUAL VOICE

(5) MANUAL VOLUME

(6) RHYTHM NO.

(7) RHYTHM VARIATION

(8) TEMPO (Absolute value LSB)

(9) TEMPO (Absolute value MSB)

(10) RHYTHM VOLUME

(11) CHORD 1 VOLUME

(12) CHORD 2 VOLUME

(13) BASS VOLUME

MIDI Data Format/MIDI-Datenformat/Format des donées MIDI/Formato de datos MIDI

(14) SPLIT POINT

(15) DUAL/SPLIT MODE

(16) DUAL/SPLIT VOICE

(17) DUAL/SPLIT BALANCE

(18) REVERB

(19) REVERB DEPTH

(20) LEFT PEDAL FUNCTION

(21) Reserved

(22) INTRO

(23) TOUCH SESITIVITY

(24) PITCH BEND RANGE

(25) CHORUS

(26) SOUNDBOARD EFFECT DEPTH

(27) DRUMS VOICE in the GM Multi-

Timbre Mode

Individual Key Tuning Data Bulk Dump

Format

F0H, 43H, 73H

36H (Product ID: CVP-89)

06H (Bulk ID)

00H (Bulk No.)

00H, 00H, 0bH, 00H (Data Length= wxyH

88*2 bytes)

[BULK DATA] (low (A-1), high (A-1)

...low (C7), high (C7))

[CHECK SUM (1byte)]= 0-sum

(BULK DATA)

Name Data Send Format

F0H, 43H, 0xH, 7DH, 00H, 10H

(Data Length= 10H

byte)

53H, 4BH, 20H, 20H (SK)

43H, 56H, 50H, 27H, 39H, 34H (CVP’94)

3xH, 3yH, 20H, 20H, 20H, 20H

(Version x,y)

[CHECK SUM (1byte)]= 0-(53H+4BH+20H+...

...+20H)

F7H

• Clavinova MIDI Format

[F0H] [43H] [73H] [yyH] [xxH] [F7H]

43H= YAMAHA ID

73H= CLAVINOVA ID

yyH= Product ID (CVP-89= 36H)

xxH= Substatus

xxH Information

02H Internal MIDI clock

03H External MIDI clock

06H Receive bulk data below

13H Multi-timbre mode off

14H

DOC voice multi-timbre mode on

15H CVP Multi-timbre mode on

18H DOC voice multi-timbre mode

individual track reverb depth on

61H MIDI FA Cancel On

62H MIDI FA Cancel Off

7nH All Note Off,

Receive Channel = n+1, Omni off

* When nn = 2, 3, 13, 14, 15, 18, or 7C,

Clavinova common ID (01H) is recognized

as well as 34H.

* All Control Change values are reset when

[13H], [14H] or [15H] is received. All

voices and other parameters are also

reset when [14H] or [15H] is received in

order to ensure the same initial settings.

• Special Messages

[F0H] [43H] [73H] [yyH] [11H] [0nH]

[ccH] [vvH] [F7H]

43H= YAMAHA ID

73H= CLAVINOVA ID

yyH= Product ID (CVP-89= 36H)

11H= Clavinova Special Control Code

0nH= Control MIDI Change

(n= special control change number)

ccH= Control number

ddH= Control value

cc Control Value [dd]

08H DUAL/SPLIT 00H= lower MAX

Balance

7FH= upper MAX

10H ABC Mode 00H= Off

02H= ABC Single/

Fingered

03H= Conventional

Full-Keyboard

ABC

04H= Full-Keyboard

ABC

11H

Rhythm Variation

00H= Off

01H=

Variation number

12H Fill In Switch 00H= Fill to normal

Event Off event

01H= Fill to normal

On event

02H= Fill to variation

On event

03H= Fill to variation

Off event

13H Intro/Ending 00H=

Intro mode Off

Switch Event

01H= Intro mode On

02H=

Ending mode On

03H= Fill to normal

mode On

04H= Fill to variation

mode On

14H Split [ddH]= Split key

number (the highest

note in the left-hand

keyboard range)

15H

Rhythm Number

[ddH]=

Rhythm number

19H Volume [ddH]= Volume value

n= 2 (BASS)

4 (CHORD 1)

5 (CHORD 2)

1AH

Rhythm Volume

[ddH]= Volume value

1BH

Metronome mode

00H: Off

(receive only)

01H: On

21H Solo Styleplay 00~17H=Style

Number number

22H Solo Styleplay 00H~3FH= Off

40H~7FH= On

30H Drums Parameter Change

See Drum Parameter Expanded

Format, below

3DH Soundboard Effect Depth

[ddH]= Volume value

59H Reverb 00H= Off

01H= Room

02H= Hall 1

03H= Hall 2

04H= Cosmic

5AH

Dual/Split mode

00H= Off

01H= Dual

02H= Split

(upper damper)

03H= Split

(lower damper)

04H= Split

(upper/lower

damper)

05H= Split & Lower

Voice Oct Up (upper

damper)

06H= Split & Lower

Voice Oct Up (lower

damper)

07H= SPLIT & Lower

Voice Oct Up (upper/

lower damper)

5CH

Dual/Split Voice

[ddH]=

Dual/Split voice

number

5DH Pedal Function [ddH]= Function

number

* When cc = 59 (Reverb), SK common ID

(01H) is recognized in addition to xxH.

Drum Parameter Expanded Format

[F0H] [43H] [73H] [xxH] [11H] [0nH]

[30H] [xxH] .....[F7H]

xxH: Product ID (CVP-89= 36H)

Common product ID also recognized

(pattern editor transmits both).

0x30: /* Drum Parameter */ *2 Expanded

Format

* This resets all parameters when a differ-

ent drum kit is selected.

Expands Special Message 30.

• Effect Level

[F0H] [43H] [73H] [xxH] [11H] [0nH]

[30H] [43H] [knH] [enH] [slH] [F7H]

11H: Clavinova special control code

0nH: MIDI Channel Number

* Received only on channel 15 (0EH) in

the CVP’94, affecting all tracks.

Received only on channel 10 (09H) in

the GM mode, affecting all tracks.

30H: Drums Parameter Change

43H: Effect Send Level

knH: Key Number

* Also included in the panel key code in

the Clavinova DOC Voice mode (be-

cause conversion is not possible). In-

cluded in the GM key code in the GM

mode.

* When kn = 01 the en for all keys is set to

the default.

When kn = 02 the en for all keys is set to

s1.

enH: Effect Number

en= 5B: Reverb Depth

slH: Send Level

* This data applies a ± 40H offset to the

CH depth parameter of each channel of

each instrument.

Example

[F0H] [43H] [73H] [xxH] [11H] [0eH]

[30H] [43H] [knH] [enH] [slH] [F7H]

[knH] [enH] [slH]

[36H] [5bH] [10H]:

F#0 Brush Roll reverb depth set to -30H.

[36H] [5bH] [20H] [5dH] [60H]:

F#0 Brush Roll reverb depth set to -20H

[01H] [5bH] [xxH]:

Reverb depth for all keys set to default (±0).

[02H] [5bH] [20H]:

Reverb depth for all keys set to -20H.

• Pan Set Switching

[F0H] [43H] [73H] [xxH] [11H] [0nH]

[30H] [47H] [knH] [pnH] [F7H]

11H: Clavinova special control code

0nH: MIDI Channel Number

* Received only on channel 15 (0EH) in

the CVP’94, affecting all tracks.

Received only on channel 10 (09H) in

the GM mode, affecting all tracks.

30H: Drums Parameter Change

47H: Panpot

knH: Key Number

* Also included in the panel key code in

the Common Voice mode (because

conversion is not possible). Included in

the GM key code in the GM mode.

* When kn = 01 pan is set to the value

specified in pn.

When kn = 02 the pan for all keys is set

to the pin point specified in pn.

pnH: Pan

* When kn = 01 pan is set to the value

specified in pn.

pn= 00: Normal DOC Setting

= 01: Narrow DOC left

= 02: Narrow DOC center

= 03: Narrow DOC right

= 04: Normal GM Setting

= 05: Narrow GM left

= 06: Narrow GM center

= 07: Narrow GM right

* Normal pan value used when kn is other

than 01.

However, values 48…4F are also set to

pin-point center.

• Drum Kit Assign

[F0H] [43H] [73H] [xxH] [11H] [0nH]

[30H] [40H] [knH] [skH] [F7H]

11H: Clavinova special control code

0nH: MIDI Channel Number

* Received only on channel 15 (0EH) in

the CVP’94, affecting channel 15 (0EH)

only.

Received only on channel 10 (09H) in

the GM mode, affecting channel 10

(09H) only.

30H: Drums Parameter Change

40H: Instrument Assign

knH: Key Number

* Also included in the panel key code in

the DOC Voice mode (because conver-

sion is not possible). Included in the GM

key code in the GM mode.

skH: Source Kit Number

• Absolute Tempo

[F0H] [43H] [73H] [yyH] [11H] [1nH]

[ccH] [ddH] [F7H]

43H= YAMAHA ID

73H= CLAVINOVA ID

yyH= Product ID (CVP-89= 36H)

11H= Clavinova special control code

1nH= Control MIDI Change

(Transmit: n = Control Change number)

(Receive: any channel OK)

cc= Absolute tempo low byte

dd= Absolute tempo high byte

Tempo= dd*128+ccH

• Beat, Tempo LED ON/OFF

[F0H] [43H] [73H] [yyH] [11H] [4FH]

[ccH] [ddH] [F7H]

43H= YAMAHA ID

73H= CLAVINOVA ID

yyH= Product ID

(CVP-89= 36H, or common 01H)

11H= Clavinova special control code

4FH= Control MIDI Change

ccH= 00H: Beat lamp on/off

01H: Tempo lamp on/off

ddH= 00H: On

7FH: Off

9. OTHER SYSTEM EXCLUSIVE

MESSAGES

• General MIDI Mode On

[F0H] [7EH] [7FH] [09H] [xxH] [F7H]

7EH= Universal Non-Real Time

7FH= ID of target device

09H= Sub-ID #1 General MIDI Message

xxH= Substatus

xxH Information

01H General MIDI On

02H General MIDI Off

* All sound off and all parameters are reset

to their default values when [01H] is re-

ceived.

• Master Tuning

[F0H] [43H] [1nH] [27H] [30H] [00H]

[00H] [mmH] [llH] [ccH] [F7H]

43H= YAMAHA ID

1nH= Ignored

27H

30H

00H

mmH= (mm<<4)+ll; 1step=1cent

llH= mm=08H, ll=00H; ±0cent

ccH= Ignored

• Master Volume

7FH= Universal Real Time

7FH= ID of target device

04H

01H

llH= Ignored

mmH= Volume data

• All MIDI data available for general use are

given above.

Voice List/Stimmenverzeichnis/Liste des voix

vii

Voice

MIDI DOC mode

Pitch Bend

Chorus

No.

Program

MIDI

Name

Range (Cent)

On/Off

No.

Program No.

1 00 12 Piano 100 OFF

2 01 68 Clavinova Tone 100 ON

3 02 50 E. Piano 100 OFF

4 03 14 Harpsichord 100 OFF

5 04 16 Vibes 100 OFF

6 05 24 Guitar 200 OFF

7 06 08 Strings 100 OFF

8 07 76 Organ 100 OFF

9 08 42 Choir 100 OFF

10 09 28 Upright Bass 200 OFF

11 10 30 Elec Bass 200 OFF

12 11 126 Drums 300 OFF

13 12 00 Brass 200 OFF

14 13 73 Pop Brass 200 OFF

15 14 01 Trumpet 200 OFF

16 15 40 Mute Trumpet 200 OFF

17 16 02 Horn 200 OFF

18 17 03 Sax 200 OFF

19 18 77 Sax Soft 200 OFF

20 19 04 Clarinet 200 OFF

21 20 05 Oboe 200 OFF

22 21 06 Flute 200 OFF

23 22 07 Accordion 100 OFF

24 23 41 Harmonica 100 OFF

25 24 74 Strings Soft 100 OFF

26 25 09 Violin 100 OFF

27 26 75 Violin Hard 100 OFF

28 27 10 Full Organ 100 OFF

29 28 11 Jazz Organ 1 100 ON

30 29 20 Synth Brass 200 ON

31 30 44 Synth Wood 200 ON

32 31 45 Synth Strings 100 ON

33 32 46 Synth Choir 100 ON

34 33 51 Piano Bright 100 OFF

35 34 48 Piano Soft 100 OFF

36 35 13 E. Piano DX 100 ON

37 36 22 Synth Crystal 200 ON

38 37 15 Celesta 100 OFF

39 38 17 Marimba 100 OFF

40 39 53 Folk Guitar 200 OFF

41 40 25 Jazz Guitar 1 200 OFF

42 41 72 Jazz Guitar 2 200 OFF

43 42 26 Rock Guitar 1 200 ON

44 43 69 Rock Guitar 2 200 OFF

45 44 70 Mute Guitar 200 ON

46 45 55 Banjo 200 OFF

47 46 56 Pizzicato 200 OFF

48 47 57 Harp 200 OFF

49 48 71 U. Bass Soft 200 OFF

50 49 29 E. Bass Soft 200 OFF

51 50 78 E. Bass Heavy 200 OFF

52 51 31 Synth Bass 200 OFF

53 52 23 Timpani & Orch. Hit 300 OFF

54 53 80 Bassoon 200 OFF

55 54 81 Chamber Strings 100 OFF

56 55 82 Jazz Organ 2 100 OFF

57 56 88 Rock Guitar 3 200 ON

58 57 89 Cosmic 1 200 ON

59 58 90 Cosmic 2 200 ON

60 59 91 Cosmic 3 200 OFF

Panel Voices (1—12)/Voices 13—60

* Available only in DOC mode MIDI reception

Flute 2: program number 79

Orch. Hit: program number 92

/Lista de voces

viii

Voice

MIDI

No.

Program

Name

No.

Piano

1 00 Acoustic Grand Piano

2 01 Bright Acoustic Piano

3 02 Electric Grand Piano

4 03 Honky-tonk Piano

5 04 Electric Piano 1

6 05 Electric Piano 2

7 06 Harpsichord

8 07 Clavi

Chromatic Percussion

9 08 Celesta

10 09 Glockenspiel

11 10 Music Box

12 11 Vibraphone

13 12 Marimba

14 13 Xylophone

15 14 Tubular Bells

16 15 Dulcimer

Organ

17 16 Drawbar Organ

18 17 Percussive Organ

19 18 Rock Organ

20 19 Church Organ

21 20 Reed Organ

22 21 Accordion

23 22 Harmonica

24 23 Tango Accordion

Guitar

25 24 Acoustic Guitar (nylon)

26 25 Acoustic Guitar (steel)

27 26 Electric Guitar (jazz)

28 27 Electric Guitar (clean)

29 28 Electric Guitar (muted)

30 29 Overdriven Guitar

31 30 Distortion Guitar

32 31 Guitar Harmonics

Bass

33 32 Acoustic Bass

34 33 Electric Bass (finger)

35 34 Electric Bass (pick)

36 35 Fretless Bass

37 36 Slap Bass 1

38 37 Slap Bass 2

39 38 Synth Bass 1

40 39 Synth Bass 2

Strings

41 40 Violin

42 41 Viola

43 42 Cello

44 43 Contrabass

45 44 Tremolo Strings

46 45 Pizzicato Strings

47 46 Orchestral Harp

48 47 Timpani

Voice

MIDI

No.

Program

Name

No.

Ensemble

49 48 Strings Ensemble 1

50 49 Strings Ensemble 2

51 50 Synth Strings 1

52 51 Synth Strings 2

53 52 Choir Aahs

54 53 Voice Oohs

55 54 Synth Voice

56 55 Orchestra Hit

Brass

57 56 Trumpet

58 57 Trombone

59 58 Tuba

60 59 Muted Trumpet

61 60 French Horn

62 61 Brass Section

63 62 Synth Brass 1

64 63 Synth Brass 2

Reed

65 64 Soprano Sax

66 65 Alto Sax

67 66 Tenor Sax

68 67 Baritone Sax

69 68 Oboe

70 69 English Horn

71 70 Bassoon

72 71 Clarinet

Pipe

73 72 Piccolo

74 73 Flute

75 74 Recorder

76 75 Pan Flute

77 76 Blown Bottle

78 77 Shakuhachi

79 78 Whistle

80 79 Ocarina

Synth Lead

81 80 Lead 1 (square)

82 81 Lead 2 (sawtooth)

83 82 Lead 3 (calliope)

84 83 Lead 4 (chiff)

85 84 Lead 5 (charang)

86 85 Lead 6 (voice)

87 86 Lead 7 (fifth)

88 87 Lead 8 (bass+Lead )

Voice

MIDI

No.

Program

Name

No.

Synth Pad

89 88 Pad 1 (new age)

90 89 Pad 2 (warm)

91 90 Pad 3 (polysynth)

92 91 Pad 4 (choir)

93 92 Pad 5 (bowed)

94 93 Pad 6 (metallic)

95 94 Pad 7 (halo)

96 95 Pad 8 (sweep)

Synth Effects

97 96 FX 1 (rain)

98 97 FX 2 (soundtrack)

99 98 FX 3 (crystal)

100 99 FX 4 (atmosphere)

101 100 FX 5 (brightness)

102 101 FX 6 (goblins)2

103 102 FX 7 (echoes)

104 103 FX 8 (sci-fi)

Ethnic

105 104 Sitar

106 105 Banjo

107 106 Shamisen

108 107 Koto

109 108 Kalimba

110 109 Bagpipe

111 110 Fiddle

112 111 Shanai

Percussive

113 112 Tinkle Bell

114 113 Agogo

115 114 Steel Drums

116 115 Woodblock

117 116 Taiko Drum

118 117 Melodic Tom

119 118 Synth Drum

120 119 Reverse Cymbal

Sound Effects

121 120 Guitar Fret Noise

122 121 Breath Noise

123 122 Seashore

124 123 Bird Tweet

125 124 Telephone Ring

126 125 Helicopter

127 126 Applause

128 127 Gunshot

GM Mode

No. Key Normal Kit Processed Kit

45 A1 Cymbal Mute Cymbal Mute

46 A#1 — Bell Tree

47 B1 — Storm/Thunder

48 C2 — Applause

49 C#2 — Hand Cymbal

50 D2 — Scratch

51 D#2 — Space Hit

52 E2 — Down Zap

53 F2 — Up Zap

54 F#2 Brush Roll Noise Roll

55 G2 — Hi-Q

56 G#2 Hi-Hat Closed Heavy Analog Hi-Hat

57 A2 — Voice Huh

58 A#2 Crash Cymbal Light Chinese Cymbal

59 B2 Bass Drum Light Bass Drum Analog Deep

60 C3 Snare Drum+Rim Heavy Snare Drum Low Rim Shot

61 C#3 Ride Cymbal Cup Ride Cymbal Cup

62 D3 Snare Drum + Rim Light Snare Drum High Rim Shot

63 D#3 — Voice Ha!

64 E3 — Voice Ao!

65 F3 Bass Drum Normal Bass Drum Analog Tight

66 F#3 Rim Shot Rim Shot

67 G3 Snare Drum Heavy Processed Snare Drum Mix

68 G#3 Brush Shot Noise Shot

69 A3 Snare Drum Light Snare Drum Analog

70 A#3 Hi-Hat Pedal Hi-Hat Pedal

71 B3 Snare Drum Echo Snare Drum Techno

72 C4 Tom 4 Fix Pitch Electric Tom 4

73 C#4 Hi-Hat Closed Normal Hi-Hat Closed

74 D4 Tom 3 Fix Pitch Electric Tom 3

75 D#4 Hi-Hat Open Hi-Hat Open

76 E4 Tom 2 Fix Pitch Electric Tom 2

77 F4 Tom 1 Fix Pitch Electric Tom 1

78 F#4 Ride Cymbal Normal Ride Cymbal

79 G4 Electric Tom 3 Sweep Electric Tom 3

80 G#4 Crash Cymbal Normal Crash Cymbal

81 A4 Electric Tom 2 Sweep Electric Tom 2

82 A#4 — Crash Cymbal Reverse

83 B4 Electric Tom 1 Sweep Electric Tom 1

84 C5 Conga Low Synth Conga Low

85 C#5 Cabasa Synth Cabasa

86 D5 Conga High Synth Conga High

87 D#5 Metronome Metronome

88 E5 Bongo High Synth Bongo High

89 F5 Timbale Low Timbale Low

90 F#5 Claves Synth Claves

91 G5 Timbale High Timbale High

92 G#5 Castanets Castanets

93 A5 Cuica Low Synth Cuica Low

94 A#5 Cowbell Cowbell

95 B5 Cuica High Synth Cuica High

96 C6 Hand Clap Analog Hand Clap

97 C#6 Agogo Low Synth Agogo Low

98 D6 — Finger Snap

99 D#6 Agogo High Synth Agogo High

100 E6 Bongo Low Synth Bongo Low

101 F6 — —

102 F#6 Tambourine Synth Tambourine

103 G6 — —

104 G#6 Triangle Closed Triangle Closed

105 A6 — —

106 A#6 Triangle Open Triangle Open

Percussion Kit List/Verzeichnis der Schlagzeug- und Percussion-

Keyboard Percussion (Voice No. 12: Drums) DOC/GM Mode

DOC Kit GM Kit

No. Key 129: Standard Kit

21 A-1 Cymbal Mute —

22 A#-1 — —

23 B-1 — —

24 C0 — Square Click

25 C#0 — Brush Tap

26 D0 — Brush Swirl Lo

27 D#0 — Brush Slap

28 E0 — Brush Swirl Hi

29 F0 — SD Roll

30 F#0 Brush Roll Castanets

31 G0 — SD Lo

32 G#0 HI-HAT Closed Heavey Sticks

33 A0 — BD Lo

34 A#0 Crash Cymbal Light Open Rim Shot

35 B0 BD Light BD Mid

36 C1 SD Rim Heavey BD Hi

37 C#1 Ride Cymbal Cup Closed Rim Shot

38 D1 SD Rim Light SD Mid

39 D#1 — Hand Clap

40 E1 — SD Hi

41 F1 BD Normal Floor Tom Lo

42 F#1 Rim Shot Hi-Hat Closed

43 G1 SD Heavy Floor Tom Hi

44 G#1 Brush Shot Hi-Hat Pedal

45 A1 SD Light Tom Lo

46 A#1 HI-HAT Pedal Hi-Hat Open

47 B1 SD Echo Tom Lo Mid

48 C2 Tom 4 Tom Hi Mid

49 C#2 HI-HAT Closed Normal Crash Cymbal

50 D2 Tom 3 Tom Hi

51 D#2 HI-HAT Open Ride Cymbal 1

52 E2 Tom 2 Chinese Cymbal

53 F2 Tom 1 Ride Cymbal Cup

54 F#2 Ride Cymbal Normal Tambourine

55 G2 E. Tom 3 Splash Cymbal

56 G#2 Crash Cymbal Normal Cowbell

57 A2 E. Tom 2 Crash Cymbal 2

58 A#2 — Vibraslap

59 B2 E. Tom 1 Ride Cymbal 2

60 C3 Conga Lo Bongo Hi

61 C#3 Cabasa Bongo Lo

62 D3 Conga Hi Conga Hi Mute

63 D#3 Metronome Conga Hi Open

64 E3 Bongo Hi Conga Lo

65 F3 Timbale Lo Timbale Hi

66 F#3 Claves Timbale Lo

67 G3 Timbale Hi Agogo Hi

68 G#3 Castanets Agogo Lo

69 A3 Cuica Lo Cabasa

70 A#3 Cowbell Maracas

71 B3 Cuica Hi Samba Whistle Hi

72 C4 Hand Clap Samba Whistle Lo

73 C#4 Agogo Lo Guiro Short

74 D4 — Guiro Long

75 D#4 Agogo Hi Claves

76 E4 Bongo Lo Wood Block Hi

77 F4 — Wood Block Lo

78 F#4 Tambourine Cuica Hi (Mute)

79 G4 — Cuica Lo (Open)

80 G#4 Triangle Closed Triangle Mute

81 A4 — Triangle Open

82 A#4 Triangle Open Shaker

83 B4 — Jingle Bell

84 C5 — Bell Tree

85 C#5 — One

86 D5 — Two

87 D#5 — Three

88 E5 — Four

• Cymbals can be muted by pressing the A1 key.

• Hi-Hat Open (D

4) is muted by Hi-Hat Closed

Heavy (G

2), Hi-Hat Closed Normal (C

4) and Hi-

Hat Pedal (A

3).

• Brush Roll (F

2) is muted by Brush Shot (G

3).

• Triangle Open (A

6) is muted by Triangle Closed

6).

• Beckenklänge können durch Drücken der Taste A1

gedämpft werden.

• HI-HAT OPEN (D

4) wird durch HI-HAT CLOSED

HEAVY (G

2), HI-HAT CLOSED NORMAL (C

und HI-HAT PEDAL (A

3) gedämpft.

• BRUSH ROLL (F

2) wird durch BRUSH SHOT

3) gedämpft.

• TRIANGLE OPEN (A

6) wird durch TRIANGLE

CLOSED (G

6) gedämpft.

•

Les cymbales peuvent être assourdies en appuyant sur

la touche A1.

• HI-HAT OPEN (D

4) est assourdi par HI-HAT

CLOSED HEAVY (G

2), HI-HAT CLOSED NORMAL

4) et HI-HAT PEDAL (A

3).

• BRUSH ROLL (F

2) est assourdi par BRUSH SHOT

3).

• TRIANGLE OPEN (A

6) est assourdi par TRIANGLE

CLOSED (G

6).

• Los platillos podrán silenciarse presionando la tecla A1.

• HI-HAT OPEN (D

4) se silencian con HI-HAT CLOSED

HEAVY (G

2), HI-HAT CLOSED NORMAL (C

4) y HI-HAT

PEDAL (A

3).

• BRUSH ROLL (F

2) se silencia con BRUSH SHOT (G

3).

• TRIANGLE OPEN (A

6) se silencia con TRIANGLE

CLOSED (G

6).

Sets/Liste des kits de percussion/Lista de juegos de percusión

130: Room Kit 131: Rock Kit 132:

Electronic Kit

133: Analog Kit 134: Jazz Kit 135: Brush Kit 136: Classic Kit

———————

<—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <——

<—— <—— Reverse Cymbal Reverse Cymbal <—— <—— <——

<—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <——

<—— <—— Hi-Q Hi-Q <—— <—— <——

Room SD Lo Rock SD Lo Gated SD Lo A. SD Lo Jazz SD Lo Brush Slap Lo Marching SD Lo

<—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <——

Room BD Lo Rock BD Lo Gated BD Lo A. BD Lo Jazz BD Lo Jazz BD Lo Gran Cassa Lo

<—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <——

Room BD Mid Rock BD Mid Gated BD Mid A. BD Mid Jazz BD Mid Jazz BD Mid Gran Cassa Mid

Room BD Hi Rock BD Hi Gated BD Hi A. BD Hi Jazz BD Hi Jazz BD Hi Gran Cassa Hi

<—— <—— <—— A. Closed Rim <—— <—— <——

Room SD Mid Rock SD Mid Gated SD Mid A. SD Mid Jazz SD Mid Brush Slap Hi Marching SD Mid

<—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <——

Room SD Hi Rock SD Hi Gated SD Hi A. SD Hi Jazz SD Hi Brush Tap Marching SD Hi

Room Tom 1 (Lo) Rock Tom 1 (Lo) E. Tom 1 (Lo) A. Tom 1 (Lo) Jazz Tom 1 (Lo) Brush Tom 1 (Lo) Jazz Tom 1 (Lo)

<—— <—— <—— A. Hi-Hat Closed Hi Dark Hi-Hat Closed Hi Dark Hi-Hat Closed Hi Dark Hi-Hat Closed Hi

Room Tom 2 Rock Tom 2 E. Tom 2 A. Tom 2 Jazz Tom 2 Brush Tom 2 Jazz Tom 2

<—— <—— <—— A. Hi-Hat Closed Lo Dark Hi-Hat Closed Lo Dark Hi-Hat Closed Lo Dark Hi-Hat Closed Lo

Room Tom 3 Rock Tom 3 E. Tom 3 A. Tom 3 Jazz Tom 3 Brush Tom 3 Jazz Tom 3

<—— <—— <—— A. Hi-Hat Open Dark Hi-Hat Open Dark Hi-Hat Open Dark Hi-Hat Open

Room Tom 4 Rock Tom 4 E. Tom 4 A. Tom 4 Jazz Tom 4 Brush Tom 4 Jazz Tom 4

Room Tom 5 Rock Tom 5 E. Tom 5 A. Tom 5 Jazz Tom 5 Brush Tom 5 Jazz Tom 5

<—— <—— <—— A. Cymbal <—— Brush Ride Cymbal 1 Hand Cymbal Long Lo

Room Tom 6 (Hi) Rock Tom 6 (Hi) E. Tom 6 (Hi) A. Tom 6 (Hi) Jazz Tom 6 (Hi) Brush Tom 6 (Hi) Jazz Tom 6 (Hi)

<—— <—— <—— <—— <—— Brush Ride Cymbal 2 Hand Cymbal Short Lo

<—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <——

<—— <—— A. Cowbell <—— <—— <——

<—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— Hand Cymbal Long Hi

<—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <——

<—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— Hand Cymbal Short Hi

<—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <——

<—— <—— <—— A. Conga Hi <—— <—— <——

<—— <—— <—— A. Conga Mid <—— <—— <——

<—— <—— <—— A. Conga Lo <—— <—— <——

<—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <——

<—— <—— <—— A. Maracas <—— <—— <——

<—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <——

<—— <—— <—— A. Claves <—— <—— <——

<—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <——

<—— <—— Scratch Hi Scratch Hi <—— <—— <——

<—— <—— Scratch Lo Scratch Lo <—— <—— <——

<—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <——

———————

* “<——” indicates the content is the same as that of Standard kit.

* “<——” zeigt an, daß der Inhalt identisch mit dem Standardset ist.

* “<——” indique que le contenu est le même que celui du kit standard.

* “<——” indica que el contenido es el mismo que el del juego estándar.

Specifications/Technische Daten/Spécifications/Especificaciones

CVP-89

KEYBOARD 88 KEYS (A-1 — C7)

TONE GENERATOR AWM (Advanced Wave Memory)

VOICE SELECTORS & PIANO, CLAVINOVA TONE, E. PIANO, HARPSICHORD, VIBES, GUITAR, STRINGS, ORGAN, CHOIR,

CONTROLS UPRIGHT BASS, ELEC BASS, DRUMS, VOICE 13 - 60, VOICE ▲/▼, SPLIT

(GM 128 voices also available)

AUTO BASS CHORD & FULL KEYBOARD, SINGLE/FINGERED, SOLO STYLEPLAY, RHYTHM VOLUME,

CONTROLS CHORD 1 VOLUME, CHORD 2 VOLUME, BASS VOLUME

STYLE SELECTORS & POP, 16 BEAT, DANCE POP, BOOGIE, SLOW ROCK, SWING, JAZZ BALLAD, BOSSA, RHUMBA, MARCH,

CONTROLS COUNTRY, WALTZ, STYLE 13-50, STYLE ▲/▼, DISK STYLE 1/2

START/STOP, SYNCHRO START, INTRO/ENDING, NORMAL/FILL TO NORMAL, VARIATION/ FILL

TO VARIATION, TEMPO ▲/▼, TAP, METRONOME, LCD Display, BEAT LED, FILL IN Bar (right/left)

DISK STYLE 50 styles (refer to page 26)

KEYBOARD PERCUSSION Normal Kit: 44 instruments, Proccesed Kit: 58 instruments (refer to page 8, ix), GM Drum Kit x 8

REVERB ROOM, HALL 1, HALL 2, COSMIC

CUSTOM RHYTHM CUSTOM RHYTHM, PROGRAM

REGISTRATION REGISTRATION, MEMORY

DISK ORCHESTRA SONG/PHRASE NUMBER, RIGHT/1, LEFT/2, ORCH/3-10, RHYTHM, PHRASE REPEAT, GUIDE,

LAMP CANCEL, START/STOP, REW, FF, PAUSE, REC, CHORD SEQUENCE, SONG SELECT

DISK DRIVE & CONTROLS 3.5" 2DD Micro Floppy Disk Drive.

PEDAL CONTROLS DAMPER

SOSTENUTO

SOFT (START/STOP, RHYTHM BREAK, PITCH BEND, SOLO STYLEPLAY)

OTHER CONTROLS MASTER VOLUME, UTILITY, DEMO, POWER

JACKS & CONNECTORS PHONES x 2, AUX OUT R and L/L + R, AUX IN R and L, MIDI IN/OUT/THRU, EXP PEDAL, MIC., MIC. VOL.

INPUT & OUTPUT AUX OUT: Output Impedance 600 Ω

LEVEL/IMPEDANCE AUX IN: Input Impedance 10 kΩ /Input Sensitivity -10dBm

MAIN AMPLIFIERS 100 W (50W x 1) + (25W x 2)

SPEAKERS 18 cm (7”) x 1, 13 cm (5-1/8”) x 2, 2.5 cm (1”) x 2, 8 cm (3-1/8”) x 2

DIMENSIONS

Music stand down

1434 mm x 665.6 mm x 844.8 mm (56-1/2” x 26-1/4” x 33-1/4”)

(W x D x H)

Music stand up

1434 mm x 665.6 mm x 1014.8 mm (56-1/2” x 26-1/4” x 40”)

WEIGHT 83 kg (183 lbs.)

RIGHT

CENTER

LEFT

* Specifications subject to change without notice.

* Änderungen ohne Vorankündigung vorbehalten.

* Sous toute réserve de modification des caractéristiques sans préavis.

* Especificaciones sujetas a cambios sin previo aviso.

* All fingerings shown are simple root-position types.

* Die hier gezeigten Akkorde sind jeweils die Grundakkorde.

* Tous les doigtés indiqués sont du type à position fondamentale simple.

* Todos los digitados se muestran como tipos de posición de raíz sencilla.

Minor

Moll

Mineur

Menor

Major

Dur

Majeur

Mayor

Seventh

Dur-Septakkord

Septième

Séptima

Minor seventh

Moll-Septakkord

Mineure septième

Menor de séptima

xii

Fingering Chart/Akkordliste/Tablature/Gráfica de digitado

E

(D )

D

(C )

F

(G )

A

(G )

B

(A )

E m

(D m)

D m

(C m)

F m

(G m)

A m

(G m)

B m

(A m)

E m

(D m )

D m

(C m )

F m

(G m )

A m

(G m )

B m

(A m )

E

(D )

D

(C )

F

(G )

A

(G )

B

(A )

Fingering Chart/Akkordliste/Tablature/Gráfica de digitado

Minor major seventh

Moll-Akkord mit großer

Septime

Septième majeure sur

mineur

Menor de séptima mayor

Major seventh

Dur-Akkord mit großer

Septime

Majeure septième

Mayor de séptima

Augmented

Übermäßig

Augmenté

Aumentado

Diminished

Vermindert

Diminué

Disminuida

xiii

E M

(D M )

D M

(C M )

F M

(G M )

A M

(G M )

B M

(A M )

Caug

E aug

(D aug)

Daug

Eaug

Faug

Gaug

Aaug

Baug

D aug

(C aug)

F aug

(G aug)

A aug

(G aug)

B aug

(A aug)

CmM

E mM

(D mM )

DmM

EmM

FmM

GmM

AmM

BmM

D mM

(C mM )

F mM

(G mM )

A mM

(G mM )

B mM

(A mM )

Cdim

E dim

(D dim)

Ddim

Edim

Fdim

Gdim

Adim

Bdim

D dim

(C dim)

F dim

(G dim)

A dim

(G dim)

B dim

(A dim)

Fingering Chart/Akkordliste/Tablature/Gráfica de digitado

Sixth

Dur-Akkord mit

hinzugefügter Sexte

Sixte

Sexta

Suspended fourth

Vorgehaltene

Quarte

Quarte sur sensible

Cuarta suspendida

Major seventh flatted fifth

Dur-Akkord mit großer

Septime und verminderter

Quinte

Quinte diminuée sur

majeure septième

Mayor de séptima y quinta

bemol

Minor seventh flatted fifth

Moll-Septakkord mit

verminderter Quinte

Quinte diminuée sur

mineure septième

Menor de séptima y quinta

bemol

xiv

E

(D )

D

(C )

F

(G )

A

(G )

B

(A )

Csus

E sus

(D sus )

Dsus

Esus

Fsus

Gsus

Asus

Bsus

D sus

(C sus )

F sus

(G sus )

A sus

(G sus )

B sus

(A sus )

(

E m

(D m )

D m

(C m )

F m

(G m )

A m

(G m )

B m

(A m )

(

E M

(D M )

D M

(C M )

F M

(G M )

A M

(G M )

B M

(A M )

(

Fingering Chart/Akkordliste/Tablature/Gráfica de digitado

Minor sixth

Moll-Akkord mit

hinzugefügter Sexte

Mineure sixte

Menor de sexta

Seventh suspended fourth

Dur-Septakkord mit

vorgehaltener Quarte

Quarte sur septième sensible

Séptima y cuarta suspendida

CmM

E mM

(D mM )

DmM

EmM

FmM

GmM

AmM

BmM

D mM

(C mM )

F mM

(G mM )

A mM

(G mM )

B mM

(A mM )

(b5)

(

b5)

(

b5)

(

b5)

(

b5)

(

b5)

(

b5)

(

b5)

(

b5)

(

b5)

(

b5)

(

b5)

(

b5)

(

b5)

(

b5)

(

b5)

E m

(D m )

D m

(C m )

F m

(G m )

A m

(G m )

B m

(A m )

C sus

E sus

(D sus )

D sus

E sus

F sus

G sus

A sus

B sus

D sus

(C sus )

F sus

(G sus )

A sus

(G sus )

B sus

(A sus )

E

(D )

D

(C )

F

(G )

A

(G )

B

(A )

(b5)

(

b5)

(

b5)

(

b5)

(

b5)

(

b5)

(

b5)

(

b5)

(

b5)

(

b5)

(

b5)

(

b5)

(

b5)

(

b5)

(

b5)

(

b5)

(

b5)

(b5)

Minor major seventh flatted fifth

Moll-Akkord mit großer Septime

und verminderter Quinte

Septième majeure sur mineur

quinte diminué

Menor mayor de séptima y

quinta bemol

Flatted fifth

Verminderter Quinte

Quinte diminuée

Quinta bemol

Fingering Chart/Akkordliste/Tablature/Gráfica de digitado

Minor flatted fifth

Moll-Akkord mit

verminderter Quinte

Mineure quinte diminuée

Menor de quinta bemol

Seventh flatted fifth

Dur-Septakkord mit

verminderter Quinte

Quinte diminuée en

septième

Séptima y quinta bemol

Seventh sharp fifth

Dur-Septakkord mit

erhöhter Quinte

Septième ajoutée sur

quinte

Séptima y quinta

sostenida

Major seventh sharp fifth

Dur-Akkord mit großer

Septime und erhöhter Quinte

Majeure septième ajoutée

sur quinte

Mayor de séptima y quinta

sostenida

xvi

E m

(D m )

D m

(C m )

F m

(G m )

A m

(G m )

B m

(A m )

(

E

(D )

D

(C )

F

(G )

A

(G )

B

(A )

(

E

(D )

D

(C )

F

(G )

A

(G )

B

(A )

(

E M

(D M )

D M

(C M )

F M

(G M )

B M

(A M )

A M

(G M )

(

MIDI Implementation Chart

xvii

Not Available

FCC INFORMATION (U.S.A.)

1. IMPORTANT NOTICE: DO NOT MODIFY THIS UNIT!

This product, when installed as indicated in the instructions contained in

this manual, meets FCC requirements. Modifications not expressly

approved by Yamaha may void your authority, granted by the FCC, to

use the product.

2. IMPORTANT: When connecting this product to accessories and/or

another product use only high quality shielded cables. Cable/s supplied

with this product MUST be used. Follow all installation instructions.

Failure to follow instructions could void your FCC authorization to use

this product in the USA.

3. NOTE: This product has been tested and found to comply with the

requirements listed in FCC Regulations, Part 15 for Class “B” digital

devices. Compliance with these requirements provides a reasonable

level of assurance that your use of this product in a residential

environment will not result in harmful interference with other electronic

devices. This equipment generates/uses radio frequencies and, if not

installed and used according to the instructions found in the users

manual, may cause interference harmful to the operation of other

electronic devices. Compliance with FCC regulations does not guarantee

that interference will not occur in all installations. If this product is found

to be the source of interference, which can be determined by turning the

unit “OFF” and “ON”, please try to eliminate the problem by using one of

the following measures:

Relocate either this product or the device that is being affected by the

interference.

Utilize power outlets that are on different branch (circuit breaker or fuse)

circuits or install AC line filter/s.

In the case of radio or TV interference, relocate/reorient the antenna. If

the antenna lead-in is 300 ohm ribbon lead, change the lead-in to co-axial

type cable.

If these corrective measures do not produce satisfactory results, please

contact the local retailer authorized to distribute this type of product. If

you can not locate the appropriate retailer, please contact Yamaha Cor-

poration of America, Electronic Service Division, 6600 Orangethorpe Ave,

Buena Park, CA90620

The above statements apply ONLY to those products distributed by

Yamaha Corporation of America or its subsidiaries.

* This applies only to products distributed by YAMAHA CORPORATION OF AMERICA.

• This applies only to products distributed by Yamaha-Kemble Music (U.K.) Ltd.

IMPORTANT NOTICE FOR THE UNITED KINGDOM

Connecting the Plug and Cord

IMPORTANT. The wires in this mains lead are coloured in accordance

with the following code:

BLUE : NEUTRAL

BROWN : LIVE

As the colours of the wires in the mains lead of this apparatus may not

correspond with the coloured makings identifying the terminals in your

plug proceed as follows:

The wire which is coloured BLUE must be connected to the terminal

which is marked with the letter N or coloured BLACK.

The wire which is coloured BROWN must be connected to the terminal

which is marked with the letter L or coloured RED.

Making sure that neither core is connected to the earth terminal of the

three pin plug.

CANADA

THIS DIGITAL APPARATUS DOES NOT EXCEED THE “CLASS B”

LIMITS FOR RADIO NOISE EMISSIONS FROM DIGITAL APPARA-

TUS SET OUT IN THE RADIO INTERFERENCE REGULATION OF

THE CANADIAN DEPARTMENT OF COMMUNICATIONS.

LE PRESENT APPAREIL NUMERIQUE N’EMET PAS DE BRUITS

RADIOELECTRIQUES DEPASSANT LES LIMITES APPLICABLES

AUX APPAREILS NUMERIQUES DE LA “CLASSE B” PRESCRITES

DANS LE REGLEMENT SUR LE BROUILLAGE RADIOELECTRIQUE

EDICTE PAR LE MINISTERE DES COMMUNICATIONS DU CANADA.

CAUTION: TO PREVENT ELECTRIC SHOCK, MATCH WIDE

BLADE OF PLUG TO WIDE SLOT, FULLY INSERT.

ATTENTION: POUR ÉVITER LES CHOCS ÉLECTRIQUES,

INTRODUIRE LA LAME LA PLUS LARGE DE LA FICHE DANS LA

BORNE CORRESPONDANTE DE LA PRISE ET POUSSER

JUSQU’AU FOND.

• This applies only to products distributed by Yamaha Canada Music Ltd.

• Ceci ne s’applique qu’aux produits distribués par Yamaha Canada Musique Ltée.

WARNING- When using any electrical or electronic prod-

uct, basic precautions should always be followed. These pre-

cautions include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. Read all Safety Instructions, Installation Instructions,

Special Message Section items, and any Assembly Instructions

found in this manual BEFORE marking any connections, in-

cluding connection to the main supply.

2. Main Power Supply Verification: Yamaha products are

manufactured specifically for the supply voltage in the area

where they are to be sold. If you should move, or if any doubt

exists about the supply voltage in your area, please contact

your dealer for supply voltage verification and (if applicable)

instructions. The required supply voltage is printed on the

name plate. For name plate location, please refer to the graphic

found in the Special Message Section of this manual.

3. This product may be equipped with a polarized plug

(one blade wider than the other). If you are unable to insert the

plug into the outlet, turn the plug over and try again. If the

problem persists, contact an electrician to have the obsolete

outlet replaced. Do NOT defeat the safety purpose of the plug.

4. Some electronic products utilize external power sup-

plies or adapters. Do NOT connect this type of product to any

power supply or adapter other than one described in the

owners manual, on the name plate, or specifically

recommended by Yamaha.

5. WARNING: Do not place this product or any other

objects on the power cord or place it in a position where any-

one could walk on, trip over, or roll anything over power or

connecting cords of any kind. The use of an extension cord is

not recommended! If you must use an extension cord, the

minimum wire size for a 25' cord (or less) is 18 AWG. NOTE:

The smaller the AWG number, the larger the current handling

capacity. For longer extension cords, consult a local electri-

cian.

6. Ventilation: Electronic products, unless specifically

designed for enclosed installations, should be placed in loca-

tions that do not interfere with proper ventilation. If instruc-

tions for enclosed installations are not provided, it must be

assumed that unobstructed ventilation is required.

7. Temperature considerations: Electronic products should

be installed in locations that do not significantly contribute to

their operating temperature. Placement of this product close to

heat sources such as; radiators, heat registers and other devices

that produce heat should be avoided.

8. This product was NOT designed for use in wet/damp loca-

tions and should not be used near water or exposed to rain. Exam-

ples of wet/damp locations are; near a swimming pool, spa, tub,

sink, or wet basement.

9. This product should be used only with the components

supplied or; a cart, rack, or stand that is recommended by the

manufacturer. If a cart, rack, or stand is used, please observe all

safety markings and instructions that accompany the accessory

product.

10. The power supply cord (plug) should be disconnected from

the outlet when electronic products are to be left unused for ex-

tended periods of time. Cords should also be disconnected when

there is a high probability of lightening and/or electrical storm

activity.

11. Care should be taken that objects do not fall and liquids are

not spilled into the enclosure through any openings that may exist.

12. Electrical/electronic products should be serviced by a

qualified service person when:

a. The power supply cord has been damaged; or

b. Objects have fallen, been inserted, or liquids have been

spilled into the enclosure through openings; or

c. The product has been exposed to rain; or

d. The product does not operate, exhibits a marked change

in performance; or

e. The product has been dropped, or the enclosure of the

product has been damaged.

13. Do not attempt to service this product beyond that de-

scribed in the user-maintenance instructions. All other servicing

should be referred to qualified service personnel.

14. This product, either alone or in combination with an ampli-

fier and headphones or speaker/s, may be capable of producing

sound levels that could cause permanent hearing loss. DO NOT

operate for a long period of time at a high volume level or at a

level that is uncomfortable. If you experience any hearing loss or

ringing in the ears, you should consult an audiologist.

IMPORTANT: The louder the sound, the shorter the time period

before damage occurs.

15. Some Yamaha products may have benches and/or acces-

sory mounting fixtures that are either supplied as a part of the

product or as optional accessories. Some of these items are de-

signed to be dealer assembled or installed Please make sure that

benches are stable and any optional fixtures (where applicable) are

well secured BEFORE using. Benches supplied by Yamaha are

designed for seating only. No other uses are recommended.

INFORMATION RELATING TO PERSONAL INJURY, ELECTRICAL SHOCK,

AND FIRE HAZARD POSSIBILITIES HAS BEEN INCLUDED IN THIS LIST.

IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS

92-469-2

PLEASE KEEP THIS MANUAL

VS18130 410POCP5.2-02B0 Printed in Japan

Transcripción de documentos

Owner’s Manual Bedienungsanleitung Mode d’emploi Manual de instrucciones SPECIAL MESSAGE SECTION PRODUCT SAFETY MARKINGS: Yamaha electronic products may have either labels similar to the graphics shown below or molded/stamped facsimiles of these graphics on the enclosure. The explanation of these graphics appears on this page. Please observe all cautions indicated on this page and those indicated in the safety instruction section. CAUTION RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK DO NOT OPEN CAUTION: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK. DO NOT REMOVE COVER (OR BACK). NO USER-SERVICEABLE PARTS INSIDE. REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL. See bottom of Keyboard enclosure for graphic symbol markings The exclamation point with the equilateral triangle is intended to alert the user to the presence of important operating and maintenance (servicing) instructions in the literature accompanying the product. The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol within the equilateral triangle is intended to alert the user to the presence of uninsulated “dangerous voltage” within the product’s enclosure that may be of sufficient magnitude to constitute a risk of electrical shock. IMPORTANT NOTICE: All Yamaha electronic products are tested and approved by an independent safety testing laboratory in order that you may be sure that when it is properly installed and used in its normal and customary manner, all foreseeable risks have been eliminated. DO NOT modify this unit or commission others to do so unless specifically authorized by Yamaha. Product performance and/or safety standards may be diminished. Claims filed under the expressed warranty may be denied if the unit is/has been modified. Implied warranties may also be affected. SPECIFICATIONS SUBJECT TO CHANGE: The information contained in this manual is believed to be correct at the time of printing. However, Yamaha reserves the right to change or modify any of the specifications without notice or obligation to update existing units. ENVIRONMENTAL ISSUES: Yamaha strives to produce products that are both user safe and environmentally friendly. We sincerely believe that our products and the production methods used to produce them, meet these goals. In keeping with both the letter and the spirit of the law, we want you to be aware of the following: Battery Notice: This product MAY contain a small nonrechargeable battery which (if applicable) is soldered in place. The average life span of this type of battery is approximately five years. When replacement becomes necessary, contact a qualified service representative to perform the replacement. Warning: Do not attempt to recharge, disassemble, or incinerate this type of battery. Keep all batteries away from children. Dispose of used batteries promptly and as regulated by applicable laws. Note: In some areas, the servicer is required by law to return the defective parts. However, you do have the option of having the servicer dispose of these parts for you. Disposal Notice: Should this product become damaged beyond repair, or for some reason its useful life is considered to be at an end, please observe all local, state, and federal regulations that relate to the disposal of products that contain lead, batteries, plastics, etc. NOTICE: Service charges incurred due to lack of knowledge relating to how a function or effect works (when the unit is operating as designed) are not covered by the manufacturer’s warranty, and are therefore the owners responsibility. Please study this manual carefully and consult your dealer before requesting service. NAME PLATE LOCATION: The graphic below indicates the location of the name plate. The model number, serial number, power requirements, etc., are located on this plate. You should record the model number, serial number, and the date of purchase in the spaces provided below and retain this manual as a permanent record of your purchase. Model _____________________________________ Serial No. __________________________________ Purchase Date _____________________________ 92-469- ➀ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ Owner’s Manual English Bedienungsanleitung Deutsch Mode d’emploi Français Manual de instrucciones Español Introduction Thank you for choosing a Yamaha Clavinova. Your Clavinova is a fine musical instrument that employs advanced Yamaha music technology. With the proper care, your Clavinova will give you many years of musical pleasure. ● AWM (Advanced Wave Memory) tone generator system offers a range of 60 rich, realistic voices. ● 32-note polyphony permits use of sophisticated playing techniques. ● Piano-like touch response provides extensive expressive control and outstanding playability. ● Dual and split play modes allow 2 voices to be played simultaneously or individually with the left and right hands. ● 50 exciting accompaniment styles can be used to provide rhythm-only accompaniment or fully-orchestrated rhythm, bass, and chord accompaniment. 50 additional accompaniment styles are provided on floppy disk (Style Disk). ● Custom Rhythm lets you create original rhythm patterns that can be recalled and played in the same way as the presets. ● Full-keyboard ABC (Auto Bass Chord) provides accompaniment as you play across the entire keyboard. ● 50 Solo Styleplay variations make it simple to produce rich, complex harmonies. ● 10-track performance memory records and plays back your keyboard performances. ● Registration Memory memorizes 12 complete controlpanel setups that you can recall whenever needed. ● Internal 3.5" floppy disk drive provides extended Performance Memory capacity and Disk Orchestra playback capability – one blank floppy disk for recording and one Disk Orchestra Collection disk with corresponding score are provided. ● MIDI compatibility, GM voices, and a range of MIDI functions make the Clavinova useful in a range of advanced MIDI music systems. In order to make the most of your Clavinova’s performance potential and features, we urge you to read this Owner’s Manual thoroughly, and keep it in a safe place for later reference. Contents Taking Care of Your Clavinova 1 Accompaniment ■ The Panel Controls 2 Preparation 4 The Volume Controls 5 Demonstration Playback 6 Voice Selection 7 ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Selecting the 60 Voices ....................... 7 Keyboard Percussion .......................... 8 Dual Mode ■ ■ Engaging the Dual Mode ..................... 9 Dual-mode Voice Balance ................... 9 Split Mode ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ 10 Engaging the Split Mode ................... 10 Changing the Split Voices ................. 10 Changing the Split Point .................... 10 Split Balance ..................................... 11 Damper Pedal Operation in the Split Mode ......................................... 11 Digital Reverb Effects ■ 9 12 Selecting a Reverb Effect .................. 12 Reverb Depth Control ........................ 12 The Keyboard & Polyphony 13 ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ The Pedals 14 ■ Right Pedal (Damper Pedal) ............. 14 Center Pedal (Sostenuto Pedal) ........ 14 Left Pedal (Multi-function) ................. 14 ■ Pitch Control ■ ■ The Pitch Display .............................. 16 ■ ■ ■ ■ Guided Right- and Left-hand Practice ... 32 Repeat Functions .............................. 33 Other Playback Controls ................... 34 DISK ORCHESTRA COLLECTION Disk Copy .......................................... 34 Playing Other Types of Music Data ... 34 Performance Memory 35 Easy One-pass Recording & Playback .. 35 Multi-track Recording & Playback ..... 36 ■ Adding New Tracks ........................... 38 ■ Punch-in Recording ........................... 39 ■ Playback ............................................ 40 The Chord Sequence Function ........... 41 Utility Functions 42 Selecting & Using the Utility Functions . 42 The Utility Mode Functions ................ 42 Effect Functions ..................................... 43 Disk Functions ....................................... 44 MIDI Functions ....................................... 54 General Utilities ..................................... 60 ■ The Connectors 65 Factory Preset Recall 66 Troubleshooting 66 Options 66 Index 67 28 Using Solo Styleplay ......................... 28 Harmonization Variations .................. 28 The Left Pedal & Solo Styleplay ........ 28 29 Memory Store .................................... 29 Recall ................................................ 29 Disk Orchestra 16 26 Selecting & Loading Disk Styles ........ 26 Using a Loaded Disk Style ................ 27 Registration Memory ■ 24 Creating an Original Rhythm Pattern 24 Playing Back Your Custom Rhythm Pattern ............................................... 25 Solo Styleplay ■ 21 Single-Finger & Fingered Accompaniment ................................. 21 Full-keyboard ABC ............................ 22 Volume Control .................................. 23 Changing the ABC Split Point ........... 23 Special Modes ................................... 23 Disk Styles 13 ■ ■ Custom Rhythm Pan ■ ■ Auto Bass Chord (ABC) ■ ■ 17 Style Selection ................................... 17 Tempo Control ................................... 18 Starting the Accompaniment ............. 18 Fill-ins ................................................ 20 Left-pedal Rhythm Break ................... 20 Stopping the Accompaniment ........... 20 Metronome ........................................ 20 30 Automatic Performance ..................... 30 Playing Back only Specific Parts ....... 31 Volume Control .................................. 32 Assembly ................................................ i MIDI Data Format ................................... iii Voice List .............................................. vii Percussion Kit List ............................... ix Specifications ....................................... xi Fingering Chart .................................... xii MIDI Implementation Chart ................ xvii Taking Care of Your Clavinova 1 Your Clavinova will give you years of playing pleasure if you observe the simple rules given below: 1. Avoid Humidity & Heat Avoid placing the Clavinova in areas that are subject to excessive humidity or heat. Do not leave the instrument near heaters or in a car exposed to direct sunlight, for example. 2. Avoid Dust & Moisture Avoid locations in which the instrument is likely to be exposed to excessive dust or moisture. 3. Power-off Before Connecting Connections between the Clavinova and any other device must be made with both pieces of equipment turned off. 4. Handle With Care nism and/or the floppy disk. To remove a partially ejected disk, try pressing the eject button once again or push the disk back into the slot, then repeat the eject procedure carefully. ■ Never open or close the key cover while a disk is extending from the drive (i.e. in the ejected position). The key cover may contact the disk, possibly damaging the disk or even the disk drive. ■ Do not insert anything but floppy disks into the disk drive. Other objects may cause damage to the disk drive or floppy disk. ■ Use only double-sided double density (2DD) 3.5-inch floppy disks with the Clavinova. Never apply excessive force to the controls, connectors or other parts of your Clavinova, and avoid scratching or bumping it with hard objects. Further, always turn the POWER switch off after use, and close the key cover to protect the keyboard. 5. Clean Carefully Clean the cabinet and keys of your Clavinova only with a clean, slightly damp cloth. A neutral cleanser may be used if desired. Never use abrasive cleansers, waxes, solvents or chemical dust cloths since these can dull or damage the finish. 6. Never Tamper With the Internal Circuitry Never open the Clavinova cabinet and touch or tamper with the internal circuitry. Tampering with the circuitry can result in electrical shock! 7. Electric Interference Since the Clavinova contains digital circuitry, it may cause interference if placed too close to radio or television receivers. If this occurs, move the instrument further away from the affected equipment. 8. Name Plate Location The Clavinova name plate, including the unit’s serial number, is located on the bottom panel of the main unit. 9. Handling Floppy Disks Yamaha Disk Orchestra Collection and Style Disk are writeprotected, and therefore cannot be used to save songs. To save Performance Memory songs from the Performance Memory, a blank floppy disk should be used (one blank disk is supplied with the Clavinova). Taking Care of Your Floppy Disks ■ Do NOT eject the disk during recording or playback, or at any time when the disk drive lamp is lit. Doing so may damage both the disk and the FDD. ■ Do NOT turn the Clavinova on or off while the disk is in the drive. ■ Always eject the disk before turning the Clavinova off. ■ When ejecting a floppy disk from the disk drive: Precautions Regarding Floppy Disk Use ■ Never open the disk’s shutter. Dirt or dust on the Internal magnetic surface will cause data errors. ■ Never leave disks near a speaker, TV, or other device that emits a strong magnetic field. ■ Do not store disks in places exposed to direct sunlight or sources of high temperature. ■ Do not place heavy objects such as books on top of a disk. ■ Avoid getting the disks wet. ■ Be sure to store the disks in environmental conditions as specified below: • Storage temperature: 4° to 53°C (39° to 127°F). • Storage humidity: 8 to 90% relative humidity. • Store in an area free from dust, sand, smoke, etc. ■ Be sure to apply the disk label at the proper position. When changing the label never cover the old label with a new label; always remove the old label first. Head Cleaning The head of the disk drive unit will get dirty as you use it eventually causing data errors. If this occurs, clean the head with a 3.5 inch head cleaning disk (available from most computer supply stores). Data Backup It is recommended that you copy your recorded songs to another disk for backup (see page 46). If the original disk is damaged or your song is deleted, the backup disk can be used instead of the original. Protecting Your Data (Write Protect Tab) Disk drive lamp • To eject a floppy disk, press the eject button slowly as far as it will go. Then when the disk Is fully ejected, remove it by hand. • The disk may not be ejected properly if the eject button is pressed too quickly or if it is not pressed in far enough. (The eject button may become stuck halfway with the disk extending from the slot by only a few millimeters). If this is the case, do not attempt to pull out the partially ejected disk. Doing so may damage the disk drive mecha- Write protect tab open (locked — write protected) Write protect tab closed (unlocked — write enabled) ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 2 The Panel Controls P R R AUX IN AUX OUT L L/L+R a 2 45 3 7 9! # % & 6 8 0 @ $ ^ RHYTHM BASS MAX DEMO LEFT PEDAL UTILITY REVERB FULL KEYBOARD SINGLE/ FINGERED ABC ABC SYNCHRO START SOLO STYLEPLAY INTRO/ ENDING NORMAL VARIATION START/STOP MIN C D E FILL TO NORMAL F PROGRAM CUSTOM RHYTHM MIN AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT MASTER VOLUME ) 1 CHORD 2 MAX G A FILL TO VARIATION q BEAT * POP 16BEAT DANCE POP BOOGIE SLOW ROCK SWING JAZZ BALLAD BOSSA RHUMBA ( MARCH COUNTRY WALTZ STYLE 13-50 STYLE 1 DISK STYLE 2 we r TAP METRONOME – + TEMPO – / NO + / YES t PIANO CLAVINOVA TONE E. PIANO HARPSICHORD VIBES GUITAR STRINGS ORGAN CHOIR 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 STYLE UPRIGH BASS VOICE B 1 POWER W A-1 B-1 C0 D0 E0 F0 G0 A0 B0 C1 D1 E1 F1 G1 A1 B1 C2 D2 E2 F2 G2 A2 B2 C3 D3 E3 F3 G3 A3 B3 C4 D4 E4 F4 G4 A4 I MIC. VOL MIN MIC. PHONES MAX O R E ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 0 The Panel Controls 3 1 POWER Switch ........................................................ page 4 2 MASTER VOLUME Control ..................................... page 5 MIDI 4 [DEMO] Button ......................................................... page 6 d IN OUT THRU 3 [UTILITY] Button ............... page 5, 13, 30, 33, 38, 42—64 5 [LEFT PEDAL] Button ............................................ page 14 EXP PEDAL 6 [REVERB] Button ................................................... page 12 s 7 AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT Volume Controls .... page 5, 23 8 [START/STOP] Button .................................... page 18, 22 9 ABC [FULL KEYBOARD] Button ........................... page 22 0 [INTRO/ENDING] Button ................................ page 19, 22 ! ABC [SINGLE/FINGERED] Button ....................... page 21 @ [NORMAL/FILL TO NORMAL] Button ............ page 18, 22 # [SYNCHRO START] Button ................................... page 19 $ [VARIATION/FILL TO VARIATION] Button ..... page 18, 22 % [SOLO STYLEPLAY] Button .................................. page 28 ^ [CUSTOM RHYTHM] Button ................................. page 24 & [PROGRAM] Button ............................................... page 24 * STYLE Selectors ................................................... page 17 o i u y HT ELEC BASS DRUMS VOICE 13-60 VOICE SPLIT MEMORY p SONG/PHRASE NUMBER RIGHT LEFT ORCH 1 2 3-10 REW FF PAUSE ( [DISK STYLE] Buttons .......................................... page 26 Q PHRASE REPEAT RHYTHM GUIDE ) BEAT Display ......................................................... page 20 LAMP CANCEL START/STOP REGISTRATION REC CHORD SEQUENCE q LCD Display ............................................................. page 4 SONG SELECT w [TAP (–)] Button .............................................. page 19, 42 DISK ORCHESTRA CANCEL CLEAR ALL e [METRONOME (+)] Button ............................. page 20, 42 r TEMPO [▲ (+/YES)] and [▼(–/NO)] Buttons . page 18, 42 t VOICE Selectors ...................................................... page 7 y [SPLIT] Button ....................................................... page 10 B4 C5 D5 E5 F5 G5 A5 B5 C6 D6 E6 F6 G6 A6 B6 C7 u 3.5" Floppy Disk Drive ........................ page 26, 30, 35, 44 i [REGISTRATION] Button ...................................... page 29 o [MEMORY] Button ................................................. page 29 p DISK ORCHESTRA Buttons .......................... page 30, 55 Q [CHORD SEQUENCE] Button ............................... page 41 W Keyboard ................................................................ page 13 E FILL IN Bars ........................................................... page 20 R Disk Orchestra Keyboard Guide Lamps ............... page 32 T Soft Pedal ............................................................... page 14 Y Sostenuto Pedal ..................................................... page 14 U Damper Pedal ........................................................ page 14 I PHONES Jacks ........................................................ page 4 O MIC. Jack & MIC. VOL. Control .............................. page 65 P AUX IN R and L Jacks ........................................... page 65 a AUX OUT R and L/L+R Jacks ............................... page 65 T Y s EXP PEDAL Jack .............................................. page 5, 65 U d MIDI Connectors .................................................... page 65 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 4 Preparation ■ The Music Stand If you will be using sheet music with your Clavinova, raise the music stand built into it’s top panel by lifting the rear edge of the music stand. The music stand can be lowered by slightly lifting the stand and then lowering it gently back down to its resting position. ■ The Key Cover To open the CVP-89 key cover lift it just enough to clear the keys (do not lift excessively) then slide the cover back into the main unit. To close the cover slide it forward all the way and then lower it gently until it closes completely. ■ The Power Switch POWER ∫ 001µ Piano œ= 78 Pop 1 1 After making sure that the Clavinova’s AC plug is properly inserted into a convenient AC wall outlet, press the [POWER] switch located to the left of the keyboard once to turn the power on. The power indicator located below the left end of the keyaboard will light. Press the [POWER] switch again to turn the power off. When the power is initially turned on, the PIANO voice selector LED will light, the POP style selector LED will light, and the display will appear as shown to the left. ■ Headphones PHONES One or two standard pairs of stereo headphones can be plugged in here for private practice or late-night playing. The internal speaker system is automatically shut off when a pair of headphones is plugged into either or both of the PHONES jacks. ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ The Volume Controls The Clavinova has several volume controls that give you extra versatility in creating the required sound. 5 RHYTHM BASS 1 CHORD 2 MAX MAX MIN AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT MIN RHYTHM MASTER VOLUME BASS 1 CHORD 2 MAX MAX DEMO LEFT PEDAL UTILITY REVERB FULL KEYBOARD ABC SINGLE/ FINGERED ABC SYNCHRO START SOLO STYLEPLAY NORMAL VARIATION FILL TO NORMAL FILL TO VARIATION MEMORY PROGRAM SONG/PHRASE NUMBER RIGHT LEFT ORCH RHYTHM PHRASE REPEAT GUIDE LAMP CANCEL BEAT START/STOP MIN MASTER VOLUME INTRO/ ENDING 1 2 REW FF 3-10 START/STOP CUSTOM RHYTHM MIN AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT POP 16BEAT DANCE POP BOOGIE SLOW ROCK SWING JAZZ BALLAD BOSSA RHUMBA STYLE MARCH COUNTRY WALTZ STYLE 13-50 STYLE 1 DISK STYLE 2 TAP METRONOME – + TEMPO – / NO + / YES PIANO CLAVINOVA TONE E. PIANO HARPSICHORD VIBES GUITAR STRINGS ORGAN CHOIR UPRIGHT BASS 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 VOICE ELEC BASS DRUMS VOICE 13-60 VOICE SPLIT REGISTRATION PAUSE REC CHORD SEQUENCE SONG SELECT DISK ORCHESTRA ● Master Volume ........................................................................................................................................ The MASTER VOLUME control adjusts the overall volume of sound produced by the Clavinova. It also adjusts headphone volume when one or two pairs of headphones are plugged into the PHONES jacks. Initially set the MASTER VOLUME control about half way between the “MIN” and “MAX” settings. Then, when you start playing, adjust the control for the most comfortable listening level. MAX MIN MASTER VOLUME ● Auto Accompaniment ............................................................................................................................ RHYTHM BASS Separate volume controls are provided for the RHYTHM, CHORD 1, CHORD 2, and BASS sound. These volume controls let you set up the best balance between the various accompaniment parts when the AUTO BASS CHORD (ABC), Disk Orchestra Collection playback, and Performance Memory features are used, and the RHYTHM volume control can be used to balance the keyboard and rhythm sound when only rhythm accompaniment is used. 1 CHORD 2 MAX MIN AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT The volume of the keyboard can be independently adjusted (1 … 127) by using the BASS control while holding the [UTILITY] button — this is particularly handy for adjusting the balance when recording the Clavinova sound. BASS UTILITY [001] Piano œ= 78 MANUAL VOL. 1 127 ● Other Volume Control Modes The Auto Accompaniment volume controls can be assigned to other functions via the “Accompaniment Volume Mode” utility function (page 61). They can be used to control modulation, pitch bend, and expression; or individual reverb depth for the rhythm, chord 1, chord 2, and bass parts. NOTES • If any or all of the Auto Accompaniment volume controls are set to their minimum positions, no sound will be produced by the corresponding parts. The maximum control positions produce the normal volume levels. ● Expression Control ................................................................................................................................ EXP PEDAL The Internal Amplifier & Speaker System An optional Yamaha EP-1 Expression Pedal can be plugged into the EXP PEDAL jack for foot volume (expression) control of the keyboard sound only (i.e. expression doesn’t affect the auto-accompaniment sound or disk playback). Press the pedal forward to increase volume, and backward to decrease volume. The CVP-89 features a powerful “3D System” amplifier featuring a single 50-watt channel and stereo 25-watt channels. This high-performance amplifier and speaker system puts out exceptionally rich sound with natural response from powerful lows to shimmering highs. The CVP-89 speaker system employs a single 18-cm speaker for center-channel low-frequency reproduction, and three speakers each per stereo channel: 13-centimeter speaker units for midrange sound, 2.5-cm units for outstanding high-frequency sound, and 8-cm units for player monitoring. ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 6 Demonstration Playback The Clavinova features 25 demonstration tunes that effectively demonstrate its sound and accompaniment capabilities. Here’s how you can select and play the demo tunes. PIANO CLAVINOVA TONE E. PIANO HARPSICHORD VIBES GUITAR STRINGS ORGAN CHOIR UPRIGHT BASS 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 ELEC BASS DRUMS VOICE 13-60 VOICE POP DANCE POP 16BEAT SLOW ROCK BOOGIE SWING JAZZ BALLAD BOSSA WALTZ COUNTRY MARCH RHUMBA STYLE DEMO RHYTHM BASS 1 CHORD 2 MAX MAX DEMO LEFT PEDAL UTILITY REVERB FULL KEYBOARD ABC SINGLE/ FINGERED ABC SYNCHRO START SOLO STYLEPLAY NORMAL VARIATION FILL TO NORMAL FILL TO VARIATION MEMORY PROGRAM SONG/PHRASE NUMBER RIGHT LEFT ORCH RHYTHM PHRASE REPEAT GUIDE LAMP CANCEL BEAT START/STOP MIN MASTER VOLUME INTRO/ ENDING 1 2 REW FF 3-10 START/STOP CUSTOM RHYTHM MIN AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT POP 16BEAT DANCE POP BOOGIE SLOW ROCK SWING JAZZ BALLAD BOSSA RHUMBA STYLE MARCH COUNTRY WALTZ STYLE 13-50 STYLE 1 DISK STYLE 2 TAP METRONOME – + TEMPO – / NO + / YES PIANO CLAVINOVA TONE E. PIANO HARPSICHORD VIBES GUITAR STRINGS ORGAN CHOIR UPRIGHT BASS 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 ELEC BASS DRUMS VOICE 13-60 VOICE SPLIT REGISTRATION VOICE PAUSE REC CHORD SEQUENCE SONG SELECT DISK ORCHESTRA Z Press the [DEMO] button ....................................................................................................................... DEMO DEMO SONG SELECT VOICE OR STYLE X Select a Demo Tune ............................................................................................................................... PIANO CLAVINOVA TONE E. PIANO HARPSICHORD VIBES 1 2 3 4 5 DEMO SONG Elec. Piano Voice The 25 demo tunes are selected via the STYLE and VOICE selectors — the corresponding selector indicators light when the [DEMO] button is pressed. Press a selector to start playback of the corresponding tune. You can also select continuous repeat playback of all demo tunes by pressing the [START/STOP] button. The demo tunes will play back in sequential or random order, depending on the setting of the “Random All Song Repeat” utility function described on page 62. The corresponding voice name will appear on the LCD during VOICE demo playback. The style name will appear on the display during STYLE demo playback. C Adjust the Volume .................................................................................................................................. Use the MASTER VOLUME control to adjust the volume, and play along on the keyboard if you like. MAX NOTES • The tempo cannot be adjusted during demo playback. MIN MASTER VOLUME V Stop Playback ......................................................................................................................................... START/STOP DEMO Demo playback can be stopped temporarily by pressing either the [START/ STOP] button or STYLE or VOICE selector corresponding to the demonstration tune which is currently playing. Press the [DEMO] button when you want to stop demo playback and return to the normal mode. The Demo Tunes VOICE NAME PIANO CLAVINOVA TONE HARPSICHORD GUITAR STRINGS ORGAN CHOIR COMPOSER F. F. Chopin D. Foster J. S. Bach I. Albeniz A. Vivaldi J. S. Bach W. A. Mozart SONG TITLE Etude Op.25-1 “Aeolian Harp” or “The Shephered Boy” “Water Fountain” from “The Secret of My Success” Italienisches Konzert (Italian Concerto) BWV 971 3rd movement Asturias The Four Seasons No. 3 “Autumn” 1st movement Sinfonia from Kantate (Cantata) 29 BWV 29 Requiem K. 626 No. 6 “Lacrimosa” * The demonstration pieces listed above, except the PIANO piece, are short excerpts from the original compositions. All other songs are original (© 1994 by Yamaha Corporation). ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ Voice Selection 7 The CVP-89 has a total of 60 different voices that can be selected in a number of ways. There’s also a “Keyboard Percussion” mode that let’s you play a range of drums and percussion instruments on the keyboard. CLAVINOVA TONE PIANO 2 1 HARPSICHORD E. PIANO 3 VIBES GUITAR 5 4 STRINGS 6 ORGAN CHOIR UPRIGHT BASS 9 0 8 7 ELEC BASS VOICE 13-60 DRUMS VOICE VOICE RHYTHM BASS 1 CHORD 2 MAX MAX DEMO LEFT PEDAL UTILITY REVERB FULL KEYBOARD ABC START/STOP MIN SINGLE/ FINGERED ABC SYNCHRO START SOLO STYLEPLAY NORMAL VARIATION FILL TO NORMAL FILL TO VARIATION INTRO/ ENDING PROGRAM MEMORY BEAT SONG/PHRASE NUMBER RIGHT LEFT 1 2 REW FF ORCH RHYTHM PHRASE REPEAT GUIDE LAMP CANCEL 3-10 START/STOP CUSTOM RHYTHM MIN AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT MASTER VOLUME POP 16BEAT DANCE POP BOOGIE SLOW ROCK SWING JAZZ BALLAD BOSSA RHUMBA MARCH COUNTRY WALTZ STYLE 13-50 STYLE 1 DISK STYLE 2 TAP METRONOME – + TEMPO – / NO + / YES PIANO CLAVINOVA TONE E. PIANO HARPSICHORD VIBES GUITAR STRINGS ORGAN CHOIR UPRIGHT BASS 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 STYLE ELEC BASS DRUMS VOICE 13-60 VOICE SPLIT REGISTRATION PAUSE REC CHORD SEQUENCE SONG SELECT DISK ORCHESTRA VOICE ■ Selecting the 60 Voices ● Voices 1-12: Direct Panel Selection ...................................................................................................... PIANO CLAVINOVA TONE E. PIANO HARPSICHORD VIBES GUITAR STRINGS ORGAN CHOIR UPRIGHT BASS 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 [001] Elec. Piano œ= 78 Pop ELEC BASS DRUMS VOICE 13-60 VOICE Of the Clavinova’s 60 voices, 12 are “panel voices” which can be directly accessed by pressing the corresponding VOICE selector. When a voice selector is pressed the corresponding indicator will light and the number and name of the selected voice will appear on the display. The PIANO voice is automatically selected when the power is initially turned on. 3 1 ● The VOICE 13-60 [▲] and [▼] Buttons.................................................................................................. VOICE 13-60 DRUMS Use the VOICE [▲] and [▼] buttons immediately to the right of the [VOICE 13-60] button to select a voice number between 13 and 60. Press either button briefly to select the next voice number in the specified direction, or hold the button for continuous scrolling in the specified direction. The [VOICE 13-60] indicator will light and the voice number and name will appear on the display. VOICE [001] Brass œ= 78 Pop 13 1 If a panel voice (1-12) is selected, the last selected voice in the 13-60 range can be instantly re-selected simply by pressing the [VOICE 13-60] button. The [VOICE 13-60] button will initially select voice number 13 (BRASS) after the power is turned on. • Voice number 13 can be instantly selected by pressing the VOICE [▲] and [▼] buttons simultaneously. NOTES ● Numeric Selection .................................................................................................................................. PIANO CLAVINOVA TONE E. PIANO HARPSICHORD VIBES GUITAR STRINGS ORGAN CHOIR UPRIGHT BASS 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 [001] Mute Trumpet œ= 78 Pop 16 1 ELEC BASS DRUMS VOICE 13-60 VOICE Enter the number of the desired voice via the voice selectors (note that each voice selector has a number between 1 and 0 associated with it) while pressing the [DRUMS] selector. To select voice number 16, for example, press and hold [DRUMS], press [PIANO/1], then [GUITAR/6], then release the [DRUMS] button. The voice number and name will appear on the display. The [VOICE 13-60] button indicator will light whenever a voice number between 13 and 60 is selected. ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 8 Voice Selection Panel Voices (1 — 12) No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 Name Usable Range PIANO CLAVINOVA TONE E. PIANO HARPSICHORD VIBES GUITAR STRINGS ORGAN CHOIR UPRIGHT BASS ELEC BASS DRUMS A-1 - C7 C1 - C7 C1 - C6 C1 - C6 F2 - F5 E1 - F#4 C0 - C6 C0 - C6 E1 - E5 C0 - F#3 E0 - F#3 — Voices 13 — 60 No. 13 14 15 16 17 18 Name Usable Range BRASS POP BRASS TRUMPET MUTE TRUMPET HORN SAX F0 - C6 F0 - C6 F0 - C6 F#2 - A5 A#0 - F4 A#0 - F#5 No. 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 NOTES Name Usable Range No. A#0 - F#5 D2 - A#5 A#2 - G5 G2 - F#6 F2 - A5 C3 - C6 C0 - C6 C0 - C6 C0 - C6 C0 - C6 C1 - C6 C1 - C6 C2 - F#6 C0 - C6 E1 - E5 A-1 - C7 A-1 - C7 C1 - C6 C2 - C6 C2 - C6 C2 - C6 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 SAX SOFT CLARINET OBOE FLUTE ACCORDION HARMONICA STRINGS SOFT VIOLIN VIOLIN HARD FULL ORGAN JAZZ ORGAN 1 SYNTH BRASS SYNTH WOOD SYNTH STRINGS SYNTH CHOIR PIANO BRIGHT PIANO SOFT E. PIANO DX SYNTH CRYSTAL CELESTA MARIMBA Name FOLK GUITAR JAZZ GUITAR 1 JAZZ GUITAR 2 ROCK GUITAR 1 ROCK GUITAR 2 MUTE GUITAR BANJO PIZZICATO HARP U. BASS SOFT E. BASS SOFT E. BASS HEAVY SYNTH BASS TIMPANI & ORCH. HIT BASSOON CHAMBER STRINGS JAZZ ORGAN 2 ROCK GUITAR 3 COSMIC 1 COSMIC 2 COSMIC 3 Usable Range E1 - A4 E1 - A4 E1 - A4 E1 - A4 E1 - A4 E1 - A4 C3 - A5 C1 - C6 C1 - C6 C0 - F#3 E0 - F#3 E0 - F#3 E0 - F#3 E0 - C2/G2 - C6 A#0 - D4 C1 - C6 C1 - C6 E1 - A4 G0 - C6 G0 - C6 G0 - C6 • When the DRUMS voice is selected only the keys with drum or percussion symbols printed above them will sound. • The PIANO voice is automatically selected when the power is initially turned on. • The chorus effect ON/OFF and pitch bend range parameters for the voices can be accessed via the UTILITY mode — page 43, 62. ■ Keyboard Percussion ELEC BASS DRUMS VOICE 13-60 When the [DRUMS] voice selector is pressed (its indicator will light), you can play 44 different drum and percussion instruments on the keyboard. The symbols above the keys correspond to the NORMAL drum kit instruments (keys with no symbols produce no sound). NOTES • The CVP-89 has two drum kits — “NORMAL” and “PROCESSED”. Which of these kits will sound when Keyboard Percussion is engaged depends on the currently selected accompaniment style. Some styles which use the “NORMAL” kit, however, include instruments from the “PROCESSED” kit, and vice-versa. • The accompaniment styles listed below use the “PROCESSED” drum kit while all others use the “NORMAL” kit. Internal Styles 3: DANCE POP 23: TECHNO POP Disk Styles 8: POP BALLAD 11: NEW AGE POP 12: COMPUTER GAME 16: DANCE POP 2 20: REGGAE 2 38: CLOCK • See page ix for a list of the NORMAL and PROCESSED drum kit instrument assignments. • The TRANSPOSE and PITCH functions described on pages 43 and 16 do not affect the DRUMS sound. • Drum parameters individually programmable for each instrument are accessible via the UTILITY mode — page 63. ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ Dual Mode 9 The DUAL mode makes it possible to play two voices simultaneously across the entire range of the keyboard. This makes it easy to create exceptionally rich, thick tonal textures. PIANO CLAVINOVA TONE E. PIANO HARPSICHORD VIBES GUITAR STRINGS ORGAN CHOIR UPRIGHT BASS 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 ELEC BASS VOICE 13-60 DRUMS VOICE VOICE RHYTHM BASS 1 CHORD 2 MAX MAX DEMO LEFT PEDAL UTILITY REVERB FULL KEYBOARD ABC START/STOP MIN SINGLE/ FINGERED ABC INTRO/ ENDING SYNCHRO START SOLO STYLEPLAY NORMAL VARIATION FILL TO NORMAL FILL TO VARIATION PROGRAM MEMORY BEAT SONG/PHRASE NUMBER RIGHT LEFT 1 2 REW FF ORCH RHYTHM PHRASE REPEAT GUIDE LAMP CANCEL 3-10 START/STOP CUSTOM RHYTHM MIN AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT MASTER VOLUME POP 16BEAT DANCE POP BOOGIE SLOW ROCK SWING JAZZ BALLAD BOSSA RHUMBA STYLE MARCH COUNTRY WALTZ STYLE 13-50 STYLE 1 DISK STYLE 2 TAP METRONOME – + TEMPO – / NO + / YES PIANO CLAVINOVA TONE E. PIANO HARPSICHORD VIBES GUITAR STRINGS ORGAN CHOIR UPRIGHT BASS 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 VOICE ELEC BASS DRUMS VOICE 13-60 VOICE SPLIT REGISTRATION PAUSE REC CHORD SEQUENCE SONG SELECT DISK ORCHESTRA ■ Engaging the Dual Mode Dual mode voice combinations can be broadly divided into three categories: panel voice + panel voice, panel voice + voice number 13-60, and two voices in the 13-60 range. The dual mode for each combination is selected in a different way, as described below: ● Panel Voice + Panel Voice ..................................................................................................................... PIANO CLAVINOVA TONE E. PIANO HARPSICHORD VIBES 1 2 3 4 5 To combine two panel voices simply press two voice selectors at the same time — or press one voice selector while holding another. The names of both selected voices will appear on the display when the DUAL mode is active. To return to the normal single-voice play mode, press any single voice selector. ● Panel Voice + 13-60 Voice ..................................................................................................................... PIANO CLAVINOVA TONE 1 2 VOICE 13-60 A voice in the 13…60 range can be “dualed” with the panel voices by pressing the [VOICE 13-60] button and any other voice selector at the same time. The VOICE [▲] and [▼] buttons can then be used to select the desired 13…60 voice. The names of both selected voices will appear on the display (the 13-60 voice name will appear on right side of the display). To return to the normal single-voice play mode, press any single voice selector. VOICE ● Two 13-60 Voices.................................................................................................................................... ELEC BASS DRUMS VOICE 13-60 VOICE [001] PopBrass+Brass œ= 78 Pop 1 To combine two voices in the 13-60 range press the [DRUMS] button and the [VOICE 13-60] button at the same time (the default combination is POP BRASS and BRASS). The voice shown on the right of the display can then be selected by using the VOICE [▲] and [▼] button, while the left voice can be selected by using the VOICE [▲] and [▼] buttons while holding the [DRUMS] and [VOICE 13-60] buttons. To return to the normal single-voice play mode, press any single voice selector. ■ Dual-mode Voice Balance TEMPO – / NO + / YES PIANO CLAVINOVA TONE E. PIANO 1 2 3 [ 001] Piano + ClavTone œ= 78 DUAL BALANCE 8 The volume balance between the two voices combined in the DUAL mode can be adjusted by using the TEMPO [▲] and [▼] buttons while pressing both of the active voice selectors. The selected balance value (1 … 15) will be shown on the display until the voice selectors are released. ■ A setting of “1” sets the volume of the left voice on the display to maximum and the right voice to minimum (no sound). ■ A setting of “8” sets both voices to the same volume (this is the default balance setting, and can be recalled by pressing the TEMPO [▲] and [▼] buttons simultaneously). ■ A setting of “15” sets the volume of the right voice on the display to maximum and the left voice to minimum (no sound). NOTES • Hold either the TEMPO [s] or [t] button for continuous scrolling in the specified direction. • The dual mode cannot be used with the DRUMS voice. Also, the dual and split modes cannot be used at the same time. ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 10 Split Mode The split mode lets you play different voices with the left and right hands — bass with the left and piano with the right, for example. You can assign any of the Clavinova’s voices to the left and right-hand sections of the keyboard. RHYTHM BASS 1 CHORD 2 MAX MAX DEMO LEFT PEDAL UTILITY REVERB FULL KEYBOARD ABC START/STOP MIN MASTER VOLUME SPLIT SINGLE/ FINGERED ABC INTRO/ ENDING SYNCHRO START SOLO STYLEPLAY NORMAL VARIATION FILL TO NORMAL FILL TO VARIATION MEMORY PROGRAM SONG/PHRASE NUMBER RIGHT LEFT ORCH RHYTHM BEAT 1 2 REW FF PHRASE REPEAT GUIDE LAMP CANCEL 3-10 START/STOP CUSTOM RHYTHM MIN AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT POP 16BEAT DANCE POP BOOGIE SLOW ROCK SWING JAZZ BALLAD BOSSA RHUMBA STYLE MARCH COUNTRY WALTZ STYLE 13-50 STYLE 1 DISK STYLE 2 TAP METRONOME – + TEMPO – / NO + / YES PIANO CLAVINOVA TONE E. PIANO HARPSICHORD VIBES GUITAR STRINGS ORGAN CHOIR UPRIGHT BASS 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 VOICE ELEC BASS DRUMS VOICE 13-60 VOICE SPLIT REGISTRATION PAUSE REC CHORD SEQUENCE SONG SELECT DISK ORCHESTRA ■ Engaging the Split Mode SPLIT F#2 ▼ Left-hand section C3 Right-hand section [001] Up Bass /Piano œ= 78 Pop When the [SPLIT] button is pressed and its indicator lights, the keyboard is split into left- and right-hand sections and different voices can be assigned to each. The split point is initially set at the F#2 key when the power is turned on, and the UPRIGHT BASS voice is initially assigned to the left-hand section of the keyboard (all keys up to and including F#2). The voice that was selected when the SPLIT mode was engaged is assigned to the right-hand section of the keyboard. The current settings are retained if the SPLIT mode is turned off (press the [SPLIT] button again) and on while the power remains on. The names of both the left and righthand voices appear on the display while the SPLIT mode is active. 1 ■ Changing the Split Voices UPRIGHT BASS ELEC BASS DR The right-hand voice can be changed simply by pressing the appropriate voice selector. The left-hand voice can be changed by pressing a voice selector while holding the [SPLIT] button. SPLIT 0 [001] E.Bs Slp/Piano œ= 78 SPLIT BALANCE NOTES 8 • All voices except BASS (voice numbers 10, 11, 49, 50, 51, and 52) and DRUMS (voice number 12) are shifted up one octave when assigned to the lower section of the keyboard (this function can be turned on or off via the “Split Left Octave” utility function described on page 64). ■ Changing the Split Point The split point can be set at any key by pressing the desired key while holding the [SPLIT] button. The split point key name will appear on the display while the [SPLIT] button is held. SPLIT C3 A keyboard guide lamp will indicate the selected split point. The default split point — F#2 — will always be set automatically whenever the power is initially turned on. [ 001] E.Bs Slp/Piano œ= 78 SPLIT POINT C 2 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ Split Mode 11 ■ Split Balance TEMPO – / NO The volume balance between the left-hand and right-hand voices can be adjusted by using the TEMPO [▲] and [▼] buttons while holding the [SPLIT] button. The selected balance value (1 … 15) will be shown on the display while the [SPLIT] button is held. SPLIT + / YES [001] E.Bs Slp/Piano œ= 78 SPLIT BALANCE ■ A setting of “1” sets the volume of the left voice to maximum and the right voice to minimum (no sound). 8 ■ A setting of “8” sets both voices to the same volume (this is the default balance setting, and can be recalled by pressing the TEMPO [▲] and [▼] buttons simultaneously). ■ A setting of “15” sets the volume of the right voice to maximum and the left voice to minimum (no sound). NOTES • Hold either the TEMPO [s] or [t] button for continuous scrolling in the specified direction. ■ Damper Pedal Operation in the Split Mode SPLIT The damper pedal (the right pedal — see “The Pedals” on page 14) can be assigned to the left voice only, the right voice only, or to both voices in the split mode. ■ Right Voice Only (default): Press the right (damper) pedal while holding the [SPLIT] button. ■ Left Voice Only: Press the left (soft) pedal while holding the [SPLIT] button. ■ Both Voices: Press both the right and left pedals while holding the [SPLIT] button. NOTES • The dual and split modes cannot be used at the same time. • In the split the soft and sostenuto pedal functions apply to both the left- and righthand voices. • When the ABC Single/Fingered mode (page 21) and the split mode are used simultaneously, the left-hand voice will be accompanied by the appropriate ABC chord voices. ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 12 Digital Reverb Effects The [REVERB] button provides a number of digital effects that you can use for extra depth and expressive power. REVERB RHYTHM BASS 1 CHORD 2 MAX MAX DEMO LEFT PEDAL UTILITY REVERB FULL KEYBOARD ABC START/STOP MIN MASTER VOLUME SINGLE/ FINGERED ABC INTRO/ ENDING SYNCHRO START SOLO STYLEPLAY NORMAL VARIATION FILL TO NORMAL FILL TO VARIATION PROGRAM MEMORY BEAT SONG/PHRASE NUMBER RIGHT LEFT 1 2 REW FF ORCH RHYTHM PHRASE REPEAT GUIDE LAMP CANCEL 3-10 START/STOP CUSTOM RHYTHM MIN AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT POP 16BEAT DANCE POP BOOGIE SLOW ROCK SWING JAZZ BALLAD BOSSA RHUMBA STYLE MARCH COUNTRY WALTZ STYLE 13-50 STYLE 1 DISK STYLE 2 TAP METRONOME – + TEMPO – / NO + / YES PIANO CLAVINOVA TONE E. PIANO HARPSICHORD VIBES GUITAR STRINGS ORGAN CHOIR UPRIGHT BASS 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 VOICE ELEC BASS DRUMS VOICE 13-60 VOICE SPLIT REGISTRATION PAUSE REC CHORD SEQUENCE SONG SELECT DISK ORCHESTRA ■ Selecting a Reverb Effect REVERB TAP METRONOME – + REVERB TYPE:HALL 1 Each time the [TAP] or [METRONOME] button is pressed while the [REVERB] button is held, the next reverb effect is selected. The currently selected reverb effect and the reverb depth setting appear on the display while the [REVERB] button is held. The reverb effect can also be selected by repeatedly pressing the [REVERB] button while the reverb type remains on the display. DEPTH: 8 OFF No effect is produced. ROOM This setting adds a reverb effect to the sound that is similar to the type of acoustic reverberation you would hear in a medium-size room. HALL 1 For a more spacious reverb sound, use the HALL 1 setting. This effect simulates the natural reverberation of a medium-size concert hall. HALL 2 HALL 2 simulates the reverb of a very large concert hall. COSMIC “COSMIC” is an echo effect in which the sound seems to “bounce” around in the stereo sound field. NOTES • The ROOM effect is automatically selected when the POWER switch is turned on. ■ Reverb Depth Control REVERB The depth of the selected reverb effect can be increased or decreased by pressing the TEMPO [▲] or [▼] button while holding the [REVERB] button. The reverb depth is shown on the display while the [REVERB] button is held. The reverb depth range is from “0” (no effect) to “15” (maximum depth). TEMPO – REVERB TYPE:HALL 1 / NO + / YES DEPTH:11 • Reverb depth is initially set to “8” when the power is turned on (this setting can be recalled during reverb depth selection by pressing the TEMPO [▲] and [▼] buttons simultaneously). • Hold either the TEMPO [s] or [t] button for continuous scrolling in the specified direction. BASS • The depth of reverb effect applied to the manually-played part can be individually adjusted (0 … 127, 64 by default) by using the BASS volume control while holding the [REVERB] button: This setting is shown on the display while the [REVERB] button is held. REVERB [001] Piano œ= 78 MANUAL REV. NOTES 1 64 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ The Keyboard & Polyphony 13 The Clavinova has “32-note polyphony” which means you can normally play up to 32 notes at once. This number varies, however, according to the functions being used, as shown in the chart below: Keyboard only 32 notes. Keyboard + rhythm 24 notes (rhythm uses 8). Keyboard + ABC 12 notes (rhythm 8; ABC 12). ● The number of available notes is further reduced if the dual mode, the performance memory, or a Disk Orchestra Collection disk is being played at the same time. The Clavinova also offers keyboard touch response, so the volume and timbre of notes played can be controlled according to how “hard” you play the keys. The amount of variation available depends on the selected voice. The following voices are STEREO: • No.1 PIANO • No.8 ORGAN • No.28 FULL ORGAN • No.34 PIANO BRIGHT • No.35 PIANO SOFT NOTES The following voices feature VELOCITY SWITCHING (i.e. they sound different when played soft or loud). • No.3 E.PIANO • No.11 ELEC BASS • Some voices have greater polyphony than shown in the above chart. Further, some dual-mode and split-mode voice combinations provide 64note total polyphony (32 notes per voice). Pan UTILITY RHYTHM BASS 1 CHORD 2 MAX MAX DEMO LEFT PEDAL UTILITY REVERB FULL KEYBOARD ABC SINGLE/ FINGERED ABC SYNCHRO START SOLO STYLEPLAY NORMAL VARIATION FILL TO NORMAL FILL TO VARIATION MEMORY PROGRAM SONG/PHRASE NUMBER RIGHT LEFT ORCH RHYTHM PHRASE REPEAT GUIDE LAMP CANCEL BEAT START/STOP MIN INTRO/ ENDING 1 2 REW FF 3-10 START/STOP CUSTOM RHYTHM MIN AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT MASTER VOLUME POP 16BEAT DANCE POP BOOGIE SLOW ROCK SWING JAZZ BALLAD BOSSA RHUMBA MARCH COUNTRY WALTZ STYLE 13-50 STYLE 1 DISK STYLE 2 TAP METRONOME – + TEMPO – / NO + / YES PIANO CLAVINOVA TONE E. PIANO HARPSICHORD VIBES GUITAR STRINGS ORGAN CHOIR UPRIGHT BASS 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 STYLE ELEC BASS DRUMS VOICE VOICE 13-60 VOICE SPLIT REGISTRATION PAUSE REC CHORD SEQUENCE SONG SELECT DISK ORCHESTRA RHYTHM UTILITY [ 001] Piano œ= 78 PAN POS. 1 RIGHT 6 KEYBOARD • LEFT 6 LEFT 1 CENTER Each voice has a preset pan setting (indicated by “KEYBOARD” on the display) which is automatically set when the power is first turned on. NOTES The pan settings are as follows: Full Left ● The pan (stereo) position of the voice played on the keyboard can be adjusted by moving the RHYTHM volume control while holding the [UTILITY] button. The pan position is shown on the display, from “LEFT 6” for full left at the “MIN” control position, through “CENTER” for center, to “RIGHT 6” for full right at the “MAX” control position. This can be used to produce a broader ensemble sound with the Performance Memory multitrack recording feature. RIGHT 1 RIGHT 6 Full Right • The “KEYBOARD” default keyboard scale pan places the treble-register sound to the right and the bass-register sound to the left. Using a different PAN setting places the entire voice, low and high notes included, at the same position. • The DRUMS voice has a preset PAN setting which cannot be changed. ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 14 The Pedals The CVP-89 has three pedal which offer a range of advanced expressive capabilities. LEFT PEDAL RHYTHM BASS 1 CHORD 2 MAX MAX DEMO LEFT PEDAL UTILITY REVERB FULL KEYBOARD ABC START/STOP MIN MASTER VOLUME SINGLE/ FINGERED ABC INTRO/ ENDING SYNCHRO START SOLO STYLEPLAY NORMAL VARIATION FILL TO NORMAL FILL TO VARIATION PROGRAM MEMORY BEAT SONG/PHRASE NUMBER RIGHT LEFT 1 2 REW FF ORCH RHYTHM PHRASE REPEAT GUIDE LAMP CANCEL 3-10 START/STOP CUSTOM RHYTHM MIN AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT POP 16BEAT DANCE POP BOOGIE SLOW ROCK SWING JAZZ BALLAD BOSSA RHUMBA STYLE MARCH COUNTRY WALTZ STYLE 13-50 STYLE 1 DISK STYLE 2 TAP METRONOME – + TEMPO – / NO + / YES PIANO CLAVINOVA TONE E. PIANO HARPSICHORD VIBES GUITAR STRINGS ORGAN CHOIR UPRIGHT BASS 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 VOICE ELEC BASS DRUMS VOICE 13-60 VOICE SPLIT REGISTRATION PAUSE REC CHORD SEQUENCE SONG SELECT DISK ORCHESTRA ■ Right Pedal (Damper Pedal) The damper pedal functions in the same way as a damper pedal on an acoustic piano. When the damper pedal is pressed notes played have a long sustain. Releasing the pedal immediately stops (damps) any sustained notes. NOTES • The damper pedal can be set for continuous or on/off type damping control via the “Damper Pedal Mode” utility function (page 62). Continuous control is th default setting. • The damper pedal can also be used to increase the depth of a unique “Soundboard” effect for the PIANO voice (voice number 1). The maximum depth of the Soundboard effect can be set via the “Damper Pedal Mode” utility function (page 62). ■ Center Pedal (Sostenuto Pedal) If you play a note or chord on the keyboard and press the sostenuto pedal while the note(s) are held, those notes will be sustained as long as the pedal is held (as if the damper pedal had been pressed) but all subsequently played notes will not be sustained. This makes it possible to sustain a chord, for example, while other notes are played “staccato.” NOTES • The sostenuto pedal will not function while the SOLO STYLEPLAY feature (page 28) is engaged. ■ Left Pedal (Multi-function) LEFT PEDAL TAP METRONOME – + TEMPO – / NO + / YES The left pedal has a number of functions which can be selected using the [LEFT PEDAL] button. Each time the [TAP] or [METRONOME] button is pressed while the [LEFT PEDAL] button is held, the next LEFT PEDAL function is selected and shown on the display. The left pedal functions can also be selected by using the TEMPO [▲] or [▼] button while holding the [LEFT PEDAL] button. It is also possible to select the left pedal function by repeatedly pressing the [LEFT PEDAL] button while the left-pedal function name remains on the display. ● Soft........................................................................................................................................................... LEFT PEDAL FUNCTION SOFT PEDAL Pressing the soft pedal subtly reduces the volume and slightly changes the timbre of notes played. The amount of “softness” corresponds to how deeply the pedal is pressed. The SOFT function is automatically selected whenever the POWER switch is turned on. ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 15 ● Start/Stop ................................................................................................................................................ LEFT PEDAL FUNCTION START/STOP The left pedal performs the same function as the panel [START/STOP] buttons. For details on the START/STOP function, refer to the “Accompaniment” section, page 18. ● Rhythm Break ......................................................................................................................................... LEFT PEDAL FUNCTION RHYTHM BREAK For details on the RHYTHM BREAK function, refer to the “Accompaniment” section, page 20. ● Pitch Bend ............................................................................................................................................... LEFT PEDAL FUNCTION PITCH BEND When this function is selected the center and left pedals can be used to bend the pitch of notes played on the keyboard up or down, respectively, while the center or left pedal is held. The default pitch bend range is individually set for each voice. The pitch bend range can be adjusted as required via the “Pitch Bend Range” utility function (page 62). ● Solo Styleplay ......................................................................................................................................... LEFT PEDAL FUNCTION SOLO STYLEPLAY For details on the SOLO STYLEPLAY function see “SOLO STYLEPLAY” on page 28 (the SOLO STYLEPLAY pedal function can only be selected when the SOLO STYLEPLAY feature is in use). NOTES • The damper, soft, and sostenuto pedal functions do not affect the DRUMS voice. ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 16 Pitch Control Pitch control makes it possible to tune the Clavinova over a ±50-cent range (approximate) in approximately 1.2-cent or 1-hertz intervals. A hundred “cents” equals one semitone, so the tuning range provided allows fine tuning of overall pitch over a range of approximately a semitone. Pitch control is useful for tuning the Clavinova to match other instruments or recorded music. ● Tuning Up ................................................................................................................................................ A -1 B -1 C3 B3 TEMPO – / NO Z To tune up (raise pitch), hold the A-1 and B-1 keys simultaneously (A-1 and B1 are the two lowest white keys on the keyboard) and press any key between C3 and B3. Each time a key in this range is pressed the pitch is raised by approximately 1.2 cents, up to a maximum of about 50 cents above standard pitch. To raise the pitch in 1-hertz increments press the TEMPO [▲] button instead of the C3-B3 keys. The TEMPO [▼] button can also be used to tune down while the A-1 and B-1 keys are held. + / YES X Release the A-1 and B-1 keys. ● Tuning Down ........................................................................................................................................... Z To tune down (lower pitch), hold the A-1 and A#-1 keys simultaneously and A# -1 A -1 C3 B3 TEMPO – / NO press any key between C3 and B3. Each time a key in this range is pressed the pitch is lowered by approximately 1.2 cents, up to a maximum of about 50 cents below standard pitch. To lower the pitch in 1-hertz increments press the TEMPO [▼] button instead of the C3-B3 keys. The TEMPO [▲] button can also be used to tune up while the A-1 and A#-1 keys are held. X Release the A-1 and A#-1 keys. + / YES ● To Restore Standard Pitch* ................................................................................................................... Z To restore standard pitch (A3 = 440 Hz), hold the A-1, A#-1, and B-1 keys si- A# -1 A -1 B -1 C3 B3 multaneously and press any key between C3 and B3, or simultaneously press the TEMPO [▲] and [▼] buttons. X Release the A-1, A#-1, and B-1 keys. TEMPO – / NO + / YES * Standard pitch (A3 = 440 Hz) is automatically set whenever the POWER switch is initially turned on. NOTES • The PITCH function does not affect the DRUMS sound. • Hold either the TEMPO [s] or [t] button for continuous scrolling in the specified direction. ■ The Pitch Display PITCH A3=440.0Hz The approximate pitch of A3 is shown on the display in Hertz while the pitch control function is in operation. The total display range is from approximately 427 hertz (-50 cents) to 453 hertz (+50 cents). ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ Accompaniment 17 The CVP-89 has 50 “styles” that can be used as a basis for rhythm accompaniment, or fully orchestrated rhythm, bass, and chord accompaniment (see “Auto Bass Chord” on page 21). • The Accompaniment Style data is not transmitted via the MIDI OUT connector. NOTES BEAT POP DANCE POP 16BEAT BOOGIE SLOW ROCK JAZZ BALLAD SWING BOSSA RHUMBA STYLE 13-50 WALTZ MARCH COUNTRY TAP METRONOME – + STYLE 1 DISK STYLE 2 STYLE FULL KEYBOARD SINGLE/ FINGERED ABC ABC SYNCHRO START SOLO STYLEPLAY INTRO/ ENDING NORMAL VARIATION START/STOP FILL TO NORMAL RHYTHM BASS LEFT PEDAL REVERB + / YES / NO 1 CHORD 2 MAX DEMO – FILL TO VARIATION MAX UTILITY TEMPO FULL KEYBOARD ABC SINGLE/ FINGERED ABC SYNCHRO START SOLO STYLEPLAY NORMAL VARIATION FILL TO NORMAL FILL TO VARIATION MEMORY PROGRAM SONG/PHRASE NUMBER RIGHT LEFT ORCH RHYTHM PHRASE REPEAT GUIDE LAMP CANCEL BEAT START/STOP MIN MASTER VOLUME INTRO/ ENDING 1 2 REW FF 3-10 START/STOP CUSTOM RHYTHM MIN AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT POP 16BEAT DANCE POP BOOGIE SLOW ROCK SWING JAZZ BALLAD BOSSA RHUMBA MARCH COUNTRY WALTZ STYLE 13-50 STYLE 1 DISK STYLE 2 TAP METRONOME – + TEMPO – / NO + / YES PIANO CLAVINOVA TONE E. PIANO HARPSICHORD VIBES GUITAR STRINGS ORGAN CHOIR UPRIGHT BASS 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 STYLE ELEC BASS DRUMS VOICE 13-60 VOICE SPLIT REGISTRATION PAUSE REC CHORD SEQUENCE SONG SELECT DISK ORCHESTRA VOICE ■ Style Selection ● Styles 1-12: Direct Panel Selection ....................................................................................................... POP 16BEAT DANCE POP BOOGIE SLOW ROCK SWING JAZZ BALLAD BOSSA RHUMBA MARCH COUNTRY WALTZ STYLE 13-50 STYLE STYLE [ 001] Piano œ= 72 16Beat 1 2 Of the Clavinova’s 50 styles, 12 are “panel styles” which can be directly accessed by pressing the corresponding STYLE selector. When a style selector is pressed the corresponding indicator will light and the number and name of the selected style will appear on the display. The POP style is automatically selected when the power is initially turned on. ● The [STYLE 13-50] Button and STYLE [s]/[t] Buttons ...................................................................... POP 16BEAT DANCE POP BOOGIE SLOW ROCK SWING JAZZ BALLAD BOSSA RHUMBA MARCH COUNTRY WALTZ STYLE 13-50 STYLE STYLE [ 001] Piano œ=100 8Beat SWING JAZZ BALLAD [ 001] Piano œ=208 Bebop 1 13 STYLE 13-50 STYLE 1 30 Pressing the [STYLE 13-50] button immediately recalls the last style selected in the 13-50 range. The STYLE [s] and [t] buttons can be used to select a style number between 13 and 50. Press either button briefly to select the next style number in the specified direction, or hold the button for continuous scrolling in the specified direction. The selected style number and name will appear on the display. The styles 13-50 are organized into categories corresponding to the names of the panel STYLE selectors (POP, DANCE POP, 16 BEAT, etc. — see the STYLE LIST, below). You can directly jump any category by pressing the STYLE [s] or [t] button when the corresponding panel STYLE selector indicator is lit. To select the “SWING” styles in the 13-50 range, for example, use the STYLE [s] or [t] button when the [SWING] STYLE selector indicator is lit. NOTES • The 8 BEAT style (number 13) will initially be selected by the [STYLE 13-50] button when the power is turned ON. • There are also two [DISK STYLE] buttons that can be used to select styles loaded from floppy disk (the supplied Style Disk). See the “Disk Styles” section on page 28 for details. • Use the RHYTHM volume control to adjust the volume of the rhythm sound. ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 18 Accompaniment ■ Tempo Control Whenever you select a different style, the preset tempo for that style is also selected, and the tempo is displayed on the display in quarter-note beats per minute (unless the accompaniment is playing, in which case the same tempo is maintained). You can change the tempo to any value between 32 and 280 beats per minute, however, by using the TEMPO [▲] and [▼] buttons. This can be done either before the accompaniment is started or while it is playing. Press either button briefly to decrement or increment the tempo value by one, or hold the button for continuous decrementing or incrementing. TEMPO – / NO + / YES [ 001] Piano œ=132 Dance Pop 1 3 NOTES • The preset tempo for the selected style can be recalled at any time by pressing both the [▲] and [▼] buttons simultaneously. • Automatic style tempo switching can be turned on or off via the “Style Tempo Switching” utility function described on page 61. Panel Styles (1—12) 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 POP 16BEAT DANCE POP BOOGIE SLOW ROCK SWING JAZZ BALLAD BOSSA RHUMBA MARCH COUNTRY WALTZ Styles 13—50 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 POP 8BEAT ROCK BAND 70’S JAZZ ROCK LATIN ROCK 16BEAT 16BEAT POP 16BEAT BALLAD FUNK 16BEAT SHUFFLE SOFT 16BEAT SHUFFLE DANCE POP DISCO TECHNO POP REGGAE BOOGIE ROCK’N’ROLL SHUFFLE 60’S ROCK’N’ROLL SPEED METAL TWIST SLOW ROCK SLOW BLUES SWING BEBOP 2BEAT SWING DIXIELAND BIG BAND JAZZ BALLAD BIG BAND BALLAD BOSSA JAZZ BOSSA SAMBA SALSA 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 RHUMBA MAMBO CHACHA TANGO MARCH MUSICAL POLKA 6/8 MARCH COUNTRY COUNTRY SHUFFLE COUNTRY SWING COUNTRY ROCK WALTZ JAZZ WALTZ VIENNA WALTZ BOSSA WALTZ COUNTRY WALTZ ■ Starting the Accompaniment There are several ways to start the accompaniment: ● Straight Start ........................................................................................................................................... Press the [START/STOP] button. Each of the styles also has a variation that can be selected by pressing the [VARIATION/FILL TO VARIATION] button or the right FILL IN bar (its LED will light) before pressing the [START/STOP] button. Normally the [NORMAL/ FILL TO NORMAL] button LED will be lit (or you can select it if the variation is selected), indicating that the normal pattern is selected. START/STOP FILL IN Bars Normal straight start = Variation straight start = NORMAL/FILL TO NORMAL / Left FILL IN Bar START/STOP VARIATION/FILL TO VARIATION / Right FILL IN Bar START/STOP ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ Accompaniment 19 ● Start With an Introduction ..................................................................................................................... Press the [INTRO/ENDING] button. If you press the [NORMAL/FILL TO NORMAL] button (or left FILL IN bar) or the [VARIATION/FILL TO VARIATION] button (or right FILL IN bar) while holding the [INTRO/ENDING] button, the rhythm will start with an appropriate fill and then go to the normal rhythm or variation rhythm, respectively. INTRO/ ENDING (Flashing) Intro start = INTRO/ENDING START/STOP (Flashing) Fill start to normal = INTRO/ENDING + NORMAL/FILL TO NORMAL / Left FILL IN Bar START/STOP / Right FILL IN Bar START/STOP (Flashing) Fill start to variation = INTRO/ENDING + VARIATION/FILL TO VARIATION The selected start mode can be disengaged prior to starting the accompaniment by pressing the selected button (flashing indicator) a second time. ● Synchronized Start ................................................................................................................................. Any of the start types described above can be synchronized to the first note or chord played on the keyboard by first pressing the [SYNCHRO START] button so that its indicator lights. When the keyboard is split or Auto Bass Chord Single/ Fingered mode is used, the first note played on the left-hand section of the keyboard will start the accompaniment (i.e. keys to the left of and including the splitpoint key — normally F#2). Once the synchronized start mode has been selected, use the [NORMAL/FILL TO NORMAL], [VARIATION/FILL TO VARIATION] and/or [INTRO/ENDING] buttons to select the type of start you want. The first dot of the BEAT display will flash at the current tempo when a synchronized start mode has been selected. SYNCHRO START After pressing SYNCHRO START Normal start = NORMAL/FILL TO NORMAL / Left FILL IN Bar Play key Variation start = VARIATION/FILL TO VARIATION / Right FILL IN Bar Play key Intro start = INTRO/ENDING Fill start to normal = INTRO/ENDING + NORMAL/FILL TO NORMAL / Left FILL IN Bar Play key Fill start to variation = INTRO/ENDING + VARIATION/FILL TO VARIATION / Right FILL IN Bar Play key Play key The synchronized start mode can be cancelled by pressing the [SYNCHRO START] button a second time so that its indicator goes out. NOTES • The synchronized start mode is automatically turned on when one of the ABC modes is engaged — see page 21 for details. ● Tap start .................................................................................................................................................. TAP METRONOME – + This function lets you set the tempo and start the rhythm in one operation. Simply tap the [TAP] button at the required tempo — 3 times for a 3/4 style and 4 times for a 4/4 style. The rhythm will start from the beginning of the next measure at the specified tempo. NOTES • The [TAP] button can also be used to change the tempo during rhythm playback. In this case the “tap” click will not sound. • If you tap the [TAP] button less than the required number of times (i.e. 3 or 4), the tap tempo function will be cancelled after a few seconds. ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 20 Accompaniment [ 001] Piano œ= 78 Pop 1 1 ● Measure Number Display During rhythm playback the current measure number is shown in the upper lefthand corner of the display. Measure number 1st. Beat 2nd. Beat 3rd. Beat 4th. Beat BEAT ● The Beat Display The four LED dots of the BEAT display provide a visual indication of the selected tempo. The leftmost (red) dot flashes on the first beat of each measure, the second dot flashes on the second beat, and so on (all dots except the leftmost dot are green). When a 3/4-time rhythm is selected, only the first three dots will flash. ■ Fill-ins The CVP-89 provides two types of automatic “fill-ins.” NORMAL FILL TO NORMAL VARIATION FILL TO VARIATION ■ Fill To Normal: Press the [NORMAL/FILL TO NORMAL] button or the left FILL IN bar (located in front of the keyboard) during playback to produce a fill-in and go to the normal rhythm. ■ Fill To Variation: Press the [VARIATION/FILL TO VARIATION] button or the right FILL IN bar during playback to produce a fill-in and go to the variation pattern. FILL IN Bars If you hold one of the FILL buttons or bars, the fill-in will repeat until the end of the measure in which button is released. ■ Left-pedal Rhythm Break LEFT PEDAL FUNCTION RHYTHM BREAK When the left-pedal function is set to “Rhythm Break” as described on page 15, the left pedal can be used to create a break in the rhythm while playing. Press and release the left pedal to stop the rhythm. Rhythm playback will resume from the top of the next measure. You can also hold the left pedal for longer breaks — the rhythm will resume from the top of the next measure after the pedal is released. The break can be cancelled before the beginning of the next measure by pressing the pedal a second time. ■ Stopping the Accompaniment START/STOP INTRO/ ENDING The accompaniment can be stopped at any time by pressing the [START/ STOP] button. Press the [INTRO/ENDING] button if you want to go to the ending pattern and then stop. NOTES • If you started with an intro or fill-in, or using the SYNCHRO mode, these selections are maintained even after the accompaniment is stopped. • If the left pedal is switched to START/STOP operation, it performs the same function as the panel [START/STOP] buttons (press to START, press again to STOP). ■ Metronome TAP METRONOME – + The CVP-89 also offers a metronome function that is ideal for practice. To start the metronome, simply press the [METRONOME] button so that its indicator lights. The metronome will play at the currently selected tempo whether a style is playing or not. The metronome volume can be adjusted via the RHYTHM volume control. Press the [METRONOME] button again to stop the metronome sound (the METRONOME indicator will go out). The metronome will also stop automatically if the [START/STOP] button is pressed to stop a style in progress. NOTES • If the style is started by pressing the [START/STOP] button while the metronome is playing, the metronome will continue to sound along with the style. ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ Auto Bass Chord (ABC) The CVP-89 includes a sophisticated autoaccompaniment system (Auto Bass Chord — ABC) that can provide automated rhythm, bass and chord backing in a number of ways. FULL KEYBOARD SINGLE/ FINGERED ABC ABC RHYTHM BASS 1 CHORD 2 MAX MAX DEMO LEFT PEDAL UTILITY REVERB FULL KEYBOARD ABC START/STOP MIN MASTER VOLUME 21 SINGLE/ FINGERED ABC INTRO/ ENDING SYNCHRO START SOLO STYLEPLAY NORMAL VARIATION FILL TO NORMAL FILL TO VARIATION PROGRAM MEMORY BEAT SONG/PHRASE NUMBER RIGHT LEFT 1 2 REW FF ORCH RHYTHM PHRASE REPEAT GUIDE LAMP CANCEL 3-10 START/STOP CUSTOM RHYTHM MIN AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT POP 16BEAT DANCE POP BOOGIE SLOW ROCK SWING JAZZ BALLAD BOSSA RHUMBA STYLE MARCH COUNTRY WALTZ STYLE 13-50 STYLE 1 DISK STYLE 2 TAP METRONOME – + TEMPO – / NO + / YES PIANO CLAVINOVA TONE E. PIANO HARPSICHORD VIBES GUITAR STRINGS ORGAN CHOIR UPRIGHT BASS 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 ELEC BASS DRUMS VOICE 13-60 VOICE SPLIT REGISTRATION VOICE PAUSE REC CHORD SEQUENCE SONG SELECT DISK ORCHESTRA ■ Single-Finger & Fingered Accompaniment This mode lets you create accompaniment in two ways. “Single Finger” accompaniment makes it simple to produce accompaniment using major, seventh, minor and minorseventh chords by pressing a minimum number of keys in the ABC section of the keyboard. The automatic accompaniment consists of rhythm, bass and chords. “Fingered” accompaniment is ideal if you already know how to play chords on a keyboard, since it allows you to supply your own chords for the Auto Accompaniment feature. Z Select SINGLE/FINGERED ..................................................................................................................... FULL KEYBOARD SINGLE/ FINGERED ABC ABC Press the [SINGLE/FINGERED] button to select the SINGLE/FINGERED mode (the SINGLE/FINGERED indicator will light). X Select a Style .......................................................................................................................................... Select an accompaniment style using the style selectors (see “Style Selection” on page 17). C Set the Tempo ......................................................................................................................................... Use the TEMPO [▲] and [▼] buttons to set the desired accompaniment tempo if necessary (see “Tempo Control” on page 18 for more details). V Play .......................................................................................................................................................... ● Single-finger Accompaniment C Cm C7 Pressing any key on the ABC section of the keyboard (up to the split point — normally the F#2 key) will cause the automatic chord and bass accompaniment to begin (synchro start is automatically selected in the ABC mode). If you press a “C” key, for example, a C-major accompaniment will be played. Press another key in the ABC section of the keyboard to select a new chord. The key you press will always determine the “root” of the chord played (i.e. “C” for a C chord). The name of the detected chord will appear on the display. Single-finger minor, seventh, and minor-seventh chords can be played as follows: • For a minor chord, press the root key and the black key to its left. • For a seventh chord, press the root key and the white key to its left. Cm7 • For a minor-seventh chord, press the root key and both the white and black key to its left. Any other two-note fingerings that do not fit the above rules will produce a chord based on the previous chord. ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 22 Auto Bass Chord (ABC) ● Fingered Accompaniment [001] Piano œ= 78 Dbm As soon as you play any chord (up to 4 notes) on the lower keyboard (up to the split point — normally the F#2 key), the Clavinova will automatically begin to play the chord along with the selected rhythm and an appropriate bass line (synchro start is automatically selected in the ABC mode*). The name of the detected chord will appear on the display. If the chord played is not recognized by the CVP-89, only the root note will be displayed followed by an asterisk (“* ”). 1 * Automatic synchro start switching can be enabled or disabled via the “Auto Synchro Start Switching” function, described on page 62. The Clavinova will accept the following 20 chord types in the Fingered Accompaniment mode: • • • • • • • • • • Major Minor [m] Major seventh [M7] Sixth [6] Seventh [7] Minor sixth [m6] Minor seventh [m7] Minor major seventh [mM7] Minor seventh flatted fifth [m7(b5)] Minor flatted fifth [m(b5)] • • • • • • • • • • Flatted fifth [(b5)] Seventh flatted fifth [7(b5)] Major seventh flatted fifth [M7(b5)] Seventh suspended fourth [7sus4] Suspended fourth [sus4] Augmented [aug] Seventh sharp fifth [7(#5)] Major seventh sharp fifth [M7(#5)] Diminished [dim] Minor major seventh flatted fifth [mM7(b5)] “On-bass” chords can be produced by playing 5-note chords. the lowest note specifies the bass note while the upper 4 (or 3 if the 4-note chord is not recognized) specify the chord. NOTES • The automatic accompaniment will sometimes not change when related chords are played in sequence (e.g. some minor chords followed by the minor seventh). ● The [INTRO/ENDING], [NORMAL/FILL TO NORMAL], and [VARIATION/FILL TO VARIATION] buttons can be used in the ABC mode to create pattern variations in the same way that they are used with rhythm patterns (refer to the “Accompaniment” section on page 18, 19 for details). Normal start = NORMAL/FILL TO NORMAL / Left FILL IN Bar Lower key Variation start = VARIATION/FILL TO VARIATION / Right FILL IN Bar Lower key Intro start = INTRO/ENDING Fill start to normal = INTRO/ENDING + NORMAL/FILL TO NORMAL / Left FILL IN Bar Lower key Fill start to variation = INTRO/ENDING + VARIATION/FILL TO VARIATION / Right FILL IN Bar Lower key Lower key B Stop the Accompaniment ...................................................................................................................... START/STOP INTRO/ ENDING Press the [START/STOP] or [INTRO/ENDING] button to stop the accompaniment. NOTES • Press the [SINGLE/FINGERED] button so that its indicator goes out when you want to exit from the SINGLE/FINGERED mode. ■ Full-keyboard ABC ● Full-keyboard ABC FULL KEYBOARD SINGLE/ FINGERED ABC ABC When this advanced auto-accompaniment mode is engaged (press the [FULL KEYBOARD] button so that its indicator lights) the Clavinova will automatically create appropriate accompaniment while you play just about anything, anywhere on the keyboard: chords, a bass line, arpeggiated chords, a melody line. The name of the detected chord will appear on the display. You don’t have to worry about specifying the accompaniment chords. Although Full-keyboard ABC is designed to work with many songs, some arrangements may not be suitable for use with this feature. Try playing a few simple songs in the Full-keyboard ABC mode to get a feel for its capabilities. NOTES • Chord detection occurs at approximately 8th-note intervals. Extremely short chords — less than an 8th note in length — may therefore not be detected. ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ Auto Bass Chord (ABC) ● Conventional Fullkeyboard ABC FULL KEYBOARD SINGLE/ FINGERED ABC ABC 23 The Conventional Full-keyboard ABC mode can be engaged by pressing the [FULL KEYBOARD] and [SINGLE/FINGERED] buttons simultaneously (both indicators will light). In this mode the split point is de-activated and notes played anywhere on the keyboard are detected and used to determine the harmonization of the accompaniment. In the Conventional Full-keyboard ABC mode, chord detection is possible when at least three notes are played anywhere on the keyboard. The name of the detected chord will appear on the display. NOTES • 2-note fingerings are not recognized in the Conventional Full-keyboard ABC mode. • If more than 5 notes are played in the Conventional Full-keyboard ABC mode, the lowest 4 notes are used to specify the chord. • The (b5), 7(b5), M7(b5), and mM7(b5) chord types included in the list on the previous page are not recognized in the Conventional Full-keyboard ABC mode. • The Dual or SPLIT mode can be used with Full-keyboard ABC. • The Full-keyboard and Conventional Full-keyboard ABC modes will be disengaged and the Single/Fingered mode will be engaged if Solo Styleplay is turned on. • Solo Styleplay will automatically be turned off whenever the Full-keyboard or Conventional Full-keyboard ABC mode is engaged. • Press the [FULL KEYBOARD] button so that its indicator goes out when you want to exit from the Full-keyboard ABC mode. To exit from the Conventional Full-keyboard ABC mode press the [FULL KEYBOARD] or [SINGLE/FINGERED] button twice. ■ Volume Control RHYTHM BASS 1 CHORD 2 MAX MIN AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT The RHYTHM, CHORD 1, CHORD 2, and BASS volume controls can be used to adjust the volume of the corresponding accompaniment parts when using ABC. In general, CHORD 1 controls rhythmic chords while CHORD 2 controls more decorative chords (arpeggios, etc.). The volume of the keyboard can be independently controlled by using the BASS volume control while holding the [UTILITY] button. NOTES • Some styles may not use all four parts: RHYTHM, CHORD 1, CHORD 2, and BASS. BASS UTILITY ■ Changing the ABC Split Point SINGLE/ FINGERED The ABC split point can be set at any key by pressing the desired key while holding the [SINGLE/FINGERED] button. The specified split point will appear on the display. The default split point — F#2 — will always be set automatically whenever the power is initially turned on. ABC C3 NOTES • The split point is indicated by the keyboard guide lamp above the split point key. ■ Special Modes ● Mute Some accompaniment notes may be automatically muted if they interfere musically with what is being played by the right hand. This mute function can be enabled or disabled via the “ABC Auto Mute” function described on page 64. The mute function is normally enabled (default). ● Minor Harmonization When playing a 7th chord in a minor key, the ABC system will automatically shift a 9th note down to the octave, and a 6th note to the 5th when the “Minor Harmonization” function described on page 64 is turned on. The default setting for this function is off. NOTES • Minor Harmonization will not function in the Full Keyboard ABC mode. ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 24 Custom Rhythm The CVP-89 CUSTOM RHYTHM feature allows you to create 12 original rhythm patterns that can be later recalled and played at any time, just like the presets. Each custom rhythm pattern can be “stored” in any of the CVP-89’s 12 panel style memory locations. PROGRAM CUSTOM RHYTHM RHYTHM BASS 1 CHORD 2 MAX MAX DEMO LEFT PEDAL UTILITY REVERB FULL KEYBOARD ABC SINGLE/ FINGERED ABC SYNCHRO START SOLO STYLEPLAY NORMAL VARIATION FILL TO NORMAL FILL TO VARIATION MEMORY PROGRAM SONG/PHRASE NUMBER RIGHT LEFT ORCH RHYTHM PHRASE REPEAT GUIDE LAMP CANCEL BEAT START/STOP MIN MASTER VOLUME INTRO/ ENDING 1 2 REW FF 3-10 START/STOP CUSTOM RHYTHM MIN AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT POP 16BEAT DANCE POP BOOGIE SLOW ROCK SWING JAZZ BALLAD BOSSA RHUMBA STYLE MARCH COUNTRY WALTZ STYLE 13-50 STYLE 1 DISK STYLE 2 TAP METRONOME – + TEMPO – / NO + / YES PIANO CLAVINOVA TONE E. PIANO HARPSICHORD VIBES GUITAR STRINGS ORGAN CHOIR UPRIGHT BASS 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 VOICE ELEC BASS DRUMS VOICE 13-60 VOICE SPLIT REGISTRATION PAUSE REC CHORD SEQUENCE SONG SELECT DISK ORCHESTRA ■ Creating an Original Rhythm Pattern Z Select a Rhythm ...................................................................................................................................... POP DANCE POP 16BEAT SLOW ROCK BOOGIE Begin by selecting one of the preset rhythms (NORMAL or VARIATION), a previously-recorded custom rhythm, or a loaded disk style rhythm (NORMAL or VARIATION) that is close to the rhythm you want to create. For example, select a WALTZ rhythm if you want to program a rhythm pattern in 3/4 time. You cannot program a 3/4 rhythm when a 4/4 rhythm is selected, and vice versa. X Press [PROGRAM] .................................................................................................................................. Press the [PROGRAM] button so that its LED indicator lights. The selected rhythm will begin playing. PROGRAM • CANCEL 16BEAT DANCE POP F6 When the PROGRAM mode is engaged, the LED indicators for all rhythm selectors that currently contain custom rhythm data will glow green. Any previously programmed and stored custom rhythm pattern can be erased from memory by pressing the corresponding rhythm button while holding the [CANCEL] (F6) key. C Set the Required Resolution ................................................................................................................. TAP METRONOME – + [ 0 0 1 ] CUSTOM NORMAL œ= 78 QUANTIZE ON The initial resolution for custom rhythm programming is 16th (for doublet-type beats) or 12th notes (for triplet-type beats): “QUANTIZE ON” will appear on the display when the PROGRAM mode is engaged. This means that all entered notes will be adjusted to fall on the nearest 16th or 12th beat. If you need greater resolution for free-tempo passages, switch to 96th-note resolution by pressing the [TAP] key (“QUANTIZE OFF” will appear on the display). You can return to 16th (12th) note resolution at any time by pressing the [METRONOME] button. V Enter the Rhythm .................................................................................................................................... CANCEL CLEAR ALL You can now add new notes to the selected rhythm accompaniment by playing the keyboard percussion keys at the appropriate timing. Keyboard velocity sensitivity lets you add accents and dynamics as required. The rhythm pattern is two measures long (the current measure number will appear on the display), and the pattern will continue to repeat so you can add new instruments during each repeat, if necessary. F6 G6 NOTES • If you want to create a totally new rhythm from scratch, press the [CLEAR ALL] (G6) key and the [CANCEL] key simultaneously before beginning to program. This cancels all the instruments in the original accompaniment, leaving only a metronome sound (the metronome sound is not recorded). ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ Custom Rhythm 25 B Cancel Instruments & Correct Mistakes as Required ......................................................................... CANCEL CLEAR ALL F6 G6 Although you can cancel all instruments in a pattern by pressing the [CLEAR ALL] and [CANCEL] keys, it is also possible to cancel a single instrument to erase a mistake or simply eliminate an unwanted instrument. While holding the [CANCEL] key, press the key corresponding to the instrument you want to cancel. The selected instrument should now be cleared from the pattern. N Save the Custom Rhythm ...................................................................................................................... POP 16BEAT DANCE POP BOOGIE SLOW ROCK When your custom rhythm is complete, press the STYLE selector with which you want the new rhythm to be associated. The STYLE selector indicator will glow green. This saves the custom rhythm in the selected style button. Then press the [PROGRAM] button to exit the custom rhythm programming mode (the PROGRAM indicator will go out). If you want to stop programming without saving the rhythm pattern, simply press the [PROGRAM] button so that its LED indicator goes out. NOTES • The following patterns can be individually programmed for each Custom Rhythm: Basic pattern x 1 (NORMAL) Fill-in x 2 (FILL IN 1/2) Intro x 1 (INTRO) Ending x 1 (ENDING) • If a FILL IN button or bar is pressed prior to programming, it is possible to program a one-measure custom fill-in (2 types). Custom INTRO/ENDING patterns can also be programmed: press the [INTRO/ENDING] button while the rhythm is running to program a custom ending, or while the rhythm is stopped to program a custom intro. The intro or ending pattern will be the same length as the original (8 measures maximum). • Up to 8 notes can be played simultaneously. • The drum kit, reverb, and pan settings for the custom rhythm can be changed as required via the “Edit Drum Instrument” function described on page 63. ■ Playing Back Your Custom Rhythm Pattern CUSTOM RHYTHM Once created, your original rhythm pattern can be played back by pressing the [CUSTOM RHYTHM] button (its LED will light), the style selector button into which it was stored, and then the [START/STOP] button. Press the [START/ STOP] button to stop playback. Your CUSTOM RHYTHM can also be used as the basis for ABC accompaniment. NOTES • If ABC is used with a Custom Rhythm pattern, the ABC program of the original style will be used. If the original style is a disk style, however, no ABC sound will be produced unless that disk style is loaded. • No sound will be produced if the selected Custom Rhythm style contains no data. • Custom Rhythm data will be backed up for approximately one week. • A set of 12 custom rhythms can be saved to and loaded from disk as described on page 45, 46. ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 26 Disk Styles A “Style Disk” is supplied with the Clavinova, providing an extra 50 ABC accompaniment styles. Any two of these patterns can be loaded into the Clavinova’s memory at a time. The [DISK STYLE 1] and [DISK STYLE 2] buttons select the loaded disk styles in the same way as the STYLE selectors select the internal styles. NOTES DISK STYLE 1 RHYTHM BASS MAX DEMO LEFT PEDAL REVERB SONG SELECT 1 CHORD 2 MAX UTILITY SONG/PHRASE NUMBER 2 FULL KEYBOARD ABC SINGLE/ FINGERED ABC SYNCHRO START SOLO STYLEPLAY NORMAL VARIATION FILL TO NORMAL FILL TO VARIATION MEMORY PROGRAM SONG/PHRASE NUMBER RIGHT LEFT ORCH RHYTHM PHRASE REPEAT GUIDE LAMP CANCEL BEAT START/STOP MIN MASTER VOLUME INTRO/ ENDING 1 2 REW FF 3-10 START/STOP CUSTOM RHYTHM MIN AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT POP 16BEAT DANCE POP BOOGIE SLOW ROCK SWING JAZZ BALLAD BOSSA RHUMBA MARCH COUNTRY WALTZ STYLE 13-50 STYLE 1 DISK STYLE 2 TAP METRONOME – + TEMPO – / NO + / YES PIANO CLAVINOVA TONE E. PIANO HARPSICHORD VIBES GUITAR STRINGS ORGAN CHOIR UPRIGHT BASS 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 STYLE VOICE ELEC BASS DRUMS VOICE 13-60 VOICE SPLIT REGISTRATION PAUSE REC CHORD SEQUENCE SONG SELECT DISK ORCHESTRA • If no disk styles are loaded as described below, the [DISK STYLE 1] and [DISK STYLE 2] buttons select pre-programmed disk styles contained in internal ROM memory. • Loaded disk styles will be retained in memory for about one week if the CVP-89 power is not turned on during that time. To keep the loaded disk steyles for longer periods, turn the power ON briefly at least once a week. • Style disk data can be copied to a different disk — see page 47. ■ Selecting & Loading Disk Styles Z Insert the Style Disk ............................................................................................................................... Insert the Style Disk into the disk drive with the sliding door on the disk facing the drive slot and the label side facing upward. The disk should click into place and the disk lamp will light briefly while the Clavinova reads and identifies the disk. X Make Sure the [SONG SELECT] Indicator Is Lit .................................................................................. The [SONG SELECT] indicator will light automatically when the disk is ready. If a disk is already loaded and the [SONG SELECT] indicator is not lit, press the [SONG SELECT] button so that it lights. When this is done the [DISK STYLE 1] and [DISK STYLE 2] button indicators will flash alternately, and the SINGLE/FINGERED ABC mode and synchronized start mode will be engaged (any other ABC mode will remain active if it was selected before the disk was loaded). SONG SELECT C Select a Style .......................................................................................................................................... SONG/PHRASE NUMBER [001] Piano œ=148 AmericanRock 1 ßƒ 1 Use the SONG/PHRASE NUMBER [▲] and [▼] buttons to select the desired style number. The selected style number, style name, and the current tempo will appear on the display. Also, an “s” will appear in front of the disk symbol on the display to indicate that a disk style is selected. You can “preview” the selected style by playing on the left-hand section of the keyboard (single-finger or fingered). Pattern playback will stop if a different pattern number is selected. NOTES • If a tempo is set prior to loading the style, that tempo becomes the default for the loaded style. V Load the Style ......................................................................................................................................... 1 DISK STYLE 2 Press the [DISK STYLE 1] or [DISK STYLE 2] button to load the selected pattern into that button. The [DISK STYLE 1] or [DISK STYLE 2] indicator will light, and the [SONG SELECT] indicator will go out. ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 27 B Repeat ...................................................................................................................................................... Repeat steps X through V to select and load a second pattern into the other [DISK STYLE] button if you like. N Eject the Disk When Done ..................................................................................................................... When you’ve finished with the Style Disk, press the disk drive EJECT button to remove it. Disk Style List Group No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 ROCK POP DANCE POP JAZZ Name AMERICAN ROCK ROCK’N’ROLL ROCK CLASSIC ROCKABILLY FIGHTING ROCK 60’S ROCK SHUFFLE 8BEAT 2 POP BALLAD FOLK MUSIC BOX NEW AGE POP COMPUTER GAME 16 BEAT POP BALLAD 16 BEAT SHUFFLE 2 DANCE 8BEAT DANCE POP 2 HOUSE POP POWER HOUSE FUNK 2 REGGAE 2 BIG BAND 2 BIG BAND 3 CONTEMPORARY JAZZ CHARLESTON AFRO-CUBAN SWING WALTZ Group LATIN MUSICAL & NOVELTY CLASSIC WORLD No. 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 Name CALYPSO BOSSA SOFT SAMBA 2 SALSA 2 BIG BAND CHACHA BROADWAY SHOW TIME PIT ORCHESTRA 1 (VAUDEVILLE) PIT ORCHESTRA 2 (SWING) PIT ORCHESTRA 3 (POPULAR) SNARE ROLL & PRIZE WINNER CLOCK CLASSICAL POLKA POP BAROQUE 1 POP BAROQUE 2 QUASI BAROQUE OVERTURE 1 OVERTURE 2 URBAN WALTZ CHANSON BOLERO CHINESE POP ARABIAN POP AFRICAN POP ■ Using a Loaded Disk Style 1 DISK STYLE 2 [ 001] Piano œ=148 AmericanRock 1 51 After you’ve loaded the desired Disk Styles, the [DISK STYLE 1] and [DISK STYLE 2] buttons can be used in exactly the same way as the other STYLE buttons to select the loaded patterns for ABC accompaniment (see “Auto Bass Chord (ABC)” beginning on page 21). The name of the Disk Style selected by the [DISK STYLE 1] or [DISK STYLE 2] button will be shown on the display. Also, the numbers “51” and “52” will appear when DISK STYLE 1 and DISK STYLE 2 are selected, respectively. ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 28 Solo Styleplay This sophisticated feature not only provides automatic rhythm, bass and chord accompaniment, but it also adds appropriate harmony notes (two or three harmonized notes) to a melody you play on the upper keyboard. SOLO STYLEPLAY RHYTHM BASS 1 CHORD 2 MAX MAX DEMO LEFT PEDAL UTILITY REVERB FULL KEYBOARD ABC START/STOP MIN MASTER VOLUME SINGLE/ FINGERED ABC INTRO/ ENDING SYNCHRO START SOLO STYLEPLAY NORMAL VARIATION FILL TO NORMAL FILL TO VARIATION PROGRAM MEMORY BEAT SONG/PHRASE NUMBER RIGHT LEFT 1 2 REW FF ORCH RHYTHM PHRASE REPEAT GUIDE LAMP CANCEL 3-10 START/STOP CUSTOM RHYTHM MIN AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT POP 16BEAT DANCE POP BOOGIE SLOW ROCK SWING JAZZ BALLAD BOSSA RHUMBA STYLE MARCH COUNTRY WALTZ STYLE 13-50 STYLE 1 DISK STYLE 2 TAP METRONOME – + TEMPO – / NO + / YES PIANO CLAVINOVA TONE E. PIANO HARPSICHORD VIBES GUITAR STRINGS ORGAN CHOIR UPRIGHT BASS 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 ELEC BASS DRUMS VOICE 13-60 VOICE SPLIT REGISTRATION VOICE PAUSE REC CHORD SEQUENCE SONG SELECT DISK ORCHESTRA ■ Using Solo Styleplay Z Turn Solo Styleplay ON .......................................................................................................................... Press the [SOLO STYLEPLAY] button to turn the SOLO STYLEPLAY mode on. The SINGLE/FINGERED mode is automatically selected when SOLO STYLEPLAY is turned on. If a FULL KEYBOARD mode is selected, the SINGLE/FINGERED mode will automatically be selected since Solo Styleplay cannot be used with the FULL KEYBOARD modes. SOLO STYLEPLAY X Select a Style .......................................................................................................................................... Select an accompaniment style using the style selectors (see “Style Selection” on page 17). An appropriate voice for the selected style will automatically be selected, but you can also select any other voice after selecting the style. C Set the Tempo ......................................................................................................................................... Set the desired tempo if necessary using the TEMPO [▲] and [▼] buttons (see “Tempo Control” on page 18). V Play .......................................................................................................................................................... Play the required chords (single-finger or fingered) on the ABC section of the keyboard while playing a melody line on the upper keyboard (for some styles, only one note can be played at a time on the right-hand section of the keyboard in the Solo Styleplay mode). B Stop the Accompaniment ...................................................................................................................... Press [START/STOP] or [INTRO/ENDING] to stop the accompaniment. N Turn Solo Styleplay OFF ........................................................................................................................ Press the [SOLO STYLEPLAY] button again to turn the function off. ■ Harmonization Variations SOLO STYLEPLAY POP 16BEAT DANCE POP [ 001] Piano œ= 78 SOLO STYLEPLAY BOOGIE 1 2 It is possible to apply the harmonization type and voice from a different style to the selected style by pressing the style selector corresponding to the harmonization type you want to use (except for the [DISK STYLE 1/2] selector) while holding the [SOLO STYLEPLAY] button — the selected STYLE button indicator will flash and the selected style number will appear on the display while the [SOLO STYLEPLAY] button is held. This makes it possible, for example, to use the solo styleplay harmonization type and voice from the 16 BEAT style when actually playing in the POP style. ■ The Left Pedal & Solo Styleplay LEFT PEDAL LEFT PEDAL FUNCTION SOLO STYLEPLAY If the LEFT PEDAL function is set to SOLO STYLEPLAY after the SOLO STYLEPLAY mode is selected, harmonization of notes played on the right-hand section of the keyboard only occurs while the left pedal is pressed. This allows you to combine normal ABC type performance with SOLO STYLEPLAY as required. NOTES • The SOLO STYLEPLAY mode will be disengaged if the ABC SINGLE/FINGERED mode is turned off or the FULL KEYBOARD ABC mode is turned on. ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ Registration Memory 29 The CVP-89 Registration Memory feature can be used to memorize 12 complete control-panel setups that you can recall whenever needed. MEMORY PIANO CLAVINOVA TONE E. PIANO HARPSICHORD VIBES GUITAR STRINGS ORGAN CHOIR UPRIGHT BASS 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 ELEC BASS REGISTRATION DRUMS VOICE RHYTHM BASS 1 CHORD 2 MAX MAX DEMO LEFT PEDAL UTILITY REVERB FULL KEYBOARD ABC SINGLE/ FINGERED ABC SYNCHRO START SOLO STYLEPLAY NORMAL VARIATION FILL TO NORMAL FILL TO VARIATION MEMORY PROGRAM SONG/PHRASE NUMBER RIGHT LEFT ORCH RHYTHM PHRASE REPEAT GUIDE LAMP CANCEL BEAT START/STOP MIN MASTER VOLUME INTRO/ ENDING 1 2 REW FF 3-10 START/STOP CUSTOM RHYTHM MIN AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT POP 16BEAT DANCE POP BOOGIE SLOW ROCK SWING JAZZ BALLAD BOSSA RHUMBA MARCH COUNTRY WALTZ STYLE 13-50 STYLE 1 DISK STYLE 2 TAP METRONOME – + TEMPO – / NO + / YES STYLE PIANO CLAVINOVA TONE E. PIANO HARPSICHORD VIBES GUITAR STRINGS ORGAN CHOIR UPRIGHT BASS 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 VOICE ELEC BASS DRUMS VOICE 13-60 VOICE SPLIT REGISTRATION PAUSE REC CHORD SEQUENCE SONG SELECT DISK ORCHESTRA ■ Memory Store Z Make the Desired Control Settings ....................................................................................................... Set the CVP-89 panel controls to the state you want to memorize. The settings that are memorized by the Registration Memory are listed below. Settings Stored By the Registration Memory • • • • • • • • • ABC On/Off Solo Styleplay On/Off Solo Styleplay Variation Voice Number Manual Volume Style Number Style Variation Tempo Rhythm Volume • • • • • • • • • Chord 1 Volume Chord 2 Volume Bass Volume Split Point Dual/Split Mode Dual/Split Voice Dual/Split Balance Reverb Type Reverb Depth • • • • Left Pedal Function Intro Touch Sensitivity Pitch Bend Range (for the selected voice only) • Chorus On/Off (for the selected voice only) • Soundboard Effect Depth X Memorize the Settings ........................................................................................................................... MEMORY PIANO CLAVINOVA TONE E. PIANO 1 2 3 HA CH REGISTRATION Press one of the VOICE selectors while holding the [MEMORY] button. The indicator of the pressed voice selector will glow green indicating that the panel data has been memorized in that location. ■ Recall MEMORY PIANO CLAVINOVA TONE E. PIANO 1 2 3 HA CH REGISTRATION Simply press the appropriate VOICE selector after pressing the [REGISTRATION] button (the [REGISTRATION] button indicator should be lit) to recall the memorized settings (the indicator of the selected VOICE selector will glow green). The recalled voice, style, and tempo will appear on the display. Once recalled, press the [REGISTRATION] button again so that its indicator goes out to return to the normal play mode. NOTES • If DISK STYLE 1 or DISK STYLE 2 is stored in the registration memory, the same disk style must be assigned to the same button ([DISK STYLE 1] or [DISK STYLE 2]) when the memory is recalled otherwise the currently assigned disk style will sound. • The contents of all 12 Registration Memory locations can be saved to and loaded from disk using the Save Registration and Load Registration utilities described on page 44. • The Registration Tempo utility function described on page 64 determines whether the tempo setting included in the registration memory data will be used when a registration memory is recalled. • Registration data is retained in the Clavinova memory for about one week even if the POWER is not turned on. To keep the data in memory for longer periods, turn the POWER switch on briefly at least once a week. • 12 “preset” sets of registration data are stored in the 12 memory locations when the CVP-89 is initially shipped. ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 30 Disk Orchestra Using Yamaha Disk Orchestra disks (one is supplied with the CVP-89, others are available from Yamaha), the Clavinova will let you enjoy listening to automated performances, or function as your “private music tutor,” allowing you to practice various parts of a piece while the others are played automatically. The CVP-89 also shows you which keys to play with keyboard guide lamps that light up above each key. You can also play “in ensemble” with the complete Disk Orchestra arrangement. • The Disk Orchestra Collection playback data is not transmitted via the MIDI OUT connector. NOTES SONG/PHRASE NUMBER RIGHT LEFT ORCH 1 2 3-10 REW FF PAUSE PHRASE REPEAT RHYTHM LAMP CANCEL GUIDE START/STOP CHORD SEQUENCE REC SONG SELECT DISK ORCHESTRA RHYTHM BASS 1 CHORD 2 MAX MAX DEMO LEFT PEDAL UTILITY REVERB FULL KEYBOARD ABC SINGLE/ FINGERED ABC SYNCHRO START SOLO STYLEPLAY NORMAL VARIATION FILL TO NORMAL FILL TO VARIATION MEMORY PROGRAM SONG/PHRASE NUMBER RIGHT LEFT ORCH RHYTHM PHRASE REPEAT GUIDE LAMP CANCEL BEAT START/STOP MIN MASTER VOLUME INTRO/ ENDING 1 2 REW FF 3-10 START/STOP CUSTOM RHYTHM MIN AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT POP 16BEAT DANCE POP BOOGIE SLOW ROCK SWING JAZZ BALLAD BOSSA RHUMBA MARCH COUNTRY STYLE WALTZ STYLE 13-50 STYLE 1 DISK STYLE 2 TAP METRONOME – + TEMPO – / NO + / YES PIANO CLAVINOVA TONE E. PIANO HARPSICHORD VIBES GUITAR STRINGS ORGAN CHOIR UPRIGHT BASS 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 VOICE ELEC BASS DRUMS VOICE 13-60 VOICE SPLIT REGISTRATION PAUSE REC CHORD SEQUENCE SONG SELECT DISK ORCHESTRA ■ Automatic Performance Z Insert a Disk Orchestra Disk .................................................................................................................. Insert the DISK ORCHESTRA disk into the disk drive with the sliding door facing the drive slot and the label side facing upward. The disk should click into place and the disk lamp will light briefly while the Clavinova reads and identifies the disk. NOTES • If a disk is already loaded and the [SONG SELECT] indicator is out, press the [SONG SELECT] button so that the indicator lights before proceeding. X Select a Song Number ........................................................................................................................... When the disk is inserted the [SONG SELECT], [RIGHT/1], [LEFT/2], [ORCH/3-10], and [RHYTHM] indicators will light if the corresponding tracks contain performance data, and the selected song number and name will be shown on the display along with the current tempo. Use the SONG/PHRASE NUMBER [▲] and [▼] buttons to select the desired song number. Select “ALL” if you want all songs on the disk to be played and repeated until playback is stopped. SONG SELECT SONG/PHRASE NUMBER NOTES [001] Piano œ=144 MINUET(BACH) 1 ƒALL • You can also start sequential repeat playback by using the [▲] and [▼] buttons to select the song number from which playback is to begin, and then pressing the [START/STOP] button while holding the [UTILITY] button. • The songs can be made to play back and repeat either in sequence or in random order when “ALL” is selected or when starting playback by pressing the [START/ STOP] button while holding the [UTILITY] button, and playback is started, depending on the setting of the “Random All Song Repeat” function (page 62). C Start Playback ......................................................................................................................................... START/STOP START/STOP UTILITY Start playback of the selected song by pressing either the DISK ORCHESTRA [START/STOP] button or the ABC [START/STOP] button. Unless “ALL” is selected, the selected song will play through to the end and playback will stop automatically. It is also possible to automatically play all songs from the currently selected song repeatedly by pressing the [START/STOP] button while holding the [UTILITY] button. The current measure number will be shown on the display during playback, and the voice indicator used for the RIGHT/1TR and LEFT/2TR parts will light. The voice can be changed as required via the VOICE selectors. Playback can be stopped at any time by pressing the DISK ORCHESTRA or ABC [START/STOP] button. ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ Disk Orchestra NOTES 31 • Please note that playback cannot be started while the Clavinova is searching the disk for a selected song (a flashing dot following the song name on the display indicates that the Clavinova is searching). • With some songs the displayed measure numbers may not match those marked on the score. • Some songs start after a click count-in. • The playback tempo can be changed freely as required. The preset tempo for the selected song can be recalled at any time by pressing the TEMPO [▲] and [▼] buttons simultaneously. • Some Disk Orchestra software does not produce a tempo display (e.g. free-tempo phrases, etc.). In this case, three dashes appear in place of the tempo on the display, and the measure numbers shown on the display will not match the actual measure numbers of the song. • The keyboard guide lamps corresponding to the keys being played will light in real time. The keyboard guide lamps can be turned off by pressing the [LAMP CANCEL] button. V Eject the Disk When Done ..................................................................................................................... When you’ve finished with the currently loaded disk, simply press the disk drive EJECT button to remove it. CAUTION Disk drive lamp NEVER eject a disk or turn the power off while: 1. The disk drive lamp is on. 2. The DISK ORCHESTRA function is playing. ■ Playing Back only Specific Parts RIGHT 1 LEFT ORCH 2 3-10 The [RIGHT/1], [LEFT/2], [ORCH/3-10], and [RHYTHM] buttons can be used to select playback of specific parts. The [LEFT/2] button turns the left-hand part on or off, the [RIGHT/1] button turns the right-hand part on or off, the [ORCH/3-10] button turns the ORCHESTRA parts on or off, and the [RHYTHM] button turns the rhythm part on or off. When a part is on, the corresponding LED indicator lights. You can, for example, turn off the right and/or left-hand parts so you can practice them on the keyboard. RHYTHM ● Turning Individual Orchestra Parts On or Off Normally the [ORCH/3-10] buttons turns all the orchestra parts (tracks 3 through 10)* on or off at once. You can, however, turn these parts on or off individually. There are two ways to do this: Track 10 12 14 [ 001] Piano œ=120 123456789ABCDER 1 Track 11 13 15 (Rhythm) (A) (C) (E) 5 7 10 12 14 ORCH 3-10 B5 C6 D6 E6 F6 G6 A6 B6 C7 3 4 6 8 9 11 13 15 16 (B)(D)(R)(G) (F) ORCH TAP METRONOME 3-10 – + TEMPO – / NO + / YES * Some software may actually have 15 or 16 tracks, indicated by numbers “1” through “9” and letters “A” through “E” and “R” or “A” through “G” on the display, depending on the type of data. Via the Keyboard Turn the desired tracks on or off by pressing the keys shown in the illustration to the left while holding the [ORCH/3-10] button (the current status of the tracks is shown on the display while the [ORCH/3-10] button is held): Press the key once to move the cursor to the tracks on the display, and a second to turn the track on or off. The status of the track is indicated by the track number (or letter): No number .................. Flashing number ........ Lit number .................. No data Playback off Playback on Via the Panel Controls Use the [TAP] and [METRONOME] buttons while holding the [ORCH/3-10] button to move the cursor on the display to the number of the track you want to turn on or off, then, still holding the [ORCH/3-10] button, use the TEMPO [s] and [t] buttons to turn the track on or off. NOTES • With DOC, Performance Memory, and Disklavier data, only the numbers of tracks containing data appear on the display. With most other types of data all tracks are displayed whether they contain data or not. In addition to the main display, the status of tracks 3 through 16 is indicated by the corresponding keyboard guide lamps while the [ORCH/3-10] button is held. If a lamp is out, the corresponding track contains no data. A flashing lamp indicates that playback is off, and a lit lamp indicates that playbacks is on. ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 32 Disk Orchestra ■ Volume Control During DISK ORCHESTRA playback use the RHYTHM volume control to adjust the volume of the drum and percussion parts, the CHORD 2 volume control adjusts the volume of the main left- and right-hand parts, the CHORD 1 volume control adjusts the volume of all other parts except the bass, and the BASS control adjusts the volume of the bass part. RHYTHM ..... Drum and Percussion parts (track 15). BASS .......... Bass part (track 3). CHORD 1 .... Other backing parts except Bass (track 4-10). CHORD 2 .... Main left- and right-hand parts (tracks 1 & 2). NOTES • When a different song is selected the volume settings will correspond to those in the song data, regardless of the positions of the volume controls. ■ Guided Right- and Left-hand Practice After turning GUIDE on... RIGHT Left- and right-hand guide = 1 LEFT or RIGHT 2 1 Right-hand guide only = RIGHT = LEFT 2 1 Left-hand guide only 2 LEFT RIGHT LEFT 2 1 With this feature, the Clavinova waits for you to play the appropriate keys before playing ahead, so you can learn to play the piece at your own pace. Press the [GUIDE] button so that its indicator lights to turn the guide mode on. The settings of the [RIGHT/1] and [LEFT/2] buttons will then determine whether the guide function operates for the left-hand part only, the right-hand part only, or both the right- and left-hand parts, as shown to the left. When you press the [START/STOP] button to begin playback, the introduction will play automatically but then the Clavinova will stop and wait for you to play the next key(s). The CVP-89 indicates the next key(s) to be played via the guide lamps above the keyboard. As you play the appropriate keys, the piece will continue, pausing until you play the right keys each time. As with automated performance, the song will stop automatically when the end is reached, or it can be stopped at any time by pressing the [START/STOP] button. NOTES • Disk Orchestra playback tempo can be set to any desired value after a song has been selected by using the TEMPO [▲] and [▼] buttons. • The positions of the guide lamps do not change if the transpose function is used to transpose the pitch of the keyboard. • If the guide lamps flashing above the keyboard distract you, or you want to try playing along without them, simply press the [LAMP CANCEL] button so that its indicator lights. Repeat to turn the guide lamps back on. • The [PAUSE], [REW] and [FF] buttons will not operate when the guide function is in use. ● Guide Modes ........................................................................................................................................... The Clavinova has two guide modes which can be selected as follows: A -1 GUIDE [ 001] Piano œ=120 GUIDE 1 B -1 ● Normal Wait: This mode is automatically selected when the power is turned on. It can also be selected by pressing the A-1 key (the lowest key) while holding the [GUIDE] button. The A-1 guide lamp will light while the [GUIDE] button is pressed. In the normal wait mode the Clavinova will wait until the appropriate key or chord, as indicated by the keyboard guide lamps, is played before proceeding to the next note. GUIDE [ 001] Piano œ=120 GUIDE 2bar 1 ● Delayed Wait: This mode can be selected by pressing the B-1 key (the second-to-lowest white key) while holding the [GUIDE] button. The B-1 guide lamp will light while the [GUIDE] button is pressed. In the delayed wait mode the Clavinova will play ahead for 8 quarter-note beats (two measures in 4/4 time) and then wait until the appropriate key or chord, as indicated by the keyboard guide lamps, is played. ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ Disk Orchestra 33 ■ Repeat Functions ● Phrase Repeat Use this function if you want to practice a specific phrase within a song, as indicated by the phrase marks on the Disk Orchestra Collection score. Z Select a Song .......................................................................................................................................... Press the [SONG SELECT] button so that its indicator lights and select the desired song by using the SONG/PHRASE NUMBER [▲] and [▼] buttons. SONG SELECT SONG/PHRASE NUMBER X Turn Phrase Repeat ON and Select a Phrase Number........................................................................ SONG/PHRASE NUMBER PHRASE REPEAT [ 025] Piano œ=120 PHRASE< 1 Press the [PHRASE REPEAT] button (its LED indicator will light). When this is done the phrase number will appear on the display. Use the SONG/PHRASE NUMBER [▲] and [▼]buttons to select the desired phrase number (refer to the DISK ORCHESTRA COLLECTION book that comes with the DISK ORCHESTRA COLLECTION disk). 3> C Select a Part to Practice......................................................................................................................... RIGHT 1 LEFT ORCH 2 3-10 Use the [RIGHT/1], [LEFT/2], [ORCH/3-10], and [RHYTHM] buttons to turn playback of the various parts on or off, as required. RHYTHM V Start Playback ......................................................................................................................................... Press the [START/STOP] button to begin playback of the selected phrase after a one-measure count-in. Phrase playback will repeat until the [START/STOP] button is pressed a second time. START/STOP NOTES • The count-in may not sound with some songs — e.g. those that do not include a rhythm track. ● A-B Repeat This function allows you to specify any section of a DISK ORCHESTRA song for continuous repeat playback. PHRASE REPEAT UTILITY PHRASE REPEAT + “A” point “B” point [ 009] Piano œ=120 PHRASE<A- > 1 [ 016] Piano œ=120 PHRASE<A-B> 1 While the song is playing, hold the [UTILITY] and press the [PHRASE REPEAT] button once at the beginning of the section to be repeated (the “A” point) and again at the end of the section to be repeated (the “B” point). Repeat playback will begin automatically from the A point as soon as the B point has been specified. The programmed A and B points are retained until a different song number or mode is selected, and the A-B phrase can be selected again for repeat playback after playback has been stopped by following the Phrase Repeat procedure described above and selecting “<A-B>” instead of a phrase number in step X. NOTES • The specified A-B repeat points will be erased when a new song number is selected. ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 34 Disk Orchestra ■ Other Playback Controls ● Pause ....................................................................................................................................................... Press the [PAUSE] button to temporarily stop DISK ORCHESTRA playback. Press the [PAUSE] button again (or the [START/STOP] button) to resume playback from the same point. PAUSE ● Rewind and Fast Forward ...................................................................................................................... REW FF During DISK ORCHESTRA operation the [REW] and [FF] buttons function as follows: ■ While playback is stopped or paused the [REW] and [FF] buttons can be used to step backward or forward through the song a measure at a time. Either button can also be held for continuous stepping in the specified direction. ■ During playback the [REW] and [FF] buttons allow you to move rapidly in the specified direction for as long as the button is held. No sound is produced during [REW] operation. NOTES • Using the [REW] button may cause the voice, tempo, and/or volume to change. • The [PAUSE], [REW] and [FF] buttons do not function while a guide mode is engaged. ● Pedal Pause/Next Phrase ....................................................................................................................... LEFT PEDAL FUNCTION START/STOP If the left pedal is set for START/STOP operation using the [LEFT PEDAL] button, it functions as a pause/next phrase control during DISK ORCHESTRA playback: press once to pause, and again to continue from the beginning of the next phrase (refer to the DISK ORCHESTRA COLLECTION book that comes with the DISK ORCHESTRA COLLECTION disk for phrase locations). NOTES • The pedal pause/next phrase function will not operate if the guide, phrase repeat, or all songs repeat modes are active. ■ DISK ORCHESTRA COLLECTION Disk Copy The [ORCH/3-10] and [RHYTHM] parts of songs from DISK ORCHESTRA COLLECTION disks — the disk supplied with the Clavinova and others available from Yamaha — can be copied to separate disks by following the “Copying Disk Orchestra Disks” instructions given on page 47. Data copied in this way can be played back and manipulated via the Performance Memory (page 35) — you can, for example, record your own [RIGHT/1] and [LEFT/2] parts. NOTES • Disk Orchestra Collection phrase marks are not copied. ■ Playing Other Types of Music Data In addition to Disk Orchestra Collection disks, the Clavinova can also play back Yamaha Disklavier PianoSoft™ disks, disks containing Yamaha ESEQ format sequence data, and disks containing songs recorded in Standard MIDI File format (formats 0 and 1 — the [REW] and [FF] buttons do not function with format 1 data). It is possible to change the track 1/2 voice by using the panel voice selectors during playback of Disk Orchestra Collection and Disklavier PianoSoft disks. In this case the playback voice will become the same as the voice played via the keyboard. The playback voice cannot be changed when playing back other type of disks (the keyboard voice can be changed). The phrase repeat function described above can only be used with Disk Orchestra Collection disks. A-B repeat can be used with any type of data. The guide function can only be used with ESEQ files. The [ORCH/3-10TR] part select button can also be used with all types of data: with files other than General MIDI files it turns tracks 3 through 14 on or off, and with General MIDI Files it turns tracks 3 through 9 and 11 through 16 on or off. The [RHYTHM] button can be used to turn track 15 on and off with file types other than General MIDI (with General MIDI files the [RHYTHM] button turns track 10 on and off). With any type of file the individual tracks (1 through 16) can be turned on and off as described on page 31. When playing files other than General MIDI files the Auto Accompaniment volume controls affect the following tracks (the volume of General MIDI format tracks cannot be controlled): BASS Track 3 CHORD 2 CHORD 1 RHYTHM Tracks 1 & 2 Tracks 4 … 14 Track 15 When playing General MIDI Files the Clavinova’s internal tone generator is automatically switched to the GM System Level 1 voice allocation. ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ Performance Memory The CVP-89 features a built-in “sequencer” which can be used to independently record up to ten separate parts of a single musical composition, plus a rhythm track. Each part is recorded on one of the Performance Memory “tracks” accessed via the [RIGHT/1], [LEFT/2], [ORCH/3-10], and [RHYTHM] buttons. The music data that you record is stored on a 3.5" floppy disk loaded into the Clavinova’s disk drive unit. Up to approximately 60 songs can be recorded on a single disk, depending on the amount of data contained in each song. Before you can record, however, you must “format” a new disk, as described on page 48. 35 SONG/PHRASE NUMBER RIGHT LEFT ORCH 1 2 3-10 REW FF PAUSE PHRASE REPEAT RHYTHM LAMP CANCEL GUIDE START/STOP CHORD SEQUENCE REC SONG SELECT DISK ORCHESTRA RHYTHM BASS 1 CHORD 2 MAX MAX DEMO LEFT PEDAL UTILITY REVERB FULL KEYBOARD ABC SINGLE/ FINGERED ABC SYNCHRO START SOLO STYLEPLAY NORMAL VARIATION FILL TO NORMAL FILL TO VARIATION MEMORY PROGRAM SONG/PHRASE NUMBER RIGHT LEFT ORCH RHYTHM PHRASE REPEAT GUIDE LAMP CANCEL BEAT START/STOP MIN MASTER VOLUME INTRO/ ENDING NOTES 1 2 REW FF 3-10 START/STOP CUSTOM RHYTHM MIN AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT POP 16BEAT DANCE POP BOOGIE SLOW ROCK SWING JAZZ BALLAD BOSSA RHUMBA MARCH COUNTRY WALTZ STYLE 13-50 STYLE 1 DISK STYLE 2 TAP METRONOME – + TEMPO – / NO + / YES PIANO CLAVINOVA TONE E. PIANO HARPSICHORD VIBES GUITAR STRINGS ORGAN CHOIR UPRIGHT BASS 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 STYLE VOICE ELEC BASS DRUMS VOICE 13-60 VOICE SPLIT REGISTRATION PAUSE REC CHORD SEQUENCE SONG SELECT DISK ORCHESTRA • The Performance Memory playback data is not transmitted via the MIDI OUT connector. Easy One-pass Recording & Playback Z Insert a Formatted Disk .......................................................................................................................... If you haven’t already done so, make sure that a properly formatted disk is loaded into the Clavinova disk drive (see page 48), and that the disk’s write protect tab is set to the “write” position (tab closed). NOTES • If you insert an unformatted disk, “UNFORMATTED DISK!” will appear on the display. Please format the disk before proceeding. • DOC disks, Disklavier PianoSoft disks, and disks formatted by the Disklavier cannot be formatted. • If a disk is already loaded and the [SONG SELECT] indicator is out, press the [SONG SELECT] button so that the indicator lights before proceeding. X Select a Song Number ........................................................................................................................... Select a SONG NUMBER between 1 and 60 for the piece you are about to record (up to 60 different songs, each with a different song number, can be recorded on a single disk). Make sure the song number you select has not already been used for a song previously recorded on the disk you are using. SONG/PHRASE NUMBER [ 001] Piano œ= 78 SONG 1 1 ƒ 1 NOTES • If the [RIGHT/1], [LEFT/2], [ORCH/3-10], or [RHYTHM] button indicator glows green when a song number is selected, the corresponding track of the selected song already contains recorded data. Before recording over a song that contains previous data, we recommend that you delete the entire song as described in “Song Delete” on page 47. C Select a Voice ......................................................................................................................................... Use the VOICE selectors to select the voice you want to record with. You can try out the selected voice on the keyboard before proceeding. V Engage the Record Ready Mode ........................................................................................................... REC Remaining Disk Space Current record track [001] REC TRACK 1 œ= 78 ‘‘‘‘‘‘‘‘‘‘‘ Track status 680 Press the [REC] button so that its indicator lights. The [RIGHT/1] indicator should also glow red at this point, indicating that you are ready to record on track 1. The number of the current record track and the status of tracks 1 through 16 will appear on the display (if a track number appears that track has been recorded and contains data). ● Remaining Disk Space Display When you press the [REC] button the amount of disk space available for recording will appear on the display (in approximate kilobytes). With an empty disk you should have about 707 kilobytes of space for recording (room enough for about 57,000 notes if no other Clavinova functions are used). If no space is available for recording, “DISK FULL!” will appear on the display. ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 36 Performance Memory B Start Recording ....................................................................................................................................... Play on the keyboard. Recording will begin automatically as soon as you start playing. NOTES • You can turn the metronome on before or during recording (the metronome sound will not be recorded). • The “ √ ” symbol will appear during recording. N Stop Recording ....................................................................................................................................... START/STOP REC Stop recording by pressing the [START/STOP] button or the [REC] button. When recording has finished the indicator of the recorded track will glow green, indicating that the track is ready for playback. NOTES • The Clavinova may continue to write data to the disk for a short time after you stop recording. “WRITING” will appear on the display while this occurs. DO NOT eject the disk while this display is showing. • You can enter a name for the recorded song, as described on page 51. M Play Back the Recording ....................................................................................................................... START/STOP Press the [START/STOP] button to play back your recording. Play along on the keyboard if you like. During playback you can use the [PAUSE], [REW], and [FF] buttons, as described on page 34. You can also change the playback tempo via the TEMPO [▲] and [▼] buttons. < Stop Playback ......................................................................................................................................... Playback will stop automatically when the end of the recording is reached, or you can press the [START/STOP] button to stop it at anytime. Multi-track Recording & Playback Z Insert a Formatted Disk .......................................................................................................................... If you haven’t already done so, make sure that a properly formatted disk is loaded into the Clavinova disk drive (see page 48), and that the disk’s write protect tab is set to the “write” position (tab closed). NOTES • If a disk is already loaded and the [SONG SELECT] indicator is out, press the [SONG SELECT] button so that the indicator lights before proceeding. X Select a Song Number ........................................................................................................................... SONG/PHRASE NUMBER Select a SONG NUMBER between 1 and 60 for the piece you are about to record (up to 60 different songs, each with a different song number, can be recorded on a single disk). Make sure the song number you select has not already been used for a song previously recorded on the disk you are using. C Set All Performance Features As Required ......................................................................................... Set up all necessary performance features as required: voice, voice mode (normal, dual, or split), style, tempo, etc. Try out the features as you select them to check that you have the right overall sound. V Engage the Record Ready Mode........................................................................................................... REC Press the [REC] button so that its indicator lights. The [RIGHT/1] indicator should also glow red at this point, indicating that you are ready to record on track 1. As soon as you release the [REC] button the first dot of the beat indicator will begin to flash at the currently set tempo. NOTES • Be careful not to start recording prematurely by either playing the keyboard or pressing the [START/STOP] button before you’ve completed the following steps. ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ Performance Memory 37 B Select the Track(s) to Record ................................................................................................................ SONG/PHRASE NUMBER RIGHT LEFT ORCH 2 3-10 1 [001] REC TRACK 3 œ= 78 ‘‘‘‘‘‘‘‘‘‘‘ 680 RHYTHM [001] REC TRACK 3+R œ= 78 Pop 680 1 FULL KEYBOARD SINGLE/ FINGERED ABC ABC RIGHT 1 ORCH 3-10 [001] REC ABC+R œ= 78 Pop 680 1 Only one track can be recorded at a time. If you press [RIGHT/1] you will record on track number 1. If you press [LEFT/2] you will record on track number 2. If you press [ORCH/3-10], you can choose to record on track 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, or 10 by selecting the desired track number using the SONG/PHRASE NUMBER [▲] and [▼] buttons while holding the [ORCH/3-10] button (the selected track number will appear on the display). When a record track has been selected the corresponding indicator will light. ● Recording with Rhythm To record a rhythm in addition to the part you play on the keyboard, select the desired style via the STYLE selectors and press the [RHYTHM] button so that its indicator glows red. “+R” and the style name will appear on the display. The rhythm data will be recorded on track 15. If you only want to record the rhythm track, de-select all other selected tracks by pressing their buttons so that their indicators go out. If you select the rhythm track for recording, or the rhythm track already contains data, the metronome will sound at the current tempo. ● Recording with ABC When recording with ABC auto-accompaniment the keyboard part can only be recorded to track 1 or 2. To record with ABC press the [RIGHT/1] or [LEFT/2] button and then engage an ABC mode. The [ORCH/3-10] and [RHYTHM] indicators will light automatically in addition to the [RIGHT/1] or [LEFT/2] indicator, and the ABC sound will be recorded on tracks 3 through 10 while what you play on the keyboard will be recorded on track 1 or 2. If you only want to record the ABC sound, de-select track 1 or 2 by pressing the appropriate button so that the indicator goes out. In the same way, de-select the [RHYTHM] track if you don’t want to record the rhythm sound. ● Recording with Solo Styleplay If you also select solo styleplay, the solo styleplay sound will be recorded on tracks 11 through 14. Solo Styleplay can be recorded at the same time as SINGLE/FINGERED ABC, but not at the same time as FULL KEYBOARD mode ABC. SOLO STYLEPLAY N Start Recording ....................................................................................................................................... The synchronized start mode is automatically selected when the record ready mode is engaged, so recording will begin automatically as soon as any key on the keyboard is pressed or the [START/STOP] button is pressed (see page 18 for the various synchro start modes). The current measure number is shown on the display as you record. The following parameters will be recorded in addition to notes you play: Parameters recorded for Each Track Parameters Recorded for the Entire Song • • • • • • • • • • Voice* Dual Voice* Split Voice* Volume* (Initial MIDI value = 127. Not changeable during recording) • Expression (Not recorded as an initial setting) • Pan* • Damper Pedal* • Soft Pedal* • Sostenuto Pedal (Not recorded as an initial setting) • Modulation* • Pitch Bend* • Reverb Depth* • Dual Balance* • Split Balance* • Chorus* • Pitch Bend Range Style Rhythm Volume* Reverb Type* Reverb Depth* Tempo* Intro Mode (Not changeable during recording) • Ending Mode (Not recorded as an initial setting) • Fill-in • ABC Mode (Not changeable during recording) • ABC Volume* • Solo Styleplay Mode (Not changeable during recording) • Solo Styleplay Variation (Not changeable during recording) Parameters Recorded for Each Track via MIDI Only • Coarse Tune (Not recorded as an initial setting) • Fine Tune (Not recorded as an initial setting) M Stop Recording ....................................................................................................................................... START/STOP REC Press the [REC] button a second time, or the [START/STOP] button to stop recording. ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 38 Performance Memory ■ Adding New Tracks When you’ve finished recording the first track, you can simply play it back as described in the previous section or add a new track to your song. To record a new track: Z Select a Voice ......................................................................................................................................... Select a voice and other parameters for the new track. Try out the voice and selected parameters before proceeding. X Engage the Record Ready Mode ........................................................................................................... REC Press the [REC] button to engage the record ready mode. [001] REC TRACK 3 œ= 78 12‘‘‘‘‘‘‘‘‘ ● Monitoring Previously Recorded Tracks All previously recorded tracks are automatically selected for playback when the 660 record mode is engaged. You can turn these tracks on or off as required by pressing the corresponding track button(s) before pressing the [REC] button. C Select a Track ......................................................................................................................................... Select a track other than the one you used to record the previous track. The indicator of the track selected for recording should glow red. NOTES • Remember that if you record on a track that has already been recorded, the previous material will be erased and the new material will be recorded in its place. V Start Recording ....................................................................................................................................... Play on the keyboard or press the [START/STOP] button to start recording. B Stop Recording ....................................................................................................................................... Press the [START/STOP] button or the [REC] button to stop recording. ● Changing the Initial Parameter Values The initial values of parameters marked with asterisks (*) in the lists given in step N on page 37 can be changed for each track or the entire song by engaging the record mode for the desired track, changing the parameters as required, and then disengaging the record mode (press the [REC] button again) without actually recording. To cancel any initial parameter values you’ve made, select a different track and then press the [REC] button to disengage the record mode. To change individual ABC part volume settings engage any ABC mode after turning [REC] on, set the RHYTHM, CHORD 1, CHORD 2, and/or BASS volume control as required, then disengage the record mode. BASS UTILITY Volume of each track The BASS volume control can be used while holding the [UTILITY] button to independently adjust the volume of each track (except the rhythm track). The volume of the rhythm track is adjusted via the RHYTHM volume control. Please note that volume settings can only be decreased. Individual track reverb depth can be adjusted by using the BASS volume while holding the [REVERB] button, and the overall reverb depth can be adjusted by using the TEMPO [▲] and [▼] buttons while holding the [REVERB] button. Also note that the tempo, reverb type, style, style variation, fill-in, and intro/ending settings are common to all tracks and cannot be set independently for different tracks. NOTES • Only initial parameter data created by the CVP-89 can be changed. Data converted by the Convert to SMF functiion (page 53) cannot be changed. If the data cannot be changed, “DATA NOT EDITABLE!” will appear on the display. • Only the individual track volume can be changed for data converted by the Convert to DOC function (page 52). ● Erasing the Tracks Individual tracks — except the rhythm track — can be completely erased by starting and stopping recording without actually playing or changing any parameters (i.e. press the [START/STOP] button twice). The same procedure can be used to erase the rhythm track if the RHYTHM volume control is set to its minimum position. NOTES • Tracks 3-10 can be erased by engaging the record mode, turning ABC on, and then pressing the [START/STOP] button twice. ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ Performance Memory 39 ● Recording Without a Disk The Clavinova has enough internal RAM memory to allow recording for a while even if a disk is not loaded (up to approximately 2,200 notes — 28 kilobytes — if no other data is recorded). If you accidentally record without loading a disk, make sure you use the COPY function (described on page 46) to copy the recorded data to disk if you want to keep the recorded data (the internal RAM memory is not backed up). This is necessary because the internal RAM memory is cleared automatically when a Disk Orchestra Collection, Disklavier PianoSoft, or Style Disk is loaded, or a performance disk is loaded and the [SONG SELECT] button is pressed. ● Recording Using General MIDI Voice Assignments It is also possible to use the General MIDI voice assignments when recording with the Performance Memory. See “The Multi-Timbre Mode” on page 57 for details. ■ Punch-in Recording “Punch-in recording” allows you to start recording from any “punch-in” point within a previously-recorded track and stop recording at any “punch -out” point, leaving all recorded material up to the punch-in point and following the punchout point intact. Z Play the Song .......................................................................................................................................... Play back the song in order to locate the point you want to punch-in from. You can also use the [FF] and [REW] buttons to locate the punch-in point. START/STOP X Pause Before the Punch-in Point .......................................................................................................... Press the [PAUSE] button to pause playback a bit before the point at which you want to start recording. Leave a measure or more before the punch-in point so you’ll be able to grasp the timing for the punch in. PAUSE C Engage the Record Ready Mode ........................................................................................................... REC Press the [REC] button to engage the record ready mode. The last track selected for recording will automatically be reselected. V Select a Track ......................................................................................................................................... RIGHT LEFT ORCH 2 3-10 1 If you want to record on a different track than the one that is currently selected for recording (red indicator), use the normal track selection procedure. RHYTHM B Start Playback & Recording .................................................................................................................. Press the [START/STOP] button to start playback from the current pause location, then begin playing at the point you want to record from. Recording will begin as soon as you begin playing on the keyboard. START/STOP N Stop Recording ....................................................................................................................................... Press the [START/STOP] button or the [REC] button to stop recording at the point at which you want to “punch out”. START/STOP REC START/STOP RIGHT 1 LEFT ORCH 2 3-10 RHYTHM ● Erasing All Material From the Punch-in Point If at step B, above, you press the [START/STOP] button while holding the track button corresponding to the track on which you want to record, recording will begin immediately. If you then stop recording without actually playing anything, all recorded material from the punch-in point to the end of the track will be erased. NOTES • Punch-in recording cannot be used with ABC, SOLO STYLEPLAY, or RHYTHM tracks. ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 40 Performance Memory ■ Playback Original Performance Memory recordings can be played back and controlled in the same way as described in the Disk Orchestra section, beginning on page 30. You can individually select tracks to play back (page 31), use the guide function and keyboard guide lamps with the data recorded on tracks 1 and 2 (page 32), and use the A-B repeat function (page 33). NOTES • The playback voice cannot be changed when playing back Performance Memory data (the voice played via the keyboard can be changed). ● Volume Control The RHYTHM, CHORD 1, CHORD 2, and BASS volume controls can be used to adjust the volume of the corresponding accompaniment parts when playing back data that was recorded with ABC. When playing back data that was recorded without ABC, however, these volume controls have the following track assignments. RHYTHM ........ BASS ............. CHORD 1 ....... CHORD 2 ....... RHYTHM track 3 track 4 - 10 tracks 1 & 2 tracks ● Multi-timbre Recording via MIDI Data from an external MIDI device such as a sequencer or music computer can also be recorded to the Performance Memory as follows: Z Make the Required MIDI Connections Connect the MIDI OUT terminal of the transmitting device to the Clavinova’s MIDI IN terminal using a standard MIDI cable. X Select the External Clock Mode To select the external clock mode press the [ORGAN] VOICE button while holding the [UTILITY] button. When selected, the [ORGAN] indicator will light while the [UTILITY] button is pressed. In this mode the Clavinova is controlled by an external MIDI clock signal. C Select a Song Number Select the song number to which you want to record the data by using the SONG/PHRASE NUMBER [▲] and [▼] buttons (of course, a properly formatted floppy disk must already be loaded in the disk drive). V Engage the MIDI Record Ready Mode Press the [REC] button while holding the [UTILITY] button to engage the MIDI record ready mode. In this mode all tracks (1 through 15) can be recorded at the same time via the correspondingly numbered MIDI channels. That is, MIDI data received on channel 1 will be recorded on track 1, data received via channel 2 will be recorded on track 2, etc. [001] REC TRACK ALL œ= 78 Pop 680 1 B Match the Time Signature & Tempo Select a style having a time signature that matches that of the data you are going to record (e.g. 4/4, 3/4), and match the Clavinova tempo setting to that of the data to be recorded. N Record the MIDI Data Play back the MIDI data on the sequencer, music computer, or other device. Recording will start and stop automatically. NOTES • Please note that the Clavinova’s internal styles cannot be played during multi-timbre recording. • Any notes played on the keyboard and other setting changes will be recorded on track 1 during multi-timbre recording. • Initial panel settings will not be recorded unless the settings are changed in the record ready mode. • Previous data on all tracks will be erased when new data is recorded in the multi-timbre mode. • If multi-timbre recording is carried out while the GM Multi-Timbre mode is turned on (page 57), or a “GM on” message is received during recording, GM voice recording is possible on tracks 1 through 14. • Be sure to turn the multi-timbre and external clock modes off when you’re finished multi-timbre recording (see pages 57 and 58). ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ Performance Memory 41 The Chord Sequence Function The CHORD SEQUENCE function provides a convenient way to enter chord sequences and style changes one at a time. Z Engage the Chord Sequence Function ................................................................................................ Press the [CHORD SEQUENCE] button. The [ORCH/3-10] and [RHYTHM] track button indicators will glow red, and the ABC SINGLE/FINGERED mode will be automatically selected. CHORD SEQUENCE [001] CHORD SEQUENCE œ= 78 Pop NOTES • The chord sequence data will replace any previous ABC data. 1 X Enter the Chords and/or Style Changes............................................................................................... ? qw A 6 B 6 C7 BEAT Make the required style changes (style number, normal/variation, fill-in, intro/ ending, and tempo, as necessary), play and hold a chord on the left-hand section of the keyboard, and press the [q] key (look for the “q” symbol above the B6 key) or the [w] key (C7) to enter the chord for a quarter note or whole note, respectively. You can move one beat backward by pressing the [?] key (A6). Continue entering chords in this manner until your sequence is complete. NOTES • The number of the measure to be entered is shown on the display, while the beat to be entered is shown on the BEAT display. • If no chords are entered, the result will be a rhythm-only sequence. [002] CHORD SEQUENCE œ= 78 Dbm C Stop Recording ....................................................................................................................................... CHORD SEQUENCE When all the required chords and style changes have been entered, press the [CHORD SEQUENCE] button to stop recording. NOTES • The chord sequence data now resides in Performance Memory tracks 3 though 10 and 15, and can be played back in the normal way. Add melody tracks 1 and 2 as required. You can also record over individual tracks of the sequence and replace them with original material if you like by using the standard Performance Memory track selection and record procedure. ● Punch-in Chord Sequence Recording You can begin chord sequence recording from any point within a previouslyrecorded song by pausing playback at the point you want to begin chord sequence recording, engaging the Chord Sequence function at that point, and entering the chords up to the end of the sequence as described above. NOTES • If you attempt punch-in chord sequence recording on a song in which no chord sequence data has been entered, “DATA NOT EDITABLE!” will appear on the display and the recording will not be possible. • If you record chord sequences to all songs on a disk, the maximum number of songs available on that disk will be 55. ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ Utility Functions 42 The 44 “utility functions” described in this chapter include effect, disk, MIDI, and general functions that significantly enhance the versatility and flexibility of the CVP-89. UTILITY RHYTHM BASS 1 CHORD 2 MAX MAX DEMO LEFT PEDAL UTILITY REVERB FULL KEYBOARD ABC START/STOP MIN MASTER VOLUME SINGLE/ FINGERED ABC INTRO/ ENDING BEAT SYNCHRO START SOLO STYLEPLAY NORMAL VARIATION FILL TO NORMAL FILL TO VARIATION MEMORY PROGRAM SONG/PHRASE NUMBER RIGHT LEFT 1 2 REW FF ORCH RHYTHM PHRASE REPEAT GUIDE LAMP CANCEL 3-10 START/STOP CUSTOM RHYTHM MIN AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT POP 16BEAT DANCE POP BOOGIE SLOW ROCK SWING JAZZ BALLAD BOSSA RHUMBA MARCH COUNTRY WALTZ STYLE 13-50 STYLE 1 DISK STYLE 2 TAP METRONOME – + TEMPO – / NO STYLE + / YES PIANO CLAVINOVA TONE E. PIANO HARPSICHORD VIBES GUITAR STRINGS ORGAN CHOIR UPRIGHT BASS 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 VOICE ELEC BASS DRUMS VOICE 13-60 VOICE SPLIT REGISTRATION PAUSE REC CHORD SEQUENCE SONG SELECT DISK ORCHESTRA ■ Selecting & Using the Utility Functions Most of the CVP-89 utility functions are selected and set in the same way for consistent, easy operation. The general selection and setting procedure is as follows: Z Select a Utility Function ......................................................................................................................... UTILITY TAP METRONOME – + TEMPO – + / YES / NO ⁄¤‹›‚02 CHORUS Piano OFF • You can jump directly to the first utility function in each group by pressing the corresponding STYLE selector while holding the [UTILITY] button: [POP] [16BEAT] [DANCE POP] [BOOGIE] [SLOW ROCK] m m m m m 02: Chorus ON/OFF 05: Save Registration 15: Quantize Song Data 21: Send Channel Select 32: Individual Key Tuning While holding the [UTILITY] button use the [TAP] and/or [METRONOME] buttons to select the desired utility function display. It is also possible to step through the utility functions by repeatedly pressing the [UTILITY] button (the utility display will remain for about one second after the [UTILITY] button is released). The [UTILITY] button must be held until after you’ve set the function, below. NOTES • You can cancel the selected function at this point and exit from the utility mode simply be releasing the [UTILITY] button. • The last utility function selected is automatically re-selected when the [UTILITY] button is pressed (“01: Transpose” is always the first utility function selected after the power has been turned on). • When some functions are selected “NO/YES” will flash on the display. In such cases press the TEMPO [s] (YES) button to actually engage the selected function or the TEMPO [t] (NO) button to cancel. You can release the [UTILITY] button once you’ve pressed the TEMPO [s] button. X Set as Required ...................................................................................................................................... UTILITY TAP METRONOME – + TEMPO – + / YES / NO Use the TEMPO [s] and [t] buttons while still holding the [UTILITY] button to select the required setting, or follow the procedure given below for the selected function. C Exit ........................................................................................................................................................... Release the [UTILITY] button to exit from the utility mode when you’ve finished making the required settings. If you’ve used a function which is engaged by pressing the TEMPO [s] button in response to the “NO/YES” prompt on the display (i.e. the [UTILITY] button has already been released), press the [UTILITY] button again to exit from the utility mode. UTILITY The Utility Mode Functions 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 Transpose Chorus ON/OFF Soundboard Depth Mic Reverb Depth Save Registration Load Registration Save Individual Key Tuning Load Individual Key Tuning Save Custom Rhythm Load Custom Rhythm Song Copy 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 Song Delete Disk Format Standard MIDI File Playback Mode Quantize Song Data Track Mix Volume Control Song Name Convert to DOC Convert to SMF Send Channel Select Receive Channel Select 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 Local Control ON/OFF Program Change ON/CANCEL Control Change ON/CANCEL The Multi-Timbre Mode The Split Send Mode MIDI Clock Select Panel Data Send MIDI Transpose Transmit GM Drum Kit Individual Key Tuning Touch Sensitivity 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 Accompaniment Volume Mode Style Tempo Switching Auto Synchro Start Switching Random All Song Repeat Damper Pedal Mode Pitch Bend Range Edit Drum Instrument Split Left Octave Registration Tempo ABC Auto Mute Minor Harmonization ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ Utility Functions 43 Effect Functions ■ 01: Transpose ⁄¤‹›‚01 TRANSPOSE 0 Display -6 -5 -4 -3 -2 -1 0 +1 +2 +3 +4 +5 +6 Transposition -6 semitones -5 semitones -4 semitones -3 semitones -2 semitones -1 semitone Normal +1 semitone +2 semitones +3 semitones +4 semitones +5 semitones +6 semitones The Transpose function makes it possible to shift the pitch of the entire keyboard up or down in semitone intervals up to a maximum of six semitones. “Transposing” the pitch of the Clavinova keyboard makes it easier to play in difficult key signatures, and you can simply match the pitch of the keyboard to the range of a singer or other instrumentalist. Once the Transpose function has been selected, use the TEMPO [s] and [t] buttons to select the desired degree of transposition, then release the [UTILITY] button. The amount of transposition selected is shown on the display as shown to the left. NOTES • Press the TEMPO [s] and [t] buttons simultaneously while holding the [UTILITY] button (while the Transpose function is selected) to restore normal keyboard pitch. • Transpose is always set to Normal when the power is turned on. • The transpose function does not affect the drums sound. • Notes below and above the original 88-key range of the Clavinova sound one octave higher and lower, respectively. ■ 02: Chorus ON/OFF ⁄¤‹›‚02 CHORUS Piano OFF A preset chorus effect is provided with each of the CVP-89 voices (this may be ON or OFF, depending on the voice). This function allows the chorus effect to be turned ON or OFF for the currently selected voice. Once the Chorus ON/OFF function has been selected, use the TEMPO [s] and [t] buttons to turn the chorus effect ON or OFF, then release the [UTILITY] button. NOTES • The chorus ON/OFF setting is retained in memory for approximately one week even when the power is turned off. • See page vii for a list of the chorus settings for each voice. • In the Dual mode the setting of the voice shown to the left of the display takes priority, while in the Split mode the right-hand voice setting takes priority. ■ 03: Soundboard Depth ⁄¤‹›‚03 SOUNDBOARD DEPTH 8 The CVP-89 PIANO voice ( voice number 1) features a “Soundboard” effect which can be enhanced via the damper pedal. Extra soundboard and string resonance is added when the damper pedal is pressed. This function sets the maximum depth of the Soundboard effect. Once the Soundboard Depth function has been selected, use the TEMPO [s] and [t] buttons to set the depth of the effect as required, then release the [UTILITY] button. The Soundboard Depth can be set from “0” (no effect) to “15” (maximum effect depth). The default setting is “8”. NOTES • The Soundboard Depth setting is retained in memory for approximately one week even when the power is turned off. ■ 04: Mic Reverb Depth ⁄¤‹›‚04 MIC REVERB DEPTH 8 This function sets the amount of reverb effect applied to the signal from a microphone plugged into the CVP-89 MIC. jack (page 65). Once the Mic Reverb function has been selected, use the TEMPO [s] and [t] buttons to set the depth of the reverb effect, then release the [UTILITY] button. The microphone reverb depth can be set from “0” (no reverb) to “15” (maximum reverb). The default setting is “8”. ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 44 Utility Functions Disk Functions This group of utility functions covers a range of disk-related jobs: formatting new disks, copying songs, deleting songs, saving and loading various types of data, and more. NOTES • Disk-related functions (05 through 20) can only be accessed when a disk is present in the Clavinova disk drive. ■ 05: Save Registration This function saves the contents of all 12 registration memory locations (page 29) to disk. The data can then be reloaded at any time by using the Load Registration function, described next. Z Insert a Disk & Select the Save Registration Function ....................................................................... ⁄¤‹›‚05 REGIST −> DISK SONG 01 PRESS [START] Insert a properly formatted disk into the Clavinova disk drive, then select the Save Registration function — see “Selecting & Using the Utility Functions”, page 42. X Select a Song Number & Execute the Function .................................................................................. Registration memory data can be saved to a blank song number or one that already contains performance memory data. Use the TEMPO [s] and [t] buttons to select the song number to which you want to save the registration memory data, then press the [START/STOP] button to actually begin saving the data. Simply release the [UTILITY] button before pressing the [START/STOP] button if you want to cancel the function. The contents of all 12 registration memory locations is saved to one song file on the disk. The Save Registration function will automatically be exited when the data has been saved. ■ 06: Load Registration This function reloads the panel settings saved to disk by the Save Registration function, described above. Z Insert a Disk & Select the Load Registration Function ....................................................................... ⁄¤‹›‚06 DISK −> REGIST SONG 01 PRESS [START] Insert the disk containing the registration memory data you want to load into the Clavinova disk drive, then select the Load Registration function — see “Selecting & Using the Utility Functions”, page 42. X Select a Song Number and Execute the Function ............................................................................... Use the TEMPO [s] and [t] buttons to select the song number from which you want to load the registration memory data, then press the [START/STOP] button to actually begin loading the data. “NO DATA!” will appear on the display if you select a song that contains no data. Simply release the [UTILITY] button before pressing the [START/STOP] button if you want to cancel the function. The Load Registration function will automatically be exited when the data has been loaded. ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ Utility Functions 45 ■ 07: Save Individual Key Tuning This function saves the current individual key tuning data set up via the “Individual Key Tuning” function (page 60) to disk. The data can then be reloaded at any time by using the Load Individual Key Tuning function, described next. Z Insert a Disk & Select the Save Individual Key Tuning Function ....................................................... ⁄¤‹›‚07 IND. KEY −> DISK SONG 01 PRESS [START] Insert a properly formatted disk into the Clavinova disk drive, then select the Save Individual Key Tuning function — see “Selecting & Using the Utility Functions”, page 42. X Select a Song Number & Execute the Function .................................................................................. Individual key tuning data can be saved to a blank song number or one that already contains performance memory data. Use the TEMPO [s] and [t] buttons to select the song number to which you want to save the individual key tuning data, then press the [START/STOP] button to actually begin saving the data. Simply release the [UTILITY] button before pressing the [START/STOP] button if you want to cancel the function. The tuning settings are saved to one song file on the disk. The Save Individual Key Tuning function will automatically be exited when the data has been saved. ■ 08: Load Individual Key Tuning This function reloads the individual key tuning data saved to disk by the Save Individual Key Tuning function, described above. Z Insert a Disk & Select the Load Individual Key Tuning Function ...................................................... ⁄¤‹›‚08 DISK −> IND. KEY SONG 01 PRESS [START] Insert the disk containing the individual key tuning data you want to load into the Clavinova disk drive, then select the Load Individual Key Tuning function — see “Selecting & Using the Utility Functions”, page 42. X Select a Song Number and Execute the Function ............................................................................... Use the TEMPO [s] and [t] buttons to select the song number from which you want to load the individual key tuning data, then press the [START/STOP] button to actually begin loading the data. “NO DATA!” will appear on the display if you select a song that contains no data. Simply release the [UTILITY] button before pressing the [START/STOP] button if you want to cancel the function. The Load Individual Key Tuning function will automatically be exited when the data has been loaded. The Individual Key Tuning function (UTIL 32) will then be automatically engaged with the loaded tuning, unless the loaded data is the same as that currently in the CVP-89. ■ 09: Save Custom Rhythm This function saves all the 12 current Custom Rhythm data created via the CVP-89’s Custom Rhythm programmer (page 24) to disk. The data can then be reloaded at any time by using the Load Custom Rhythm function, described next. Z Insert a Disk & Select the Save Custom Rhythm Function ................................................................ ⁄¤‹›‚09 C.RHYTHM −> DISK SONG 01 PRESS [START] Insert a properly formatted disk into the Clavinova disk drive, then select the Save Custom Rhythm function — see “Selecting & Using the Utility Functions”, page 42. X Select a Song Number & Execute the Function .................................................................................. Custom rhythm data can be saved to a blank song number or one that already contains performance memory data. Use the TEMPO [s] and [t] buttons to select the song number to which you want to save the custom rhythm data, then press the [START/STOP] button to actually begin saving the data. Simply release the [UTILITY] button before pressing the [START/STOP] button if you want to cancel the function. The custom rhythm data is saved to one song file on the disk. The Save Custom Rhythm function will automatically be exited when the data has been saved. ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 46 Utility Functions ■ 10: Load Custom Rhythm This function reloads the custom rhythm data saved to disk by the Save Custom Rhythm function, described above. Z Insert a Disk & Select the Load Custom Rhythm Function ................................................................ ⁄¤‹›‚10 DISK −> C.RHYTHM SONG 01 PRESS [START] Insert the disk containing the custom rhythm data you want to load into the Clavinova disk drive, then select the Load Custom Rhythm function — see “Selecting & Using the Utility Functions”, page 42. X Select a Song Number and Execute the Function ............................................................................... ■ 11: Song Copy Use the TEMPO [s] and [t] buttons to select the song number from which you want to load the custom rhythm data, then press the [START/STOP] button to actually begin loading the data. “NO DATA!” will appear on the display if you select a song that contains no data. Simply release the [UTILITY] button before pressing the [START/STOP] button if you want to cancel the function. The Load Custom Rhythm function will automatically be exited when the data has been loaded. Performance Memory song data — including any existing registration, individual key tuning, and custom rhythm data — can be “backed up” by copying to a new song number or a different disk, as follows: NOTES • The Song Copy function cannot be executed if the selected song contains only registration, individual key tuning, and/or custom rhythm data. Z Insert a Disk & Select the Source Song ............................................................................................... Insert the disk containing the song you want to copy, and use the SONG/ PHRASE NUMBER [s] and [t] buttons to select the number of the song you wish to copy. X Select the Song Copy Function ............................................................................................................ Select the Song Copy function — see “Selecting & Using the Utility Functions”, page 42. “NO DATA!” will appear on the display if you select a song that contains no data. NOTES • The utility mode can be exited by releasing the [UTILITY] button. C Select the Destination Song .................................................................................................................. ⁄¤‹›‚11 SONG COPY SONG 01−>02 PRESS [START] Copy to same disk ⁄¤‹›‚11 COPY −> DISK2 SONG 01−>01 PRESS [START] While holding the [UTILITY] button use the TEMPO [s] and [t] buttons to select the song number you wish to copy to (i.e. the destination song number), then release the [UTILITY] button. If you select a song number that already contains data, that data will be overwritten by the new song data. If you select a song number greater than 60 (“DISK 2” will appear on the display), the copy will be made to a different disk. Copy to different disk V Start Copying .......................................................................................................................................... ⁄¤‹›‚11 COPY −> DISK2 0/ 3 INSERT DISK2 Insert destination disk. ⁄¤‹›‚11 COPY −> DISK2 1/ 3 INSERT DISK1 Insert source disk. Press the [START/STOP] button to begin the actual copy operation. If you chose to copy to a different disk, you may have to exchange the source and destination disks a few times if the song being copied is long and complex. In this case, the Clavinova will prompt you to insert the source and destination disks with the displays shown to the left. “END” will appear on the display briefly when the copy operation has been successfully completed. • While the data is being copied the number of times the disks will have to be exchanged to complete the copy operation will be shown on the display. NOTES • If you copy to a song number that already contains data, “ARE YOU SURE?” will appear on the display. Use the TEMPO [s] (YES) and [t] (NO) buttons to select either (YES) or (NO). (YES) if you intend to execute the copy operation or (NO) if you wish to cancel the operation. The copy operation will begin automatically if you select (YES). ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ Utility Functions 47 • The copy operation can be aborted at any time prior to actually starting the copy operation (i.e. prior to pressing the [START/STOP] button or the TEMPO [s] button) or during the disk exchange display by pressing the [UTILITY] button. ● Copying Disk Orchestra Disks ([ORCH/3-10] and [RHYTHM] parts only) ......................................... All Disk Orchestra data except the right-hand and left-hand parts can be copied to a separate disk by following the standard copy procedure outlined above. The copied data cannot, however, be copied a second time to another disk. NOTES • When a Disk Orchestra disk is copied, any parts using the JAZZ ORGAN 2 voice will be shifted down one octave. ● Copying the Style Disk Data .................................................................................................................. All Style Disk data can be copied to a separate disk by following the standard copy procedure outlined above. A single disk can hold up to 50 styles. Style Disk data can only be copied to a newly formatted disk (i.e. no other data can be previously recorded on the disk) or a disk which already contains copied style data. NOTES • Data from the Style Disk cannot be copied to a disk that contains Performance Memory or Disk Orchestra Collection data. The reverse is also true: Performance Memory and Disk Orchestra Collection data cannot be copied to a disk that contains data copied from the Style Disk. ● Copying Data Recorded Without a Disk ............................................................................................... If you’ve used the performance memory to record data without first loading a disk: ⁄¤‹›‚11 SONG COPY insert a formatted disk, select the Song Copy function, then select the destination song CVP −> 01 PRESS [START] number and copy as described above. NOTES • Data cannot be copied from Disklavier disks, or Standard MIDI File disks. Data cannot be copied to any write protected disk. It is also not possible to copy from one song number to another within the same Disk Orchestra disk. ■ 12: Song Delete You can delete any Performance Memory song data — not including any existing registration, individual key tuning, and custom rhythm data — from a loaded disk as follows: Z Insert a Disk & Select the Delete Function........................................................................................... ⁄¤‹›‚12 SONG DELETE SONG 01 PRESS [START] Insert the disk containing the song you want to delete, then select the Delete function — see “Selecting & Using the Utility Functions”, page 42. X Select the Song to Delete ...................................................................................................................... While holding the [UTILITY] button use the TEMPO [s] and [t] buttons to select the song number you wish to deletee, then release the [UTILITY] button. C Confirm & Execute the Delete Operation ............................................................................................. Press the [START/STOP] button — “ARE YOU SURE?” will appear on the display. Use the TEMPO [s] (YES) and [t] (NO) buttons to select either (YES) or (NO). (YES) to immediately delete the selected song, or (NO) if you wish to cancel the operation. If the selected song contains no data the “ARE YOU SURE?” prompt will not appear and the utility mode will be automatically exited. “END” will appear on the display briefly when the delete operation has been successfully completed. NOTES • The delete operation can be aborted at any time prior to actually starting the delete operation (i.e. prior to pressing the TEMPO [s] button) by pressing the [UTILITY] button. • Data recorded to memory without loading a disk can be deleted simply by selecting the Song Delete function and use the TEMPO [s] (YES) and [t] (NO) buttons to select either (YES) or (NO). • Data cannot be deleted from any write protected disk, the supplied Style Disk, Disk Orchestra Collection disks, or Disklavier disks. ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 48 Utility Functions ■ 13: Disk Format The Clavinova uses only 3.5" 2DD floppy disks. We recommend that you use Yamaha 2DD disks. Before you can use a new disk for recording, the disk must be “formatted” so that the Clavinova can recognize it and correctly write the music data onto it. Z Insert the Disk To Be Formatted ........................................................................................................... Insert a new blank disk. Make sure that the disk’s write protect tab is set to the “write” position (tab closed), and insert the new disk into the disk drive unit with the sliding door facing the drive slot and the label side of the disk facing upward. The disk should click securely into place, and the disk drive lamp should light briefly. Write protect tab closed (unlocked — write enabled) NOTES • “UNFORMATTED DISK!” will appear on the display to indicate that a blank (unformatted) disk or one with a format not recognizable by the CVP-89 is loaded in the drive. If you press the [UTILITY] button at this point utility function 13: Disk Format will automatically be selected. • “DISK PROTECTED” will appear if a protected disk that cannot be formatted is loaded in the drive: a write-protected disk, a Disk Orchestra Collection disk, a Disklavier disk, or a disk formatted by the Disklavier. X Select the Disk Format Function ........................................................................................................... ⁄¤‹›‚13 DISK FORMAT PRESS [START] Select the Disk Format function — see “Selecting & Using the Utility Functions”, page 42. When the Disk Format function is selected, “PRESS [START]” will appear on the display. Press the [STOP/START] button to begin the disk format procedure. C Confirm & Start the Format Operation ................................................................................................. ⁄¤‹›‚13 DISK FORMAT ARE YOU SURE? When the [START/STOP] button has been pressed, “ARE YOU SURE?” will appear on the display. Use the TEMPO [s] (YES) and [t] (NO) buttons to confirm and continue or cancel the operation. “YES” if you intend to execute the format operation or “NO” if you wish to cancel the operation. This step is necessary because formatting completely erases any data that is already on the disk — make sure that the disk you’re about to format does not contain any important data! Formatting will begin the instant you select “YES”. The number of each “track” on the disk will be shown on the display as the format process continues (“F80” through “END”). When formatting is complete (the display will show “END”), you can go ahead and record using the performance memory, or use the Song Copy function to copy songs or Disk Style data to the disk. NOTES • The format operation can be aborted at any time prior to actually starting the format operation (i.e. prior to pressing the TEMPO [s] button) by pressing the [UTILITY] or [START/STOP] button. In this case, the disk will have to be properly formatted again before use. ■ 14: Standard MIDI File Playback Mode (SMF Data Format) ⁄¤‹›‚14 SMF VOICE MODE GM This function determines whether standard MIDI files on floppy disk are played back using the General MIDI voice assignments or the standard Clavinova voice assignments. Once the Standard MIDI File Playback Mode function has been selected, use the TEMPO [s] and [t] buttons to select “NORMAL” or “GM”, then release the [UTILITY] button. ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ Utility Functions 49 NORMAL Standard SMF Mode. Standard Clavinova voice assignments (unless a “GM ON” message is included in the data). Track 10 not necessarily drums. GM GM SMF Mode. General MIDI voice assignments. Track 10 is always drums. NOTES • The Standard SMF mode is useful when playing back a disk containing Standard MIDI Files created on an external sequencer using the Clavinova panel voice assignments. • The GM SMF mode is automatically selected (GM) whenever the POWER switch is turned on. ■ 15: Quantize Song Data This function “quantizes” song memory data that has already been recorded to disk. This means that all notes are aligned to the nearest specified beat, thereby “tightening up” the overall timing. Z Insert the Disk and Select a Song ......................................................................................................... Make sure that the disk containing the song you want to quantize is loaded in the Clavinova disk drive, and that the song to be quantized is selected. X Select the Quantize Song Data Function ............................................................................................. ⁄¤‹›‚15 QUANTIZE NO/YES Select the Quantize Song Data function — see “Selecting & Using the Utility Functions”, page 42. “NO/YES” will flash on the display. Press the TEMPO [s] button (YES) to engage the Quantize function or the [t] button (NO) to cancel. Once you’ve pressed the TEMPO [s] button to engage the function you can release the [UTILITY] button. C Select the Quantize Value ...................................................................................................................... Use the TEMPO [s] and [t] buttons to select the desired quantize value, as shown on the display: TRACK –– QUANT. 16 OFF: “Free”. No quantization. PRESS [START] 32: All notes aligned to the nearest 32nd note. 16: All notes aligned to the nearest 16th note. 8: All notes aligned to the nearest 8th note. 24: All notes aligned to the nearest 16th note triplet. 3 3 12: All notes aligned to the nearest 8th note triplet. 6: All notes aligned to the nearest quarter note triplet. 3 V Select a Track ......................................................................................................................................... TRACK 2 QUANT. 16 PRESS [START] Use the [TAP] and [METRONOME] buttons to select the track you want to quantize. NOTES • Up until this point you can exit from the Quantize Song Data function at any time by pressing the [UTILITY] button. B Quantize the Data ................................................................................................................................... Press the [START/STOP] button to begin quantization. During quantization the number of the measure being quantized will appear in the lower right corner of the display. The Quantize Song Data function will automatically be exited when the data has been quantized. NOTES • Once quantized, song data cannot be returned to its original “free” form. It is therefore a good idea to make a backup copy of the data before using this function. • Only song data created by the CVP-89, CVP-87A, CVP-85A or CVP-83S can be quantized. Data converted by the Convert to DOC function (page 52) or Convert to SMF function (page 53) cannot be quantized. • Only note and voice data is quantized. ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 50 Utility Functions ■ 16: Track Mix Extra Performance Memory track space can be created by using this function to mix the data from two tracks to a single track. The data from the “source” and “destination” tracks is mixed and the result placed in the destination track. You can also use this function to copy data from one track to another by specifying a blank destination track (i.e. the source track data is copied to the destination track. Z Insert the Disk and Select a Song ......................................................................................................... Make sure that the disk containing the song with the tracks you want to mix is loaded in the Clavinova disk drive, and that the song to be affected is selected. X Select the Track Mix Function ............................................................................................................... ⁄¤‹›‚16 TRACK MIX NO/YES Select the Track Mix function — see “Selecting & Using the Utility Functions”, page 42. “NO/YES” will flash on the display. Press the TEMPO [s] button (YES) to engage the Track Mix function or the [t] button (NO) to cancel. Once you’ve pressed the TEMPO [s] button to engage the function you can release the [UTILITY] button. C Select the Source Track ......................................................................................................................... ⁄¤‹›‚16 TRACK MIX 1+ 1−> 1 PRESS [START] Use the [TAP] and [METRONOME] buttons to select the source track. V Select the Destination Track ................................................................................................................. ⁄¤‹›‚16 TRACK MIX 1+ 2−> 2 PRESS [START] Use the TEMPO [s] and [t] buttons to select the destination track. NOTES • Up until this point you can exit from the Track Mix function without affecting the data on disk by pressing the [UTILITY] button. B Start the Mix Operation .......................................................................................................................... Press the [START/STOP] button to start the actual track mix operation. The number of the measure being processed will appear in the lower right corner of the display. The Track Mix function will automatically be exited when the data has been mixed. NOTES • The initial data values of the destination track take priority. • The initial data values of the source track are copied if the destination track is empty. • The destination track cannot be returned to its pre-mix condition after the Track Mix function has been executed. It is therefore a good idea to make a backup copy of the data before using this function. • Only song data created by the CVP-89, CVP-87A, CVP-85A or CVP-83S can be mixed. Data converted by the Convert to DOC function (page 52) or Convert to SMF function (page 53) cannot be mixed. ■ 17: Volume Control This function allows you to individually adjust the playback volume of each of the Performance Memory tracks. Z Insert the Disk and Select a Song ......................................................................................................... Make sure that the disk containing the song you want to set volume levels for is loaded in the Clavinova disk drive, that the [SONG SELECT] indicator is lit, and that the song to be affected is selected. ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ Utility Functions 51 X Select the Volume Control Function ..................................................................................................... ⁄¤‹›‚17 VOLUME CONTROL OFF Select the Volume Control function — see “Selecting & Using the Utility Functions”, page 42. Use the TEMPO [s] and [t] buttons to turn Volume Control ON or OFF. Once you’ve turned ON to engage the function you can release the [UTILITY] button. C Select a Track ......................................................................................................................................... – ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ 1:127 123456789ABCDEFG Use the [TAP] and [METRONOME] buttons to select the track for which you want to change the volume level. V Set the Volume........................................................................................................................................ ¥ø –~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ 2: 78 123456789ABCDEFG Use the TEMPO [s] and [t] buttons to set the volume of the selected track. The volume range is from “0” (no sound) to “127” (maximum volume). To re-record the initial volume value press the [REC] button then, in response to ¥ø~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ the “ARE YOU SURE?” prompt, use the TEMPO [s] and [t] buttons to select ARE YOU SURE? “YES” or “NO” as required. NOTES • The initially recorded volume value is always “127”. • Only data originally recorded on the CVP-89 can be re-recorded. Data converted by the Convert to SMF function (page 53) cannot be re-recorded. B Exit ........................................................................................................................................................... To exit from this function first press the [UTILITY] button to return to the VOLUME CONTROL ON/OFF display, press the TEMPO [s] or [t] button while holding the [UTILITY] button to turn volume control off. NOTES • If the [SONG/PHRASE NUMBER] button is used to select a different song number while the Volume Control mode is engaged, the Volume Control mode will be automatically turned OFF and the utility mode will be exited. ■ 18: Song Name Use this function to enter original titles (up to 12 characters) for your Performance Memory songs. Z Insert a Disk ............................................................................................................................................ Insert the disk containing the song for which you want to enter a title. X Select the Song Name Function............................................................................................................ ⁄¤‹›‚18 SONG NAME NO/YES Select the Song Name function — see “Selecting & Using the Utility Functions”, page 42. “NO/YES” will flash on the display. Press the TEMPO [s] button (YES) to engage the Song Name function or the [t] button (NO) to cancel. Once you’ve pressed the TEMPO [s] button to engage the function you can release the [UTILITY] button. C Select a Song .......................................................................................................................................... SONG 01 NAME –ONG S 1 Use the [TAP] and [METRONOME] buttons to select the song for which you want to enter a name. The existing song name will appear on the display, or “NO SONG DATA” will appear if the selected song contains no data. “SONG 1”, “SONG 2”, etc. will appear if the song has not already been given a name. V Move the Cursor to the Appropriate Character ................................................................................... Use the TEMPO [s] and [t] buttons to move the cursor to the character location at which you want to enter a character. ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 52 Utility Functions B Enter a Character.................................................................................................................................... The following keys on the CVP-89 keyboard enter the corresponding characters when pressed: B D G I K N P S U W Z 1 4 6 8 ! # & ( * - / < > [ ^ ` } A-1 B-1 C0 D0 E0 F0 G0 A0 B0 C1 D1 E1 F1 G1 A1 B1 C2 D2 E2 F2 G2 A2 B2 C3 D3 E3 F3 G3 A3 B3 C4 D4 E4 F4 G4 A4 B4 C5 D5 E5 F5 G5 A5 B5 C6 D6 E6 F6 G6 A6 B6 C7 A C E F H J L M O Q R T V X Y 0 2 3 5 7 9 " $ % ' ) + , . : ; = ? ] \ å { | Space å Back space Insert space Delete • Small capital characters can be entered by pressing the corresponding keys while holding the A-1 key. • If you press the damper pedal while entering a character, the cursor will not move ahead to the next character. This can make it easier to select a character for a given character location. N Repeat Until Done................................................................................................................................... Repeat steps V and B until your name is complete. M Register the Name & Exit ....................................................................................................................... Press the [START/STOP] button to register the entered name and exit from the utility mode. Press [UTILITY] if you want to exit without registering the name. NOTES • Names can only be entered for songs recorded on the CVP-89, CVP-87A, CVP-85A, or CVP-83S. ■ 19: Convert to DOC This function can be used to convert the performance memory voice assignments used by the CVP-89 to DOC Voice Assignments so songs recorded on CVP-89 can be played back on other Clavinovas. Z Insert a Disk & Select the Convert to DOC Function .......................................................................... ⁄¤‹›‚19 CONVERT TO DOC SONG 01 PRESS [START] Insert the disk containing the data to be converted into the Clavinova disk drive, then select the Convert to DOC function — see “Selecting & Using the Utility Functions”, page 42. This function cannot be executed if an appropriate disk is not loaded — see “Notes” below. X Select a Song Number & Execute the Conversion Function .............................................................. Use the TEMPO [s] and [t] buttons to select the song number you want to convert, then press the [START/STOP] button to actually begin the conversion process. Simply release the [UTILITY] button before pressing the [START/STOP] button if you want to cancel the function. You can release the [UTILITY] button once the conversion has started, and the conversion will continue to completion. The number of the measure being processed will appear on the display. The Convert to DOC function will automatically be exited when the conversion is complete. NOTES • The JAZZ ORGAN 2 voice will be shifted up one octave after conversion. • This function cannot be used to convert the voice data on Disk Orchestra Collection, Disklavier, Style, Standard MIDI File, write-protected, or already-converted disks. Also, Performance Memory data recorded using the GM voice assignments cannot be converted. • Once converted, the data cannot be returned to its original form. It is therefore a good idea to make a backup copy of the data before using this function. • The Quantize (UTIL 15) and Track Mix (UTIL 16) functions cannot be applied to data converted by the Convert to DOC function. • Some Clavinova models may not have the required voices or different voices will be used so the sound may not be exactly the same as the original. ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ Utility Functions 53 ■ 20: Convert to SMF This function can be used to convert the performance memory data used by the CVP-89 to Standard MIDI File (SMF) format so songs recorded on the CVP-89 can be played back on SMF-compatible devices. Z Insert a Disk & Select the Convert To SMF Function .......................................................................... ⁄¤‹›‚20 CONVERT TO SMF SONG 01 PRESS [START] Insert the disk containing the data to be converted into the Clavinova disk drive, then select the Convert to SMF function — see “Selecting & Using the Utility Functions”, page 42. X Select a Song Number & Execute the Conversion Function .............................................................. Use the TEMPO [s] and [t] buttons to select the song number you want to convert, then press the [START/STOP] button to actually begin the conversion process. Simply release the [UTILITY] button before pressing the [START/STOP] button if you want to cancel the function. You can release the [UTILITY] button once the conversion has started, and the conversion will continue to completion. The number of the measure being processed will appear on the display. The Convert To SMF function will automatically be exited when the conversion is complete. NOTES • This function cannot be used to convert the voice data on Disk Orchestra Collection, Disklavier, Style, write-protected, or already-converted disks. • Once converted, the data cannot be returned to its original form. It is therefore a good idea to make a backup copy of the data before using this function. • Further recording cannot be carried out with songs converted by the Convert to SMF function. Also, the Quantize (UTIL 15) and Track Mix (UTIL 16) functions cannot be applied to data converted by the Convert to SMF function. ■ Disk Error Messages If an error related to the disk occurs, one of the following messages may appear. If this happens, check the possible causes and solutions listed below. If all else fails, try a different disk. If this doesn’t clear up the problem, contact your Yamaha dealer. DISK ERROR ! An error occurred while writing to or reading from the disk. Try the operation again; if the error occurs a second time the disk or drive may be faulty. If the drive has been in use for some time the heads may be dirty. Clean the heads with a commercially-available floppy disk head cleaner. If the error still occurs with one disk and not others the disk should be considered faulty and should be discarded. If the error occurs with all disks the drive may be faulty. Refer the problem to your Yamaha dealer. DISK PROTECTED ! You have attempted to format, write to, copy to/from, or delete data from a writeprotected disk. Use a disk that is not write protected (set the disk’s write-protect tab to the write-enable position). UNFORMATTED DISK ! The loaded disk is not formatted for use with the Clavinova. After making sure that the disk does not contain any important data (for another device, for example), format the disk as described on page 48. DISK FULL ! The currently loaded disk is full and cannot hold any more data. Either delete unnecessary data or replace the disk with one that has more available disk space. NO DISK ! A disk read or write operation was attempted but no disk is present in the disk drive. Make sure an appropriate disk is inserted in the disk drive before performing any operation that involves disk access. INCOMPATIBLE DATA! You have attempted to perform a Convert to DOC or SMF function on data that cannot be converted. DATA NOT EDITABLE! You have attempted to record or edit data that is not recognized by the CVP-89. Refer to the notes on pages 38, 41, 57, and 63. ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 54 Utility Functions MIDI Functions MIDI, the Musical Instrument Digital Interface, is a world-standard communication interface that allows MIDI-compatible musical instruments and equipment to share musical information and control one another. This makes it possible to create “systems” of MIDI instruments and equipment that offer far greater versatility and control than is available with isolated instruments. The Clavinova has 11 MIDI functions that can be accessed via the normal function selection procedure (page 42), or by pressing the appropriate VOICE selector while holding the [UTILITY] button. The MIDI functions accessed by the various VOICE selectors are shown in the following chart: Function Selector 21. Send Channel Select PIANO 22. Receive Channel Select CLAVINOVA TONE 23. Local ON/OFF E. PIANO 24. Program Change ON/CANCEL HARPSICHORD 25. Control Change ON/CANCEL VIBES 26. Multi-Timbre Mode ON/OFF GUITAR 27. Split Send Mode STRINGS 28. MIDI Clock Select ORGAN 29. Panel Data Transmit CHOIR 30. MIDI Transpose Transmit UPRIGHT BASS 31. GM Drum Kit NOTES • Always use a high-quality MIDI cable to connect MIDI OUT to MIDI IN terminals. Never use MIDI cables longer than about 15 meters, since cables longer than this can pick up noise which can cause data errors. • When using the Clavinova with other MIDI equipment, always refer to the MIDI specifications (implementation chart and MIDI data format) of the equipment used to ensure compatibility. — ■ 21: Send Channel Select In any MIDI control setup, the MIDI channels of the transmitting and receiving equipment must be matched for proper data transfer (there are 16 MIDI channels). This function sets the MIDI send (transmit) channel of the CVP-89. Z Select the Send Channel Function ....................................................................................................... ⁄¤‹›‚21 MIDI SEND CH. 1 Select the Send Channel function as described in “Selecting & Using the Utility Functions” (page 42), or press [PIANO] while holding [UTILITY]. The [PIANO] indicator will light while the [UTILITY] button is pressed. X Set the MIDI Send Channel .................................................................................................................... Use the TEMPO [s] and [t] buttons to select the desired channel — the selected channel number is shown on the display. NOTES • When the power is initially turned ON, the MIDI send channel is set to 1. • “1” can be instantly selected by pressing the TEMPO [s] and [t] buttons simultaneously. ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ Utility Functions 55 ■ 22: Receive Channel Select In addition to the 16 MIDI channels, an “OMNI” receive mode is also available which allows reception on all 16 MIDI channels. In the OMNI mode it is not necessary to match the receive channel of the receiving device to the transmit channel of the transmitting device. Z Select the Receive Channel Function ................................................................................................... ⁄¤‹›‚22 MIDI RECEIVE CH. ALL Select the Receive Channel function as described in “Selecting & Using the Utility Functions” (page 42), or press [CLAVINOVA TONE] while holding [UTILITY]. The [CLAVINOVA TONE] indicator will light while the [UTILITY] button is pressed. X Set the MIDI Receive Channel ............................................................................................................... Use the TEMPO [s] and [t] buttons to select the desired channel — the selected channel number is shown on the display, or “ALL” if the OMNI receive mode is selected. NOTES • When the power is initially turned ON, MIDI receive is set to the OMNI ON mode and the basic receive channel is set to 1. • “ALL” (OMNI) and basic receive channel 1 can be instantly selected by pressing the TEMPO [s] and [t] buttons simultaneously. ■ 23: Local Control ON/OFF MIDI OUT MIDI Sequencer MIDI IN Tone Generator Played from Clavinova keyboard. MIDI IN MIDI OUT Clavinova Local control OFF. Played from MIDI Sequencer. “Local Control” refers to the fact that, normally, the Clavinova keyboard controls its internal tone generator, allowing the internal voices to be played directly from the keyboard. This situation is “Local Control ON” since the internal tone generator is controlled locally by its own keyboard. Local control can be turned off, however, so that the Clavinova keyboard does not play the internal voices, but the appropriate MIDI information is still transmitted via the MIDI OUT connector when notes are played on the keyboard. At the same time, the internal tone generator responds to MIDI information received via the MIDI IN connector. This means that while an external MIDI sequencer, for example, plays the Clavinova’s internal voices, an external tone generator can be played from the Clavinova keyboard. Local Control is automatically turned ON when the power is initially turned on. Z Select the Local Control ON/OFF Function .......................................................................................... ⁄¤‹›‚23 LOCAL CONTROL ON Select the Local Control ON/OFF function as described in “Selecting & Using the Utility Functions” (page 42), or press [E. PIANO] while holding [UTILITY]. X Turn Local Control ON or OFF .............................................................................................................. E. PIANO = local control OFF. 3 E. PIANO Use the TEMPO [s] and [t] buttons or the [E. PIANO] button to turn local control ON or OFF as required. = local control ON. 3 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 56 Utility Functions ■ 24: Program Change ON/CANCEL Normally the Clavinova will respond to MIDI program change numbers received from an external keyboard or other MIDI device, causing the correspondingly numbered Clavinova voice to be selected. The Clavinova will normally also send a MIDI program change number whenever one of its voices is selected, causing the correspondingly numbered voice or program to be selected on the external MIDI device if the device is set up to receive and respond to MIDI program change numbers. This function makes it possible to cancel program change number reception and transmission so that voices can be selected on the Clavinova without affecting the external MIDI device, and vice versa. Program Change is automatically turned ON when the power is initially turned on. Z Select the Program Change ON/CANCEL Function ............................................................................ ⁄¤‹›‚24 PROGRAM CHANGE ON Select the Program Change ON/CANCEL function as described in “Selecting & Using the Utility Functions” (page 42), or press [HARPSICHORD] while holding [UTILITY]. X Turn Program Change ON or CANCEL ................................................................................................. HARPSICHORD 4 HARPSICHORD 4 = program change reception/ transmission CANCEL. Use the TEMPO [s] and [t] buttons or the [HARPSICHORD] button to turn program change reception and transmission ON or OFF as required. = program change reception/ transmission ON. ■ 25: Control Change ON/CANCEL Normally the Clavinova will respond to MIDI control change data received from an external MIDI device or keyboard, causing the selected Clavinova voice to be affected by pedal and other “control” settings received from the controlling device. The Clavinova also transmits MIDI control change information when either of its pedals are operated. This function makes it possible to cancel control change data reception and transmission if you do not want the Clavinova voices to be affected by control change data received from an external device or vice versa. Control Change is automatically turned ON when the power is initially turned on. Z Select the Control Change ON/CANCEL Function .............................................................................. ⁄¤‹›‚25 CONTROL CHANGE ON Select the Control Change ON/CANCEL function as described in “Selecting & Using the Utility Functions” (page 42), or press [VIBES] while holding [UTILITY]. X Turn Control Change ON or CANCEL ................................................................................................... VIBES 5 VIBES 5 = control change reception/ transmission CANCEL. = control change reception/ transmission ON. Use the TEMPO [s] and [t] buttons or the [VIBES] button to turn local control reception and transmission ON or OFF as required. ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ Utility Functions 57 ■ 26: The Multi-Timbre Mode The Multi-Timbre mode is a special mode in which the Clavinova voices can be independently controlled on different MIDI channel numbers (1—15 in the CVP mode; 1—10,15, 16 in the DOC mode; 1—16 in the GM mode) by an external MIDI device. The Multi-Timbre mode is off (SINGLE) when the power is initially turned on. Z Select the Multi-Timbre Mode Function ............................................................................................... ⁄¤‹›‚26 MULTI-TIMBRE SINGLE Select the Multi-Timbre Mode function as described in “Selecting & Using the Utility Functions” (page 42), or press [GUITAR] while holding [UTILITY]. X Select a Multi-Timbre Mode ................................................................................................................... Use the TEMPO [s] and [t] buttons or the [GUITAR] button to select the desired Multi-Timbre mode, described in the chart below. GUITAR 6 GUITAR 6 = Multi-Timbre mode ON. (CVP, DOC or GM) = Multi-Timbre mode OFF. (SINGLE) SINGLE Multi-Timbre mode OFF. CVP Multi-track MIDI data received by the CVP-89 is played using the panel voice assignments — i.e. the same voices selected by the panel controls. DOC Multi-track MIDI data received by the CVP-89 is played using the Yamaha DOC voice assignments. The panel voice assignments are not changed but the transmitted data is converted to DOC voice assignments. GM Multi-track MIDI data received by the CVP-89 is played using General MIDI voice assignments. Transmitted data is also converted to GM voice assignments. When this mode is selected the panel voices also conform to the GM assignments (voices 1—128, drum kits 129—136). NOTES • See page vii, viii for listings of the voice assignments in each mode. • The Dual, Split, internal Style, ABC, and Solo Style Play functions will not operate in the DOC or GM mode. • Either “DOC MODE” or “GM MODE” will appear on the display when you return to the play mode. ● Recording with the GM Voices If you press the Performance Memory [REC] button while the GM mode is engaged, the [REC] indicator and the indicator of the last selected track will light (red), and that track will be in the record ready mode. The remaining recording procedure is the same as described on page 35. NOTES • If the selected song number already contains data that was not recorded in the GM mode, “DATA NOT EDITABLE!” will appear on the display and recording will not be possible. The reverse is also true: i.e. panel-voice data cannot be recorded to a song that already contains GM-voice data. • Internal styles cannot be recorded in the GM mode. • Select a voice number between 129 and 136 to record a drum voice. When the [RHYTHM] button is pressed voice number 129 will automatically be selected if another drum voice is not already selected. Track number 10 is automatically selected for recording. • Only tracks 3 through 9 can be selected using the [ORCH/3-10] and SONG/PHRASE NUMBER [s] and [t] buttons (track 10 is selected by pressing the [RHYTHM] button). It is possible, however, to record voices 129 through 136 to tracks 3 through 9. ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 58 Utility Functions ■ 27: The Split Send Mode In the split send mode notes played on the left-hand section of the keyboard (to the left of and including the split point key — see “Changing the Split Point” on page 10) are transmitted on MIDI channel 2, while the upper keyboard section transmits on the MIDI channel set using the Send Channel Select function described earlier. In this mode the left- and righthand sections of the keyboard can be used to play separate external keyboards or tone generators set to receive on the appropriate channels. The Split Send Mode is automatically turned OFF when the power is initially turned on. Z Select the Split Send Mode Function ................................................................................................... ⁄¤‹›‚27 MIDI SPLIT OFF Select the Split Send Mode function as described in “Selecting & Using the Utility Functions” (page 42), or press [STRINGS] while holding [UTILITY]. X Turn Split Send ON or OFF .................................................................................................................... STRINGS = Split Send Mode ON. 7 STRINGS Use the TEMPO [s] and [t] buttons or the [STRINGS] button to turn split send ON or OFF as required. = Split Send Mode OFF. 7 ■ 28: MIDI Clock Select This function determines whether the Clavinova’s rhythm and ABC timing is controlled by the Clavinova’s own internal clock or an external MIDI clock signal received from external equipment connected to the MIDI IN connector. The Clock Mode is automatically set to INTERNAL when the power is initially turned on. Z Select the MIDI Clock Select Function ................................................................................................. ⁄¤‹›‚28 MIDI CLOCK INTERNAL Select the MIDI Clock Select function as described in “Selecting & Using the Utility Functions” (page 42), or press [ORGAN] while holding [UTILITY]. X Set the MIDI Clock to INTERNAL or MIDI IN ......................................................................................... ORGAN = MIDI IN. 8 ORGAN Use the TEMPO [s] and [t] buttons or the [ORGAN] button to set the MIDI clock to INTERNAL or MIDI IN as required. = INTERNAL. 8 NOTES • If the Clock Mode is set to MIDI IN and a MIDI clock signal is not being received from an external source, the rhythm, ABC and other clock-dependent features will not operate. ■ 29: Panel Data Send This function causes all the current Clavinova panel settings (selected voice, etc.) to be transmitted via the MIDI OUT connector. This is particularly useful if you will be recording performances to a MIDI sequence recorder which will be used to control the Clavinova on playback. By transmitting the Clavinova panel settings and recording them on the MIDI sequence recorder prior to the actual performance data, the Clavinova will be automatically restored to the same settings when the performance is played back. Z Select the Panel Data Send Function ................................................................................................... ⁄¤‹›‚29 SEND PANEL DATA PRESS [START] Select the Panel Data Send function as described in “Selecting & Using the Utility Functions” (page 42), or press [CHOIR] while holding [UTILITY] to send the data immediately (in the latter case the next step is not required). X Send the Panel Data ............................................................................................................................... Press the [START/STOP] button to begin transmission of the panel data. ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ Utility Functions 59 ■ 30: MIDI Transpose Transmit This function transposes the pitch of transmitted MIDI note data up or down in semitone intervals up to a maximum of six semitones. The pitch of notes played on the keyboard is not affected. Z Select the MIDI Transpose Transmit Function .................................................................................... ⁄¤‹›‚30 MIDI TRANSPOSE 0 Select the MIDI Transpose Transmit function as described in “Selecting & Using the Utility Functions” (page 42), or press [UPRIGHT BASS] while holding [UTILITY]. The [UPRIGHT BASS] indicator will light while the [UTILITY] button is pressed. X Set the Transpose Value As Required .................................................................................................. Display -6 -5 -4 -3 -2 -1 0 +1 +2 +3 +4 +5 +6 Use the TEMPO [s] and [t] buttons to set the MIDI Transpose Transmit value as required. Transposition -6 semitones -5 semitones -4 semitones -3 semitones -2 semitones -1 semitone Normal +1 semitone +2 semitones +3 semitones +4 semitones +5 semitones +6 semitones NOTES • Press the TEMPO [s] and [t] buttons simultaneously while holding the [UTILITY] button to restore normal transmitted pitch. • Transpose is always set to Normal when the power is turned on. ■ 31: GM Drum Kit The CVP-89 includes two different GM drum kits that can be selected via this function. There’s also an “AUTO” setting that allows automatic GM drum kit selection. NORMAL The default Yamaha-standard GM drum kit. Can be used with most General MIDI software. ⁄¤‹›‚31 GM DRUM KIT AUTO TG100 This kit has the same instrument assignments as the Yamaha TG100 tone generator. When a GM drum kit is selected via the panel (129 through 136 in the GM mode), the normal drum kit name will remain on the display but the TG100 kit will be played via the keyboard. AUTO This is the default setting. The TG100 kit is automatically selected when appropriate disk is inserted. The NORMAL kit is selected at other times. When “AUTO” is selected and a GM drum kit is selected via the panel (129 through 136 in the GM mode), the normal drum kit will be played via the keyboard. ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 60 Utility Functions General Utilities The functions in this group apply to a wide range of functions and features. ■ 32: Individual Key Tuning The Individual Key Tuning Feature makes it possible to individually tune each key on the CVP-89 keyboard in order to match different tuning standards. The pitch of each key can be raised or lowered by a maximum of 50 cents (approximately) from the standard pitch. Z Select the Individual Key Tuning Function .......................................................................................... ⁄¤‹›‚32 IND. KEY TUNING NO/YES Select the Individual Key Tuning function — see “Selecting & Using the Utility Functions”, page 42. “NO/YES” will flash on the display. Press the TEMPO [s] button (YES) to engage the Individual Key Tuning function, or the [t] button (NO) to cancel. Once you’ve pressed the TEMPO [s] button to engage the function you can release the [UTILITY] button. X Select Up or Down Tuning ..................................................................................................................... INDIVIDUAL KEY TUNE ON(UP) ååå=+ 0 First, use the [TAP] and [METRONOME] buttons to select either “ON (UP)” if you want to raise the pitch of a key or “ON (DOWN)” if you want to lower the pitch of a key. OFF Individual key tuning OFF. ON (UP) Raise pitch. ON (DOWN) Lower pitch. C Press the Key To Be Tuned Once ......................................................................................................... INDIVIDUAL KEY TUNE ON(UP) C 3=+ 0 Press the key to be tuned once to display the current tuning value on the display. “0” indicates normal pitch, positive values indicate that pitch has been increased by the corresponding number of steps (about 1.2 cents per step), and negative (“-”) values indicate that pitch has been lowered by the corresponding number of steps. V Press the Key To Tune ........................................................................................................................... Subsequent presses on the key selected in the previous step tune the key in the specified “(UP)” or “(DOWN)” direction — one 1.2-cent step per press. The highest and lowest possible values are “+44” and “-44”, respectively. The TEMPO [s] and [t] keys can also be used to tune as required: [s] to tune up and [t] to tune down. NOTES • “0” can be instantly selected by pressing the TEMPO [s] and [t] buttons simultaneously. B Select a New Key Or Exit ....................................................................................................................... To tune a different key, repeat steps X through V, above. To exit from the Individual Key Tuning function, press the [UTILITY] button. NOTES • Individual key tuning is automatically turned OFF whenever the POWER switch is turned on. • The Individual Key Tuning data will be erased when the power is turned off, but can be saved to and loaded from disk by using the “Save Individual Key Tuning” and “Load Individual Key Tuning” functions (page 45). ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ Utility Functions 61 ■ 33: Touch Sensitivity The Clavinova can be set to one of three different types of keyboard touch sensitivity to match different playing styles and preferences. SOFT ⁄¤‹›‚33 TOUCH SENS MEDIUM Allows maximum loudness to be produced with relatively light key pressure. MEDIUM Produces a fairly “standard” keyboard response. HARD Requires the keys to be played quite hard to produce maximum loudness. NOTES • The MEDIUM setting is automatically selected whenever the POWER switch is turned on. ■ 34: Accompaniment Volume Mode Normally the Auto Accompaniment volume controls are used to adjust the volume of the Rhythm, Chord 1, Chord 2, and Bass accompaniment parts, as labelled on the Clavinova panel. This function can be used to assign these volume controls to other operations. ⁄¤‹›‚34 ACCOMP. VOLUME 1 1 Rhythm, Chord 1, Chord 2, and Bass volume control. 2 Modulation, Pitch Bend +, Pitch Bend -, and Expression. In this mode the RHYTHM slider controls modulation depth, the CHORD 1 slider controls upward pitch bend, the CHORD 2 slider controls downward pitch bend, and the BASS slider controls expression (overall volume). 3 Reverb depth for the Rhythm, Chord 1, Chord 2, and Bass tracks. This applies when playing with ABC and when playing back performance memory data that was recorded with ABC. When playing back performance memory data that was recorded without ABC, and when playing back Disk Orchestra Collection data, the CHORD 1, CHORD 2 and BASS controls correspond to tracks 4-10, 1-2, and 3, respectively. NOTES • The Rhythm, Chord 1, Chord 2, and Bass volume setting (1) is automatically selected whenever the POWER switch is turned on. • 1 and 2 can be recorded and their initial values can be changed as described on page 38. 3 applies only to playback. ■ 35: Style Tempo Switching This function determines whether the preset tempo for each style will be automatically selected whenever a style is selected (while style playback is stopped) or whether the currently selected tempo will be maintained regardless of the selected style (refer to page 17). ⁄¤‹›‚35 STYLE TEMPO SET TEMPO KEEP TEMPO Style tempo switching OFF — the current tempo is maintained. SET TEMPO NOTES Style tempo switching ON — the preset tempo for each style is automatically selected. • Style tempo switching is automatically set to “SET TEMPO” whenever the POWER switch is turned on. ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 62 Utility Functions ■ 36: Auto Synchro Start Switching This function determines whether the “Synchro Start” mode will automatically be turned ON and OFF when an ABC mode is turned ON and OFF (refer to page 19, 22). ⁄¤‹›‚36 ABC SYNC. START ON OFF Auto synchro start switching OFF — synchro start is not turned on and off with ABC. ON Auto synchro start switching ON — synchro start is automatically turned on and off with ABC. NOTES • When this function is OFF the SYNCHRO START mode will not be retained after stopping an accompaniment that was started using the SYNCHRO START mode. • Auto synchro start switching is automatically turned ON whenever the POWER switch is turned on. ■ 37: Random All Song Repeat This function determines whether the songs are played back and repeated in sequential or random order when “ALL” is selected when playing back a disk (refer to page 30). This function also affects demo song playback (page 6). OFF Random all song repeat OFF — the songs are played in sequence. ⁄¤‹›‚37 RANDOM PLAY OFF ON Random all song repeat ON — the songs are played in random order. NOTES • Random all song repeat is automatically turned OFF whenever the POWER switch is turned on. ■ 38: Damper Pedal Mode Sets the damper pedal for on/off or continuous operation (refer to page 14). ⁄¤‹›‚38 DAMPER PEDAL CONTINUOUS CONTINUOUS Continuous damper pedal operation. SW On/off damper pedal operation. NOTES • Continuous damper pedal operation (CONTINUOUS) is automatically selected whenever the POWER switch is turned on. ■ 39: Pitch Bend Range ⁄¤‹›‚39 PITCH BEND RANGE 100Cent This function allows the maximum pitch bend range to be set from 100 cents to 1200 cents in 100-cent increments for each individual voice (100 cents = 1 semitone). First select the voice you want to set the pitch bend range for, then select and set the Pitch Bend Range function. NOTES • A complete list of the preset pitch bend ranges for each voice is given on page vii. • The pitch bend range of the voice shown to the left of the display takes priority in the DUAL mode. In the Split mode the right-hand voice setting takes priority. • The pitch bend range settings are retained in memory for approximately one week even when the power is turned off. • Unexpected sound may be produced if the pitch of a note is bent beyond the range of the voice. See page 8 for a list of the usable ranges for each voice. ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ Utility Functions 63 ■ 40: Edit Drum Instrument The CVP-89 has two drum kits — NORMAL and PROCESSED — and this function allows either kit to be selected for each individual drum instrument. Individual reverb depth and pan settings are also possible. Z Select the Edit Drum Instrument Function ........................................................................................... ⁄¤‹›‚40 EDIT DRUM INST. NO/YES Select the Edit Drum Instrument function — see “Selecting & Using the Utility Functions”, page 42. Then press the TEMPO [s] button if you actually want to engage the Edit Drum Instrument function. Once the TEMPO [s] button has been pressed you can release the [UTILITY] button. The DRUMS voice will automatically be selected and the kit (NORMAL or PROCESSED) for the currently selected style will be recalled. X Select an Instrument .............................................................................................................................. ⁄¤‹›‚40 EDIT DRUM INST. PRESS [DRUM KEY] Press the key on the CVP-89 keyboard corresponding to the drum instrument you want to edit. The name of the selected instrument and the drum kit currently selected for that instrument will appear on the display. C Select a Parameter ................................................................................................................................. EDIT DRUM INSTRUMENT Rim Lite KIT: NORMAL Use the [TAP] and [METRONOME] buttons to select the parameter you want to edit: KIT, REV DEPTH, or PAN. V Edit the Parameter as Required ............................................................................................................ EDIT DRUM INSTRUMENT Rim Lite REV DEPTH: 8 Use the TEMPO [s] and [t] buttons to select the NORMAL or PROCESSED drum kit if the KIT parameters is selected, set the reverb depth from 0 to 15 if the REV DEPTH parameter is selected, or set the pan position from LEFT 6 through CENTER, DEFAULT to RIGHT 6 if the PAN parameter is selected. NOTES EDIT DRUM INSTRUMENT ALL KIT:PROCESSED • If you press the C7 key while the KIT parameter is selected, “ALL” will appear in place of the instrument name and the NORMAL or PROCESSED kit can be selected for all instruments. The REV DEPTH and PAN parameters for all instruments return to their default values and cannot be edited when “ALL” is selected. • Up to 16 individual reverb depth settings, 8 pan settings, and 8 kit settings can be made — e.g. after setting KIT to “ALL” and selecting “NORMAL” or “PROCESSED”. If you attempt to make more reverb depth, pan, or kit settings the “TOO MANY!” error message will appear. The reverb depth and pan settings of an already-edited instrument can be restored to their default values by simultaneously pressing the TEMPO [▲] and [▼] buttons. Since some instruments are already edited for some accompaniment styles, the maximum number of editable instruments will be less when those styles are selected. • The Edit Drum Instrument function cannot be used in the GM mode — “DATA NOT EDITABLE!” will appear on the display. • See page ix for a list of the NORMAL or PROCESSED kit. B Select a New Instrument Or Exit ........................................................................................................... To edit a different instrument, repeat steps X through V, above. To exit from the Edit Drum Instrument function, press the [UTILITY] button. ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 64 Utility Functions ■ 41: Split Left Octave This function determines whether the left-hand voice in a split keyboard setup will be automatically shifted up one octave (refer to page 10). ⁄¤‹›‚41 SPLIT-L OCTAVE + 1 0 Octave shift OFF — no octave shift will occur. +1 Octave shift ON — all voices except BASS (voice numbers 10, 11, 49, 50, 51, and 52) and DRUMS (voice numbers 12) will be shifted. NOTES • Octave shift is automatically turned ON (+1) whenever the POWER switch is turned on. ■ 42: Registration Tempo Determines whether the tempo setting in a recalled registration memory will be used or not (refer to page 29). ⁄¤‹›‚42 REGIST. TEMPO SET TEMPO KEEP TEMPO The recalled tempo setting is not used — the tempo will not change when a registration memory is recalled. SET TEMPO NOTES The recalled tempo setting is used — the tempo will change when a registration memory is recalled. • The registration Tempo function is automatically turned SET TEMPO whenever the POWER switch is turned on. ■ 43: ABC Auto Mute Turns the Auto Accompaniment mute function on or off (refer to page 23). OFF Mute OFF. ⁄¤‹›‚43 ABC AUTO MUTE ON ON Mute ON. NOTES • The mute function is automatically turned ON whenever the POWER switch is turned on. ■ 44: Minor Harmonization Turns the Auto Accompaniment minor harmonization function on or off (refer to page 23). ⁄¤‹›‚44 7th CHORD IN min CHORD TONE NORMAL Minor harmonization OFF. CHORD TONE Minor harmonization ON. NOTES • The Minor harmonization function is automatically turned OFF (NORMAL) whenever the POWER switch is turned on. ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ The Connectors 65 Although the Clavinova is a self-contained musical instrument that simply be plugged into the AC mains outlet and played, it also features a number of connectors for system expansion. ● AUX IN L and R Jacks ............................................................................................................................ AUX IN R These jacks are intended primarily for use with external synthesizers or tone generator modules. For example, the outputs of the synthesizer/tone generator can be to the Clavinova AUX IN jacks, allowing the sound of the synthesizer/tone generator to be reproduced via the Clavinova’s internal amplifier and speaker system. L NOTES Tone Generator • The input signal from the AUX IN jacks is delivered to the AUX OUT jacks, but is not affected by the Clavinova’s volume control or reverb effect. ● AUX OUT L/L+R and R Jacks ................................................................................................................ R AUX OUT The AUX OUT L/L+R and R jacks deliver the output of the Clavinova for connection to an instrument amplifier, mixing console, PA system, or recording equipment. If you will be connecting the Clavinova to a monaural sound system, use only the L/L+R jack. When a plug is inserted into the L/L+R jack only, the left- and right-channel signals are combined and delivered via the L/L+R jack so you don’t lose any of the Clavinova’s sound. L/L+R Stereo System CAUTION • The AUX OUT jack signal must never be returned to the AUX IN jacks, either directly or through external equipment. ● MIDI IN, THRU and OUT Connectors .................................................................................................... MIDI Sequencer IN OUT Tone Generator The MIDI IN connector receives MIDI data from an external MIDI device (such as a synthesizer, sequencer, music computer, etc.) which can be used to control the Clavinova. The MIDI THRU connector re-transmits any data received at the MIDI IN connector, allowing “chaining” of several MIDI instruments or other devices. The MIDI OUT connector transmits MIDI data generated by the Clavinova (e.g. note and velocity data produced by playing the Clavinova keyboard). More details on MIDI are given in “MIDI Functions” on page 54. THRU MIDI ● EXP PEDAL Jack .................................................................................................................................... EXP PEDAL An optional Yamaha EP-1 Expression Pedal can be plugged into this jack for foot volume (expression) control of the keyboard sound only (i.e. expression doesn’t affect the auto-accompaniment sound or disk playback). Press the pedal forward to increase volume, and backward to decrease volume. ● MIC. Jack and VOL. Control .................................................................................................................. MIC. VOL. MIN MAX MIC. A standard microphone with a 1/4" phone plug can be connected to the MIC. jack. The microphone sound is then mixed with the Clavinova sound and delivered via the Clavinova’s speakers. The MIC. VOL. control can be used to adjust the microphone volume. NOTES • The depth of the digital reverb effect applied to the microphone sound can be adjusted via the “Mic Reverb Depth” utility function described on page 43. ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ 66 Factory Preset Recall C7 POWER The factory preset settings for the data listed below can be restored by holding the C7 key while turning the power on. • Registration memory data. • Style disk load data. • Custom rhythm data. (no data) • Pitch bend range data. • Chorus ON/OFF data. • Soundboard depth data. NOTES • Custom Rhythm initially contains no data, so any Custom Rhythm data you have created will be erased when the Factory Preset Recall function is executed. Troubleshooting If you encounter what appears to be a malfunction, please check the following points before assuming that your Clavinova is faulty. 1. No Sound When the Power is Turned On Is the AC plug properly connected to an AC wall outlet? Check the AC connection carefully. Is the MASTER VOLUME control turned up to a reasonable listening level? 2. No Rhythm, ABC, or Performance Memory Sound Check the Auto Accompaniment volume control settings. No sound is produced if these are set to their minimum positions. 3. The Clavinova Reproduces Radio or TV Sound This can occur if there is a high-power transmitter in your vicinity. Contact your Yamaha dealer. 4. Intermittent Static Noise This is usually due to turning on or off a household appliance or other electronic equipment which is fed by the same AC mains line as your Clavinova. 5. Interference Appears On Radio or TV Sets Located Near the Clavinova The Clavinova contains digital circuitry which can generate radio-frequency noise. The solution is to move the Clavinova further away from the affected equipment, or vice versa. 6. Distorted Sound When the Clavinova is Connected to An External Amplifier/Speaker System If the Clavinova is connected to a stereo system or instrument amplifier and the sound is distorted, reduce the setting of the Clavinova volume control to a level at which the distortion ceases. Options ● BC-10 Bench A stable, comfortable bench styled to match your Yamaha Clavinova. ● HPE-160 Stereo Headphones High-performance lightweight dynamic headphones with extra-soft ear pads. NOTES • Some items may not be available in certain areas. ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ Index 67 A K A-B repeat, disk orchestra .......................... 33 ABC auto mute ............................................ 64 Accompaniment .......................................... 17 Accompaniment volume mode .................... 61 Assembly ....................................................... i Auto bass chord (ABC) ............................... 21 Auto synchro start switching ....................... 62 Automatic performance, disk orchestra ...... 30 Aux jacks ..................................................... 65 Key cover ...................................................... 4 Keyboard percussion .................................... 8 B M Balance, split mode ..................................... 11 Metronome .................................................. 20 Mic jack & volume control ........................... 65 Mic reverb depth ......................................... 43 MIDI clock select ......................................... 58 MIDI connectors .......................................... 65 MIDI data format ........................................... iii MIDI transpose transmit .............................. 59 Minor harmonization ............................. 23, 64 Multi-timbre mode ....................................... 57 Multi-timbre recording via MIDI ................... 40 Music data, playing other types .................. 34 Music stand ................................................... 4 Mute mode .................................................. 23 C Chord sequence function ............................ 41 Chorus on/off .............................................. 43 Connectors .................................................. 65 Control change on/cancel ........................... 56 Controls, panel .............................................. 2 Convert to DOC .......................................... 52 Convert to SMF ........................................... 53 Custom rhythm ............................................ 24 D Damper pedal mode ................................... 62 Damper pedal, split mode ........................... 11 Demonstration playback ............................... 6 Disk copy, disk orchestra ............................ 34 Disk error messages ................................... 53 Disk format .................................................. 48 Disk orchestra ............................................. 30 Disk styles, loading ..................................... 26 Disk styles, using ........................................ 27 Dual mode ..................................................... 9 E Edit drum instrument ................................... 63 Exp pedal jack ............................................. 65 Expression control ........................................ 5 F Factory preset recall ................................... 66 Fill-ins .......................................................... 20 Fingered accompaniment ........................... 21 Fingering chart ............................................. xii Floppy disk handling ..................................... 1 Full-keyboard ABC ...................................... 22 L Left pedal .................................................... 14 Load custom rhythm ................................... 46 Load individual key tuning ........................... 45 Load registration ......................................... 44 Local control on/off ...................................... 55 N Next phrase, disk orchestra ........................ 34 O Options ........................................................ 66 P Pan .............................................................. 13 Panel send data .......................................... 58 Pause, disk orchestra ................................. 34 Pedal pause, disk orchestra ........................ 34 Pedals ......................................................... 14 Percussion kit list ......................................... ix Performance memory ................................. 35 Pitch bend range ......................................... 62 Pitch bend, left pedal .................................. 15 Pitch control ................................................ 16 Pitch display ................................................ 16 Playing specific parts, disk orchestra .......... 31 Polyphony ................................................... 13 Power switch ................................................. 4 Program change on/cancel ......................... 56 Punch-in recording ...................................... 39 G GM drum kit ................................................ 59 Guided practice, disk orchestra .................. 32 Q H R Harmonization variations, solo styleplay ..... 28 Headphones .................................................. 4 Random all song repeat .............................. 62 Recall, registration memory ........................ 29 Receive channel select ............................... 55 Recording & playback, multitrack ................ 36 Recording & playback, one-pass ................ 35 Registration memory ................................... 29 Registration tempo ...................................... 64 I Individual key tuning ................................... 60 Introduction ................................................. 19 Quantize song data ..................................... 49 Repeat functions, disk orchestra ................. 33 Reverb depth control ................................... 12 Reverb effects ............................................. 12 Rewind & fast forward, disk orchestra ........ 34 Rhythm break, left pedal ....................... 15, 20 Right pedal .................................................. 14 S Save custom rhythm ................................... 45 Save individual key tuning .......................... 45 Save registration ......................................... 44 Send channel select .................................... 54 Single-finger accompaniment ..................... 21 Soft, left pedal ............................................. 14 Solo styleplay, left pedal ....................... 15, 28 Solo styleplay, using ................................... 28 Song copy ................................................... 46 Song delete ................................................. 47 Song name .................................................. 51 Sostenuto pedal .......................................... 14 Soundboard depth ...................................... 43 Specifications ............................................... xi Split left octave ............................................ 64 Split mode ................................................... 10 Split point, ABC ........................................... 23 Split point, changing .................................... 10 Split send mode .......................................... 58 Standard MIDI file playback mode .............. 48 Start/stop, left pedal .................................... 15 Starting accompaniment ............................. 18 Stopping accompaniment ........................... 20 Store, registration memory .......................... 29 Style selection, accompaniment ................. 17 Style tempo switching ................................. 61 Synchronized start ...................................... 19 T Tap start ...................................................... 19 Tempo control ............................................. 18 Touch sensitivity ......................................... 61 Track mix .................................................... 50 Transpose ................................................... 43 Troubleshooting .......................................... 66 U Utility functions, list ..................................... 42 Utility functions, selecting ............................ 42 V Voice balance, dual mode ............................. 9 Voice list ........................................................ 8 Voice list ....................................................... vii Voice selection .............................................. 7 Volume control, utility .................................. 50 Volume controls ................................ 5, 23, 32 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ i Assembly/Zusammenbau/Montage/Montaje Assembly 1 NOTES 5 x 20 mm screws 5 x 20 mm Schrauben Vis de 5 x 20 mm Tornillos de 5 x 20 mm x18 1 4 x 20 mm round-head screws 4 x 20 mm Rundkopfschrauben x5 Z Open the box and remove all the parts. 2 Vis à tête ronde de 4 x 20 mm Tornillos de cabeza redonda de 4 x 20 mm 2 • We do not recommend attempting to assemble the Clavinova alone. The job can be easily accomplished, however, with only two people. • Use only the screws provided or replacements of exactly the specified size. Using screws of the wrong size can result in damage to the instrument. 3 On opening the box you should find the parts shown in the illustration above. Check to make sure that all the required parts are provided. X Carefully lean the main unit against a wall. To make it easier to install the legs, place a soft blanket or similar material on the floor near a wall, close the Clavinova keyboard cover, place the front panel of the Clavinova (the side with the keyboard) on the blanket and gently lean the unit against the wall — MAKING SURE THAT IT CAN NOT FALL — as shown in the illustration. Blanket, etc. Decke o.ä. Couverture, etc. C Attach the front legs. Manta, etc. Six 5 x 20 mm screws 1 Sechs 5 x 20 mm Schrauben 1 Six vis de 5 x 20 mm 1 Seis tornillos de 5 x 20 mm 1 Securely attach the two front legs using six 5 x 20 mm screws 1 each (use a Philips “+” screwdriver), as shown in the illustration. Make sure the screws are securely tightened. V Attach the rear leg and pedal box assembly. 4 Four 5 x 20mm screws 1 Vier 5 x 20 mm Schrauben 1 Quatre vis de 5 x 20 mm 1 Cuatro tornillos de 5 x 20 mm 1 Black Schwarz Noir Negro White Weiß Blanc Blanco Black Schwarz Noir Negro Before attaching the rear leg and pedal box assembly, insert the 3 plugs extending from the rear leg into the corresponding sockets in the main unit, making sure that the connectors must be inserted with the protruding clip facing the rear of the main unit. Then securely attach the rear leg with the six 5 x 20 mm screws 1, and the pedal bracket with the five 4 x 20 mm round-head screws 2. IMPORTANT • After assembling the Clavinova, check once more to make sure that all screws have been securely fastened. • If the stand leans to the side, makes unusual noises, or otherwise seems unstable during use, check and tighten all screws while following the assembly instructions given above. Five 4 x 20 mm round-head screws 2 Fünf 4 x 20 mm Rundkopfschrauben 2 Cinq vis à tête ronde de 4 x 20 mm 2 Cinco tornillos de cabeza redonda de 4 x 20 mm 2 Two 5 x 20 mm screws 1 Zwei 5 x 20 mm Schrauben 1 Deux vis de 5 x 20 mm 1 Dos tornillos de 5 x 20 mm 1 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ Assembly/Zusammenbau/Montage/Montaje Zusammenbau HINWEISE • Wir raten davon ab, das Clavinova alleine zusammenzubauen und aufzustellen. Zwei Personen können diese Arbeit jedoch problemlos ausführen. • Verwenden Sie ausschließlich die mitgelieferten Schrauben oder Ersatzschrauben identischer Größe. Die Verwendung von Schrauben mit abweichenden Maßen kann eine Beschädigung des Instruments zur Folge haben. Z Den Versandkarton öffnen und alle Teile auspacken. Der Karton sollte alle in der Abbildung gezeigten Teile enthalten. Vergewissern Sie sich, daß alle Teile vollzählig vorhanden sind. X Die Haupteineit vorsichtig an eine Wand lehnen. Um das Anschrauben der Beine zu erleichtern, breiten Sie eine Decke oder ein weiches Tuch neben der Wand auf dem Boden aus, schließen den Tastaturdeckel des Clavinova, stellen das Instrument mit der Vorderkante (Seite mit der Tastatur) vorsichtig auf die Decke und lehnen es an die Wand, wie in der Abbildung gezeigt. VERGEWISSERN SIE SICH, DASS DAS INSTRUMENT NICHT KIPPEN ODER WEGRUTSCHEN KANN! C Die vorderen Beine montieren. Beine mit jeweils sechs 5 x 20 mm Schrauben 1 (Kreuzschlitzschraubendreher verwenden!) gut am Clavinova fest, wie in der Abbildung gezeigt. Ziehen Sie die Schrauben fest an. V Das hintere Bein mit dem Pedalkasten montieren. Bevor Sie das hintere Bein mit dem Pedalkasten anbringen, schließen Sie die 3 aus dem hinteren Bein ragenden Stekker an die entsprechenden Buchsen der Haupteinheit an. Die Stecker müssen mit dem hervorstehenden Clip zur Rückseite der Haupteinheit weisend in die Buchsen gesteckt werden. Schrauben Sie das hintere Bein danach mit sechs 5 x 20 mm Schrauben 1 und die Pedalstrebe mit den fünf 4 x 20 mm Rundkopfschrauben 2 gut fest. WICHTIG • Vergewissern Sie sich nach Zusammenbau und Aufstellung des Clavinova noch einmal davon, daß alle Schrauben fest angezogen sind. • Wenn der Ständer schief steht, komische Geräusch erzeugt oder sich beim Spielen wackelig anfühlt, prüfen Sie gemäß den unter “Zusammenbau und Aufstellung” gegebenen Anweisungen, ob der Ständer richtig zusammengebaut wurde, und ziehen dabei die einzelnen Schrauben noch einmal nach. Montage REMARQUES • Nous ne vous conseillons pas d’essayer d’assembler le Clavinova seul. Toutefois, ce travail peut être facilement exécuté par deux personnes. • N’utilisez que les vis fournies ou des vis ayant exactement les mêmes dimensions. L’utilisation de vis de dimensions incorrectes pourrait endommager l’instrument. Z Ouvrir le carton et retirer toutes les pièces Montaje NOTAS • No le recomendamos que intente montar la Clavinova usted solo. El trabajo puede ser realizado fácilmente entre dos personas. • Utilice sólo los tornillos suministrados o reemplazos del exacto tamaño especificado. El empleo de tornillos de un tamaño erróneo puede dañar el instrumento. Z Abra la caja y extraiga todas las partes. Les pièces indiquées sur l’illustration devraient toutes se trouver dans le carton. Vérifier qu’il n’en manque aucune. Al abrir la caja, encontrará las partes que se muestran en la ilustración de arriba. Asegúrese de que no falta ninguna de las partes requeridas. X Appuyez le clavier contre un X Incline con cuidado la unidad mur en faisant très attention principal contra una pared. Pour faciliter la pose des pieds, placez une couverture épaisse, ou un matériau similaire, sur le plancher à proximité d’un mur. Fermez le cache-clavier et placez le bord avant (bord côté clavier) du Clavinova sur la couverture et appuyez ensuite le Clavinova contre le mur de la manière illustrée. ASSUREZVOUS QU’IL NE PEUT PAS TOMBER. Para facilitar la instalación de las patas, coloque una manta blanda o un material semejante sobre el piso cerca de una pared, cierre la cubierta del teclado de la Clavinova, coloque el panel frontal de la Clavinova (el lado con el teclado) sobre la manta e incline con cuidado la unidad contra la pared, ASEGURANDOSE DE QUE NO PUEDA CAERSE, como se muestra en la ilustración. C Posez les pieds avant C Instale las patas delanteras. Fixez chacun des deux pieds avant à l’aide de six vis de 5 x 20 mm 1 (utilisez un tournevis cruciforme “+”) comme illustré. Vérifiez que les vis sont serrées à fond. V Fixez le pied arrière et le pédalier Avant de fixer le pied arrière et le pédalier, branchez les 3 connecteurs sortant du pied arrière aux prises correspondantes du clavier, en veillant à ce que les connecteurs soient branchés avec la languette dirigée vers l’arrière du clavier. Fixez ensuite le pied arrière à l’aide de six vis de 5 x 20 mm 1 et la ferrure du pédalier à l’aide de cinq vis à tête ronde de 4 x 20 mm 2. IMPORTANT • Après avoir assemblé le Clavinova, vérifiez une fois de plus que toutes les vis sont bien serrées. • Si le support du clavier penche d’un côté, fait du bruit ou semble instable lorsque vous utilisez l’instrument, vérifiez de nouveau et resserrez toutes les vis en suivant les instructions d’assemblage données cidessus. ii Instale con seguridad las dos patas delanteras usando seis tornillos de 5 x 20 mm 1 en cada una (emplee un destornillador de cabeza en cruz), como se muestra en la ilustración. Asegúrese de que los tornillos se aprietan bien. V Instale la pata trasera y el conjunto de la caja de pedales. Antes de instalar la pata trasera y el conjunto de la caja de pedales, inserte las 3 clavijas que salen de la pata trasera en los enchufes correspondientes de la unidad principal, asegurándose de que los conectores quedan insertados con el retenedor que sobresale encarado a la parte posterior de la unidad principal. Entonces, instale con seguridad la pata trasera con los seis tornillos de 5 x 20 mm 1, y la ménsula de pedales con los cinco tornillos de cabeza redonda de 4 x 20 mm 2. IMPORTANTE • Después de montar la Clavinova, compruebe otra vez para asegurarse de que todos los tornillos se han apretado bien. • Si el soporte se inclina hacia un lado, hace ruidos anormales, o parece inestable durante la utilización, compruebe y apriete todos los tornillos mientras sigue las instrucciones de montaje de arriba. ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ iii MIDI Data Format/ MIDI-Datenformat/ Format des If you’re already very familiar with MIDI, or are using a computer to control your music hardware with computer-generated MIDI messages, the data provided in this section can help you to control the Clavinova. Si vous vous êtes déjà familiarisés avec l’interface MIDI, ou si vous utilisez un ordinateur pour commander votre matériel de musique au moyen de messages MIDI générés par ordinateur, les données suivantes vous aideront à commander le Clavinova. Falls Sie bereits mit MIDI vertraut sind oder einen Computer zur Hardware-Steuerung einsetzen, werden Ihnen die nachfolgend aufgeführten Daten bei der Steuerung des Clavinovas wahrscheinlich hilfreich sein. Si ya está muy familiarizado con MIDI o si está usando una computadora para controlar su música con mensajes MIDI generados por computadora, los datos proporcionados en esta sección le ayudarán a controlar la Clavinova. 1. NOTE ON/OFF [9nH] [kkH] [vvH] 9nH= Note on/off event (n= MIDI channel number) kkH= Note number (Transmission: 0FH~72H= D#-1~F#7, Reception= 15H~6CH: A-1~C7) vvH= Velocity (Note on= 01H~7FH, Note off= 00H) [8nH] [kkH] [vvH] 8nH= Note off event (n= MIDI channel number) kkH= Note number (Transmission: 0FH~72H= D#-1~F#7, Reception= 15H~6CH: A-1~C7) vvH= Velocity (Note off= 00H~7FH) * 8nH (note off) is receive only. 9nH (vvH=00H) used for transmission. 2. CONTROL CHANGE [BnH] [ccH] [vvH] BnH= Control event (n= MIDI channel number) ccH= Control number vvH= Control value • Modulation (Vibrato) [BnH] [01H] [vvH] n= MIDI channel number vvH= Modulation 00H~0FH: Off : AM also off. 10H~1FH: 1 : Voice default AM when greater than 10H 20H~2FH: 2 30H~3FH: 3 40H~4FH: 4 50H~5FH: 5 60H~6FH: 6 70H~7FH: 7 * LFO speed fixed for each voice • Volume [BnH] [07H] [vvH] n= MIDI channel number vvH= Volume (00H~7FH) 00H: -∞ 6FH: -3dB 7FH: ±0dB • Pan [BnH] [0AH] [vvH] n= MIDI channel number vvH= Pan (00H~7FH) 00H~17H: Left 6 18H~1FH: Left 5 20H~27H: Left 4 28H~2FH: Left 3 30H~37H: Left 2 38H~3FH: Left 1 40H~47H: Center 48H: Voice default Pan 49H: Scaling Pan (Standard) (receive only) 4AH: Scaling Pan (Wide) (receive only) 4BH: Scaling Pan (Narrow L) (receive only) 4CH: Scaling Pan (Narrow C) (receive only) 4DH: Scaling Pan (Narrow R) (receive only) 4EH: Scaling Pan (Half L) (receive only) 4FH: Scaling Pan (Half R) (receive only) 50H~57H: Right 1 58H~5FH: Right 2 60H~67H: Right 3 68H~6FH: Right 4 70H~77H: Right 5 78H~7FH: Right 6 • Expression [BnH] [0BH] [vvH] n= MIDI channel number vvH= Expression (00H~7FH) 00H: -∞ 6FH: -3dB 7FH= ±0dB • Damper pedal [BnH] [40H] [vvH] n= MIDI channel number vvH= Control value (00H~7FH) 8 levels max. • Sostenuto pedal [BnH] [42H] [vvH] n= MIDI channel number vvH= Control value (00H~7FH) 00H~3FH: Off 40H~7FH: On • Soft pedal [BnH] [43H] [vvH] n= MIDI channel number vvH= Control value (00H~7FH) 8 levels max. • Portamento control [BnH] [54H] [vvH] n= MIDI channel number vvH= Control value (00H~7FH) 15H~6CH: Key Number • Reverb depth [BnH] [5BH] [vvH] n= MIDI channel number vvH= Reverb Depth (00H~7FH) Individually adjustable for each channel. • Chorus depth [BnH] [5DH] [vvH] n= MIDI channel number vvH= Reverb Depth (00H~7FH) Individually adjustable for each channel. 3. MODE MESSAGES (receive only) [BnH] [ccH] [vvH] BnH= Control event (n= MIDI channel number) ccH= Mode message number vvH= Mode message value • All sound off [BnH] [78H] [00H] n= MIDI channel number • Reset all controllers [BnH] [79H] [00H] n= MIDI channel number • Local Control ON/OFF [BnH] [7AH] [vvH] n= MIDI channel number vvH= 00H: Off 7FH: On • All notes OFF [BnH] [7BH] [00H] n= MIDI channel number • OMNI OFF/All notes OFF [BnH] [7CH] [00H] n= MIDI channel number • OMNI ON/All notes OFF [BnH] [7DH] [00H] n= MIDI channel number ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ s donées MIDI/Formato de datos MIDI 4. REGISTERED/NON-REGISTERED PARAMETER NUMBER • Data entry [BnH] [06H] [mmH] [BnH] [26H] [llH] n= MIDI channel number mm/ll=RPN • Data inc [BnH] [60H] [xxH] n= MIDI channel number xx= Dummy, RPN • Data dec [BnH] [61H] [xxH] n= MIDI channel number xx= Dummy, RPN • Non-registered parameter number [BnH] [62H] [llH] [BnH] [63H] [mmH] n= MIDI channel number * No parameter is received, but the data is recognized because of RPN reception. • Registered parameter number [BnH] [64H] [llH] [BnH] [65H] [mmH] n= MIDI channel number llH= 00H, mmH= 00H: Pitch bend range llH= 01H, mmH= 00H: Fine tune llH= 02H, mmH= 00H: Coarse tune llH= 7FH, mmH= 7FH: RPN Reset 5. PROGRAM CHANGE [CnH] [ppH] CnH= Program change event (n= MIDI channel number) ppH= Program number Panel Voices dd VOICE 00H PIANO 01H CLAVINOVA TONE 02H E. PIANO 03H HARPSICHORD 04H VIBES 05H GUITAR 06H STRINGS 07H ORGAN 08H CHOIR 09H UPRIGHT BASS 0AH ELEC BASS 0BH DRUMS Voices 13 — 60 dd VOICE 0CH BRASS 0DH POP BRASS 0EH TRUMPET 0FH MUTE TRUMPET 10H HORN 11H SAX 12H 13H 14H 15H 16H 17H 18H 19H 1AH 1BH 1CH 1DH 1EH 1FH 20H 21H 22H 23H 24H 25H 26H 27H 28H 29H 2AH 2BH 2CH 2DH 2EH 2FH 30H 31H 32H 33H 34H 35H 36H 37H 38H 39H 3AH 3BH SAX SOFT CLARINET OBOE FLUTE ACCORDION HARMONICA STRINGS SOFT VIOLIN VIOLIN HARD FULL ORGAN JAZZ ORGAN 1 SYNTH BRASS SYNTH WOOD SYNTH STRINGS SYNTH CHOIR PIANO BRIGHT PIANO SOFT E. PIANO DX SYNTH CRYSTAL CELESTA MARIMBA FOLK GUITAR JAZZ GUITAR 1 JAZZ GUITAR 2 ROCK GUITAR 1 ROCK GUITAR 2 MUTE GUITAR BANJO PIZZICATO HARP U. BASS SOFT E. BASS SOFT E. BASS HEAVY SYNTH BASS TIMPANI & ORCH. HIT BASSOON CHAMBER STRINGS JAZZ ORGAN 2 ROCK GUITAR 3 COSMIC 1 COSMIC 2 COSMIC 3 6. PITCH BENDER [EnH] [llH] [mmH] EnH= Bender event (n= MIDI channel number) llH= Least significant byte mmH= Most significant byte * Caution: Each voice is set to its own bend range when the power is turned on. The bend range is set to 300 cents when the CVP/DOC Multi-Timbre mode is engaged, and to 200 cents when the GM Multi-Timbre mode is engaged. RPN data can be used to set the range in 100-cent (semitone) increments. iv 7. SYSTEM REALTIME MESSAGES [rrH] F8H: FAH: FCH: FEH: Timing clock Start Stop Active sensing Data Transmission Reception F8H Transmitted every Received as 96-clock 96 clocks tempo timing when MIDI clock is set to External FAH Rhythm start Rhythm start FCH Rhythm stop Rhythm stop FEH Transmitted every All notes are turned 200 milliseconds off if no data is received for more than 400 milliseconds * Caution: If an overrun framing error occurs the Damper, Sostenuto, and Soft effects for all channels are turned off and an All Note Off occurs. 8. SYSTEM EXCLUSIVE MESSAGES • YAMAHA MIDI format [F0H] [43H] [xnH] [ffH] ..... [F7H] 43H= YAMAHA ID xnH= Substatus + MIDI channel number ffH= Format number * n specifies the receive channel regardless of whether omni is on or off. x 0 2 2 ff 7CH 7C H 7DH Information Panel data receive Panel data bulk dump request Model ID data bulk dump request Panel Data Send Format F0H, 43H, 0xH, 7CH, 00H, 22H (x: channel number, data length= Panel data+0cH) 53H, 4BH, 20 H, 20H (SK) 43H, 56H, 50H, 27H, 39H, 34H (CVP’94) 3xH, 3yH (Version x, y) [Panel Data] [Check Sum (1byte)]= 0(53H+4BH+20H+... ...+Data end) F7H [Panel Data Contents] (1) ABC ON/OFF (2) SSP ON/OFF (3) SSP NO. (4) MANUAL VOICE (5) MANUAL VOLUME (6) RHYTHM NO. (7) RHYTHM VARIATION (8) TEMPO (Absolute value LSB) (9) TEMPO (Absolute value MSB) (10) RHYTHM VOLUME (11) CHORD 1 VOLUME (12) CHORD 2 VOLUME (13) BASS VOLUME ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ v MIDI Data Format/ MIDI-Datenformat/ Format des donées MIDI/Formato de datos MIDI (14) (15) (16) (17) (18) (19) (20) (21) (22) (23) (24) (25) (26) (27) SPLIT POINT DUAL/SPLIT MODE DUAL/SPLIT VOICE DUAL/SPLIT BALANCE REVERB REVERB DEPTH LEFT PEDAL FUNCTION Reserved INTRO TOUCH SESITIVITY PITCH BEND RANGE CHORUS SOUNDBOARD EFFECT DEPTH DRUMS VOICE in the GM MultiTimbre Mode Individual Key Tuning Data Bulk Dump Format F0H, 43H, 73H 36H (Product ID: CVP-89) 06H (Bulk ID) 00H (Bulk No.) 00H, 00H, 0bH, 00H (Data Length= wxyH 88*2 bytes) [BULK DATA] (low (A-1), high (A-1) ...low (C7), high (C7)) [CHECK SUM (1byte)]= 0-sum (BULK DATA) Name Data Send Format F0H, 43H, 0xH, 7DH, 00H, 10H (Data Length= 10H byte) 53H, 4BH, 20H, 20H (SK) 43H, 56H, 50H, 27H, 39H, 34H (CVP’94) 3xH, 3yH, 20H, 20H, 20H, 20H (Version x,y) [CHECK SUM (1byte)]= 0-(53H+4BH+20H+... ...+20H) F7H • Special Messages [F0H] [43H] [73H] [yyH] [11H] [0nH] [ccH] [vvH] [F7H] 43H= YAMAHA ID 73H= CLAVINOVA ID yyH= Product ID (CVP-89= 36H) 11H= Clavinova Special Control Code 0nH= Control MIDI Change (n= special control change number) ccH= Control number ddH= Control value cc Control 08H DUAL/SPLIT Balance 10H 11H 12H 13H • Clavinova MIDI Format [F0H] [43H] [73H] [yyH] [xxH] [F7H] 43H= YAMAHA ID 73H= CLAVINOVA ID yyH= Product ID (CVP-89= 36H) xxH= Substatus xxH 02H 03H 06H 13H 14H 15H 18H Information Internal MIDI clock External MIDI clock Receive bulk data below Multi-timbre mode off DOC voice multi-timbre mode on CVP Multi-timbre mode on DOC voice multi-timbre mode individual track reverb depth on 61H MIDI FA Cancel On 62H MIDI FA Cancel Off 7nH All Note Off, Receive Channel = n+1, Omni off * When nn = 2, 3, 13, 14, 15, 18, or 7C, Clavinova common ID (01H) is recognized as well as 34H. * All Control Change values are reset when [13H], [14H] or [15H] is received. All voices and other parameters are also reset when [14H] or [15H] is received in order to ensure the same initial settings. 14H 15H 19H 1AH 1BH 21H 22H 30H 3DH 59H Value [dd] 00H= lower MAX 7FH= upper MAX ABC Mode 00H= Off 02H= ABC Single/ Fingered 03H= Conventional Full-Keyboard ABC 04H= Full-Keyboard ABC Rhythm Variation 00H= Off 01H= Variation number Fill In Switch 00H= Fill to normal Event Off event 01H= Fill to normal On event 02H= Fill to variation On event 03H= Fill to variation Off event Intro/Ending 00H= Intro mode Off Switch Event 01H= Intro mode On 02H= Ending mode On 03H= Fill to normal mode On 04H= Fill to variation mode On Split [ddH]= Split key number (the highest note in the left-hand keyboard range) Rhythm Number [ddH]= Rhythm number Volume [ddH]= Volume value n= 2 (BASS) 4 (CHORD 1) 5 (CHORD 2) Rhythm Volume [ddH]= Volume value Metronome mode 00H: Off (receive only) 01H: On Solo Styleplay 00~17H= Style Number number Solo Styleplay 00H~3FH= Off 40H~7FH= On Drums Parameter Change See Drum Parameter Expanded Format, below Soundboard Effect Depth [ddH]= Volume value Reverb 00H= Off 01H= Room 02H= Hall 1 03H= Hall 2 04H= Cosmic 5AH Dual/Split mode 00H= Off 01H= Dual 02H= Split (upper damper) 03H= Split (lower damper) 04H= Split (upper/lower damper) 05H= Split & Lower Voice Oct Up (upper damper) 06H= Split & Lower Voice Oct Up (lower damper) 07H= SPLIT & Lower Voice Oct Up (upper/ lower damper) 5CH Dual/Split Voice [ddH]= Dual/Split voice number 5DH Pedal Function [ddH]= Function number * When cc = 59 (Reverb), SK common ID (01H) is recognized in addition to xxH. Drum Parameter Expanded Format [F0H] [43H] [73H] [xxH] [11H] [0nH] [30H] [xxH] .....[F7H] xxH: Product ID (CVP-89= 36H) Common product ID also recognized (pattern editor transmits both). 0x30: /* Drum Parameter */ *2 Expanded Format * This resets all parameters when a different drum kit is selected. Expands Special Message 30. • Effect Level [F0H] [43H] [73H] [xxH] [11H] [0nH] [30H] [43H] [knH] [enH] [slH] [F7H] 11H: Clavinova special control code 0nH: MIDI Channel Number * Received only on channel 15 (0EH) in the CVP’94, affecting all tracks. Received only on channel 10 (09H) in the GM mode, affecting all tracks. 30H: Drums Parameter Change 43H: Effect Send Level knH: Key Number * Also included in the panel key code in the Clavinova DOC Voice mode (because conversion is not possible). Included in the GM key code in the GM mode. * When kn = 01 the en for all keys is set to the default. When kn = 02 the en for all keys is set to s1. enH: Effect Number en= 5B: Reverb Depth slH: Send Level * This data applies a ± 40H offset to the CH depth parameter of each channel of ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ vi each instrument. Example [F0H] [43H] [73H] [xxH] [11H] [0eH] [30H] [43H] [knH] [enH] [slH] [F7H] [knH] [enH] [slH] [36H] [5bH] [10H]: F#0 Brush Roll reverb depth set to -30H. [36H] [5bH] [20H] [5dH] [60H]: F#0 Brush Roll reverb depth set to -20H [01H] [5bH] [xxH]: Reverb depth for all keys set to default (±0). [02H] [5bH] [20H]: Reverb depth for all keys set to -20H. • Pan Set Switching [F0H] [43H] [73H] [xxH] [11H] [0nH] [30H] [47H] [knH] [pnH] [F7H] 11H: Clavinova special control code 0nH: MIDI Channel Number * Received only on channel 15 (0EH) in the CVP’94, affecting all tracks. Received only on channel 10 (09H) in the GM mode, affecting all tracks. 30H: Drums Parameter Change 47H: Panpot knH: Key Number * Also included in the panel key code in the Common Voice mode (because conversion is not possible). Included in the GM key code in the GM mode. * When kn = 01 pan is set to the value specified in pn. When kn = 02 the pan for all keys is set to the pin point specified in pn. pnH: Pan * When kn = 01 pan is set to the value specified in pn. pn= 00: Normal DOC Setting = 01: Narrow DOC left = 02: Narrow DOC center = 03: Narrow DOC right = 04: Normal GM Setting = 05: Narrow GM left = 06: Narrow GM center = 07: Narrow GM right * Normal pan value used when kn is other than 01. However, values 48…4F are also set to pin-point center. • Drum Kit Assign [F0H] [43H] [73H] [xxH] [11H] [0nH] [30H] [40H] [knH] [skH] [F7H] 11H: Clavinova special control code 0nH: MIDI Channel Number * Received only on channel 15 (0EH) in the CVP’94, affecting channel 15 (0EH) only. Received only on channel 10 (09H) in the GM mode, affecting channel 10 (09H) only. 30H: Drums Parameter Change 40H: Instrument Assign knH: Key Number * Also included in the panel key code in the DOC Voice mode (because conversion is not possible). Included in the GM key code in the GM mode. skH: Source Kit Number • Absolute Tempo [F0H] [43H] [73H] [yyH] [11H] [1nH] [ccH] [ddH] [F7H] 43H= YAMAHA ID 73H= CLAVINOVA ID yyH= Product ID (CVP-89= 36H) 11H= Clavinova special control code 1nH= Control MIDI Change (Transmit: n = Control Change number) (Receive: any channel OK) cc= Absolute tempo low byte dd= Absolute tempo high byte Tempo= dd*128+ccH • Master Volume 7FH= Universal Real Time 7FH= ID of target device 04H 01H llH= Ignored mmH= Volume data • Beat, Tempo LED ON/OFF [F0H] [43H] [73H] [yyH] [11H] [4FH] [ccH] [ddH] [F7H] 43H= YAMAHA ID 73H= CLAVINOVA ID yyH= Product ID (CVP-89= 36H, or common 01H) 11H= Clavinova special control code 4FH= Control MIDI Change ccH= 00H: Beat lamp on/off 01H: Tempo lamp on/off ddH= 00H: On 7FH: Off 9. OTHER SYSTEM EXCLUSIVE MESSAGES • General MIDI Mode On [F0H] [7EH] [7FH] [09H] [xxH] [F7H] 7EH= Universal Non-Real Time 7FH= ID of target device 09H= Sub-ID #1 General MIDI Message xxH= Substatus xxH Information 01H General MIDI On 02H General MIDI Off * All sound off and all parameters are reset to their default values when [01H] is received. • Master Tuning [F0H] [43H] [1nH] [27H] [30H] [00H] [00H] [mmH] [llH] [ccH] [F7H] 43H= YAMAHA ID 1nH= Ignored 27H 30H 00H 00H mmH= (mm<<4)+ll; 1step=1cent llH= mm=08H, ll=00H; ±0cent ccH= Ignored • All MIDI data available for general use are given above. ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ Voice List/Stimmenverzeichnis/Liste des voix vii Panel Voices (1—12)/Voices 13—60 Voice MIDI DOC mode MIDI No. Program No. Program No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 12 68 50 14 16 24 08 76 42 28 30 126 00 73 01 40 02 03 77 04 05 06 07 41 74 09 75 10 11 20 44 45 46 51 48 13 22 15 17 53 25 72 26 69 70 55 56 57 71 29 78 31 23 80 81 82 88 89 90 91 Name Pitch Bend Range (Cent) Chorus On/Off Piano Clavinova Tone E. Piano Harpsichord Vibes Guitar Strings Organ Choir Upright Bass Elec Bass Drums Brass Pop Brass Trumpet Mute Trumpet Horn Sax Sax Soft Clarinet Oboe Flute Accordion Harmonica Strings Soft Violin Violin Hard Full Organ Jazz Organ 1 Synth Brass Synth Wood Synth Strings Synth Choir Piano Bright Piano Soft E. Piano DX Synth Crystal Celesta Marimba Folk Guitar Jazz Guitar 1 Jazz Guitar 2 Rock Guitar 1 Rock Guitar 2 Mute Guitar Banjo Pizzicato Harp U. Bass Soft E. Bass Soft E. Bass Heavy Synth Bass Timpani & Orch. Hit Bassoon Chamber Strings Jazz Organ 2 Rock Guitar 3 Cosmic 1 Cosmic 2 Cosmic 3 100 100 100 100 100 200 100 100 100 200 200 300 200 200 200 200 200 200 200 200 200 200 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 200 200 100 100 100 100 100 200 100 100 200 200 200 200 200 200 200 200 200 200 200 200 200 300 200 100 100 200 200 200 200 OFF ON OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF ON ON ON ON ON OFF OFF ON ON OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF ON OFF ON OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF ON ON ON OFF * Available only in DOC mode MIDI reception Flute 2: program number 79 Orch. Hit: program number 92 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ /Lista de voces viii GM Mode Voice MIDI No. Program No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 Name Piano 00 Acoustic Grand Piano 01 Bright Acoustic Piano 02 Electric Grand Piano 03 Honky-tonk Piano 04 Electric Piano 1 05 Electric Piano 2 06 Harpsichord 07 Clavi Chromatic Percussion 08 Celesta 09 Glockenspiel 10 Music Box 11 Vibraphone 12 Marimba 13 Xylophone 14 Tubular Bells 15 Dulcimer Organ 16 Drawbar Organ 17 Percussive Organ 18 Rock Organ 19 Church Organ 20 Reed Organ 21 Accordion 22 Harmonica 23 Tango Accordion Guitar 24 Acoustic Guitar (nylon) 25 Acoustic Guitar (steel) 26 Electric Guitar (jazz) 27 Electric Guitar (clean) 28 Electric Guitar (muted) 29 Overdriven Guitar 30 Distortion Guitar 31 Guitar Harmonics Bass 32 Acoustic Bass 33 Electric Bass (finger) 34 Electric Bass (pick) 35 Fretless Bass 36 Slap Bass 1 37 Slap Bass 2 38 Synth Bass 1 39 Synth Bass 2 Strings 40 Violin 41 Viola 42 Cello 43 Contrabass 44 Tremolo Strings 45 Pizzicato Strings 46 Orchestral Harp 47 Timpani Voice MIDI No. Program No. 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 Name Ensemble Strings Ensemble 1 Strings Ensemble 2 Synth Strings 1 Synth Strings 2 Choir Aahs Voice Oohs Synth Voice Orchestra Hit Brass Trumpet Trombone Tuba Muted Trumpet French Horn Brass Section Synth Brass 1 Synth Brass 2 Reed Soprano Sax Alto Sax Tenor Sax Baritone Sax Oboe English Horn Bassoon Clarinet Pipe Piccolo Flute Recorder Pan Flute Blown Bottle Shakuhachi Whistle Ocarina Synth Lead Lead 1 (square) Lead 2 (sawtooth) Lead 3 (calliope) Lead 4 (chiff) Lead 5 (charang) Lead 6 (voice) Lead 7 (fifth) Lead 8 (bass+Lead ) Voice MIDI No. Program No. 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 97 98 99 100 101 102 103 104 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 121 122 123 124 125 126 127 128 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 127 Name Synth Pad Pad 1 (new age) Pad 2 (warm) Pad 3 (polysynth) Pad 4 (choir) Pad 5 (bowed) Pad 6 (metallic) Pad 7 (halo) Pad 8 (sweep) Synth Effects FX 1 (rain) FX 2 (soundtrack) FX 3 (crystal) FX 4 (atmosphere) FX 5 (brightness) FX 6 (goblins)2 FX 7 (echoes) FX 8 (sci-fi) Ethnic Sitar Banjo Shamisen Koto Kalimba Bagpipe Fiddle Shanai Percussive Tinkle Bell Agogo Steel Drums Woodblock Taiko Drum Melodic Tom Synth Drum Reverse Cymbal Sound Effects Guitar Fret Noise Breath Noise Seashore Bird Tweet Telephone Ring Helicopter Applause Gunshot ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ Percussion Kit List/Verzeichnis der Schlagzeug- und Percussion- ix Keyboard Percussion (Voice No. 12: Drums) No. 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 Key A1 A#1 B1 C2 C#2 D2 D#2 E2 F2 F#2 G2 G#2 A2 A#2 B2 C3 C#3 D3 D#3 E3 F3 F#3 G3 G#3 A3 A#3 B3 C4 C#4 D4 D#4 E4 F4 F#4 G4 G#4 A4 A#4 B4 C5 C#5 D5 D#5 E5 F5 F#5 G5 G#5 A5 A#5 B5 C6 C#6 D6 D#6 E6 F6 F#6 G6 G#6 A6 A#6 Normal Kit Cymbal Mute — — — — — — — — Brush Roll — Hi-Hat Closed Heavy — Crash Cymbal Light Bass Drum Light Snare Drum+Rim Heavy Ride Cymbal Cup Snare Drum + Rim Light — — Bass Drum Normal Rim Shot Snare Drum Heavy Brush Shot Snare Drum Light Hi-Hat Pedal Snare Drum Echo Tom 4 Hi-Hat Closed Normal Tom 3 Hi-Hat Open Tom 2 Tom 1 Ride Cymbal Normal Electric Tom 3 Crash Cymbal Normal Electric Tom 2 — Electric Tom 1 Conga Low Cabasa Conga High Metronome Bongo High Timbale Low Claves Timbale High Castanets Cuica Low Cowbell Cuica High Hand Clap Agogo Low — Agogo High Bongo Low — Tambourine — Triangle Closed — Triangle Open • Cymbals can be muted by pressing the A1 key. • Hi-Hat Open (D#4) is muted by Hi-Hat Closed Heavy (G#2), Hi-Hat Closed Normal (C#4) and HiHat Pedal (A#3). • Brush Roll (F#2) is muted by Brush Shot (G#3). • Triangle Open (A#6) is muted by Triangle Closed (G#6). • Beckenklänge können durch Drücken der Taste A1 gedämpft werden. • HI-HAT OPEN (D#4) wird durch HI-HAT CLOSED HEAVY (G#2), HI-HAT CLOSED NORMAL (C#4) und HI-HAT PEDAL (A#3) gedämpft. • BRUSH ROLL (F#2) wird durch BRUSH SHOT (G#3) gedämpft. • TRIANGLE OPEN (A#6) wird durch TRIANGLE CLOSED (G#6) gedämpft. Processed Kit Cymbal Mute Bell Tree Storm/Thunder Applause Hand Cymbal Scratch Space Hit Down Zap Up Zap Noise Roll Hi-Q Analog Hi-Hat Voice Huh Chinese Cymbal Bass Drum Analog Deep Snare Drum Low Rim Shot Ride Cymbal Cup Snare Drum High Rim Shot Voice Ha! Voice Ao! Bass Drum Analog Tight Rim Shot Processed Snare Drum Mix Noise Shot Snare Drum Analog Hi-Hat Pedal Snare Drum Techno Fix Pitch Electric Tom 4 Hi-Hat Closed Fix Pitch Electric Tom 3 Hi-Hat Open Fix Pitch Electric Tom 2 Fix Pitch Electric Tom 1 Ride Cymbal Sweep Electric Tom 3 Crash Cymbal Sweep Electric Tom 2 Crash Cymbal Reverse Sweep Electric Tom 1 Synth Conga Low Synth Cabasa Synth Conga High Metronome Synth Bongo High Timbale Low Synth Claves Timbale High Castanets Synth Cuica Low Cowbell Synth Cuica High Analog Hand Clap Synth Agogo Low Finger Snap Synth Agogo High Synth Bongo Low — Synth Tambourine — Triangle Closed — Triangle Open • Les cymbales peuvent être assourdies en appuyant sur la touche A1. • HI-HAT OPEN (D#4) est assourdi par HI-HAT CLOSED HEAVY (G#2), HI-HAT CLOSED NORMAL (C#4) et HI-HAT PEDAL (A#3). • BRUSH ROLL (F#2) est assourdi par BRUSH SHOT (G#3). • TRIANGLE OPEN (A#6) est assourdi par TRIANGLE CLOSED (G#6). DOC/GM Mode DOC Kit No. 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 Key A-1 A#-1 B-1 C0 C#0 D0 D#0 E0 F0 F#0 G0 G#0 A0 A#0 B0 C1 C#1 D1 D#1 E1 F1 F#1 G1 G#1 A1 A#1 B1 C2 C#2 D2 D#2 E2 F2 F#2 G2 G#2 A2 A#2 B2 C3 C#3 D3 D#3 E3 F3 F#3 G3 G#3 A3 A#3 B3 C4 C#4 D4 D#4 E4 F4 F#4 G4 G#4 A4 A#4 B4 C5 C#5 D5 D#5 E5 Cymbal Mute — — — — — — — — Brush Roll — HI-HAT Closed Heavey — Crash Cymbal Light BD Light SD Rim Heavey Ride Cymbal Cup SD Rim Light — — BD Normal Rim Shot SD Heavy Brush Shot SD Light HI-HAT Pedal SD Echo Tom 4 HI-HAT Closed Normal Tom 3 HI-HAT Open Tom 2 Tom 1 Ride Cymbal Normal E. Tom 3 Crash Cymbal Normal E. Tom 2 — E. Tom 1 Conga Lo Cabasa Conga Hi Metronome Bongo Hi Timbale Lo Claves Timbale Hi Castanets Cuica Lo Cowbell Cuica Hi Hand Clap Agogo Lo — Agogo Hi Bongo Lo — Tambourine — Triangle Closed — Triangle Open — — — — — — GM Kit 129: Standard Kit — — — Square Click Brush Tap Brush Swirl Lo Brush Slap Brush Swirl Hi SD Roll Castanets SD Lo Sticks BD Lo Open Rim Shot BD Mid BD Hi Closed Rim Shot SD Mid Hand Clap SD Hi Floor Tom Lo Hi-Hat Closed Floor Tom Hi Hi-Hat Pedal Tom Lo Hi-Hat Open Tom Lo Mid Tom Hi Mid Crash Cymbal Tom Hi Ride Cymbal 1 Chinese Cymbal Ride Cymbal Cup Tambourine Splash Cymbal Cowbell Crash Cymbal 2 Vibraslap Ride Cymbal 2 Bongo Hi Bongo Lo Conga Hi Mute Conga Hi Open Conga Lo Timbale Hi Timbale Lo Agogo Hi Agogo Lo Cabasa Maracas Samba Whistle Hi Samba Whistle Lo Guiro Short Guiro Long Claves Wood Block Hi Wood Block Lo Cuica Hi (Mute) Cuica Lo (Open) Triangle Mute Triangle Open Shaker Jingle Bell Bell Tree One Two Three Four • Los platillos podrán silenciarse presionando la tecla A1. • HI-HAT OPEN (D#4) se silencian con HI-HAT CLOSED HEAVY (G#2), HI-HAT CLOSED NORMAL (C#4) y HI-HAT PEDAL (A#3). • BRUSH ROLL (F#2) se silencia con BRUSH SHOT (G#3). • TRIANGLE OPEN (A#6) se silencia con TRIANGLE CLOSED (G#6). ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ Sets/Liste des kits de percussion/Lista de juegos de percusión 130: Room Kit — — — <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— Room SD Lo <—— Room BD Lo <—— Room BD Mid Room BD Hi <—— Room SD Mid <—— Room SD Hi Room Tom 1 (Lo) <—— Room Tom 2 <—— Room Tom 3 <—— Room Tom 4 Room Tom 5 <—— Room Tom 6 (Hi) <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— — — — — 131: Rock Kit — — — <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— Rock SD Lo <—— Rock BD Lo <—— Rock BD Mid Rock BD Hi <—— Rock SD Mid <—— Rock SD Hi Rock Tom 1 (Lo) <—— Rock Tom 2 <—— Rock Tom 3 <—— Rock Tom 4 Rock Tom 5 <—— Rock Tom 6 (Hi) <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— — — — — 132: Electronic Kit — — — <—— <—— <—— <—— Reverse Cymbal <—— Hi-Q Gated SD Lo <—— Gated BD Lo <—— Gated BD Mid Gated BD Hi <—— Gated SD Mid <—— Gated SD Hi E. Tom 1 (Lo) <—— E. Tom 2 <—— E. Tom 3 <—— E. Tom 4 E. Tom 5 <—— E. Tom 6 (Hi) <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— Scratch Hi Scratch Lo <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— — — — — 133: Analog Kit — — — <—— <—— <—— <—— Reverse Cymbal <—— Hi-Q A. SD Lo <—— A. BD Lo <—— A. BD Mid A. BD Hi A. Closed Rim A. SD Mid <—— A. SD Hi A. Tom 1 (Lo) A. Hi-Hat Closed Hi A. Tom 2 A. Hi-Hat Closed Lo A. Tom 3 A. Hi-Hat Open A. Tom 4 A. Tom 5 A. Cymbal A. Tom 6 (Hi) <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— A. Cowbell <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— A. Conga Hi A. Conga Mid A. Conga Lo <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— A. Maracas <—— <—— <—— <—— A. Claves <—— <—— Scratch Hi Scratch Lo <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— — — — — 134: Jazz Kit — — — <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— Jazz SD Lo <—— Jazz BD Lo <—— Jazz BD Mid Jazz BD Hi <—— Jazz SD Mid <—— Jazz SD Hi Jazz Tom 1 (Lo) Dark Hi-Hat Closed Hi Jazz Tom 2 Dark Hi-Hat Closed Lo Jazz Tom 3 Dark Hi-Hat Open Jazz Tom 4 Jazz Tom 5 <—— Jazz Tom 6 (Hi) <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— — — — — 135: Brush Kit — — — <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— Brush Slap Lo <—— Jazz BD Lo <—— Jazz BD Mid Jazz BD Hi <—— Brush Slap Hi <—— Brush Tap Brush Tom 1 (Lo) Dark Hi-Hat Closed Hi Brush Tom 2 Dark Hi-Hat Closed Lo Brush Tom 3 Dark Hi-Hat Open Brush Tom 4 Brush Tom 5 Brush Ride Cymbal 1 Brush Tom 6 (Hi) Brush Ride Cymbal 2 <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— — — — — x 136: Classic Kit — — — <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— Marching SD Lo <—— Gran Cassa Lo <—— Gran Cassa Mid Gran Cassa Hi <—— Marching SD Mid <—— Marching SD Hi Jazz Tom 1 (Lo) Dark Hi-Hat Closed Hi Jazz Tom 2 Dark Hi-Hat Closed Lo Jazz Tom 3 Dark Hi-Hat Open Jazz Tom 4 Jazz Tom 5 Hand Cymbal Long Lo Jazz Tom 6 (Hi) Hand Cymbal Short Lo <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— Hand Cymbal Long Hi <—— Hand Cymbal Short Hi <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— <—— — — — — * “<——” indicates the content is the same as that of Standard kit. * “<——” zeigt an, daß der Inhalt identisch mit dem Standardset ist. * “<——” indique que le contenu est le même que celui du kit standard. * “<——” indica que el contenido es el mismo que el del juego estándar. ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ xi Specifications/Technische Daten/Spécifications/Especificaciones CVP-89 KEYBOARD 88 KEYS (A-1 — C7) TONE GENERATOR AWM (Advanced Wave Memory) VOICE SELECTORS & CONTROLS PIANO, CLAVINOVA TONE, E. PIANO, HARPSICHORD, VIBES, GUITAR, STRINGS, ORGAN, CHOIR, UPRIGHT BASS, ELEC BASS, DRUMS, VOICE 13 - 60, VOICE ▲/▼, SPLIT (GM 128 voices also available) AUTO BASS CHORD & CONTROLS FULL KEYBOARD, SINGLE/FINGERED, SOLO STYLEPLAY, RHYTHM VOLUME, CHORD 1 VOLUME, CHORD 2 VOLUME, BASS VOLUME STYLE SELECTORS & CONTROLS POP, 16 BEAT, DANCE POP, BOOGIE, SLOW ROCK, SWING, JAZZ BALLAD, BOSSA, RHUMBA, MARCH, COUNTRY, WALTZ, STYLE 13-50, STYLE ▲/▼, DISK STYLE 1/2 START/STOP, SYNCHRO START, INTRO/ENDING, NORMAL/FILL TO NORMAL, VARIATION/ FILL TO VARIATION, TEMPO ▲/▼, TAP, METRONOME, LCD Display, BEAT LED, FILL IN Bar (right/left) DISK STYLE 50 styles (refer to page 26) KEYBOARD PERCUSSION Normal Kit: 44 instruments, Proccesed Kit: 58 instruments (refer to page 8, ix), GM Drum Kit x 8 REVERB ROOM, HALL 1, HALL 2, COSMIC CUSTOM RHYTHM CUSTOM RHYTHM, PROGRAM REGISTRATION REGISTRATION, MEMORY DISK ORCHESTRA SONG/PHRASE NUMBER, RIGHT/1, LEFT/2, ORCH/3-10, RHYTHM, PHRASE REPEAT, GUIDE, LAMP CANCEL, START/STOP, REW, FF, PAUSE, REC, CHORD SEQUENCE, SONG SELECT DISK DRIVE & CONTROLS 3.5" 2DD Micro Floppy Disk Drive. PEDAL CONTROLS RIGHT DAMPER CENTER SOSTENUTO LEFT SOFT (START/STOP, RHYTHM BREAK, PITCH BEND, SOLO STYLEPLAY) OTHER CONTROLS MASTER VOLUME, UTILITY, DEMO, POWER JACKS & CONNECTORS PHONES x 2, AUX OUT R and L/L + R, AUX IN R and L, MIDI IN/OUT/THRU, EXP PEDAL, MIC., MIC. VOL. INPUT & OUTPUT LEVEL/IMPEDANCE AUX OUT: Output Impedance 600 Ω AUX IN: Input Impedance 10 kΩ /Input Sensitivity -10dBm MAIN AMPLIFIERS 100 W (50W x 1) + (25W x 2) SPEAKERS 18 cm (7”) x 1, 13 cm (5-1/8”) x 2, 2.5 cm (1”) x 2, 8 cm (3-1/8”) x 2 DIMENSIONS Music stand down 1434 mm x 665.6 mm x 844.8 mm (56-1/2” x 26-1/4” x 33-1/4”) Music stand up 1434 mm x 665.6 mm x 1014.8 mm (56-1/2” x 26-1/4” x 40”) (W x D x H) WEIGHT 83 kg (183 lbs.) * * * * Specifications subject to change without notice. Änderungen ohne Vorankündigung vorbehalten. Sous toute réserve de modification des caractéristiques sans préavis. Especificaciones sujetas a cambios sin previo aviso. ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ Fingering Chart/Akkordliste/Tablature/Gráfica de digitado xii * All fingerings shown are simple root-position types. * Die hier gezeigten Akkorde sind jeweils die Grundakkorde. * Tous les doigtés indiqués sont du type à position fondamentale simple. * Todos los digitados se muestran como tipos de posición de raíz sencilla. Major Dur Majeur Mayor Minor Moll Mineur Menor Seventh Dur-Septakkord Septième Séptima Minor seventh Moll-Septakkord Mineure septième Menor de séptima C Cm C7 Cm 7 Db (C#) Db m (C #m) Db7 (C#7 ) Db m 7 (C# m 7) D Dm D7 Dm 7 Eb (D#) E bm (D #m) E b7 (D#7) E bm 7 (D# m7 ) E Em E7 Em 7 F Fm F7 Fm 7 F# (Gb) F #m (Gb m) F# 7 (Gb7) F #m 7 (Gb m 7) G Gm G7 Gm 7 Ab (G#) A bm (G# m) A b7 (G#7) A bm 7 (G# m7 ) A Am A7 Am 7 Bb (A#) B bm (A# m) B b7 (A#7) B bm 7 (A# m 7) B Bm B7 Bm 7 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ xiii Fingering Chart/Akkordliste/Tablature/Gráfica de digitado Major seventh Dur-Akkord mit großer Septime Majeure septième Mayor de séptima Minor major seventh Moll-Akkord mit großer Septime Septième majeure sur mineur Menor de séptima mayor Augmented Übermäßig Augmenté Aumentado Diminished Vermindert Diminué Disminuida CM 7 CmM 7 Caug Cdim Db M 7 (C# M 7) Db mM7 (C# mM 7 ) Db aug (C# aug) Db dim (C# dim) DM 7 DmM 7 Daug Ddim E bM 7 (D# M7 ) E bmM 7 (D# mM 7 ) E baug (D# aug) E bdim (D# dim) EM 7 EmM7 Eaug Edim FM 7 FmM7 Faug Fdim F #M 7 (Gb M 7) F #mM7 (Gb mM7 ) F #aug (Gb aug) F #dim (Gb dim) GM 7 GmM7 Gaug Gdim A bM 7 (G# M7 ) A bmM 7 (G# mM7 ) A baug (G# aug) A bdim (G# dim) AM 7 AmM 7 Aaug Adim B bM 7 (A# M 7) B bmM 7 (A# mM 7 ) B baug (A# aug) B bdim (A# dim) BM 7 BmM7 Baug Bdim ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ Fingering Chart/Akkordliste/Tablature/Gráfica de digitado xiv Sixth Dur-Akkord mit hinzugefügter Sexte Sixte Sexta Suspended fourth Vorgehaltene Quarte Quarte sur sensible Cuarta suspendida Minor seventh flatted fifth Moll-Septakkord mit verminderter Quinte Quinte diminuée sur mineure septième Menor de séptima y quinta bemol Major seventh flatted fifth Dur-Akkord mit großer Septime und verminderter Quinte Quinte diminuée sur majeure septième Mayor de séptima y quinta bemol C6 Csus 4 Cm 7 (b5) CM 7 (b5) Db 6 (C# 6 ) Db sus 4 (C# sus 4) Db m 7 (b5) (C# m 7 (b5)) Db M 7 (b5) (C# M 7 (b5)) D6 Dsus 4 Dm 7 (b5) DM 7 (b5) E b6 (D# 6 ) E bsus 4 (D# sus 4) E bm 7 (b5) (D# m7 (b5) ) E bM 7 (b5) (D# M7 (b5) ) E6 Esus 4 Em 7 (b5) EM 7 (b5) F6 Fsus 4 Fm 7 (b5) FM 7 (b5) F#6 (Gb 6 ) F #sus 4 (Gb sus 4) F #m 7 (b5) (Gb m 7 (b5) ) F #M 7 (b5) (Gb M 7 (b5) ) G6 Gsus 4 Gm 7 (b5) GM 7 (b5) A b6 (G#6 ) A bsus 4 (G# sus4 ) A bm 7 (b5) (G# m7 (b5) ) A bM 7 (b5) (G# M7 (b5) ) A6 Asus 4 Am 7 (b5) AM 7 (b5) B b6 (A#6 ) B bsus 4 (A# sus 4 ) B bm 7 (b5) (A# m 7 (b5) ) B bM 7 (b5) (A# M 7 (b5) ) B6 Bsus 4 Bm 7 (b5) BM 7 (b5) ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ xv Fingering Chart/Akkordliste/Tablature/Gráfica de digitado Minor major seventh flatted fifth Moll-Akkord mit großer Septime und verminderter Quinte Septième majeure sur mineur quinte diminué Menor mayor de séptima y quinta bemol Minor sixth Moll-Akkord mit hinzugefügter Sexte Mineure sixte Menor de sexta Seventh suspended fourth Dur-Septakkord mit vorgehaltener Quarte Quarte sur septième sensible Séptima y cuarta suspendida Flatted fifth Verminderter Quinte Quinte diminuée Quinta bemol CmM 7 (b5) Cm 6 C7 sus 4 C(b5) Db mM7 (b5) (C# mM 7(b5) ) Db m 6 (C #m 6) Db 7 sus 4 (C# 7 sus 4) D b(b5) (C#(b5) ) DmM 7(b5) Dm 6 D7 sus 4 D(b5) E bmM 7(b5) (D# mM 7(b5) ) E bm 6 (D# m6 ) E b7 sus 4 (D# 7 sus4 ) E b(b5) (D#(b5) ) EmM7 (b5) Em 6 E7 sus 4 E (b5) FmM7 (b5) Fm 6 F 7 sus 4 F (b5) F #mM7 (b5) (Gb mM7 (b5) ) F #m 6 (Gb m 6) F #7 sus 4 (Gb7 sus 4 ) F #(b5) (Gb(b5)) GmM7(b5) Gm 6 G7 sus 4 G (b5) A bmM 7 (b5) (G# mM7 (b5) ) A bm 6 (G# m6 ) A b7sus 4 (G#7 sus4 ) A b (b5) (G#(b5) ) AmM 7(b5) Am 6 A 7 sus 4 A(b5) B bmM 7 (b5) (A# mM 7 (b5) ) B bm 6 (A# m 6) B b7sus 4 (A#7 sus4 ) B b (b5) (A#(b5)) BmM7 (b5) Bm 6 B7 sus 4 B (b5) ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ Fingering Chart/Akkordliste/Tablature/Gráfica de digitado Minor flatted fifth Moll-Akkord mit verminderter Quinte Mineure quinte diminuée Menor de quinta bemol Seventh flatted fifth Dur-Septakkord mit verminderter Quinte Quinte diminuée en septième Séptima y quinta bemol Seventh sharp fifth Dur-Septakkord mit erhöhter Quinte Septième ajoutée sur quinte Séptima y quinta sostenida Major seventh sharp fifth Dur-Akkord mit großer Septime und erhöhter Quinte Majeure septième ajoutée sur quinte Mayor de séptima y quinta sostenida Cm (b5) C 7(b5) C 7(#5) CM 7 (#5) Db m (b5) (C# m (b5) ) D b7 (b5) (C#7(b5) ) D b7 (#5) (C#7(#5) ) Db M 7 (#5) (C# M 7 (#5)) Dm (b5) D 7(b5) D 7(#5) DM 7 (#5) E bm (b5) (D# m(b5) ) E b 7 (b5) (D#7 (b5) ) E b 7 (#5) (D#7 (#5) ) E bM 7 (#5) (D# M7 (#5) ) Em (b5) E 7 (b5) E 7 (#5) EM 7 (#5) Fm (b5) F 7 (b5) F 7 (#5) FM 7 (#5) F #m (b5) (Gb m (b5) ) F # 7 (b5) (Gb7(b5) ) F # 7 (#5) (Gb7(#5) ) F #M 7 (#5) (Gb M 7 (#5) ) Gm (b5) G 7 (b5) G 7 (#5) GM 7 (#5) A bm (b5) (G# m(b5) ) A b 7 (b5) (G#7(b5) ) A b 7 (#5) (G#7(#5)) A bM 7 (#5) (G# M7 (#5) ) Am (b5) A 7 (b5) A 7 (#5) AM 7 (#5) B bm (b5) (A#m (b5) ) B b 7 (b5) (A#7 (b5)) B b 7 (#5) (A#7 (#5)) B bM 7 (#5) (A# M 7 (#5) ) B 7 (b5) B 7 (#5) BM 7 (#5) Bm (b5) xvi ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ xvii MIDI Implementation Chart Not Available ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ FCC INFORMATION (U.S.A.) 1. IMPORTANT NOTICE: DO NOT MODIFY THIS UNIT! electronic devices. Compliance with FCC regulations does not guarantee that interference will not occur in all installations. If this product is found to be the source of interference, which can be determined by turning the unit “OFF” and “ON”, please try to eliminate the problem by using one of the following measures: Relocate either this product or the device that is being affected by the 2. IMPORTANT: When connecting this product to accessories and/or interference. another product use only high quality shielded cables. Cable/s supplied Utilize power outlets that are on different branch (circuit breaker or fuse) with this product MUST be used. Follow all installation instructions. circuits or install AC line filter/s. Failure to follow instructions could void your FCC authorization to use this product in the USA. In the case of radio or TV interference, relocate/reorient the antenna. If the antenna lead-in is 300 ohm ribbon lead, change the lead-in to co-axial 3. NOTE: This product has been tested and found to comply with the type cable. requirements listed in FCC Regulations, Part 15 for Class “B” digital If these corrective measures do not produce satisfactory results, please devices. Compliance with these requirements provides a reasonable contact the local retailer authorized to distribute this type of product. If level of assurance that your use of this product in a residential you can not locate the appropriate retailer, please contact Yamaha Corenvironment will not result in harmful interference with other electronic poration of America, Electronic Service Division, 6600 Orangethorpe Ave, devices. This equipment generates/uses radio frequencies and, if not Buena Park, CA90620 installed and used according to the instructions found in the users manual, may cause interference harmful to the operation of other The above statements apply ONLY to those products distributed by Yamaha Corporation of America or its subsidiaries. * This applies only to products distributed by YAMAHA CORPORATION OF AMERICA. This product, when installed as indicated in the instructions contained in this manual, meets FCC requirements. Modifications not expressly approved by Yamaha may void your authority, granted by the FCC, to use the product. IMPORTANT NOTICE FOR THE UNITED KINGDOM Connecting the Plug and Cord IMPORTANT. The wires in this mains lead are coloured in accordance with the following code: BLUE : NEUTRAL BROWN : LIVE As the colours of the wires in the mains lead of this apparatus may not correspond with the coloured makings identifying the terminals in your plug proceed as follows: The wire which is coloured BLUE must be connected to the terminal which is marked with the letter N or coloured BLACK. The wire which is coloured BROWN must be connected to the terminal which is marked with the letter L or coloured RED. Making sure that neither core is connected to the earth terminal of the three pin plug. • This applies only to products distributed by Yamaha-Kemble Music (U.K.) Ltd. CANADA THIS DIGITAL APPARATUS DOES NOT EXCEED THE “CLASS B” LIMITS FOR RADIO NOISE EMISSIONS FROM DIGITAL APPARATUS SET OUT IN THE RADIO INTERFERENCE REGULATION OF THE CANADIAN DEPARTMENT OF COMMUNICATIONS. LE PRESENT APPAREIL NUMERIQUE N’EMET PAS DE BRUITS RADIOELECTRIQUES DEPASSANT LES LIMITES APPLICABLES AUX APPAREILS NUMERIQUES DE LA “CLASSE B” PRESCRITES DANS LE REGLEMENT SUR LE BROUILLAGE RADIOELECTRIQUE EDICTE PAR LE MINISTERE DES COMMUNICATIONS DU CANADA. CAUTION: TO PREVENT ELECTRIC SHOCK, MATCH WIDE BLADE OF PLUG TO WIDE SLOT, FULLY INSERT. ATTENTION: POUR ÉVITER LES CHOCS ÉLECTRIQUES, INTRODUIRE LA LAME LA PLUS LARGE DE LA FICHE DANS LA BORNE CORRESPONDANTE DE LA PRISE ET POUSSER JUSQU’AU FOND. • This applies only to products distributed by Yamaha Canada Music Ltd. • Ceci ne s’applique qu’aux produits distribués par Yamaha Canada Musique Ltée. ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS INFORMATION RELATING TO PERSONAL INJURY, ELECTRICAL SHOCK, AND FIRE HAZARD POSSIBILITIES HAS BEEN INCLUDED IN THIS LIST. WARNING- When using any electrical or electronic product, basic precautions should always be followed. These precautions include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Read all Safety Instructions, Installation Instructions, Special Message Section items, and any Assembly Instructions found in this manual BEFORE marking any connections, including connection to the main supply. 2. Main Power Supply Verification: Yamaha products are manufactured specifically for the supply voltage in the area where they are to be sold. If you should move, or if any doubt exists about the supply voltage in your area, please contact your dealer for supply voltage verification and (if applicable) instructions. The required supply voltage is printed on the name plate. For name plate location, please refer to the graphic found in the Special Message Section of this manual. 3. This product may be equipped with a polarized plug (one blade wider than the other). If you are unable to insert the plug into the outlet, turn the plug over and try again. If the problem persists, contact an electrician to have the obsolete outlet replaced. Do NOT defeat the safety purpose of the plug. 4. Some electronic products utilize external power supplies or adapters. Do NOT connect this type of product to any power supply or adapter other than one described in the owners manual, on the name plate, or specifically recommended by Yamaha. 8. This product was NOT designed for use in wet/damp locations and should not be used near water or exposed to rain. Examples of wet/damp locations are; near a swimming pool, spa, tub, sink, or wet basement. 9. This product should be used only with the components supplied or; a cart, rack, or stand that is recommended by the manufacturer. If a cart, rack, or stand is used, please observe all safety markings and instructions that accompany the accessory product. 10. The power supply cord (plug) should be disconnected from the outlet when electronic products are to be left unused for extended periods of time. Cords should also be disconnected when there is a high probability of lightening and/or electrical storm activity. 11. Care should be taken that objects do not fall and liquids are not spilled into the enclosure through any openings that may exist. 12. Electrical/electronic products should be serviced by a qualified service person when: a. The power supply cord has been damaged; or b. Objects have fallen, been inserted, or liquids have been spilled into the enclosure through openings; or c. The product has been exposed to rain; or d. The product does not operate, exhibits a marked change in performance; or e. The product has been dropped, or the enclosure of the product has been damaged. 5. WARNING: Do not place this product or any other objects on the power cord or place it in a position where anyone could walk on, trip over, or roll anything over power or connecting cords of any kind. The use of an extension cord is not recommended! If you must use an extension cord, the minimum wire size for a 25' cord (or less) is 18 AWG. NOTE: The smaller the AWG number, the larger the current handling capacity. For longer extension cords, consult a local electrician. 6. Ventilation: Electronic products, unless specifically designed for enclosed installations, should be placed in locations that do not interfere with proper ventilation. If instructions for enclosed installations are not provided, it must be assumed that unobstructed ventilation is required. 13. Do not attempt to service this product beyond that described in the user-maintenance instructions. All other servicing should be referred to qualified service personnel. 14. This product, either alone or in combination with an amplifier and headphones or speaker/s, may be capable of producing sound levels that could cause permanent hearing loss. DO NOT operate for a long period of time at a high volume level or at a level that is uncomfortable. If you experience any hearing loss or ringing in the ears, you should consult an audiologist. IMPORTANT: The louder the sound, the shorter the time period before damage occurs. 15. 7. Temperature considerations: Electronic products should be installed in locations that do not significantly contribute to their operating temperature. Placement of this product close to heat sources such as; radiators, heat registers and other devices that produce heat should be avoided. Some Yamaha products may have benches and/or accessory mounting fixtures that are either supplied as a part of the product or as optional accessories. Some of these items are designed to be dealer assembled or installed Please make sure that benches are stable and any optional fixtures (where applicable) are well secured BEFORE using. Benches supplied by Yamaha are designed for seating only. No other uses are recommended. PLEASE KEEP THIS MANUAL 92-469-2 M.D.G., EMI Division © Yamaha Corporation 1994 VS18130 410POCP5.2-02B0 Printed in Japan